The apostasy of the latter times in which, according to divine prediction, the world should wonder after the beast the mystery of iniquity should so farre prevaile over the mystery of godlinesse, whorish Babylon over the virgin-Church of Christ, as that the visible glory of the true church should be much clouded the true unstained Christian faith corrupted the purity of true worship polluted, or, The gentiles theology of dæmons i.e. inferiour divine powers, supposed to be mediatours between God and man : revived in the latter times amongst Christians in worshipping of angels, deifying and invocating of saints, adoring and templing of reliques, bowing downe to images, worshipping of crosses, &c : all which together with a true discovery of the nature, originall, progresse, of the great, fatall and solemn apotisy are cleared : delivered in publique some years since upon I Tim. 4. 1,2,3 / by Joseph Mede ...
         Mede, Joseph, 1586-1638.
      
       
         
           1641
        
      
       Approx. 352 KB of XML-encoded text transcribed from 86 1-bit group-IV TIFF page images.
       
         Text Creation Partnership,
         Ann Arbor, MI ; Oxford (UK) :
         2004-11 (EEBO-TCP Phase 1).
         A50525
         Wing M1590
         ESTC R22768
         12744581
         ocm 12744581
         93201
         
           
            This keyboarded and encoded edition of the work described above is co-owned by the institutions providing financial support to the Early English Books Online Text Creation Partnership. This Phase I text is available for reuse, according to the terms of
             Creative Commons 0 1.0 Universal
            . The text can be copied, modified, distributed and performed, even for commercial purposes, all without asking permission.
          
        
      
       
         Early English books online.
      
       
         (EEBO-TCP ; phase 1, no. A50525)
         Transcribed from: (Early English Books Online ; image set 93201)
         Images scanned from microfilm: (Early English books, 1641-1700 ; 254:E162, no 3)
      
       
         
           
             The apostasy of the latter times in which, according to divine prediction, the world should wonder after the beast the mystery of iniquity should so farre prevaile over the mystery of godlinesse, whorish Babylon over the virgin-Church of Christ, as that the visible glory of the true church should be much clouded the true unstained Christian faith corrupted the purity of true worship polluted, or, The gentiles theology of dæmons i.e. inferiour divine powers, supposed to be mediatours between God and man : revived in the latter times amongst Christians in worshipping of angels, deifying and invocating of saints, adoring and templing of reliques, bowing downe to images, worshipping of crosses, &c : all which together with a true discovery of the nature, originall, progresse, of the great, fatall and solemn apotisy are cleared : delivered in publique some years since upon I Tim. 4. 1,2,3 / by Joseph Mede ...
             Mede, Joseph, 1586-1638.
             Twisse, William, 1578?-1646.
          
           [16], 152 p.
           
             Printed by Richard Bishop for Samuel Man ...,
             London :
             1641.
          
           
             Preface signed: William Twisse.
             Reproduction of original in Thomason Collection, British Library.
          
        
      
    
     
       
         Created by converting TCP files to TEI P5 using tcp2tei.xsl, TEI @ Oxford.
         Re-processed by University of Nebraska-Lincoln and Northwestern, with changes to facilitate morpho-syntactic tagging. Gap elements of known extent have been transformed into placeholder characters or elements to simplify the filling in of gaps by user contributors.
      
       
         EEBO-TCP is a partnership between the Universities of Michigan and Oxford and the publisher ProQuest to create accurately transcribed and encoded texts based on the image sets published by ProQuest via their Early English Books Online (EEBO) database (http://eebo.chadwyck.com). The general aim of EEBO-TCP is to encode one copy (usually the first edition) of every monographic English-language title published between 1473 and 1700 available in EEBO.
         EEBO-TCP aimed to produce large quantities of textual data within the usual project restraints of time and funding, and therefore chose to create diplomatic transcriptions (as opposed to critical editions) with light-touch, mainly structural encoding based on the Text Encoding Initiative (http://www.tei-c.org).
         The EEBO-TCP project was divided into two phases. The 25,363 texts created during Phase 1 of the project have been released into the public domain as of 1 January 2015. Anyone can now take and use these texts for their own purposes, but we respectfully request that due credit and attribution is given to their original source.
         Users should be aware of the process of creating the TCP texts, and therefore of any assumptions that can be made about the data.
         Text selection was based on the New Cambridge Bibliography of English Literature (NCBEL). If an author (or for an anonymous work, the title) appears in NCBEL, then their works are eligible for inclusion. Selection was intended to range over a wide variety of subject areas, to reflect the true nature of the print record of the period. In general, first editions of a works in English were prioritized, although there are a number of works in other languages, notably Latin and Welsh, included and sometimes a second or later edition of a work was chosen if there was a compelling reason to do so.
         Image sets were sent to external keying companies for transcription and basic encoding. Quality assurance was then carried out by editorial teams in Oxford and Michigan. 5% (or 5 pages, whichever is the greater) of each text was proofread for accuracy and those which did not meet QA standards were returned to the keyers to be redone. After proofreading, the encoding was enhanced and/or corrected and characters marked as illegible were corrected where possible up to a limit of 100 instances per text. Any remaining illegibles were encoded as <gap>s. Understanding these processes should make clear that, while the overall quality of TCP data is very good, some errors will remain and some readable characters will be marked as illegible. Users should bear in mind that in all likelihood such instances will never have been looked at by a TCP editor.
         The texts were encoded and linked to page images in accordance with level 4 of the TEI in Libraries guidelines.
         Copies of the texts have been issued variously as SGML (TCP schema; ASCII text with mnemonic sdata character entities); displayable XML (TCP schema; characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or text strings within braces); or lossless XML (TEI P5, characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or TEI g elements).
         
          Keying and markup guidelines are available at the
           Text Creation Partnership web site
          .
        
      
       
         
         
      
    
     
       
         eng
      
       
         
           Bible. -- N.T. -- Timothy, 1st, IV, 1-3 -- Prophecies.
           End of the world -- Early works to 1800.
           Apostasy -- Early works to 1800.
        
      
    
     
        2004-05 TCP
        Assigned for keying and markup
      
        2004-07 SPi Global
        Keyed and coded from ProQuest page images
      
        2004-08 Rina Kor
        Sampled and proofread
      
        2004-08 Rina Kor
        Text and markup reviewed and edited
      
        2004-10 pfs
        Batch review (QC) and XML conversion
      
    
  
   
     
       
         
         
         
           THE
           APOSTASY
           OF
           THE
           LATTER
           TIMES
           .
        
         
           In
           which
           ,
           (
           according
           to
           divine
           prediction
           )
           the
           world
           should
           wonder
           after
           the
           Beast
           ,
           the
           Mystery
           of
           Iniquity
           should
           so
           farre
           prevaile
           over
           the
           Mystery
           of
           Godlinesse
           ,
           whorish
           Babylon
           over
           the
           virgin-Church
           of
           Christ
           ;
           as
           that
           the
           visible
           glory
           of
           the
           True
           Church
           should
           be
           much
           clouded
           ,
           the
           True
           unstained
           Christian
           Faith
           corrupted
           ,
           the
           purity
           of
           true
           worship
           polluted
           .
        
         
           OR
           ,
           THE
           GENTILES
           THEOLOGY
           
             OF
             DAEMONS
          
           ,
           i.
           e.
           
             inferiour
             divine
             powers
          
           :
           Supposed
           to
           be
           mediatours
           between
           God
           and
           man
           :
           Revived
           in
           the
           LATTER
           TIMES
           amongst
           Christians
           ,
           in
           worshipping
           of
           Angels
           ,
           deifying
           and
           invocating
           of
           Saints
           ,
           adoring
           and
           templing
           of
           Reliques
           ,
           bowing
           downe
           to
           Images
           ,
           worshipping
           of
           Crosses
           ,
           &c.
           
        
         
           All
           which
           ,
           together
           with
           A
           true
           discovery
           of
           the
           Nature
           ,
           Originall
           ,
           Progresse
           ,
           of
           the
           great
           ,
           fatall
           ,
           and
           solemn
           Apo●tasy
           ,
           are
           cleared
           .
        
         
           Delivered
           in
           publique
           some
           years
           since
           upon
           1
           Tim.
           4.1
           ,
           2
           ,
           3.
           
           By
           IOSEPH
           MEDE
           B.
           D.
           and
           late
           Fellow
           of
           Christs
           Colledge
           in
           Cambridge
           .
        
         
           
             
               1
               Iohn
               5.21
            
             .
          
           
             Little
             children
             ,
             keep
             your selves
             from
             Idols
             .
          
        
         
           LONDON
           ,
           Printed
           by
           
             Richard
             Bishop
          
           for
           SAMUEL
           MAN
           dwelling
           at
           the
           signe
           of
           the
           Swan
           in
           Pauls
           Church-yard
           .
           1641.
           
        
      
       
         
         
         
           The
           Preface
           to
           the
           Reader
           .
        
         
           
             VIno
             vendibili
             non
             opus
             est
             suspensâ
             hederâ
             :
          
           A
           cup
           of
           good
           wine
           will
           be
           known
           where
           it
           is
           without
           an
           Ivy
           bush
           ;
           such
           is
           the
           following
           discourse
           ,
           and
           so
           I
           am
           perswaded
           it
           will
           approve
           it self
           unto
           all
           unpartiall
           and
           judicious
           Readers
           .
           Many
           yeers
           agoe
           I
           was
           acquainted
           with
           it
           ,
           by
           the
           Authors
           own
           hand
           :
           For
           such
           was
           his
           scholasticall
           ingenuity
           ;
           I
           found
           him
           most
           free
           in
           communicating
           his
           studies
           ;
           right
           like
           unto
           the
           description
           of
           the
           Scholar
           in
           Chaucer
           :
           
             
               Sounding
               in
               morall
               vertue
               was
               his
               speech
               ,
            
             
               And
               glady
               would
               Learne
               ,
               and
               gladly
               teach
               .
            
          
        
         
           And
           sometimes
           he
           dealt
           plainly
           with
           me
           ,
           in
           telling
           me
           the
           reason
           why
           ;
           and
           that
           was
           ,
           because
           he
           found
           me
           so
           inquisitive
           after
           his
           meditations
           ,
           whereas
           those
           with
           whom
           he
           familiarly
           conversed
           ,
           were
           nothing
           so
           .
           The
           truth
           is
           ,
           I
           was
           exceedingly
           taken
           with
           his
           notions
           ;
           for
           he
           had
           a
           Critical
           wit
           ,
           and
           affected
           to
           correct
           common
           errours
           :
           and
           herein
           he
           seemed
           to
           me
           exceeding
           happy
           ,
           Demonstrating
           not
           onely
           acutenesse
           of
           wit
           ,
           and
           clearnesse
           of
           conceipt
           ,
           but
           solidity
           of
           judgment
           .
           And
           therfore
           from
           the
           first
           time
           ,
           that
           I
           grew
           acquainted
           with
           him
           ,
           I
           made
           bold
           to
           improve
           my
           acquaintance
           to
           the
           uttermost
           of
           mine
           owne
           advantage
           scholasticall
           ,
           encouraged
           thereunto
           by
           his
           facility
           and
           ready
           condescension
           to
           my
           requests
           .
        
         
         
           2
           The
           beginning
           of
           our
           familiaritie
           was
           occasioned
           by
           a
           rumour
           spread
           of
           his
           opinion
           ,
           concerning
           the
           glorious
           Kingdome
           of
           Christ
           here
           on
           earth
           ,
           which
           many
           hunderd
           yeeres
           agoe
           was
           cryed
           downe
           ,
           as
           the
           Errour
           of
           the
           Millenaries
           :
           and
           Augustine
           himselfe
           ,
           though
           confessing
           that
           at
           first
           he
           liked
           the
           same
           ,
           yet
           sheweth
           how
           that
           afterwards
           he
           was
           taken
           off
           from
           it
           ,
           and
           upon
           what
           ground
           .
           And
           it
           seemed
           wondrous
           strange
           to
           us
           ,
           that
           such
           an
           opinion
           should
           after
           so
           many
           hundred
           yeeres
           be
           revived
           ;
           and
           that
           in
           so
           strange
           a
           manner
           ,
           as
           now
           we
           finde
           ,
           both
           amongst
           us
           ,
           and
           amongst
           outlandish
           Divines
           .
           Neverthelesse
           my selfe
           being
           firmely
           set
           upon
           studies
           of
           another
           nature
           ,
           I
           had
           no
           great
           edge
           so
           much
           as
           to
           hearken
           to
           it
           ,
           much
           lesse
           to
           take
           it
           into
           consideration
           .
           But
           a
           friend
           in
           the
           Countrey
           sometimes
           urged
           me
           to
           write
           to
           an
           acquaintance
           in
           London
           ;
           and
           to
           entreate
           him
           to
           enquire
           of
           Master
           Mede
           ,
           whether
           he
           were
           of
           the
           same
           opinion
           with
           Piscator
           and
           Alstedius
           concerning
           the
           first
           resurrection
           ▪
           and
           the
           glorious
           kingdome
           of
           Christ.
           And
           hereupon
           shortly
           after
           ,
           word
           was
           sent
           me
           ,
           that
           he
           did
           agree
           with
           Piscator
           in
           this
           ,
           that
           some
           shall
           rise
           a
           thousand
           yeeres
           before
           others
           ,
           but
           he
           differed
           from
           him
           in
           this
           ,
           that
           Piscator
           thought
           this
           Reign
           of
           Christ
           should
           be
           in
           heaven
           ;
           but
           I
           (
           said
           Master
           Mede
           )
           agree
           rather
           with
           Alstedius
           and
           conceive
           ,
           that
           the
           thousa●d
           yeeres
           reigne
           of
           Christ
           shall
           be
           on
           earth
           .
           Yet
           herein
           he
           differed
           from
           Alstedius
           ;
           that
           whereas
           Alstedius
           was
           of
           opinion
           ,
           that
           the
           thousand
           yeers
           reigne
           of
           Christ
           should
           be
           after
           the
           day
           of
           judgment
           ,
           Master
           Medes
           opinion
           was
           that
           it
           should
           be
           
             in
             &
             Durante
             die
             judicii
          
           ,
           in
           an●
           during
           the
           day
           of
           judgement
           ;
           which
           day
           of
           judgement
           should
           continue
           a
           thousand
           yeeres
           ,
           beginning
           with
           the
           ruine
           of
           
           Antichrist
           ,
           and
           ending
           with
           the
           destruction
           of
           cog
           and
           Magog
           .
           And
           that
           Camerarius
           writing
           upon
           
             Plato's
             Alcinous
          
           ,
           testifies
           that
           the
           Rabbines
           among
           the
           Iews
           write
           ,
           that
           the
           seventh
           thousand
           yeeres
           shall
           be
           the
           great
           day
           of
           judgement
           ,
           or
           the
           judgement
           of
           the
           great
           day
           .
           And
           Hierome
           upon
           the
           sixty
           fifth
           chapter
           of
           Esay
           confesseth
           ,
           that
           it
           was
           a
           tradition
           among
           the
           Jews
           ,
           that
           the
           Messias
           should
           reigne
           a
           thousand
           yeeres
           in
           new
           Jerusalem
           .
        
         
           3.
           
           When
           I
           heard
           this
           ,
           my
           Spirit
           was
           stirred
           up
           in
           me
           to
           lay
           aside
           for
           a
           while
           my
           ordinary
           studies
           ,
           and
           to
           take
           this
           into
           consideration
           ;
           and
           I
           prayed
           Master
           Mede
           to
           give
           me
           leave
           to
           propose
           my
           reasons
           against
           this
           opinion
           of
           his
           .
           And
           the
           truth
           is
           ,
           the
           improbability
           of
           it
           seemed
           very
           pregnant
           unto
           naturall
           reason
           ;
           and
           diverse
           arguments
           that
           way
           offered
           themselves
           ,
           which
           seemed
           to
           be
           of
           very
           difficult
           (
           if
           at
           all
           possible
           )
           solution
           .
           And
           over
           and
           above
           it
           seemed
           very
           contradictious
           to
           diverse
           plaine
           passages
           of
           holy
           Scripture
           .
           Master
           Mede
           very
           redily
           enterteyned
           the
           motion
           ,
           and
           prescribed
           me
           a
           time
           after
           which
           he
           should
           be
           at
           leasure
           for
           me
           ;
           and
           in
           a
           letter
           after
           this
           ,
           in
           his
           familiar
           manner
           asked
           me
           saying
           ;
           when
           come
           your
           Queries
           ?
           I
           accepted
           his
           courteous
           answer
           ,
           and
           sent
           up
           unto
           him
           ,
           first
           and
           last
           ,
           twelve
           arguments
           against
           that
           opinion
           of
           his
           ;
           and
           at
           the
           first
           I
           sent
           him
           ten
           ,
           with
           an
           answer
           devised
           by
           my selfe
           to
           nine
           of
           them
           ;
           for
           so
           I
           had
           promised
           him
           ,
           namely
           that
           I
           would
           bethinke
           my
           wits
           of
           what
           possibly
           might
           bee
           said
           in
           the
           solution
           of
           them
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           straitnesse
           of
           my
           invention
           ,
           leaving
           it
           to
           him
           to
           approve
           ,
           or
           correct
           ,
           or
           adde
           ,
           as
           he
           thought
           good
           .
           And
           whereas
           I
           could
           devise
           nothing
           at
           all
           in
           answer
           to
           my
           tenth
           argument
           ,
           he
           sent
           me
           a
           large
           answer
           thereunto
           in
           three
           sides
           of
           a
           sheet
           of
           Paper
           ;
           
           whereby
           I
           well
           percieved
           ,
           that
           my
           best
           arguments
           had
           been
           known
           to
           him
           ,
           and
           examined
           before
           I
           devised
           them
           .
        
         
           4.
           
           After
           this
           ,
           I
           came
           acquainted
           with
           many
           discourses
           upon
           the
           same
           argument
           ,
           one
           Printed
           at
           Hanow
           in
           
             Germany
             ,
             De
             die
             novissimo
             ,
             Of
             the
             last
             day
          
           ;
           a
           few
           onely
           were
           Printed
           ;
           Two
           copies
           (
           and
           no
           more
           )
           were
           brought
           into
           England
           ;
           Master
           Mede
           bought
           them
           both
           ,
           and
           sent
           me
           one
           of
           them
           to
           Copy
           it
           out
           ,
           which
           we
           did
           After
           this
           ,
           no
           lesse
           then
           seven
           manu-scripts
           were
           sent
           me
           from
           one
           Divine
           ,
           treating
           of
           this
           and
           other
           mysteries
           .
           Now
           here
           I
           cannot
           but
           confesse
           my
           corruption
           ,
           for
           I
           received
           them
           by
           way
           of
           a
           bribe
           .
           And
           indeed
           I
           was
           to
           doe
           him
           a
           favour
           (
           which
           yet
           was
           never
           done
           ,
           the
           death
           of
           a
           speciall
           Friend
           preventing
           it
           )
           and
           I
           dealt
           plainly
           wiih
           him
           ,
           and
           told
           him
           I
           would
           not
           sell
           my
           favours
           Gratis
           ;
           I
           would
           be
           well
           payd
           for
           them
           .
           And
           therefore
           whereas
           I
           heard
           he
           had
           strange
           notions
           upon
           the
           Revelation
           ,
           and
           touching
           the
           mysteries
           of
           the
           first
           resurrection
           ,
           and
           Christs
           Kingdome
           ;
           I
           looked
           to
           be
           see'd
           with
           the
           communication
           of
           them
           ;
           with
           promise
           to
           return
           them
           safely
           ,
           after
           I
           had
           suckt
           the
           honey
           out
           of
           them
           ,
           though
           he
           had
           never
           a
           whit
           the
           lesse
           for
           that
           ,
           such
           is
           the
           nature
           of
           spirituall
           commodities
           .
           The
           good
           man
           sent
           me
           word
           ,
           that
           such
           bribes
           would
           never
           make
           me
           rich
           :
           But
           I
           returned
           answer
           ,
           that
           they
           would
           make
           me
           more
           rich
           then
           the
           enjoying
           of
           all
           the
           treasures
           of
           Aethiopia
           ,
           and
           the
           hill
           Amara
           to
           boote
           :
           And
           here
           I
           found
           rich
           mines
           indeed
           ,
           even
           all
           the
           mysteries
           belonging
           to
           Christs
           glorious
           kingdome
           set
           downe
           apart
           ,
           by
           way
           of
           question
           ,
           and
           a
           solemn
           resolution
           thereof
           ,
           with
           proofes
           adjoyned
           out
           of
           holy
           scripture
           .
           Since
           that
           ,
           I
           have
           met
           with
           diverse
           choyse
           pieces
           of
           the
           same
           argument
           ;
           some
           prosecuting
           a
           few
           parts
           thereof
           only
           ,
           
           and
           others
           more
           .
           But
           l●t
           that
           passe
           ,
           I
           returne
           to
           Master
           Mede
           .
        
         
           Many
           letters
           passing
           betweene
           us
           ,
           he
           had
           occasion
           sometimes
           to
           touch
           upon
           somethings
           ,
           whereof
           he
           had
           written
           more
           at
           large
           ,
           either
           by
           occasion
           of
           Chappell
           exercises
           ,
           as
           he
           called
           them
           ,
           or
           in
           more
           operous
           and
           large
           discourses
           .
           I
           was
           glad
           to
           observe
           such
           pre●ious
           birds
           of
           Paradise
           spring
           ;
           and
           thereupon
           insinuated
           with
           him
           further
           ,
           entreating
           him
           to
           communicate
           such
           exercises
           of
           his
           to
           me
           .
           And
           truly
           I
           found
           such
           exemplary
           favour
           with
           him
           ,
           that
           he
           would
           scarce
           deny
           me
           any
           thing
           .
           Thus
           I
           came
           to
           be
           partaker
           of
           divers
           Chappell
           exercises
           of
           his
           ,
           one
           whereof
           was
           a
           notable
           discovery
           of
           the
           common
           errour
           ,
           about
           Zipporahs
           circumcising
           of
           her
           childe
           ,
           as
           if
           she
           did
           it
           in
           discontent
           and
           in
           spleene
           ,
           throwing
           the
           foreskin
           at
           Moses
           feete
           ,
           and
           saying
           ,
           
             Thou
             art
             a
             bloody
             husband
          
           .
           But
           Master
           Mede
           brings
           it
           about
           to
           signifie
           the
           ordinary
           forme
           of
           expression
           used
           in
           that
           Sacrament
           ,
           which
           was
           to
           this
           effect
           ,
           
             Thou
             art
             my
             blood
             ,
             sonne
          
           ;
           and
           he
           proves
           it
           both
           out
           of
           notable
           circumstances
           of
           the
           story
           of
           Moses
           ,
           and
           out
           of
           the
           Rabbines
           ,
           acknowledging
           that
           forme
           ,
           and
           applying
           it
           to
           that
           fact
           of
           Zipporah
           .
        
         
           5
           I
           confesse
           there
           hath
           been
           some
           difference
           between
           us
           about
           ceremonies
           ,
           as
           about
           the
           lawfulnesse
           of
           bowing
           towards
           the
           Altar
           ,
           and
           about
           the
           holinesse
           of
           Churches
           ,
           whereof
           he
           was
           as
           zealous
           as
           his
           Lord
           of
           Canterbury
           ,
           or
           rather
           more
           ;
           for
           he
           held
           it
           unlawfull
           to
           pull
           downe
           Churches
           ,
           they
           being
           places
           separated
           for
           Gods
           use
           ,
           and
           his
           peculiar
           :
           wherein
           he
           followed
           Master
           Hookers
           conceit
           ,
           in
           the
           fifth
           Booke
           of
           his
           
             Ecclesiasticall
             Policie
          
           .
           But
           his
           Lord
           of
           Canterbury
           did
           not
           hold
           it
           unlawfull
           
           to
           pull
           downe
           Saint
           Gregories
           .
           That
           axiome
           ,
           
             Eadem
             est
             ratio
             loci
             &
             temporis
             ,
          
           There
           ,
           is
           the
           same
           reason
           of
           time
           and
           place
           ,
           deceived
           him
           ,
           as
           it
           deceiveth
           many
           ,
           for
           where
           it
           doth
           hold
           ,
           it
           holds
           only
           in
           reference
           to
           time
           ,
           and
           place
           ,
           naturall
           .
           And
           indeed
           ,
           time
           is
           only
           naturall
           ;
           but
           place
           may
           be
           artificiall
           ,
           and
           such
           is
           a
           Temple
           .
           That
           is
           for
           the
           generall
           notions
           of
           them
           ;
           then
           as
           touching
           the
           special
           notions
           of
           them
           ,
           herein
           is
           a
           vast
           difference
           .
           For
           the
           proportion
           of
           time
           is
           very
           considerable
           for
           the
           advancing
           of
           Gods
           service
           ;
           as
           one
           day
           in
           seven
           ,
           rather
           then
           one
           day
           in
           a
           fortnight
           ,
           or
           one
           day
           in
           a
           moneth
           ;
           the
           like
           cannot
           be
           said
           of
           the
           proportion
           of
           place
           .
           And
           lastly
           ,
           the
           time
           of
           Gods
           worship
           is
           defined
           by
           God
           still
           even
           under
           the
           Gospell
           ,
           namely
           ,
           the
           Lords
           day
           ;
           not
           for
           any
           place
           defined
           by
           him
           .
           And
           truely
           the
           Lord
           seemed
           to
           me
           by
           speciall
           providence
           to
           cast
           us
           upon
           a
           debate
           about
           the
           holinesse
           of
           Churches
           .
           And
           it
           was
           high
           time
           to
           enquire
           into
           it
           ,
           superstition
           in
           this
           kinde
           of
           late
           strangely
           encreasing
           .
           The
           Austine
           disputations
           in
           Oxford
           ,
           which
           were
           wont
           to
           be
           kept
           in
           Saint
           Maries
           of
           late
           I
           heare
           ,
           are
           excommunicated
           thence
           .
           I
           wonder
           the
           Act
           ,
           and
           the
           exercises
           thereof
           ,
           are
           not
           translated
           to
           some
           other
           places
           ,
           for
           feare
           of
           prophanation
           :
           and
           the
           Terrae-filius
           ,
           or
           Praevaricator
           ,
           must
           take
           heed
           of
           observing
           the
           old
           forme
           of
           exercising
           their
           pleasant
           wits
           in
           facetious
           discourse
           ,
           for
           feare
           of
           prophanation
           ,
           which
           cannot
           he
           salved
           by
           ought
           but
           Doctor
           Cozens
           his
           Devotions
           :
           Yet
           were
           not
           the
           same
           kinds
           of
           exercises
           performed
           at
           the
           same
           time
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           same
           place
           ,
           in
           the
           time
           of
           Popery
           ?
           Whence
           it
           followes
           ,
           that
           either
           they
           were
           mrre
           prophane
           than
           we
           now
           adayes
           ,
           or
           we
           more
           superstitious
           than
           they
           .
        
         
         
           6
           But
           whereas
           some
           were
           too
           forward
           in
           censuring
           Master
           Mede
           ,
           as
           complying
           with
           the
           times
           in
           this
           ,
           it
           is
           well
           knowne
           ,
           that
           twenty
           yeares
           and
           more
           ,
           before
           that
           last
           Sermon
           of
           his
           ,
           whereat
           divers
           took
           great
           offence
           ,
           he
           had
           maintained
           his
           opinion
           that
           way
           ,
           and
           upon
           a
           text
           very
           plausible
           at
           first
           sight
           to
           justifie
           it
           ,
           
             Lev.
             19.30
             .
             Ye
             shal
             reverence
             my
             Sanctuary
             ,
          
           which
           text
           may
           easily
           miscarry
           an
           honest
           man
           ,
           and
           a
           good
           schollar
           ,
           into
           an
           opinion
           of
           reverence
           due
           unto
           Churches
           ,
           either
           civill
           or
           religious
           ,
           or
           of
           a
           middle
           size
           betwixt
           them
           ,
           as
           some
           (
           I
           heare
           )
           have
           very
           unhappily
           set
           their
           wits
           on
           work
           to
           devise
           ;
           as
           if
           man
           ,
           made
           after
           Gods
           image
           ,
           were
           bound
           to
           performe
           reverence
           to
           the
           worke
           of
           his
           own
           hands
           .
           But
           if
           we
           seriously
           consider
           the
           two
           parts
           of
           the
           text
           ,
           and
           duly
           weigh
           and
           compare
           them
           together
           ,
           we
           shall
           soone
           finde
           ,
           how
           the
           meaning
           of
           the
           one
           ,
           will
           give
           light
           to
           cleare
           the
           meaning
           of
           the
           other
           :
           for
           thus
           it
           runs
           ,
           
             Ye
             shall
             keep
             my
             Sabbaths
             ,
             and
             reverence
             my
             Sanctuary
             .
          
           Now
           the
           keeping
           of
           the
           Sabbath
           is
           clearly
           no
           other
           ,
           than
           the
           reverenceing
           of
           God
           upon
           the
           Sabbath
           :
           so
           say
           I
           ,
           the
           reverencing
           of
           the
           Sanctuary
           is
           no
           other
           ,
           than
           the
           reverencing
           of
           God
           in
           the
           Sanctuary
           .
           In
           all
           this
           I
           have
           spoken
           nothing
           of
           the
           vast
           difference
           between
           the
           Temple
           at
           Jerusalem
           ,
           and
           our
           Temple
           and
           Chappels
           ;
           every
           one
           where
           of
           amongst
           us
           ,
           for
           devotion
           thereunto
           ,
           is
           compared
           with
           the
           Temple
           of
           King
           Solomon
           ;
           whereas
           there
           was
           but
           one
           Temple
           for
           all
           the
           Scribes
           ,
           and
           into
           that
           Temple
           none
           presumed
           to
           come
           but
           the
           Priests
           and
           into
           the
           
             Sanctum
             Sanctorum
          
           no
           Priests
           ,
           but
           the
           High
           Priest
           ,
           and
           that
           but
           once
           a
           yeare
           .
           The
           truth
           is
           ,
           both
           the
           Sanctuary
           ,
           at
           the
           first
           ,
           and
           the
           Temple
           throughout
           ,
           were
           Ceremoniall
           ,
           both
           whole
           and
           part
           ,
           and
           
           all
           the
           services
           thereof
           ;
           and
           so
           God
           made
           use
           of
           it
           ,
           as
           of
           sacrifices
           to
           communicate
           mysteries
           of
           godlinesse
           unto
           his
           people
           .
           Yet
           I
           confesse
           I
           have
           heard
           some
           in
           great
           state
           ,
           to
           professe
           that
           the
           Temple
           was
           morall
           ,
           that
           is
           ,
           the
           building
           of
           it
           a
           morall
           duty
           :
           But
           I
           prove
           it
           was
           not
           ;
           if
           it
           were
           morall
           ,
           then
           all
           the
           Church
           of
           God
           for
           1600.
           yeares
           before
           the
           floud
           ,
           and
           some
           1200.
           after
           ,
           till
           the
           building
           of
           the
           Temple
           ,
           failed
           of
           the
           substance
           of
           a
           morall
           duty
           ;
           for
           till
           then
           they
           had
           none
           .
           Againe
           ,
           if
           it
           were
           a
           morall
           duty
           ,
           then
           God
           commanded
           it
           from
           the
           first
           ,
           either
           by
           word
           ,
           or
           by
           writing
           it
           in
           mans
           heart
           ;
           not
           by
           word
           ,
           as
           appeares
           by
           Gods
           owne
           profession
           made
           to
           
             David
             ,
             2
             Sam.
             7.7
             .
             In
             all
             the
             places
             wherein
             I
             have
             walked
             ,
             with
             all
             the
             children
             of
             Israel
             ,
             spake
             I
             one
             word
             with
             any
             of
             the
             tribes
             of
             Israel
             ,
             when
             I
             commanded
             the
             Judges
             to
             feed
             my
             people
             Israel
             ;
             or
             said
             I
             ,
             Why
             build
             ye
             not
             me
             an
             house
             of
             Cedar
             trees
             ?
          
           If
           written
           in
           mans
           heart
           ,
           then
           all
           along
           so
           many
           ages
           ,
           the
           people
           of
           God
           sinned
           against
           their
           consciences
           ,
           in
           not
           building
           a
           Temple
           unto
           God.
           
        
         
           7.
           
           But
           perhaps
           there
           is
           some
           colour
           at
           least
           ,
           or
           shew
           of
           reason
           to
           prove
           this
           ?
           and
           what
           may
           that
           be
           ?
           is
           it
           that
           of
           Solomon
           to
           the
           King
           of
           
             Tyrus
             ?
             2
             Chron.
             2.5
             .
             The
             house
             which
             I
             build
             is
             great
             ,
             for
             great
             is
             our
             God
             above
             all
             gods
             .
          
           Here
           seemes
           to
           be
           an
           intimation
           ,
           that
           the
           house
           must
           be
           answerable
           to
           the
           greatnesse
           of
           God
           :
           whereto
           I
           answer
           :
           Then
           belike
           it
           is
           a
           morall
           duty
           to
           build
           an
           house
           answerable
           to
           Gods
           greatnesse
           .
           But
           ,
           say
           I
           ,
           this
           was
           utterly
           impossible
           to
           man
           in
           the
           state
           of
           Innocency
           ;
           therefore
           this
           is
           no
           morall
           duty
           .
           Such
           an
           house
           had
           need
           be
           as
           bigge
           as
           all
           the
           world
           ,
           from
           the
           outermost
           cope
           of
           heaven
           ,
           to
           the
           center
           of
           the
           earth
           ,
           yet
           that
           not
           answerable
           ;
           
           for
           as
           Solomon
           saith
           ,
           verse
           6.
           
           The
           heavens
           of
           heavens
           cannot
           conteyne
           him
           ;
           but
           I
           do
           it
           to
           burn
           incense
           before
           him
           .
           Yet
           it
           became
           Salomon
           in
           undertaking
           it
           to
           goe
           through
           with
           it
           answerably
           to
           the
           glory
           ,
           wherewith
           God
           had
           adorned
           him
           :
           But
           the
           patterne
           of
           it
           was
           delivered
           to
           him
           by
           David
           his
           Father
           ,
           and
           his
           Father
           received
           it
           by
           revelation
           .
           Surely
           it
           hath
           been
           in
           the
           power
           of
           heathens
           since
           that
           time
           to
           build
           temples
           exceeding
           the
           glory
           of
           the
           Temple
           built
           by
           Salomon
           :
           witnesse
           the
           Temple
           of
           Diana
           at
           Ephesus
           :
           and
           that
           of
           Fez
           at
           this
           day
           .
           Surely
           the
           richer
           Potentates
           are
           ,
           the
           more
           they
           are
           enabled
           to
           build
           more
           glorious
           Temples
           :
           And
           the
           greatest
           States
           of
           the
           world
           at
           this
           day
           are
           heathenish
           ,
           not
           Christian.
           
        
         
           8
           But
           to
           the
           matter
           in
           hand
           ,
           Amongst
           the
           cheife
           pieces
           which
           Mr.
           Mede
           was
           pleased
           to
           communicate
           unto
           me
           ,
           this
           of
           the
           Apostasie
           of
           Latter
           times
           ,
           as
           it
           was
           the
           largest
           of
           all
           the
           rest
           ,
           so
           it
           gave
           me
           greatest
           content
           ;
           both
           for
           the
           interpretation
           he
           makes
           of
           the
           text
           in
           Paul
           ,
           different
           from
           all
           former
           interpretations
           of
           course
           ,
           which
           he
           shews
           to
           bee
           most
           agreeable
           to
           the
           text
           ;
           and
           that
           it
           affordes
           new
           and
           more
           plentifull
           matter
           of
           meditation
           ,
           both
           as
           touching
           the
           doctrines
           of
           Daemons
           ,
           opening
           the
           meaning
           thereof
           ,
           &
           shewing
           what
           they
           are
           :
           and
           as
           touching
           the
           description
           of
           those
           persons
           ,
           who
           were
           the
           founders
           of
           them
           ;
           which
           openeth
           a
           large
           field
           of
           discourse
           ,
           and
           that
           so
           pertinently
           and
           fully
           exemplified
           by
           the
           Author
           ,
           as
           cannot
           but
           give
           great
           content
           to
           the
           Protestant
           Reader
           ;
           the
           foule
           superstitions
           and
           corruptions
           in
           use
           among
           the
           Romanists
           ,
           being
           represented
           to
           the
           life
           ,
           and
           that
           with
           great
           variety
           of
           reading
           ,
           together
           with
           the
           explication
           ,
           and
           illustration
           
           of
           some
           very
           obscure
           passages
           in
           Daniels
           prophecy
           .
        
         
           9.
           
           I
           had
           sometimes
           a
           dispute
           with
           Doctor
           Sibs
           about
           Master
           Medes
           explication
           of
           Saint
           Pauls
           phrase
           ,
           
             the
             doctrines
             of
             Daemons
          
           ,
           which
           he
           took
           to
           be
           somewhat
           violent
           and
           strayned
           ,
           But
           I
           professed
           freely
           ,
           I
           saw
           no
           just
           reason
           for
           such
           a
           censure
           .
           It
           is
           true
           we
           commonly
           conceived
           the
           word
           Daemoniorum
           ,
           to
           be
           
             Genitivus
             efficientis
          
           ,
           a
           genitive
           case
           noting
           the
           Author
           or
           efficient
           cause
           .
           But
           Master
           Mede
           takes
           it
           to
           be
           
             Genitivus
             materiae
          
           ,
           the
           genitive
           case
           noting
           the
           matter
           ,
           or
           subject
           .
           Now
           all
           the
           learned
           and
           judicious
           know
           it
           to
           be
           as
           usuall
           to
           take
           the
           genitive
           case
           in
           this
           latter
           sense
           ,
           as
           in
           the
           former
           ;
           and
           therefore
           no
           racking
           of
           the
           text
           is
           committed
           by
           him
           in
           this
           :
           Whereas
           on
           the
           other
           side
           ,
           Beza
           despaires
           of
           making
           Paul
           speake
           true
           Greeke
           ,
           unlesse
           by
           Daemons
           we
           understand
           false
           Prophets
           .
           But
           Master
           Mede
           ,
           by
           his
           interpretation
           is
           driven
           to
           no
           such
           shift
           ,
           but
           preserves
           the
           integrity
           of
           the
           language
           ,
           as
           well
           consisting
           with
           his
           interpretation
           .
        
         
           10.
           
           I
           have
           heard
           others
           highly
           commend
           this
           discourse
           of
           Master
           Medes
           ,
           as
           a
           choice
           piece
           ,
           as
           Master
           
             Steven
             Marshall
          
           by
           name
           ,
           that
           worthy
           Preacher
           .
           My
           opinion
           is
           ,
           that
           never
           was
           the
           defection
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           Rome
           ,
           and
           the
           native
           genius
           thereof
           more
           lively
           ,
           and
           clearely
           ,
           and
           learnedly
           set
           forth
           ,
           as
           most
           exactly
           answereable
           to
           that
           which
           the
           Scripture
           hath
           foretold
           ,
           then
           by
           Master
           Mede
           in
           the
           opening
           and
           expounding
           of
           this
           text
           ,
           whereupon
           he
           insists
           ,
           and
           accommodating
           the
           manners
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           Rome
           in
           the
           latter
           dayes
           thereunto
           ;
           and
           by
           Master
           Potter
           in
           his
           learned
           and
           accurate
           discourse
           of
           the
           number
           
           of
           the
           Beast
           666
           whereof
           Master
           Medes
           judgement
           was
           ,
           that
           it
           was
           the
           greatest
           discovery
           that
           hath
           been
           made
           since
           the
           world
           began
           .
           Much
           adoe
           I
           had
           to
           draw
           him
           to
           peruse
           it
           ,
           and
           give
           me
           his
           judgement
           of
           it
           :
           for
           he
           feared
           it
           would
           prove
           but
           a
           fancy
           ;
           but
           after
           he
           had
           perused
           it
           ,
           he
           sent
           me
           word
           ,
           that
           he
           did
           not
           think
           it
           possible
           that
           a
           matter
           of
           such
           reality
           and
           solidity
           could
           be
           wrought
           out
           of
           it
           .
        
         
           
             WILLIAM
             TWISSE
             .
          
        
      
       
         
         
           The
           Catalogue
           of
           the
           Authors
           .
        
         
           
             
               A
            
             
               ACta
               Stephani
               Monachi
               .
            
             
               Aemilius
               Sura
               apud
               Paterculum
               .
            
             
               Ambrosius
               .
            
             
               Ammianus
               Marcellinus
               .
            
             
               Apuleius
               .
            
             
               Arnobius
               .
            
             
               Athenagorae
               legat
               .
               pro
               Christ.
               
            
             
               Augustinus
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             
               B
            
             
               Balaeus
               .
            
             
               Baronius
               .
            
             
               Basilius
               .
            
             
               S.
               Benedicti
               Reg.
               
            
             
               Beza
               .
            
             
               Budaeus
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             
               C
            
             
               Caesarius
               .
            
             
               Calvinus
               .
            
             
               Castellio
               .
            
             
               Cedrenus
               .
            
             
               Celsus
               apud
               Originem
               .
            
             
               Chemnitius
               .
            
             
               Chrysostomus
               .
            
             
               Cicero
               .
            
             
               Clemens
               Alexandrinus
               .
            
             
               Clementis
               alterius
               constitutiones
               .
            
             
               Concilium
               Chalcedonense
               .
            
             
               Concilium
               Constantinopolitanum
               .
            
             
               Concilium
               Laodicenum
               .
            
             
               Concilium
               Nicenum
               2.
               
            
             
               Constantinus
               Morossa
               .
            
             
               Cosma
               Megalianus
               .
            
             
               Cyrillus
               Alexandrinus
               .
            
             
               Cyrillus
               Hierosolym
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             
               D
            
             
               Damascenus
               .
            
             
               Diodorus
               apud
               Eusebium
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             
               E
            
             
               Epiphanius
               .
            
             
               Evagrius
               .
            
             
               Eucherius
               .
            
             
               Eunapius
               .
            
             
               Eusebius
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             
               F
            
             
               Fasciculus
               temporum
               .
            
             
               Florus
               .
            
             
               Franciscus
               Junius
               .
            
             
               Fridericus
               Sylburgius
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             
               G
            
             
               Gennadius
               de
               viris
               ilillustribus
               .
            
             
               Graserus
               .
            
             
               Gratianus
               .
            
             
               Gregorius
               magnus
               .
            
             
               Gregorius
               Nazianzenus
               .
            
             
               Gregorius
               Nyssenus
               .
            
             
               Gregorius
               Turonensis
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             
               H
            
             
               Hermes
               Trismegistus
               .
            
             
               Herodotus
               .
            
             
               Hesiodus
               .
            
             
               Hieronymus
               .
            
             
               Hilarius
               .
            
             
               Hyperius
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             
               I
            
             
               Iamblycus
               .
            
             
               Interpres
               Aretae
               .
            
             
               Interpretes
               Septuagint
               .
            
             
               Interpres
               Syrus
               .
            
             
               Interpres
               Vulgatus
               .
            
             
               Joannes
               Curopalata
               .
            
             
               Ioannes
               de
               Nicol.
               
            
             
               Ionathan
               .
            
             
               Iornandes
               .
            
             
               Iosephus
               .
            
             
               Irenaeus
               .
            
             
               Iustinus
               Martyr
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             
               K
            
             
               Kircheri
               concordantia
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             
               L
            
             
               Lactantins
               .
            
             
               Legenda
               aurea
               .
            
             
               Leo
               magnus
               .
            
             
               Linacer
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             
               M
            
             
               Martini
               Lexicon
               .
            
             
               Melancthon
               .
            
             
               
               Melchior
               Canus
               .
            
             
               Miracula
               B.
               Virginis
               ,
               lib.
               Ital.
               
            
          
        
         
           
             
               O
            
             
               Oecumenius
               .
            
             
               Oenomaus
               apud
               Eusebium
               .
            
             
               Onkelos
               .
            
             
               Origines
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             
               P
            
             
               Paterculus
               .
            
             
               Paulus
               Diaconus
               .
            
             
               Philo
               Biblius
               .
            
             
               Plato
               .
            
             
               Plutarchus
               .
            
             
               Porphyrius
               .
            
             
               Possevinus
               .
            
             
               Procopius
               .
            
             
               Psellus
               .
            
             
               Ptolomaeus
               .
            
             
               Purchas
               pilgrimage
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             
               S
            
             
               Sammon
               .
               Serenus
               apud
               Macrobium
               .
            
             
               Sanchuniathon
               apud
               Eusebium
               .
            
             
               Servius
               .
            
             
               Sigonius
               .
            
             
               Simeon
               Metaphrastes
               .
            
             
               Sleidanus
               .
            
             
               Socrates
               ,
               historicus
               Ecclesiasticus
               .
            
             
               Stephani
               ,
               Robertus
               &
               Henricus
               .
            
             
               Suidas
               .
            
             
               Surius
               .
            
             
               Synesius
            
          
        
         
           
             
               T
            
             
               Targumin
               &
               Targumistae
               .
            
             
               Tertullianus
               .
            
             
               Theodoretus
               .
            
             
               Theodorus
               apud
               Baronium
               .
            
             
               Theophanis
               miscel
               .
               hist.
               
            
             
               Theophanes
               presbyter
               apud
               Baron
               .
            
             
               Theosterictus
               .
            
             
               Tremelius
               .
            
             
               Trithemius
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             
               V
            
             
               Varro
               .
            
             
               Vatablus
               .
            
             
               Venantius
               Fortunatus
               apud
               Biblioth
               .
               Patrum
               .
            
             
               Vincent
               .
               histor
               .
            
             
               Virgilius
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             
               Z
            
             
               Zozomenus
               .
            
          
        
      
       
         
         
           Errata
           .
        
         
           Pag.
           2.
           line
           17.
           reade
           discrete
           ,
           p.
           7.
           l.
           2
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           p.
           9.
           l.
           28.
           profecta
           ,
           p.
           10
           ,
           l.
           13.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           l.
           17.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           l.
           18.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           l.
           28.
           suppetias
           .
           p.
           11.
           l.
           5
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           p.
           13.
           l.
           6.
           
           Idololatrae
           ,
           l.
           7.
           
           Idola
           ,
           l.
           9.
           
           Es.
           65.
           l.
           10.
           
           Idolis
           ,
           p.
           18.
           l.
           4.
           which
           ,
           p.
           31.
           l.
           12.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           p.
           34.
           l.
           18.
           that
           ,
           p.
           42.
           l.
           31.
           induxit
           ,
           l.
           33.
           
             pro
             Pandiis
          
           ,
           p.
           45.
           l.
           26.
           attended
           ,
           p.
           47.
           l.
           5.
           characters
           ,
           p.
           59.
           l.
           25.
           beautifull
           ,
           p.
           61.
           l.
           8.
           not
           ,
           p.
           70.
           l.
           22.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           p
           ,
           71.
           l.
           34.
           after
           sackcloth
           make
           a
           colon
           ,
           p.
           77.
           l.
           19.
           &
           p.
           78.
           l.
           14.
           
           Iohojachin
           ,
           p.
           83.
           l.
           22.
           contained
           ,
           p.
           93.
           verse
           36.
           proficietque
           p.
           94.
           ver
           .
           39.
           honorem
           ,
           p.
           100.
           l.
           17.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           l.
           7.
           polity
           p.
           113.
           l.
           14.
           he
           ,
           p.
           114.
           l.
           8.
           sententiae
           .
        
         
           
             In
             the
             Margine
             .
          
           
             Pag.
             7.
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             &c.
             p.
             13.
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             p.
             22.
             perspici
             ,
             p.
             46.
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             p.
             84.
             
             I●rnandes
             ,
             p.
             97.
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             p.
             48.
             habebatur
             .
             p.
             125.
             for
             Rem
             r.
             Hom.
             
          
        
      
    
     
       
         
         
           THE
           APOSTASY
           OF
           THE
           LATER
           TIMES
           .
        
         
           
             
               
                 A
                 Treatise
                 on
                 1
              
               Timothy
               
                 Chap.
                 4.
                 
                 Ver.
                 1
                 ,
                 2.
                 
              
            
             
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               
                 Which
                 I
                 conceive
                 may
                 bee
                 thus
                 translated
                 ,
              
               viz.
               
            
             
               Howbeit
               the
               Spirit
               speaketh
               expresly
               ,
               that
               in
               the
               later
               times
               some
               shall
               revolt
               from
               the
               Faith
               ,
               attending
               
               to
               erroneous
               spirits
               and
               *
               Doctrines
               of
               Daemons
               ,
               through
               the
               hypocrisie
               of
               lyars
               ,
               having
               seared
               consciences
               ,
               forbidding
               to
               marry
               ,
               and
               commanding
               to
               abstaine
               from
               meats
               ,
               &c.
               
            
          
        
         
           THe
           words
           I
           have
           read
           ,
           are
           a
           prophesie
           of
           a
           revolt
           of
           Christians
           from
           the
           great
           mystery
           of
           Christian
           Worship
           ,
           described
           in
           the
           last
           verse
           of
           the
           former
           chapter
           ;
           which
           according
           to
           the
           division
           of
           the
           Ancients
           ,
           should
           bee
           the
           first
           of
           this
           :
           for
           that
           last
           verse
           ,
           together
           with
           the
           first
           six
           verses
           of
           this
           and
           halfe
           the
           seventh
           verse
           ,
           make
           the
           seventh
           title
           or
           main
           Section
           of
           this
           Epistle
           ,
           expressed
           in
           the
           Edition
           of
           
             Robert
             Stephen
          
           ;
           and
           so
           supposed
           ,
           from
           the
           grounds
           of
           that
           division
           ,
           to
           belong
           all
           to
           one
           argument
           .
           The
           words
           therefore
           of
           my
           Text
           ,
           depend
           upon
           the
           last
           of
           the
           former
           chapter
           ,
           as
           the
           second
           part
           of
           a
           discreet
           proposition
           ;
           that
           howsoever
           the
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           the
           mystery
           of
           Christian
           Religion
           ,
           which
           is
           ,
           
             God
             manifested
             in
             the
             Flesh
             ,
             justified
             in
             the
             Spirit
             ,
             seene
             of
             Angels
             ,
             and
             assumed
             into
             glory
             :
          
           Though
           this
           mystery
           was
           a
           great
           one
           ,
           and
           at
           that
           time
           preached
           and
           beleeved
           in
           the
           world
           ;
           neverthelesse
           ,
           the
           Spirit
           (
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           )
           speaketh
           expresly
           ,
           
             that
             in
             the
             later
             times
             there
             shall
             be
             a
             revolt
             or
             departing
             from
             the
             faith
             ,
          
           though
           not
           in
           all
           parts
           of
           it
           ,
           yet
           from
           a
           main
           and
           fundamentall
           part
           thereof
           ,
           namely
           ,
           the
           assumption
           of
           this
           God
           and
           Man
           to
           the
           throne
           of
           glory
           ,
           and
           the
           incommunicable
           majesty
           in
           Heaven
           ,
           where
           he
           hath
           a
           name
           given
           him
           above
           every
           name
           ,
           and
           whereof
           no
           creature
           in
           Heaven
           or
           in
           earth
           can
           be
           capable
           :
           which
           connexion
           is
           the
           reason
           why
           the
           Apostle
           putteth
           this
           
             assumption
             into
             glory
          
           in
           the
           last
           place
           of
           his
           description
           ,
           which
           should
           else
           in
           the
           true
           order
           have
           followed
           the
           words
           ,
           
             justified
             in
             the
             spirit
          
           ,
           and
           beene
           before
           
             preached
             unto
             the
             Gentiles
          
           ,
           and
           
             beleeved
             on
             in
             the
             world
          
           .
           But
           it
           is
           the
           method
           of
           the
           Scripture
           ,
           sometimes
           
           to
           translate
           the
           proper
           order
           ,
           and
           to
           mention
           that
           in
           the
           last
           place
           whereunto
           it
           is
           to
           joine
           ,
           and
           from
           whence
           it
           is
           to
           inferre
           the
           next
           words
           that
           follow
           after
           .
           And
           unlesse
           this
           reason
           be
           allowed
           here
           ,
           there
           will
           hardly
           be
           found
           any
           other
           reason
           of
           this
           misplacing
           .
           But
           more
           of
           this
           shall
           be
           both
           spoken
           and
           made
           better
           to
           appeare
           hereafter
           .
        
         
           I
           come
           now
           more
           neer
           to
           my
           Text
           ;
           the
           words
           whereof
           I
           divide
           into
           two
           parts
           :
           First
           ,
           a
           description
           of
           this
           solemne
           Apostasie
           ,
           in
           the
           first
           verse
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           the
           manner
           or
           means
           whereby
           it
           was
           to
           come
           to
           passe
           in
           the
           following
           verse
           ,
           
             viz.
             through
             the
             hypocrisie
             of
             lyars
             ,
             who
             had
             seared
             consciences
             ,
             forbidding
             to
             marry
             ,
             and
             commanding
             to
             abstain
             from
             meats
             .
          
        
         
           For
           the
           description
           of
           the
           Apostasie
           it selfe
           ,
           we
           shall
           
           finde
           it
           first
           generally
           and
           indefinitely
           expressed
           both
           in
           the
           word
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           they
           shall
           apostatize
           or
           revolt
           ;
           and
           in
           the
           next
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           shall
           attend
           to
           erroneous
           Doctrines
           ,
           or
           Doctrines
           of
           errour
           .
        
         
           Then
           particularly
           ,
           1
           what
           these
           erroneous
           Doctrines
           
           should
           be
           for
           the
           kinde
           or
           quality
           ,
           namely
           new
           Doctrines
           of
           Daemons
           ,
           or
           a
           new
           Idolatry
           .
           2
           The
           persons
           who
           should
           thus
           apostatize
           ,
           not
           all
           but
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           some
           .
           3
           The
           time
           when
           it
           should
           be
           ,
           in
           these
           later
           times
           .
           4
           The
           proofe
           or
           warrant
           of
           this
           prophesie
           ,
           it
           is
           that
           which
           the
           Spirit
           hath
           elsewhere
           long
           agoe
           foretold
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           in
           the
           written
           word
           verbatim
           ,
           
             totidem
             verbis
          
           or
           in
           expresse
           words
           .
           For
           the
           second
           part
           (
           viz.
           )
           the
           means
           ;
           Consider
           first
           the
           manner
           or
           method
           used
           ,
           
             by
             lying
             hypocrisie
             or
             hypocriticall
             lying
          
           ;
           Secondly
           ,
           the
           quality
           and
           description
           of
           the
           authors
           and
           furtherers
           thereof
           ,
           they
           should
           be
           such
           as
           
             had
             their
             consciences
             seared
             ,
             who
             forbade
             marriages
             and
             meats
             .
          
           Where
           ,
           before
           I
           go
           any
           further
           ,
           I
           must
           give
           an
           account
           of
           thus
           translating
           these
           later
           words
           which
           I
           make
           the
           second
           part
           ,
           because
           they
           are
           commonly
           translated
           otherwise
           ,
           (
           viz.
           )
           intransitively
           ,
           as
           referring
           the
           words
           of
           the
           two
           last
           verses
           to
           the
           persons
           mentioned
           in
           the
           first
           (
           viz.
           )
           those
           some
           who
           
           should
           apostatize
           and
           give
           heed
           to
           erroneous
           spirits
           and
           doctrines
           of
           devils
           ,
           as
           they
           usually
           translate
           it
           :
           so
           that
           the
           words
           of
           the
           second
           &
           third
           verses
           should
           be
           the
           expression
           by
           particulars
           of
           that
           which
           was
           before
           generally
           comprized
           under
           erroneous
           spirits
           and
           doctrines
           of
           devils
           ,
           which
           should
           consist
           partly
           in
           forbidding
           lawfull
           marriage
           ,
           and
           partly
           in
           commanding
           abstinence
           from
           meats
           ,
           thereby
           abridging
           Christian
           liberty
           .
           But
           this
           interpretation
           seemes
           very
           unlikely
           ;
           for
           first
           ,
           since
           S.
           Paul
           intendeth
           here
           to
           describe
           that
           great
           apostasie
           of
           the
           Christian
           visible
           Church
           ,
           as
           is
           evident
           by
           the
           pointing
           out
           of
           the
           time
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           in
           the
           later
           times
           ;
           who
           can
           beleeve
           that
           he
           who
           aymeth
           at
           this
           ,
           would
           instance
           only
           in
           the
           smaller
           and
           almost
           circumstantiall
           errours
           ,
           omitting
           the
           main
           &
           fundamental
           ,
           which
           the
           Scripture
           elswhere
           telleth
           us
           should
           be
           Idolatry
           or
           spirituall
           fornication
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           as
           for
           errours
           about
           marriages
           and
           meates
           ,
           they
           were
           not
           proper
           to
           the
           last
           times
           ,
           but
           found
           more
           or
           lesse
           in
           the
           Apostles
           owne
           times
           ,
           as
           may
           be
           gathered
           by
           some
           passages
           of
           their
           Epistles
           :
           why
           should
           then
           our
           Apostle
           ,
           here
           speaking
           of
           the
           Apostasie
           of
           the
           last
           times
           ,
           instance
           only
           in
           these
           things
           which
           the
           first
           times
           in
           some
           measure
           were
           never
           free
           from
           ?
           Lastly
           ,
           which
           I
           take
           alone
           to
           be
           sufficient
           ,
           the
           Syntax
           of
           the
           words
           will
           not
           beare
           it
           ,
           to
           have
           them
           so
           translated
           ;
           for
           the
           persons
           in
           the
           first
           verse
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           are
           expressed
           
             in
             casu
             recto
          
           ,
           whereas
           the
           persons
           in
           the
           verses
           following
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           are
           in
           the
           genitive
           :
           now
           by
           what
           Syntax
           can
           these
           be
           construed
           intransitively
           ?
           how
           will
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           agree
           with
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           &c.
           without
           breach
           of
           Grammar
           ,
           unsampled
           in
           our
           Apostles
           Epistles
           ?
           If
           any
           say
           ,
           they
           may
           be
           referred
           then
           and
           agree
           with
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           that
           indeed
           would
           be
           a
           strange
           sense
           ,
           and
           nothing
           to
           their
           purpose
           ,
           to
           say
           that
           Devils
           lie
           ,
           have
           seared
           consciences
           ,
           and
           forbid
           marriages
           and
           meates
           .
           But
           to
           construe
           it
           transitively
           ,
           and
           to
           make
           all
           these
           genitive
           cases
           to
           be
           governed
           by
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           
           and
           take
           the
           preposition
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           to
           signifie
           Caus●m
           or
           
             Modum
             actionis
          
           ,
           *
           as
           is
           most
           usuall
           in
           Scripture
           :
           this
           ,
           as
           it
           keepeth
           the
           Syntax
           true
           ,
           so
           I
           hope
           to
           make
           it
           appeare
           hereafter
           to
           bee
           the
           very
           meaning
           and
           the
           event
           most
           answerable
           thereunto
           ,
           when
           you
           shall
           heare
           proved
           out
           of
           Story
           ,
           that
           the
           Apostasie
           of
           the
           visible
           Church
           came
           in
           by
           lying
           wonders
           and
           all
           deceivablenesse
           of
           unrighteousnesse
           ,
           mannaged
           by
           those
           who
           either
           professed
           or
           doted
           upon
           Monasticall
           hypocrisie
           ,
           the
           affectation
           of
           which
           errours
           ,
           at
           length
           surprizing
           the
           body
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           is
           that
           which
           S.
           Paul
           2
           Thes.
           2.
           calls
           not
           the
           Apostasie
           it selfe
           ,
           but
           
             a
             not-love
             of
             the
             truth
          
           ,
           for
           which
           God
           
             gave
             them
             over
             to
             strong
             delusions
             that
             they
             might
             beleeve
             a
             ly
             .
          
           But
           this
           is
           out
           of
           its
           place
           ,
           only
           I
           have
           anticipated
           thus
           much
           ,
           lest
           you
           should
           be
           too
           long
           in
           suspence
           of
           the
           grounds
           of
           this
           novelty
           in
           translating
           :
           and
           yet
           this
           difficulty
           concerning
           the
           Syntax
           ,
           hath
           stumbled
           many
           of
           our
           later
           interpreters
           ,
           as
           amongst
           others
           Beza
           ,
           who
           solves
           it
           only
           by
           saying
           ,
           that
           the
           Apostle
           more
           regarded
           the
           matter
           than
           the
           construction
           ;
           which
           for
           my
           part
           I
           cannot
           beleeve
           :
           others
           who
           can
           ,
           may
           if
           they
           please
           .
           I
           returne
           now
           unto
           the
           first
           part
           of
           my
           Text
           ,
           the
           description
           of
           that
           solemne
           Apostasie
           ;
           where
           I
           will
           consider
           the
           five
           parts
           or
           points
           thereof
           as
           I
           have
           propounded
           them
           ,
           though
           it
           be
           not
           according
           to
           the
           order
           of
           the
           words
           .
           And
           first
           in
           the
           more
           generall
           expression
           of
           the
           words
           ,
           as
           I
           called
           it
           :
           I
           say
           in
           these
           words
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           &
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           (
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           )
           is
           as
           much
           as
           to
           say
           ,
           they
           shall
           make
           an
           Apostasie
           ;
           now
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           in
           Scripture
           use
           ,
           when
           it
           looks
           towards
           a
           person
           ,
           signifies
           a
           revolt
           or
           rebellion
           ;
           when
           towards
           God
           ,
           a
           spirituall
           revolt
           from
           God
           or
           rebellion
           against
           divine
           Majesty
           ,
           whether
           totall
           ,
           or
           by
           Idolatry
           and
           serving
           other
           gods
           ;
           for
           the
           Seventy
           ,
           whence
           the
           new
           Testament
           borrows
           the
           use
           of
           speech
           ,
           usually
           translates
           by
           this
           word
           the
           verb
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           to
           rebell
           ,
           and
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           rebellion
           ;
           both
           which
           when
           they
           have
           reference
           to
           a
           spirituall
           Soveraignty
           ,
           
           meane
           nought
           else
           but
           Idolatry
           and
           serving
           of
           other
           gods
           ,
           as
           may
           appeare
           Josuah
           22.19
           .
           where
           the
           Israelites
           supposing
           their
           brethren
           the
           Rubenites
           and
           Gadites
           ,
           in
           building
           another
           Altar
           upon
           the
           banks
           of
           Jordan
           ,
           had
           meant
           to
           have
           forsaken
           the
           Lord
           and
           served
           other
           gods
           ,
           they
           said
           unto
           them
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           you
           have
           rebelled
           against
           the
           Lord
           ,
           and
           presently
           ,
           rebell
           not
           against
           the
           Lord
           ,
           nor
           rebell
           against
           us
           ;
           where
           the
           Seventy
           hath
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           two
           and
           twenty
           verse
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           rebellion
           is
           translated
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           in
           the
           words
           ,
           the
           Lord
           God
           of
           gods
           he
           knoweth
           if
           it
           be
           in
           rebellion
           or
           transgression
           against
           the
           Lord
           ;
           also
           Numb
           .
           14.
           ver
           .
           9.
           when
           the
           people
           would
           have
           renounced
           the
           Lord
           upon
           the
           report
           of
           the
           spyes
           ,
           Josuah
           and
           Caleb
           spake
           unto
           them
           ,
           saying
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           
             rebell
             yee
             not
          
           ,
           where
           the
           Seventy
           hath
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           
             be
             not
             apostates
             from
             the
             Lord
          
           ;
           so
           Nehem.
           9.26
           .
           in
           that
           repentant
           confession
           which
           the
           Levites
           make
           of
           the
           Idolatry
           of
           their
           nation
           ,
           they
           were
           disobedient
           say
           they
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           and
           rebelled
           against
           thee
           ;
           the
           Seventy
           hath
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           and
           Daniel
           in
           the
           like
           confession
           chap.
           9.
           ver
           .
           9.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           the
           Seventy
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           
             wee
             have
             rebelled
          
           ;
           so
           the
           Idolatry
           of
           Ahaz
           2
           Chron.
           28.
           and
           29.
           is
           by
           the
           same
           interpreters
           called
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           and
           he
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           revolted
           greatly
           from
           the
           Lord.
           
        
         
           I
           will
           not
           trouble
           you
           with
           the
           places
           where
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           translated
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           is
           used
           for
           treason
           and
           rebellion
           against
           earthly
           Princes
           ,
           which
           are
           many
           :
           it
           is
           sufficient
           to
           gather
           from
           what
           we
           have
           quoted
           ,
           that
           apostasie
           having
           reference
           to
           a
           soveraignty
           and
           lordship
           ,
           betokens
           a
           withdrawing
           of
           subjection
           and
           service
           therefrom
           ;
           which
           if
           the
           soveraignty
           and
           majesty
           be
           divine
           ,
           is
           done
           by
           Idolatry
           *
           ,
           and
           service
           of
           other
           gods
           ,
           as
           well
           as
           if
           the
           majesty
           of
           the
           true
           God
           were
           renounced
           altogether
           .
           The
           use
           of
           the
           New
           Testament
           is
           answerable
           ,
           Hebr.
           3.12
           .
           Take
           
           heed
           lest
           there
           be
           in
           any
           of
           you
           an
           evill
           heart
           of
           unbeliefe
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           in
           departing
           from
           the
           living
           God
           ,
           and
           which
           is
           more
           neer
           to
           our
           purpose
           S.
           Paul
           in
           his
           2
           Thes.
           2.
           meanes
           no
           other
           thing
           in
           his
           prophesie
           of
           the
           man
           of
           sinne
           by
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           than
           Christian
           Idolatry
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           (
           Syr.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           )
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           unlesse
           that
           apostasie
           come
           first
           ,
           that
           is
           ,
           unlesse
           there
           be
           a
           breach
           of
           allegiance
           and
           faith
           given
           unto
           Christ
           ,
           by
           Idolatry
           under
           Antichrist
           :
           the
           like
           therefore
           I
           conclude
           to
           bee
           intended
           in
           my
           Text
           by
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           namely
           ,
           that
           in
           the
           later
           times
           men
           should
           break
           their
           oath
           of
           fidelity
           to
           Christ
           ,
           that
           in
           and
           through
           him
           alone
           they
           should
           approach
           and
           worship
           the
           divine
           Majesty
           :
           and
           so
           hath
           the
           use
           of
           the
           word
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           taught
           us
           something
           ,
           at
           least
           it
           hath
           wrought
           an
           indefinite
           suspicion
           of
           what
           should
           befall
           Christians
           in
           the
           later
           times
           ;
           howsoever
           we
           are
           yet
           in
           suspence
           whether
           this
           departing
           from
           Christ
           and
           the
           mystery
           of
           godlinesse
           should
           be
           totall
           in
           not
           acknowledging
           him
           at
           all
           ,
           or
           whether
           hereticall
           in
           serving
           other
           gods
           besides
           him
           .
           For
           the
           Jewes
           we
           know
           ,
           when
           they
           forsook
           the
           Lord
           most
           ,
           yet
           did
           not
           forsake
           him
           altogether
           ,
           but
           their
           apostasie
           was
           in
           not
           serving
           him
           only
           and
           alone
           ,
           but
           others
           besides
           him
           ,
           as
           Calves
           ,
           the
           host
           of
           Heaven
           ,
           and
           Baalim
           .
        
         
           Let
           us
           therefore
           see
           if
           the
           next
           generall
           words
           will
           affords
           us
           yet
           further
           information
           ,
           
           viz.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           attending
           to
           erroneous
           spirits
           ,
           or
           as
           some
           read
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           spirits
           of
           errour
           .
           It
           would
           be
           unprofitable
           and
           tedious
           here
           to
           tel
           of
           the
           divers
           use
           of
           this
           word
           spirit
           ,
           in
           Scripture
           :
           some
           take
           it
           in
           this
           place
           for
           Doctors
           of
           spirituall
           things
           ,
           and
           so
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           or
           as
           some
           read
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           should
           be
           Doctors
           of
           errour
           .
        
         
           But
           I
           had
           rather
           take
           Spirits
           in
           this
           place
           for
           doctrines
           themselves
           ,
           for
           so
           Divines
           observe
           it
           to
           be
           used
           1
           Joh.
           4.1
           .
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           beleeve
           not
           every
           spirit
           ,
           
             i.
             e.
          
           every
           doctrine
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           but
           try
           the
           spirits
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           if
           they
           be
           of
           God
           :
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           because
           many
           false
           Prophets
           ,
           &c.
           and
           so
           onward
           in
           that
           chapter
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           signifies
           the
           false
           doctrine
           of
           Antichrist
           ;
           so
           if
           this
           sense
           be
           admitted
           ,
           wee
           are
           something
           lesse
           in
           suspense
           than
           we
           were
           ,
           and
           may
           guesse
           that
           this
           revolt
           should
           not
           be
           totall
           but
           hereticall
           ,
           for
           wee
           shall
           not
           easily
           finde
           the
           word
           spirit
           to
           be
           otherwise
           used
           but
           either
           for
           the
           doctrines
           or
           Doctors
           of
           Christianity
           ,
           or
           for
           heresies
           under
           the
           same
           :
           It
           seemes
           therefore
           to
           be
           some
           revolt
           from
           Christ
           by
           Idolatry
           ,
           even
           in
           those
           who
           would
           seeme
           to
           worship
           him
           .
        
         
           But
           suppose
           it
           be
           so
           ,
           yet
           still
           are
           we
           in
           suspence
           what
           these
           erroneous
           and
           idolatrous
           doctrines
           might
           be
           :
           For
           Idolatry
           ,
           as
           we
           may
           see
           in
           the
           Jewish
           apostasies
           ,
           was
           of
           divers
           kindes
           ,
           as
           worshipping
           the
           host
           of
           Heaven
           ,
           Baalim
           ,
           and
           the
           Gentiles
           other
           things
           besides
           them
           .
           But
           wee
           shall
           not
           be
           long
           in
           doubt
           ,
           the
           next
           words
           will
           cleare
           the
           case
           ,
           
           and
           tell
           us
           they
           shall
           bee
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           doctrines
           of
           Daemons
           ,
           not
           which
           Daemons
           or
           Devills
           are
           authours
           of
           ,
           though
           it
           be
           true
           ,
           as
           if
           the
           genitive
           case
           were
           active
           ;
           but
           doctrines
           concerning
           Daemons
           ,
           the
           genitive
           case
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           being
           here
           to
           be
           taken
           passively
           ,
           for
           the
           object
           of
           these
           doctrines
           ,
           as
           in
           Heb.
           6.
           we
           have
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           doctrines
           of
           Baptismes
           ,
           and
           doctrines
           of
           laying
           on
           of
           hands
           ,
           of
           the
           resurrection
           of
           the
           dead
           ,
           and
           eternall
           judgement
           ,
           and
           doctrines
           about
           and
           concerning
           all
           these
           ;
           and
           the
           same
           use
           may
           elsewhere
           be
           found
           even
           with
           the
           word
           Doctrine
           ,
           as
           Acts
           13.12
           .
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           the
           doctrine
           of
           the
           Lord
           ,
           
             i.
             e.
          
           concerning
           him
           ;
           so
           Titus
           2.10
           .
           and
           Gal.
           2.20
           .
           we
           have
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           the
           faith
           of
           the
           Sonne
           of
           God
           ,
           
             i.
             e.
          
           concerning
           him
           *
           .
           Semblably
           in
           my
           Text
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           are
           doctrines
           of
           Daemons
           or
           
             Doctrinae
             Deastrorum
          
           ,
           that
           is
           ,
           the
           Gentiles
           idolatrous
           Theology
           of
           Daemons
           should
           be
           revived
           among
           Christians
           :
           for
           I
           take
           the
           word
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           or
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           (
           for
           all
           is
           one
           )
           not
           in
           that
           worst
           sense
           ,
           which
           no
           authour
           but
           
           the
           Scripture
           useth
           ,
           but
           in
           the
           better
           and
           more
           indifferent
           sense
           ,
           as
           it
           was
           supposed
           and
           taken
           among
           the
           Theologists
           and
           Philosophers
           of
           the
           Gentiles
           ,
           and
           as
           it
           is
           also
           sometimes
           taken
           in
           Scripture
           ,
           as
           I
           shall
           shew
           in
           due
           time
           .
        
         
           Mean
           while
           let
           us
           first
           see
           what
           the
           Gentiles
           and
           their
           Theologists
           understood
           by
           Daemons
           :
           which
           when
           you
           have
           heard
           ,
           I
           doubt
           not
           but
           you
           will
           confesse
           the
           deifying
           and
           worshipping
           of
           Saints
           and
           Angels
           ,
           with
           other
           parts
           of
           their
           Idolatry
           ,
           which
           doe
           this
           ,
           to
           be
           as
           lively
           an
           image
           of
           the
           doctrine
           of
           Daemons
           as
           could
           possibly
           be
           expressed
           ;
           and
           such
           a
           one
           ,
           as
           whereby
           the
           apostasie
           of
           the
           later
           times
           is
           as
           by
           a
           character
           distinguished
           from
           the
           heresies
           ,
           false
           doctrines
           ,
           and
           corruptions
           of
           all
           other
           times
           whatsoever
           .
        
         
           Daemons
           ,
           in
           the
           Gentiles
           Theology
           ,
           were
           Deastri
           or
           an
           inferiour
           sort
           of
           deified
           powers
           ,
           as
           a
           middle
           betweene
           the
           Soveraigne
           Gods
           and
           mortall
           men
           :
           so
           saith
           
             Plato
             in
             Symposio
          
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           :
           so
           say
           all
           the
           Platonists
           ,
           and
           well
           nigh
           all
           other
           sects
           of
           Philosophers
           ;
           I
           am
           sure
           most
           doe
           :
           for
           it
           is
           a
           very
           ancient
           doctrine
           ,
           insomuch
           that
           
             Plutarch
             (
             de
             deffectu
             Oraculorum
          
           )
           fetcheth
           this
           distinction
           between
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           
             i.
             e.
          
           Soveraign
           Gods
           ,
           and
           Daemons
           ,
           as
           farre
           as
           the
           antiquity
           of
           
             Zoroaster
             ;
             magnas
             &
             difficiles
             dubitationes
          
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             videntur
             solvisse
             qui
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             medio
             inter
             Deos
             &
             homines
             loco
             constituerunt
             ,
             &
             quod
             nos
             cum
             his
             quodammodo
             conciliat
             &
             conjungit
             ,
             invenerint
             ,
             sive
             haec
             Magorum
             ,
             &
             Zoroastris
             doctrina
             sit
             ,
             sive
             Thracica
             ab
             Orpheo
             perfecta
             ,
             sive
             Aegyptiaca
             sive
             Phrygica
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           The
           Soveraigne
           or
           highest
           Gods
           which
           amongst
           them
           were
           properly
           called
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           were
           those
           whom
           they
           supposed
           to
           be
           in
           the
           Heavens
           ,
           yea
           in
           the
           Sunne
           ,
           Moon
           ,
           and
           Starres
           ,
           whence
           they
           called
           them
           
             Dii
             Superi
             ,
             Dii
             Coelestes
          
           ,
           whom
           they
           affirmed
           to
           have
           neither
           begining
           nor
           ending
           ,
           as
           Apuleius
           speaks
           
             de
             Daemonio
             Socr.
             Immortales
             sine
             ullo
             vel
             fine
             vel
             exordio
             ,
             sed
             prorsus
             à
             retro
             aeviterni
             .
          
           And
           because
           they
           dwelt
           in
           the
           heavenly
           
           lights
           ,
           as
           it
           were
           soules
           in
           bodies
           ,
           Plato
           thinks
           the
           name
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           first
           came
           quasi
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           of
           the
           everlasting
           running
           and
           uncessant
           motion
           of
           the
           heavenly
           bodies
           ,
           
             Plat.
             in
             Cratylo
          
           .
        
         
           Now
           these
           Soveraigne
           Celestiall
           Gods
           they
           supposed
           so
           sublime
           and
           pure
           as
           might
           not
           bee
           prophaned
           with
           approach
           of
           earthly
           things
           ,
           or
           with
           the
           care
           or
           mannaging
           of
           mortall
           mens
           businesses
           ;
           and
           therefore
           they
           bring
           in
           that
           middle
           sort
           of
           divine
           Powers
           which
           they
           call
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           or
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           to
           be
           as
           mediatours
           and
           agents
           betweene
           the
           Soveraigne
           Gods
           and
           mortall
           men
           :
           thus
           saith
           Plato
           in
           his
           Symposium
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           God
           is
           not
           approached
           by
           men
           ,
           but
           all
           the
           commerce
           and
           inter-course
           betweene
           Gods
           and
           men
           is
           performed
           by
           the
           mediations
           of
           Daemons
           .
           Will
           you
           see
           the
           particulars
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ;
           Daemons
           are
           reporters
           and
           carriers
           from
           men
           to
           the
           Gods
           ,
           and
           againe
           from
           the
           Gods
           to
           men
           ;
           of
           the
           supplications
           and
           prayers
           of
           the
           one
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           injunctions
           and
           rewards
           of
           devotion
           from
           the
           other
           .
           And
           Apuleius
           in
           the
           place
           forequoted
           describes
           them
           ,
           
             mediae
             potestates
             per
             quas
             &
             desideria
             nostra
             &
             merita
             ad
             Deos
             commeant
             ,
             inter
             mortales
             Coelicolasque
             vectores
             ,
             hinc
             precum
             ,
             inde
             donorum
             ;
             qui
             ultrò
             citróque
             portant
             hinc
             petitiones
             ,
             inde
             suspetias
             seu
             quidam
             utrinque
             interpretes
             &
             salutigeri
             :
          
           For
           ,
           saith
           he
           ,
           
             neque
             enim
             pro
             majestate
             Deûm
             Coelestium
             fuerit
             haec
             curare
             ,
          
           it
           beseems
           not
           the
           majesty
           of
           the
           Soveraigne
           Gods
           to
           mannage
           these
           things
           of
           themselves
           .
           Whence
           it
           is
           that
           Celsus
           in
           Origen
           tearmes
           his
           Daemons
           
             summi
             Dei
             Satrapas
             ,
             praesides
             ,
             procuratores
             ,
             Duces
             ,
             qui
             neglecti
             non
             minùs
             laedere
             possunt
             ,
             quàm
             Persarum
             ,
             Romanorumve
             Regis
             Satrapae
             ,
             praesides
             ,
             ministri
             ,
             &c.
             lib.
          
           8.
           
             contra
             Celsum
             .
             pag.
          
           940.
           
           Where
           note
           by
           the
           way
           ,
           that
           
           Celsus
           as
           some
           others
           did
           ,
           acknowledges
           but
           one
           Soveraigne
           God.
           
        
         
           By
           reason
           of
           this
           office
           of
           mediation
           ,
           Plutarch
           calls
           the
           order
           of
           Daemons
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           Also
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           &c.
           agreeable
           to
           the
           doctrine
           of
           
             Plato
             ,
             lib.
             de
             defec
             .
             Oracul
             .
          
           the
           order
           of
           agents
           ,
           and
           ministers
           &c.
           
           To
           stay
           no
           longer
           here
           ,
           take
           the
           summe
           of
           all
           in
           the
           words
           of
           Apuleius
           in
           the
           book
           forenamed
           ,
           
             cuncta
             Coelestium
             voluntate
             ,
             numine
             ,
             &
             autoritate
             fiunt
             ,
             sed
             Daemonum
             obsequio
             ,
             opera
             ,
             &
             ministerio
             .
          
           And
           if
           I
           should
           bring
           all
           which
           I
           might
           to
           this
           purpose
           ,
           I
           should
           be
           too
           tedious
           .
           Porphyrius
           in
           
             Eusebius
             ,
             Plutarch
          
           ,
           skillfull
           men
           in
           this
           kinde
           of
           Philosophy
           ,
           will
           satisfie
           them
           fully
           ,
           to
           whom
           this
           is
           not
           sufficient
           .
           This
           was
           the
           Occumenicall
           Philosophy
           of
           the
           Apostles
           times
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           times
           long
           before
           them
           :
           
             Thales
             ,
             Pythagoras
          
           ,
           all
           the
           Academicks
           and
           Stoicks
           ,
           and
           not
           many
           to
           be
           excepted
           ,
           unlesse
           the
           Epicures
           ,
           taught
           this
           Divinity
           .
           Hee
           that
           had
           rather
           read
           a
           Father
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           let
           him
           but
           turne
           over
           the
           eighth
           and
           ninth
           books
           of
           S.
           
             Austin
             de
             Civ
             .
             Dei
          
           ,
           the
           eighteenth
           chap
           er
           of
           the
           former
           book
           ,
           having
           this
           Title
           ;
           
             Qualis
             sit
             religio
             in
             qua
             docetur
             ,
             quod
             homines
             ut
             commendentur
             Diis
             ,
             bonis
             Daemonibus
             uti
             debeant
             Advocatis
             :
          
           of
           the
           one
           and
           twenty
           chapter
           this
           ,
           
             An
             Daemonibus
             nuntiis
             &
             interpretibus
             Dii
             utantur
             ?
          
           And
           of
           the
           ninth
           chapter
           of
           the
           ninth
           book
           the
           Title
           is
           this
           ,
           
             An
             amicitia
             Coelestium
             Deorum
             per
             intercessionem
             Daemonum
             possit
             homini
             provideri
             ?
          
           And
           of
           the
           seventeenth
           chapter
           this
           ,
           
             Ad
             consequendam
             vitam
             beatam
             non
             talimediatore
             indigere
             hominem
             qualis
             est
             D●mon
             ,
             sed
             tali
             qualis
             est
             unus
             Christus
             .
          
           The
           reading
           of
           which
           Titles
           alone
           were
           sufficient
           to
           shew
           what
           was
           the
           supposed
           office
           of
           the
           Daemons
           among
           the
           Gentiles
           .
        
         
           This
           Philosophy
           therefore
           so
           generall
           was
           that
           ,
           without
           doubt
           ,
           whereof
           S.
           Paul
           admonisheth
           the
           Colossians
           to
           take
           heed
           lest
           they
           were
           spoyled
           with
           the
           vaine
           deceipt
           
           thereof
           ,
           as
           being
           after
           traditions
           of
           men
           ,
           and
           rudiments
           of
           the
           world
           ,
           and
           not
           after
           Christ.
           For
           some
           Christians
           even
           then
           under
           a
           pretence
           of
           humility
           ,
           of
           not
           approaching
           too
           neerly
           and
           too
           boldly
           to
           God
           ,
           would
           have
           brought
           in
           the
           worshiping
           of
           Angels
           in
           stead
           of
           this
           of
           Daemons
           ;
           but
           S.
           Paul
           tells
           them
           ,
           that
           as
           in
           Christ
           dwelleth
           the
           fulnesse
           of
           the
           Godhead
           bodily
           ,
           so
           that
           he
           needed
           no
           colleagues
           of
           mediation
           ;
           so
           also
           were
           they
           compleat
           in
           him
           ,
           and
           needed
           therefore
           no
           agents
           besides
           him
           .
           
             Let
             no
             man
             therefore
          
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             beguile
             you
             of
             your
             reward
             through
             humility
             ,
             and
             worshipping
             of
             Angels
             ,
             intruding
             into
             those
             things
             which
             he
             hath
             not
             seene
             ,
             and
             not
             holding
             the
             head
             .
          
        
         
           Neither
           is
           the
           holy
           Scripture
           ignorant
           of
           this
           distinction
           of
           Soveraigne
           Gods
           and
           Daemons
           :
           the
           first
           whereof
           the
           Celestiall
           and
           Soveraigne
           Gods
           ,
           whether
           visible
           or
           invisible
           ,
           it
           calls
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           the
           Host
           of
           heaven
           ;
           The
           other
           sort
           it
           stileth
           by
           the
           name
           of
           Baalim
           ,
           that
           is
           ,
           
           Domini
           ,
           or
           Lords
           .
           And
           Manasses
           the
           king
           of
           Idolaters
           was
           compleat
           for
           both
           of
           them
           :
           so
           we
           read
           2
           Chron.
           33.3
           .
           that
           he
           reared
           up
           Altars
           for
           Baalim
           ,
           and
           made
           groves
           ,
           and
           worshipped
           all
           the
           Hoast
           of
           heaven
           ,
           and
           served
           them
           :
           and
           2
           King.
           23.5
           .
           that
           good
           Josiah
           is
           said
           to
           have
           put
           down
           all
           the
           Idolatrous
           Priests
           which
           burnt
           incense
           to
           Baal
           ,
           to
           the
           Sunne
           ,
           and
           to
           the
           Moon
           ,
           and
           to
           the
           Planets
           ,
           and
           to
           all
           the
           hoast
           of
           heaven
           :
           now
           that
           these
           Baalims
           were
           no
           other
           than
           Daemon-gods
           ,
           appeares
           by
           their
           cutting
           and
           launcing
           themselves
           ,
           who
           worshipped
           them
           :
           1
           King.
           18.
           for
           these
           tragyck
           ceremonies
           are
           counted
           by
           those
           who
           treat
           about
           these
           mysteries
           ,
           as
           certaine
           characters
           of
           Daemons
           but
           this
           you
           shall
           have
           further
           confirmed
           in
           due
           place
           ,
           where
           the
           arguments
           may
           bee
           better
           understood
           .
        
         
         
           This
           distinction
           also
           of
           Soveraign
           Gods
           and
           Daemons
           ,
           I
           suppose
           our
           Apostle
           alludes
           to
           ,
           1
           Cor.
           8.5
           .
           where
           he
           saith
           ,
           though
           there
           be
           many
           that
           be
           called
           gods
           ,
           whether
           in
           heaven
           ,
           or
           in
           earth
           ;
           as
           there
           be
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           gods
           many
           ,
           that
           is
           ,
           
             Dii
             Coelestes
          
           Soveraigne
           Deities
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           Lords
           many
           ,
           
             i.
             e.
          
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           Daemons
           Presidents
           of
           earthly
           things
           ;
           yet
           to
           us
           Christians
           there
           is
           but
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           one
           Soveraigne
           God
           the
           Father
           ,
           of
           whom
           are
           all
           things
           ,
           and
           we
           to
           him
           ,
           that
           is
           ,
           to
           whom
           as
           supreame
           ,
           we
           direct
           all
           our
           services
           ;
           and
           but
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           one
           Lord
           Jesus
           Christ
           ,
           in
           stead
           of
           their
           many
           mediators
           and
           Daemons
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           by
           whom
           are
           all
           things
           which
           come
           from
           the
           Father
           to
           us
           ,
           and
           through
           whom
           alone
           we
           finde
           accesse
           to
           him
           .
           The
           allusion
           ,
           me
           thinks
           ,
           is
           passing
           elegant
           ,
           and
           such
           as
           I
           think
           cannot
           be
           well
           understood
           without
           this
           distinction
           of
           superiour
           and
           inferiour
           Deities
           in
           the
           Theology
           of
           the
           Gentiles
           ,
           they
           having
           a
           plurality
           in
           both
           sorts
           ;
           and
           we
           Christians
           but
           one
           in
           each
           ,
           as
           our
           Apostle
           affirmeth
           ;
           there
           wants
           but
           only
           the
           name
           of
           Daemons
           ,
           in
           stead
           of
           which
           the
           Apostle
           puts
           Lords
           ,
           and
           that
           for
           the
           honour
           of
           Christ
           ,
           of
           whom
           he
           was
           to
           inferre
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           the
           name
           of
           Christ
           being
           not
           to
           be
           polluted
           with
           the
           appellation
           of
           an
           Idol
           :
           for
           his
           Apodosis
           must
           have
           beene
           otherwise
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           :
           
           or
           may
           bee
           hee
           alludes
           unto
           the
           Hebrew
           name
           Baalim
           ,
           which
           signifies
           Lords
           :
           and
           those
           Lords
           ,
           as
           I
           told
           you
           ,
           were
           nothing
           else
           but
           Daemons
           ;
           for
           thus
           would
           S.
           Paul
           speak
           in
           the
           Hebrew
           tongue
           ,
           there
           are
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           and
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           many
           Gods
           and
           many
           Lords
           .
        
         
           And
           thus
           have
           I
           shewed
           you
           ,
           though
           but
           briefly
           in
           regard
           of
           the
           abundance
           the
           argument
           would
           afford
           ,
           the
           nature
           and
           office
           of
           these
           Daemons
           according
           to
           the
           doctrine
           of
           the
           Gentiles
           :
           I
           come
           now
           unto
           another
           part
           of
           this
           doctrine
           ,
           which
           concernes
           the
           originall
           of
           Daemons
           ,
           
           whom
           you
           shall
           finde
           to
           be
           the
           deified
           soules
           of
           men
           after
           death
           ;
           for
           the
           canonizing
           of
           the
           soules
           of
           deceased
           worthies
           is
           not
           now
           first
           devised
           among
           Christians
           ,
           but
           was
           an
           idolatrous
           trick
           even
           from
           the
           dayes
           of
           the
           elder
           world
           ,
           so
           that
           the
           devill
           ,
           when
           he
           brought
           in
           this
           Apostaticall
           doctrine
           amongst
           Christians
           ,
           swarved
           but
           little
           from
           his
           ancient
           method
           of
           seducing
           mankinde
           .
        
         
           Let
           Hesiod
           speak
           in
           the
           first
           place
           ,
           as
           being
           of
           the
           most
           knowne
           the
           most
           ancient
           ,
           he
           tells
           us
           that
           when
           those
           happy
           men
           of
           the
           first
           and
           golden
           age
           of
           the
           world
           were
           departed
           this
           life
           ,
           great
           Jupiter
           promoted
           them
           to
           bee
           Daemons
           ,
           that
           is
           ,
           keepers
           ,
           and
           protectors
           ,
           or
           patrons
           of
           earthly
           mortalls
           ,
           and
           overseers
           of
           their
           good
           and
           evill
           works
           ,
           givers
           of
           riches
           ;
           and
           this
           ,
           saith
           he
           ,
           is
           the
           kingly
           royalty
           given
           them
           .
           But
           heare
           his
           owne
           words
           :
           
             
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
            
             
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               AIMONES
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
            
             
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               .
            
             
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
            
             
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
            
             
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               .
            
          
        
         
           And
           hence
           it
           is
           that
           Oenomaus
           ,
           quoted
           by
           Eusebiús
           ,
           calleth
           these
           Daemon-gods
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           Hesiods
           gods
           .
        
         
           The
           next
           shall
           be
           Plato
           ,
           who
           in
           his
           Cratylus
           sayes
           ,
           
           that
           Hesiod
           ,
           and
           a
           great
           number
           of
           the
           rest
           of
           the
           Poets
           ,
           speak
           excellently
           ,
           when
           they
           affirme
           that
           good
           men
           when
           they
           die
           attaine
           great
           honour
           and
           dignity
           ,
           and
           become
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           which
           is
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           as
           much
           to
           say
           as
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           that
           is
           ,
           wise
           ones
           ;
           for
           wise
           ones
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           are
           only
           good
           ones
           ,
           and
           all
           good
           ones
           are
           of
           Hesiods
           golden
           generation
           .
        
         
           The
           same
           
             Plato
             ,
             de
             Repub.
          
           would
           have
           all
           those
           who
           die
           valiantly
           in
           the
           field
           ,
           to
           be
           accounted
           of
           the
           golden
           kinde
           ,
           and
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           effici
           ,
           to
           be
           made
           Daemons
           ,
           and
           the
           oracle
           to
           bee
           consulted
           ,
           how
           they
           should
           be
           buried
           and
           honoured
           ;
           and
           accordingly
           ever
           afterwards
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           
             i.
             e.
          
           their
           sepulchers
           to
           be
           served
           and
           adored
           as
           the
           sepulchers
           of
           Daemons
           :
           In
           like
           manner
           should
           be
           done
           unto
           all
           who
           in
           their
           life
           time
           excelled
           in
           vertue
           ,
           whether
           they
           died
           through
           age
           or
           otherwise
           :
           this
           place
           Eusebiu●
           quotes
           
             (
             lib.
          
           14.
           
           
             Prep
             .
             Evang.
          
           )
           to
           paralell
           with
           it
           the
           then
           harmelesse
           practice
           of
           Christians
           ,
           in
           honouring
           the
           memory
           of
           Martyrs
           ,
           by
           holding
           their
           assemblies
           at
           their
           sepulchers
           ;
           to
           the
           end
           that
           he
           might
           shew
           the
           Gentiles
           ,
           that
           Christians
           also
           honoured
           their
           worthies
           in
           the
           worthiest
           fashion
           .
           But
           would
           to
           God
           that
           in
           the
           next
           ages
           after
           ,
           this
           custome
           of
           Christians
           then
           but
           resembling
           ,
           had
           not
           proved
           the
           very
           same
           doctrine
           of
           Daemons
           which
           the
           Gentiles
           practised
           .
        
         
           But
           I
           goe
           on
           ,
           and
           my
           next
           authour
           shall
           be
           
             Hermes
             Trismegistus
          
           ,
           whose
           antiquity
           is
           said
           to
           be
           very
           neere
           the
           time
           of
           Moses
           ;
           I
           will
           translate
           you
           his
           words
           out
           of
           his
           Asclepius
           which
           Apuleius
           made
           latine
           .
           There
           having
           named
           
             Aesculapius
             ,
             Osyris
          
           ,
           and
           his
           grandfather
           Hermes
           ,
           who
           were
           (
           as
           he
           saith
           )
           worshipped
           for
           Daemons
           in
           his
           owne
           time
           ;
           he
           addes
           further
           ,
           that
           the
           Aegyptians
           call
           them
           (
           namely
           the
           Daemons
           )
           
             Sancta
             animalia
          
           ,
           and
           that
           amongst
           them
           (
           namely
           the
           Aegyptians
           )
           
             per
             singulas
             Civitates
             coli
             eorum
             animas
             ,
             quorum
             sunt
             consecratae
             virtutes
             .
          
           
           And
           here
           note
           by
           the
           way
           ,
           that
           some
           are
           of
           opinion
           ,
           that
           the
           Aegyptian
           Serapis
           ,
           whose
           Idoll
           had
           a
           bushell
           upon
           his
           head
           ,
           was
           Joseph
           ,
           whose
           soule
           the
           Aegyptians
           had
           canonized
           for
           a
           Daemon
           after
           his
           death
           .
        
         
           
             Philo
             Byblius
          
           the
           translator
           of
           Sancuniathon
           the
           ancient
           Phaenician
           Historian
           ,
           who
           lived
           before
           the
           times
           of
           Troy
           ,
           and
           wrote
           the
           Acts
           of
           Moses
           ,
           and
           the
           Jewes
           (
           saith
           Eusebius
           )
           very
           agreeable
           to
           the
           Scripture
           ,
           and
           faith
           ,
           he
           learned
           his
           story
           of
           Ierom-baal
           a
           Priest
           of
           the
           God
           JEVO
           :
           
             Philo
             Byblius
          
           (
           I
           say
           )
           in
           a
           preface
           to
           his
           translation
           of
           this
           Author
           ,
           setteth
           downe
           what
           he
           had
           observed
           ,
           and
           learned
           out
           of
           the
           same
           story
           ,
           and
           might
           serve
           to
           help
           their
           understanding
           who
           should
           read
           it
           :
           namely
           ,
           that
           all
           the
           Barbarians
           ,
           cheifly
           the
           Phaenicians
           and
           Aegyptians
           ,
           of
           whom
           the
           rest
           had
           it
           ,
           accounted
           of
           those
           for
           
             Dii
             maximi
          
           ,
           who
           had
           found
           out
           any
           thing
           profitable
           for
           the
           life
           of
           man
           ,
           or
           had
           deserved
           well
           of
           any
           nation
           ,
           and
           that
           they
           worshipped
           these
           as
           Gods
           ,
           erecting
           Statues
           ,
           Images
           ,
           and
           Temples
           unto
           them
           ,
           and
           more
           especially
           they
           gave
           the
           names
           of
           their
           Kings
           (
           as
           to
           the
           elements
           of
           the
           world
           ,
           so
           also
           )
           to
           these
           their
           reputed
           Gods
           :
           for
           they
           esteemed
           the
           naturall
           Deities
           of
           the
           Sunne
           ,
           Moon
           ,
           and
           Planets
           ,
           and
           those
           which
           are
           in
           these
           ,
           to
           be
           only
           and
           properly
           Gods
           :
           so
           that
           they
           had
           two
           sorts
           of
           gods
           ,
           some
           were
           Immortals
           ,
           and
           others
           were
           Mortals
           .
        
         
           Thus
           saith
           
             Philo
             Byblius
          
           out
           of
           the
           Phaenician
           History
           ,
           from
           which
           testimony
           we
           may
           borrow
           some
           more
           light
           concerning
           those
           Baalims
           in
           Scripture
           .
           *
           For
           Baal
           or
           Belus
           ,
           whose
           worship
           Iezabell
           the
           daughter
           of
           Ithabaal
           King
           of
           Tyre
           brought
           into
           Israel
           ,
           was
           a
           deified
           Phaenician
           King
           of
           that
           name
           ,
           as
           Virgil
           will
           tell
           us
           in
           that
           verse
           concerning
           the
           Phaenician
           Queene
           
             Dido
             :
             Implevitque
             mero
             pateram
             ,
             quam
             Belus
             &
             omnes
             A
             Belo
             soliti
             ,
             &c.
             
          
        
         
         
           Nay
           ,
           Baal
           ,
           or
           in
           the
           Chaldee
           Dialect
           ,
           Bel
           (
           for
           all
           is
           one
           )
           was
           the
           first
           King
           of
           Babel
           after
           Nimrod
           ,
           
           and
           the
           first
           (
           as
           is
           written
           )
           that
           ever
           was
           deified
           and
           reputed
           a
           God
           after
           death
           ;
           whence
           afterward
           they
           called
           all
           other
           Daemons
           Baalim
           ;
           even
           as
           because
           the
           first
           Roman
           Emperour
           was
           called
           Caesar
           ,
           thence
           were
           all
           the
           Emperours
           after
           him
           stiled
           Caesars
           :
           and
           it
           may
           be
           this
           is
           part
           of
           that
           which
           
             Philo
             Biblius
          
           out
           of
           Sancuniathon
           would
           tell
           us
           ;
           That
           the
           Barbarians
           ,
           especially
           the
           Phaenicians
           ,
           &c.
           gave
           names
           from
           their
           Kings
           to
           such
           as
           were
           canonized
           after
           death
           :
           For
           so
           we
           see
           here
           that
           the
           Babilonians
           ,
           and
           the
           neighbouring
           Countries
           ,
           which
           spake
           the
           Hebrew
           tongue
           ,
           or
           some
           Dialect
           thereof
           ,
           called
           all
           Daemons
           Baalim
           ,
           of
           the
           first
           Daemon
           ,
           or
           deified
           King
           in
           the
           world
           ,
           Baal
           ,
           or
           Belus
           :
           for
           at
           that
           time
           when
           Belus
           reigned
           in
           Babel
           ,
           was
           Phaenicia
           ,
           with
           the
           neighbour
           people
           ,
           under
           the
           kingdome
           of
           Babel
           :
           Whence
           may
           seeme
           also
           to
           have
           come
           their
           community
           of
           language
           and
           ceremonies
           ;
           and
           here
           note
           a
           wonderfull
           mystery
           ,
           that
           old
           Babel
           ,
           the
           first
           pattern
           in
           the
           world
           of
           ambitious
           Dominion
           ,
           was
           also
           the
           Foundresse
           of
           Idols
           ,
           and
           the
           Mother
           of
           the
           fornication
           ,
           and
           abominations
           of
           the
           earth
           .
        
         
           And
           because
           we
           have
           fallen
           upon
           the
           naming
           of
           Daemons
           ,
           let
           us
           observe
           another
           mystery
           of
           names
           ,
           out
           of
           
             Plutarch
             (
             de
             defect
             .
             Orac.
             )
          
           which
           may
           helpe
           us
           out
           ,
           or
           prevent
           some
           difficulties
           ,
           namely
           ,
           that
           Daemons
           are
           sometimes
           called
           by
           the
           names
           of
           those
           Celestiall
           gods
           ,
           whose
           Ministers
           and
           Proctors
           they
           are
           ,
           and
           from
           whom
           they
           receive
           their
           power
           and
           Divinity
           :
           As
           Apollo's
           Daemon
           .
           
             Apollo
             ;
             Iupiter's
          
           Daemon
           ,
           Iupiter
           ,
           and
           so
           the
           rest
           .
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ;
           
             Sicut
             &
             nostrum
             alius
             Iovius
             ,
             alius
             Minervius
             ,
             alius
             Mercurialis
             ,
             &c.
             dicitur
             .
          
        
         
           Thus
           Plutarch
           ,
           with
           Cleombrotus
           there
           saith
           ,
           he
           learned
           of
           a
           wonderfull
           and
           profound
           Egyptian
           Hermite
           ,
           who
           lived
           about
           the
           red
           Sea
           ,
           &c.
           
        
         
           To
           which
           is
           agreeable
           what
           
             Eusebius
             Praepar
             .
             Evang.
             lib.
          
           3.
           cap.
           2.
           quotes
           out
           of
           
             Diodorus
             ,
             viz.
             Aegyptios
             asserere
             mor●ales
             multos
             propter
             beneficia
             in
             Deos
             relatos
             ,
             &
             eorumaliquos
             coelestibus
             Diis
             cognomines
             .
          
        
         
           The
           same
           Plutarch
           in
           the
           same
           place
           doth
           acquaint
           us
           with
           this
           pretty
           conceit
           ,
           which
           being
           to
           the
           purpose
           I
           will
           not
           omit
           ;
           namely
           ,
           that
           the
           soules
           of
           men
           tooke
           degrees
           after
           death
           ,
           
           first
           they
           commenced
           Heroes
           ,
           who
           were
           as
           Probationers
           to
           a
           Daemonship
           ;
           then
           after
           a
           time
           sufficient
           ,
           Demons
           ;
           and
           after
           that
           ,
           if
           they
           deserved
           well
           ,
           to
           a
           more
           sublime
           degree
           .
           Howsoever
           it
           be
           ,
           Daemons
           ,
           and
           Heroes
           differed
           but
           in
           more
           ,
           and
           lesse
           antiquity
           ,
           the
           more
           antient
           Heroes
           ,
           being
           called
           Daemons
           ,
           and
           the
           younger
           Daemons
           Heroes
           .
        
         
           But
           that
           we
           may
           returne
           againe
           more
           close
           to
           the
           matter
           in
           hand
           ,
           this
           order
           of
           Daemons
           ,
           or
           soule-gods
           ,
           as
           I
           may
           call
           them
           ,
           found
           place
           in
           the
           Religion
           of
           the
           elder
           Romans
           ,
           who
           called
           them
           
             Penates
             ,
             Lares
          
           ,
           and
           
             Manii
             Dii
          
           ;
           and
           when
           once
           they
           began
           to
           canonize
           their
           deceased
           Emperours
           ,
           which
           was
           from
           the
           time
           of
           Augustus
           ,
           they
           called
           them
           Divi
           ,
           which
           word
           before
           that
           time
           was
           more
           generall
           .
           Tully
           in
           his
           second
           booke
           
             de
             Legibus
          
           ,
           shall
           be
           my
           witnesse
           ,
           that
           his
           countrey-men
           acknowledged
           this
           distinction
           of
           Soveraigne
           Gods
           ,
           and
           Soule-deified
           powers
           ,
           for
           there
           you
           shall
           finde
           this
           law
           ;
           
             Divos
             &
             eos
             ,
             qui
             coelestes
             semper
             habiti
             ,
             colunto
             ;
             &
             illos
             ,
             quos
             in
             coelum
             merita
             vocaverint
             .
          
           And
           againe
           ,
           
             Deorum
             Manium
             jura
             ,
             sancta
             sunto
             .
             Hos
             letho
             Datos
             Divos
             habento
          
           ;
           would
           God
           the
           present
           Christian
           Romans
           had
           not
           renewed
           this
           Law.
           
        
         
         
           Yea
           ,
           so
           strongly
           was
           this
           doctrine
           embraced
           amongst
           the
           Gentiles
           ,
           that
           some
           of
           their
           later
           Theologists
           thought
           ,
           that
           even
           the
           soules
           of
           wicked
           men
           and
           Tyrants
           had
           a
           power
           after
           death
           ,
           and
           that
           of
           these
           came
           
             mali
             Daemones
          
           ,
           which
           hurt
           men
           ;
           and
           yet
           to
           these
           they
           ordained
           Temples
           ,
           and
           sacrifices
           to
           keepe
           them
           from
           hurting
           them
           ,
           as
           well
           as
           to
           the
           good
           Daemons
           for
           helping
           them
           ;
           but
           the
           Ancients
           gave
           this
           honour
           to
           the
           soules
           of
           vertuous
           men
           onely
           .
        
         
           Thus
           have
           you
           heard
           the
           originall
           of
           Daemons
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           most
           ancient
           ,
           and
           generall
           opinion
           of
           the
           Gentiles
           .
           But
           besides
           these
           Daemons
           ,
           whose
           originall
           you
           have
           heard
           ,
           I
           meane
           besides
           soule-Daemons
           ,
           and
           canonized
           mortals
           ;
           their
           Theologists
           bring
           in
           another
           kinde
           of
           Daemons
           more
           high
           and
           sublime
           ,
           which
           never
           had
           beene
           the
           soules
           of
           men
           ,
           nor
           ever
           were
           linkt
           to
           a
           mortall
           body
           ,
           but
           were
           from
           the
           beginning
           ,
           or
           without
           beginning
           ,
           alwayes
           the
           same
           *
           .
           So
           Apuleius
           tels
           us
           in
           the
           booke
           forenamed
           ;
           
             Est
             &
             superius
             aliud
             augustiusque
             Daemonum
             genus
             ,
             qui
             semper
             à
             corporis
             compedibus
             ,
             &
             nexibus
             liberi
             certis
             potestatibus
             curentur
             ,
             Ex
             hac
             sublimiori
             Daemonum
             copiâ
             autumat
             Plato
             singulis
             hominibus
             in
             vitâ
             agendâ
             ,
             testes
             &
             custodes
             singulos
             additos
             .
          
           This
           sort
           of
           Daemons
           doth
           fitly
           answer
           and
           parallel
           that
           sort
           of
           spirituall
           powers
           ,
           which
           we
           call
           Angels
           ,
           as
           the
           former
           of
           soule-Daemons
           doth
           those
           ,
           which
           with
           us
           are
           called
           Saints
           .
        
         
           But
           lest
           I
           might
           seeme
           to
           have
           no
           measure
           in
           raking
           up
           this
           Ethnicall
           dung-hill
           ,
           I
           will
           now
           leave
           the
           Theologie
           of
           the
           originall
           of
           Daemons
           ,
           and
           shew
           you
           yet
           another
           piece
           of
           that
           doctrine
           of
           Daemons
           ,
           namely
           ,
           concerning
           
           the
           manner
           how
           Daemons
           were
           to
           be
           worshipped
           ,
           and
           as
           it
           were
           brought
           to
           the
           lure
           of
           men
           ,
           when
           they
           had
           occasion
           of
           devotion
           with
           them
           .
           
           And
           this
           ▪
           was
           done
           by
           sacring
           of
           Images
           ;
           this
           you
           shall
           heare
           from
           an
           ancient
           Authour
           ,
           and
           passing
           skilfull
           in
           the
           mysteries
           ,
           even
           
             Hermes
             Trismegistus
          
           ,
           who
           in
           his
           Asclepius
           ,
           speaketh
           ,
           in
           English
           ,
           thus
           ,
           It
           is
           a
           wonder
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           beyond
           all
           wonders
           ,
           (
           and
           he
           saith
           truly
           )
           that
           man
           should
           finde
           out
           a
           way
           to
           make
           Gods
           :
           Yet
           because
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           our
           forefathers
           erred
           much
           through
           unbeliefe
           concerning
           Deities
           ,
           and
           had
           small
           regard
           of
           Religion
           ,
           and
           Divine
           worship
           ,
           therefore
           they
           devised
           an
           art
           to
           make
           Gods
           (
           he
           meaneth
           Images
           )
           and
           because
           they
           could
           not
           make
           soules
           (
           he
           meanes
           to
           these
           senslesse
           bodies
           )
           therefore
           they
           called
           the
           soules
           of
           Daemons
           ,
           and
           Angels
           ,
           and
           put
           them
           into
           their
           Images
           ,
           and
           holy
           mysteries
           ,
           by
           which
           meanes
           alone
           these
           Images
           have
           power
           of
           helping
           ,
           and
           hurting
           ;
           which
           thus
           incorporated
           (
           he
           saith
           )
           are
           called
           by
           the
           Egyptians
           ,
           
             Animalia
             sancta
          
           .
           And
           in
           another
           place
           ,
           that
           kinde
           of
           Gods
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           which
           men
           make
           ,
           is
           composed
           of
           two
           natures
           ,
           of
           a
           divine
           ,
           which
           is
           first
           and
           more
           sacred
           ;
           and
           of
           that
           which
           is
           amongst
           men
           ,
           namely
           ,
           the
           matter
           whereof
           they
           are
           made
           .
           The
           summe
           of
           all
           this
           mystery
           is
           ,
           that
           Images
           were
           made
           as
           bodies
           ,
           
           to
           be
           informed
           with
           Daemons
           as
           with
           soules
           :
           For
           an
           Image
           was
           a
           trap
           to
           catch
           Daemons
           ,
           and
           a
           devise
           to
           tie
           them
           to
           a
           place
           ,
           and
           to
           keepe
           them
           from
           flitting
           .
        
         
           The
           like
           hath
           Eusebius
           out
           of
           
             Porphyrie
             ,
             Imagines
             à
             Diis
             peramari
             ,
             iisdemque
             circumscribi
             ,
             quasi
             in
             sacrâ
             quâdam
             terrâ
             in
             sacratâ
             imagine
             contineri
             ;
             quâ
             sublatâ
             ,
             illud
             statim
             solvitur
             ,
             quo
             Deus
             continetur
             .
          
           This
           is
           that
           which
           Psellus
           calleth
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           the
           approaching
           or
           presencing
           of
           Daemons
           .
           And
           Iamblychus
           termeth
           these
           consecrated
           Idols
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           Images
           filled
           with
           divine
           fellowship
           ,
           or
           with
           divine
           society
           .
           And
           our
           fore-mentioned
           Hermes
           calleth
           them
           
             Statuas
             animatas
             sensu
             &
             spiritu
             plenas
             .
          
        
         
         
           Hence
           came
           that
           answer
           ,
           or
           defence
           of
           the
           Gentiles
           ,
           as
           
             Arnobius
             (
             lib.
          
           6.
           
             advers
             .
             Gent.
          
           )
           makes
           them
           speake
           ,
           
             Neque
             nos
             aera
             ,
             argenti
             materias
             aurique
             ,
             neque
             alia
             quibus
             signa
             conficiunt
             ,
             eas
             esse
             per
             se
             Deos
             ,
             &
             religiosa
             discernimus
             numina
             ;
             Sed
             eos
             in
             his
             colimus
             ,
             e●sque
             veneramur
             ,
             quos
             dedicatio
             infert
             sacra
             ,
             &
             fra●rilibus
             efficit
             habitare
             simulachris
             .
          
           And
           in
           another
           place
           he
           makes
           this
           objection
           for
           their
           behalfe
           ;
           
             An
             numquid
             dicitis
             fortè
             praesentiam
             vobis
             quandam
             sub
             his
             numinum
             exhiberi
             simulachris
             ,
             &
             quia
             Deos
             vider●
             non
             datum
             est
             ,
             eos
             ita
             coli
             ,
             &
             munia
             officiosa
             praestari
             ?
          
           And
           thus
           have
           we
           seene
           the
           ground
           of
           the
           idolatrous
           use
           of
           Images
           ,
           and
           found
           that
           the
           worship
           of
           them
           also
           is
           a
           doctrine
           of
           Daemons
           :
           for
           as
           at
           first
           they
           were
           ordained
           for
           Daemons
           ,
           so
           whatsoever
           Deity
           is
           worshipped
           in
           this
           manner
           ,
           though
           it
           were
           the
           true
           ,
           and
           Soveraigne
           God
           ,
           is
           thereby
           made
           a
           Daemon
           .
        
         
           What
           I
           say
           of
           Images
           ,
           must
           be
           understood
           also
           of
           Pillars
           ,
           and
           Columnes
           ,
           whereof
           we
           read
           ,
           Levit.
           26.
           
           
             Yee
             shall
             make
             no
             Idols
             ,
             nor
             graven
             Images
             ,
             nor
             reare
             you
             up
             a
             pillar
             to
             bow
             downe
             unto
             it
             :
          
           for
           howsoever
           Pillars
           and
           Images
           ,
           through
           some
           confusion
           ,
           at
           length
           surprizing
           the
           Gentiles
           superstition
           ,
           may
           afterwards
           seeme
           to
           be
           ascribed
           to
           other
           Deities
           besides
           Daemons
           ;
           yet
           by
           originall
           institution
           they
           were
           proper
           unto
           Daemons
           ,
           and
           no
           other
           .
           The
           soveraigne
           ,
           and
           celestiall
           gods
           ,
           they
           were
           worshipped
           in
           the
           Sunne
           ,
           Moone
           ,
           and
           Starres
           ,
           where
           they
           were
           supposed
           to
           dwell
           ,
           but
           Images
           ,
           and
           Columnes
           were
           for
           Daemons
           ;
           and
           if
           they
           seemed
           to
           be
           made
           for
           any
           other
           ,
           Plutarch's
           Hermite
           would
           resolve
           us
           ,
           that
           they
           were
           but
           Daemons
           ,
           called
           by
           the
           name
           of
           some
           soveraigne
           gods
           ,
           whose
           Agents
           they
           were
           .
           The
           truth
           of
           this
           ,
           the
           History
           of
           the
           beginning
           of
           Idolatry
           makes
           evident
           ;
           for
           that
           Images
           and
           Pillars
           were
           at
           first
           devised
           and
           erected
           to
           the
           honour
           of
           dead
           men
           “
           ;
           this
           the
           fourteenth
           Chapter
           of
           the
           booke
           of
           Wisdome
           will
           tell
           us
           ,
           
           that
           by
           the
           vain-glory
           of
           men
           they
           first
           entred
           into
           the
           world
           ;
           no
           lesse
           will
           the
           long
           continuing
           custome
           of
           the
           world
           ,
           using
           thus
           to
           honour
           not
           onely
           the
           dead
           ,
           but
           since
           also
           the
           living
           ,
           be
           sufficient
           to
           perswade
           the
           truth
           :
           
             Minutius
             Faelix
          
           in
           his
           Octavius
           ,
           will
           put
           us
           forth
           of
           doubt
           ,
           
             Majores
             nostri
          
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             dum
             Reges
             suos
             colunt
             religio●è
             ,
             dum
             defunctos
             eos
             desiderant
             in
             Imaginibus
             videre
             ,
             dum
             gestiunt
             eorum
             memorias
             in
             statuis
             detinere
             ,
             sacra
             facta
             sunt
             ,
             quae
             fuerant
             assumpta
             solatia
             .
          
           When
           therefore
           those
           whom
           they
           thus
           honoured
           and
           remembred
           ,
           were
           canonized
           for
           Daemons
           ,
           then
           were
           these
           memorials
           also
           worshipped
           for
           some
           supposed
           presence
           ,
           or
           divine
           respect
           of
           such
           Daemons
           ,
           in
           or
           to
           them
           .
           The
           worshipping
           therefore
           of
           Images
           ,
           and
           Columnes
           ,
           is
           by
           its
           originall
           and
           institution
           ,
           a
           piece
           of
           the
           doctrine
           of
           Daemons
           *
           ;
           so
           that
           whatsoever
           is
           thus
           worshipped
           ,
           yea
           ,
           the
           glory
           of
           the
           incorruptible
           God
           himselfe
           is
           thereby
           changed
           into
           a
           Daemon
           .
        
         
           Thus
           much
           of
           Images
           and
           Idoll-Pillars
           ,
           of
           the
           reason
           of
           their
           supposed
           Divinity
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           originall
           ,
           and
           first
           occasion
           of
           worshipping
           them
           .
           But
           yet
           we
           have
           not
           done
           ,
           there
           is
           another
           piece
           of
           Daemon-devotion
           yet
           behinde
           ,
           namely
           ,
           the
           worshipping
           of
           Daemons
           in
           their
           reliques
           ,
           shrines
           and
           sepulchres
           *
           ,
           for
           this
           was
           also
           a
           part
           of
           the
           doctrine
           ,
           and
           Theologie
           of
           Daemons
           .
           Plato
           ,
           whom
           before
           we
           quoted
           for
           the
           Canonizing
           of
           Daemons
           ,
           of
           the
           ghosts
           of
           such
           as
           died
           valiantly
           in
           the
           field
           ,
           would
           have
           their
           shrines
           and
           coffins
           to
           be
           worshipped
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           as
           the
           coffins
           of
           Daemons
           :
           here
           also
           what
           
             Clemens
             Alexandrinus
          
           speaks
           of
           this
           Daemon-doctrine
           ,
           
             Strom.
             lib.
          
           6.
           
           
             Existimant
             (
             scil
             .
             Graeci
             )
             nihil
             referre
             an
             has
             animas
             (
             scil
             .
             Daemones
             quos
             invocant
             )
             Deos
             ,
             an
             Angelos
             dicamus
             :
             Jam
             vero
             qui
             sunt
             eorum
             doctrinae
             periti
             in
             multis
             Templis
             tanquam
             Deorum
             statuas
             ,
             omnes
             ferè
             mortuorum
             loculos
             posuêre
             ,
             Daemones
             quidem
             vocantes
             eorum
             animas
             ,
             eas
             autem
             coli
             ab
             hominibus
             docentes
             ,
             ut
             quae
             divinâ
             
             providentiâ
             propter
             vitae
             puritatem
             ,
             potestatem
             acceperint
             ,
             ut
             ad
             hominum
             ministerium
             ,
             locum
             qui
             est
             circa
             terram
             ,
             obi●ent
             :
             sciebant
             enim
             aliquas
             animas
             ex
             naturâ
             corpore
             teneri
             .
          
           Out
           of
           which
           words
           observe
           ,
           that
           they
           supposed
           the
           like
           presences
           ,
           and
           power
           of
           Daemons
           at
           their
           coffins
           and
           sepulchres
           ,
           which
           before
           we
           observed
           and
           heard
           of
           in
           their
           Images
           ,
           as
           though
           there
           alwayes
           remained
           some
           naturall
           tie
           between
           the
           soules
           deceased
           ,
           and
           their
           reliques
           ,
           and
           therefore
           they
           there
           builded
           Temples
           unto
           them
           ,
           where
           their
           bodies
           ,
           and
           ashes
           were
           entombed
           ;
           and
           hence
           it
           is
           that
           the
           Primitive
           Fathers
           which
           write
           against
           the
           Gentiles
           ,
           do
           so
           often
           upbraid
           them
           ,
           that
           their
           Temples
           were
           nothing
           else
           but
           the
           sepulchres
           of
           dead
           men
           ;
           
             Specioso
             quidem
             nomine
          
           (
           saith
           Clemens
           in
           his
           
             Protrepticon
             )
             Templa
             dici
             ,
             fuisse
             autem
             sepulchra
             ,
             id
             est
             sepulchra
             ipsa
             vocata
             fuisse
             Templa
             .
          
           He
           goeth
           on
           speaking
           to
           the
           Gentiles
           ;
           
             Vos
             autem
             vel
             nunc
             saltem
             Daemonum
             cultus
             obliviscamini
             ,
             sepulchra
             colere
             erubescentes
             .
          
           To
           the
           like
           purpose
           
             Arnobius
             lib.
          
           6.
           
             advers
             .
             Gent.
             Quid
             quod
             multa
             ex
             his
             Templa
             ,
             quae
             tholis
             sunt
             aureis
             ,
             &
             sublimibus
             elata
             fastigiis
             ,
             auctorum
             conscriptionibus
             ▪
             comprobatur
             contegere
             ciueres
             ,
             at
             que
             ossa
             ,
             &
             functorum
             esse
             ,
             corporum
             sepulturas
             ?
             Nonne
             patet
             &
             promptum
             est
             aut
             pro
             Diis
             immortalibus
             mortuos
             vos
             colere
             ,
             aut
             inexpiabilem
             fier●
             Numinibus
             contumeliam
             ,
             quorum
             delubra
             &
             Templa
             mortuorum
             superlata
             sunt
             bustis
             ?
          
        
         
           I
           might
           further
           adde
           to
           these
           Oecumenicall
           doctrines
           of
           Daemons
           ,
           that
           monstrous
           one
           of
           the
           Egytians
           ,
           for
           which
           their
           fellow
           Gentiles
           derided
           them
           ,
           who
           worshipped
           living
           bruit
           beasts
           ,
           yea
           ,
           onyons
           and
           garlick
           ,
           and
           water
           it selfe
           ,
           with
           divine
           worship
           ,
           as
           supposing
           some
           Daemon
           or
           other
           to
           dwell
           in
           them
           ;
           such
           were
           their
           Cow-god
           Apis
           ,
           and
           their
           Bull-god
           Mnevis
           ,
           and
           their
           Water-god
           Nilus
           ,
           which
           it
           shall
           be
           enough
           onely
           to
           have
           named
           ,
           to
           make
           the
           former
           compleat
           ,
           and
           that
           from
           it
           ,
           and
           the
           rest
           of
           that
           kinde
           of
           abominations
           ,
           we
           may
           gather
           this
           conclusion
           once
           for
           all
           ,
           that
           since
           the
           Soveraigne
           
           and
           Celestiall
           gods
           ,
           (
           as
           you
           heard
           before
           )
           might
           not
           be
           approached
           nor
           polluted
           by
           these
           earthly
           and
           materiall
           things
           ,
           but
           kept
           alwayes
           immoveable
           ,
           without
           change
           of
           place
           or
           presence
           ,
           their
           heavenly
           stations
           ;
           therefore
           the
           adoring
           or
           worshipping
           of
           any
           visible
           or
           materiall
           thing
           ,
           for
           any
           supposed
           presence
           ,
           or
           other
           relation
           of
           a
           divine
           power
           therewith
           ,
           is
           to
           be
           accounted
           amongst
           the
           doctrines
           of
           Daemons
           .
        
         
           And
           thus
           have
           you
           seene
           the
           Theologie
           of
           Daemons
           ;
           first
           ,
           for
           their
           nature
           and
           degree
           ,
           to
           have
           beene
           supposed
           by
           the
           Gentiles
           an
           inferiour
           ,
           and
           middle
           sort
           of
           divine
           powers
           ,
           betweene
           the
           soveraigne
           ,
           and
           heavenly
           gods
           ,
           and
           mortall
           men
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           their
           office
           to
           be
           as
           Mediators
           and
           agents
           betweene
           these
           soveraigne
           Gods
           ,
           and
           men
           .
           Thirdly
           ,
           their
           originall
           ,
           to
           be
           the
           deified
           soules
           of
           worthy
           men
           after
           death
           ;
           and
           some
           of
           an
           higher
           degree
           ,
           which
           had
           no
           beginning
           ,
           or
           ever
           were
           imprisoned
           in
           mortall
           bodies
           .
           Fourthly
           ,
           the
           way
           to
           worship
           them
           ,
           to
           finde
           and
           receive
           benefits
           from
           them
           ,
           namely
           ,
           by
           consecrate
           Images
           and
           Pillars
           ,
           wherein
           to
           have
           ,
           and
           retaine
           their
           presence
           at
           devotions
           to
           be
           given
           them
           .
           Fifthly
           ,
           to
           adore
           their
           reliques
           ,
           and
           to
           Temple
           them
           .
        
         
           Now
           therefore
           judge
           impartially
           whether
           Saint
           Pauls
           prophesie
           be
           not
           fulfilled
           already
           amongst
           Christians
           ,
           who
           foretold
           that
           the
           time
           should
           come
           that
           they
           should
           Apostatize
           and
           revive
           againe
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           Doctrines
           of
           Daemons
           ?
           whether
           the
           deifying
           and
           worshipping
           of
           Saints
           ,
           and
           Angels
           ,
           whether
           the
           bowing
           downe
           to
           Images
           ,
           whether
           of
           men
           ,
           or
           other
           things
           visible
           ,
           breaden
           Idols
           ,
           and
           Crosses
           like
           new
           Daemon-Pillars
           ,
           whether
           the
           adoring
           or
           templing
           of
           reliques
           ,
           whether
           these
           make
           not
           as
           lively
           an
           image
           of
           the
           Gentiles
           Theologie
           of
           Daemons
           (
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           )
           as
           possibly
           could
           be
           expressed
           ?
           and
           whether
           these
           two
           words
           comprehend
           not
           the
           whole
           pith
           and
           marrow
           of
           Christian
           Apostasie
           ,
           which
           was
           to
           consist
           in
           spirituall
           fornication
           or
           idolatry
           ,
           as
           
           appeares
           by
           that
           name
           and
           denomination
           thereof
           given
           by
           Saint
           John
           in
           his
           
             Revelation
             ,
             The
             whore
             of
             Babylon
             ?
          
           Is
           not
           she
           rightly
           termed
           the
           Babylonish
           whore
           ,
           which
           hath
           revived
           and
           replanted
           the
           doctrines
           of
           Daemons
           ,
           first
           founded
           in
           the
           ancient
           Babel
           .
           And
           is
           not
           this
           now
           fulfilled
           which
           Saint
           John
           foretels
           us
           ,
           Apoc.
           11.
           
           That
           
             the
             second
             and
             outmost
             court
             of
             the
             Temple
          
           (
           which
           is
           the
           second
           state
           of
           the
           Christian
           Church
           )
           
             together
             with
             the
             holy
             City
             ,
             should
             be
             troden
             downe
             ,
             and
             overtrampled
             by
             the
             Gentiles
          
           (
           that
           is
           ,
           overwhelmed
           with
           the
           Gentiles
           Idolatry
           )
           forty
           two
           moneths
           .
        
         
           But
           perhaps
           I
           am
           yet
           too
           forward
           in
           my
           application
           ;
           some
           things
           in
           our
           way
           must
           first
           be
           cleared
           ,
           for
           howsoever
           the
           resemblance
           indeed
           be
           evident
           ,
           yet
           first
           the
           Text
           seemes
           not
           to
           intend
           or
           meane
           it
           ,
           because
           the
           word
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           is
           in
           the
           Scripture
           never
           taken
           in
           the
           
             better
             or
             indifferent
             sense
          
           ,
           howsoever
           prophane
           Authours
           doe
           so
           use
           it
           ,
           but
           alwayes
           in
           an
           
             evill
             sense
          
           for
           the
           devill
           ,
           or
           an
           
             evill
             spirit
          
           ;
           now
           the
           signification
           of
           words
           in
           Scripture
           is
           to
           be
           esteemed
           and
           taken
           only
           according
           to
           the
           Scriptures
           use
           ,
           though
           other
           Writers
           use
           them
           otherwise
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           for
           the
           charge
           of
           Idolatry
           ,
           though
           much
           of
           that
           wherein
           we
           have
           instanced
           ,
           may
           be
           granted
           to
           be
           justly
           suspected
           for
           such
           indeed
           ,
           yet
           neverthelesse
           ,
           that
           whereupon
           this
           application
           mainly
           relieth
           ,
           namely
           ,
           the
           
             praying
             to
             Saints
             glorified
             ,
             as
             Mediators
             and
             Agents
             for
             us
             with
             God
             ,
          
           should
           not
           seeme
           to
           deserve
           so
           foule
           a
           name
           ;
           for
           suppose
           it
           were
           a
           needlesse
           ,
           yea
           ,
           and
           fruitlesse
           Ceremony
           ,
           yet
           what
           reason
           can
           be
           given
           why
           this
           should
           be
           more
           tainted
           with
           Idolatry
           ,
           then
           is
           the
           
             like
             honour
          
           given
           to
           Saints
           and
           
             holy
             men
          
           whilst
           they
           live
           on
           earth
           ,
           whom
           to
           desire
           to
           mediate
           and
           pray
           to
           God
           for
           us
           ,
           was
           never
           accounted
           so
           much
           as
           an
           
             unlawfull
             matter
          
           ?
           when
           these
           two
           scruples
           are
           answered
           ,
           I
           will
           returne
           to
           continue
           my
           former
           application
           .
        
         
           To
           the
           first
           therefore
           ,
           for
           the
           use
           of
           the
           word
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           
           in
           Scripture
           ,
           I
           say
           ,
           that
           because
           those
           which
           the
           Gentiles
           tooke
           for
           Daemons
           ,
           and
           for
           
             Deified
             soules
          
           of
           their
           Worthies
           ,
           were
           indeed
           no
           other
           then
           
             evill
             spirits
          
           ,
           counterfeiting
           the
           soules
           of
           men
           departed
           ,
           and
           masking
           themselves
           under
           the
           names
           of
           such
           supposed
           Daemons
           ,
           under
           that
           colour
           to
           seduce
           mankinde
           ;
           therefore
           the
           Scripture
           useth
           the
           name
           Daemons
           for
           that
           they
           were
           indeed
           ,
           and
           not
           for
           what
           they
           seemed
           to
           be
           ;
           for
           no
           blessed
           soule
           or
           good
           Angell
           would
           admit
           any
           honour
           which
           did
           derogate
           from
           the
           honour
           of
           the
           
             onely
             true
             God
          
           ,
           who
           made
           them
           :
           neither
           doe
           the
           glorified
           Saints
           in
           heaven
           ,
           or
           the
           blessed
           Angels
           ,
           though
           Apostate
           Christians
           now
           invocate
           and
           worship
           them
           ,
           accept
           of
           this
           honour
           ,
           heare
           their
           prayers
           ,
           or
           condescend
           to
           their
           devotions
           ,
           by
           any
           signe
           or
           act
           whatsoever
           ;
           but
           whatsoever
           is
           made
           seeme
           to
           be
           done
           by
           them
           ,
           is
           done
           by
           the
           selfe
           same
           wicked
           spirits
           ,
           which
           heretofore
           were
           masked
           under
           the
           names
           of
           Daemons
           ;
           and
           therefore
           in
           this
           regard
           the
           one
           may
           as
           well
           beare
           the
           names
           of
           Daemons
           as
           the
           other
           ,
           and
           be
           as
           likely
           to
           be
           intended
           by
           the
           use
           of
           that
           word
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           though
           the
           Scripture
           often
           useth
           this
           word
           in
           the
           
             worst
             sen●e
          
           ,
           yet
           followes
           it
           not
           it
           alwayes
           should
           doe
           so
           ,
           because
           the
           word
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           it selfe
           ,
           which
           the
           Scripture
           hath
           appropriated
           to
           signifie
           
             Satan
             the
             prince
             of
             hell-hounds
          
           ,
           following
           therein
           the
           Seventy
           (
           who
           first
           gave
           it
           this
           notion
           ,
           no
           where
           els
           sampled
           in
           any
           Greek
           Author
           )
           yet
           is
           this
           word
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           in
           the
           New
           Testament
           it selfe
           three
           severall
           times
           used
           in
           the
           common
           sense
           for
           a
           slanderer
           or
           
             false
             accuser
          
           ,
           and
           that
           in
           three
           several
           Epistles
           ,
           in
           both
           to
           Timothy
           ,
           
           and
           that
           to
           Titus
           ;
           and
           why
           should
           the
           like
           seeme
           improbable
           for
           the
           word
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           or
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ?
           Nay
           ,
           most
           certain
           it
           is
           so
           ,
           as
           I
           come
           now
           to
           make
           manifest
           .
        
         
           And
           first
           ,
           Act.
           17.18
           .
           where
           Saint
           Paul
           our
           Apostle
           ,
           having
           at
           Athens
           preached
           
             Iesus
             risen
             from
             the
             dead
          
           ,
           the
           Philosophers
           thus
           encountred
           him
           saying
           ,
           
             This
             fellow
          
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           which
           we
           translate
           ,
           
             He
             seemeth
             to
             be
             a
             setter
             forth
             of
             strange
             gods
             ,
          
           namely
           ,
           
           Daemon-gods
           :
           for
           hearing
           of
           one
           Jesus
           after
           death
           to
           become
           a
           Lord
           and
           Saviour
           ,
           and
           to
           be
           adored
           with
           divine
           worship
           ,
           they
           tooke
           him
           presently
           ,
           according
           to
           their
           owne
           principles
           in
           that
           kinde
           ,
           to
           be
           some
           new
           or
           forreigne
           Daemon
           ,
           for
           so
           it
           followes
           in
           the
           text
           ,
           that
           they
           said
           thus
           ,
           
             Because
             he
             preached
             unto
             them
             Iesus
             and
             the
             resurrection
             :
          
           Upon
           the
           same
           ground
           
             Celsus
             in
             Origen
             lib.
          
           8.
           
             cont
             .
             Cels.
          
           cals
           the
           same
           Christ
           our
           Saviour
           the
           Christians
           Daemon
           ;
           for
           whereas
           the
           Christians
           said
           ,
           that
           they
           without
           hurt
           and
           danger
           blasphemed
           and
           reproached
           the
           Gentiles
           gods
           ,
           Celsus
           replies
           ,
           *
           
             Nonne
             vides
             bone
             vir
             ,
             quod
             etiam
             tuo
             Daemoni
             opponens
             se
             quispiam
             ,
             non
             solum
             convitiatur
             ▪
             sed
             terrâ
             marique
             illum
             exigit
             ?
          
           where
           Origen
           answers
           Celsus
           ,
           a
           
             Qui
             nullos
             scit
             malos
             Daemones
             ,
             nescio
             quomodo
             sui
             oblitus
             ,
             Iesum
             vocarit
             Daemonem
             .
          
           But
           Saint
           Paul
           thus
           charged
           by
           the
           Philosophers
           ,
           comming
           to
           make
           his
           Apologie
           in
           Areopagus
           ,
           retorts
           their
           accusation
           ,
           
             Yee
             men
             of
             Athens
          
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             I
             see
             you
             in
             all
             things
             ,
          
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           too
           full
           of
           Demons
           already
           ,
           I
           shall
           not
           need
           bring
           any
           more
           amongst
           you
           ;
           for
           thus
           the
           word
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           by
           Etymologie
           signifies
           a
           worshipper
           of
           Daemon-gods
           ,
           and
           was
           anciently
           used
           in
           this
           sense
           ;
           and
           so
           shall
           you
           finde
           it
           often
           in
           
             Clemens
             Alexandrinus
          
           his
           Protrepticon
           b
           ,
           not
           to
           speak
           of
           others
           ,
           though
           afterwards
           from
           signifying
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           as
           Budaeus
           speaks
           ,
           it
           came
           to
           be
           applied
           to
           those
           who
           were
           too
           precise
           and
           anxious
           in
           their
           devotions
           :
           I
           (
           saith
           the
           Apostle
           )
           preach
           no
           new
           Daemon
           unto
           you
           ,
           but
           that
           
             Soveraigne
             and
             coelestiall
             God
             ,
             who
             made
             the
             world
             ,
             and
             all
             things
             therein
             ,
             who
             being
             Lord
             of
             heaven
             and
             earth
             ,
             dwelleth
             not
          
           (
           as
           your
           Daemon-gods
           doe
           )
           
             in
             
             Temples
             made
             with
             hands
             ,
             neither
             is
             worshipped
             with
             mens
             hands
             ,
             as
             though
             he
             needed
             any
             thing
          
           (
           as
           you
           conceive
           of
           your
           Daemons
           )
           
             seeing
             he
             giveth
             to
             all
             ,
             life
             ,
             and
             breath
             ,
             and
             all
             things
             :
          
           This
           God
           I
           preach
           unto
           you
           .
           And
           this
           place
           I
           take
           to
           be
           so
           unanswerable
           for
           the
           indifferent
           and
           common
           acception
           of
           the
           word
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           that
           I
           care
           not
           now
           though
           the
           rest
           should
           faile
           me
           ;
           but
           let
           us
           see
           what
           they
           are
           .
        
         
           In
           Revel
           .
           9.13
           .
           &c.
           The
           sixth
           Trumpet
           from
           Euphrates
           brings
           an
           huge
           army
           upon
           the
           Christian
           world
           ,
           which
           destroyeth
           a
           third
           part
           of
           men
           ,
           and
           yet
           those
           which
           remained
           
             repented
             not
          
           of
           those
           sinnes
           (
           vers
           .
           20.
           )
           for
           which
           these
           plagues
           came
           upon
           the
           earth
           ,
           
             viz.
             That
             they
             should
             not
             worship
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             and
             Idols
             of
             gold
             ,
             silver
             ,
             and
             brasse
             ,
             and
             stone
             ,
             and
             of
             wood
             which
             can
             neither
             see
             ,
             nor
             heare
             ,
             nor
             walke
             .
          
           Is
           not
           this
           a
           Comment
           upon
           the
           Apostles
           prophesie
           in
           my
           Text
           ?
        
         
           The
           time
           which
           it
           concernes
           must
           needs
           fall
           into
           the
           last
           times
           ,
           for
           it
           is
           the
           last
           Trumpet
           save
           one
           .
           The
           place
           must
           be
           the
           Roman
           Empire
           ,
           or
           Christian
           world
           ,
           for
           that
           is
           the
           Stage
           of
           all
           the
           Seales
           and
           Trumpets
           and
           how
           could
           it
           be
           otherwise
           ,
           seeing
           Saint
           John
           at
           Pathmos
           saw
           them
           comming
           from
           the
           great
           River
           Euphrates
           ?
           whatsoever
           comes
           from
           thence
           ,
           must
           needs
           fall
           upon
           the
           territory
           of
           the
           Roman
           Empire
           .
           To
           hold
           you
           no
           longer
           ,
           the
           best
           Expounders
           make
           it
           the
           Ottoman
           or
           Turkish
           invasion
           ,
           which
           hath
           swallowed
           so
           great
           a
           part
           of
           Christendome
           .
           But
           what
           people
           are
           they
           ,
           who
           in
           the
           Roman
           territory
           ,
           doe
           in
           these
           later
           times
           worship
           Idols
           of
           gold
           ,
           silver
           ,
           brasse
           ,
           and
           stone
           ,
           and
           wood
           ?
           Are
           they
           Ethnicks
           ?
           there
           is
           none
           such
           .
           Are
           they
           Jewes
           ?
           they
           cannot
           endure
           the
           sight
           of
           them
           .
           Are
           they
           Mahumetans
           ?
           nay
           ,
           they
           abhorre
           it
           also
           .
           Then
           must
           they
           needs
           be
           Christians
           ,
           and
           then
           must
           Christians
           too
           worship
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           for
           both
           are
           spoken
           of
           the
           same
           men
           .
           But
           what
           Christians
           doe
           ,
           or
           ever
           did
           worship
           devils
           formally
           ?
           But
           Daemon-gods
           
           (
           alasse
           )
           they
           doe
           ,
           and
           long
           have
           done
           .
           Here
           therefore
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           is
           againe
           taken
           in
           the
           common
           and
           Philosophicall
           sense
           ,
           or
           at
           least
           ,
           which
           is
           all
           one
           ,
           for
           evill
           spirits
           worshipped
           under
           the
           names
           of
           Daemons
           and
           deceased
           souls
           .
        
         
           Besides
           my
           Text
           ,
           there
           is
           but
           one
           place
           more
           in
           all
           the
           Epistles
           of
           Saint
           Paul
           ,
           where
           the
           word
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           is
           used
           ,
           namely
           ,
           1
           Cor.
           10.
           where
           if
           there
           be
           any
           allusion
           to
           the
           Gentiles
           conceit
           of
           Daemons
           ,
           then
           all
           the
           places
           of
           Saint
           Pauls
           Epistles
           are
           bending
           that
           way
           :
           But
           some
           there
           are
           ,
           saith
           Stephen
           in
           his
           Thesaurus
           who
           thinke
           the
           Apostle
           in
           his
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           or
           
             Cup
             of
             Daemons
          
           ,
           alludes
           unto
           that
           poculum
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           used
           amongst
           the
           Gentiles
           .
           And
           further
           to
           strengthen
           the
           conceit
           of
           the
           Apostles
           allusion
           to
           the
           heathenish
           notion
           of
           Daemons
           *
           ,
           the
           words
           of
           the
           former
           verse
           make
           much
           ;
           for
           
             the
             things
             which
             the
             Gentiles
             sacrifice
             ,
             they
             sacrifice
          
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             to
             Daemons
             ,
             and
             not
             to
             God.
          
           Now
           this
           was
           the
           very
           tenet
           of
           the
           Gentiles
           ,
           that
           the
           
             Soveraigne
             and
             Coelestiall
             gods
          
           were
           to
           be
           worshipped
           onely
           ,
           
             pura
             mente
             ,
             and
             with
             hymnes
             and
             praises
             ,
          
           and
           that
           sacrifices
           were
           onely
           for
           
             Daemons
             ,
             vid.
             Porphyr
             .
             in
             Euseb.
             praep
             .
             Evang.
             Her.
             Trismeg
             .
             in
             Asclepio
             Apuleium
             de
             Daemonio
             Socratis
             .
          
           He
           therefore
           who
           had
           given
           his
           faith
           to
           that
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           
             One
             Lord
          
           ,
           to
           the
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           to
           the
           
             onely
             Potentate
          
           ,
           to
           the
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           to
           the
           
             onely
             Mediator
             Jesus
             Christ
          
           ,
           must
           have
           no
           communion
           ,
           have
           no
           part
           in
           the
           service
           of
           these
           
             many
             Mediators
             ,
             Lords
             or
             Daemon-Gods
          
           of
           the
           Nations
           ;
           for
           Christs
           monarchicall
           Mediation
           excludes
           all
           other
           Mediators
           and
           Daemons
           :
           not
           that
           the
           woodden
           Idoll
           was
           ought
           of
           it selfe
           ,
           but
           that
           the
           Gentiles
           supposed
           there
           dwelt
           some
           Daemon
           therein
           ,
           who
           received
           their
           sacrifices
           ,
           and
           to
           whom
           they
           intended
           their
           services
           .
           Thus
           may
           this
           place
           be
           expounded
           ,
           and
           so
           the
           use
           of
           the
           word
           Daemon
           in
           the
           
             worst
             sense
          
           or
           
             directly
             for
             a
             Divell
          
           ,
           will
           be
           almost
           confined
           to
           the
           Gospel
           :
           where
           the
           subject
           spoken
           of
           being
           men
           vexed
           with
           evill
           spirits
           ,
           could
           admit
           no
           other
           sense
           or
           use
           ;
           and
           yet
           S.
           Luke
           ,
           the
           
           best
           languaged
           of
           the
           Evangelists
           ,
           knowing
           the
           word
           to
           be
           ambiguous
           ,
           and
           therefore
           ,
           as
           it
           were
           ,
           to
           distinguish
           it
           once
           for
           all
           ,
           doth
           ,
           the
           first
           time
           he
           useth
           it
           ,
           doe
           it
           with
           an
           explication
           ,
           chapter
           4.
           verse
           33.
           
           
             There
             was
          
           ,
           saith
           hee
           ,
           
             a
             man
             in
             the
             Synagogue
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             having
             the
             spirit
             of
             an
             uncleane
             Daemon
             .
          
        
         
           Thus
           much
           of
           the
           word
           Daemonium
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           in
           Scripture
           ,
           whereby
           I
           hope
           that
           it
           appeares
           ,
           that
           this
           place
           of
           my
           Text
           is
           not
           the
           only
           place
           where
           the
           word
           is
           used
           according
           to
           the
           notion
           of
           the
           Gentiles
           ,
           and
           their
           Theologists
           :
           But
           you
           will
           say
           ,
           did
           any
           of
           the
           Fathers
           ,
           or
           Ancients
           expound
           it
           thus
           in
           this
           place
           ?
           if
           they
           had
           done
           so
           ,
           the
           mystery
           of
           iniquity
           could
           never
           have
           taken
           such
           footing
           ;
           which
           because
           it
           was
           to
           come
           according
           to
           divine
           disposition
           ,
           what
           wonder
           if
           this
           were
           hidden
           from
           their
           eyes
           .
           Howsoever
           it
           may
           seeme
           that
           God
           left
           not
           his
           spirit
           without
           a
           witnesse
           ;
           For
           ,
           as
           I
           take
           it
           ,
           Epiphanius
           ,
           one
           of
           the
           most
           zealous
           of
           the
           Fathers
           of
           his
           time
           against
           Saint-worship
           then
           peeping
           ,
           took
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           in
           my
           text
           for
           a
           
             doctrine
             of
             worshipping
             of
             dead
             men
          
           ;
           you
           may
           read
           him
           in
           the
           seventy
           eighth
           Heresie
           towards
           the
           conclusion
           ,
           where
           ,
           upon
           occasion
           of
           some
           who
           made
           a
           Goddesse
           of
           the
           
             blessed
             Virgin
          
           ,
           and
           offered
           a
           cake
           unto
           her
           as
           the
           Queene
           of
           heaven
           ,
           he
           quotes
           the
           place
           of
           my
           text
           concerning
           them
           ,
           saying
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           which
           in
           English
           sounds
           thus
           ,
           
             that
             also
             of
             the
             Apostle
             is
             fulfilled
             of
             these
             ,
             some
             shall
             apostatize
             from
             sound
             doctrine
             ,
             giving
             heed
             to
             fables
             and
             doctrines
             of
             Daemons
             ,
             for
          
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             they
             shall
             be
             worshippers
             of
             dead
             men
             ,
             as
             they
             were
             worshipped
             in
             Israel
          
           ;
           are
           not
           these
           last
           words
           for
           an
           exposition
           of
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ?
           But
           what
           (
           will
           you
           say
           )
           doth
           he
           meane
           by
           dead
           men
           worshipped
           in
           Israel
           ?
           I
           suppose
           he
           meanes
           their
           Baalim
           ,
           who
           (
           as
           is
           already
           shewed
           )
           were
           nothing
           
           else
           but
           Daemons
           ,
           or
           
             deified
             Ghosts
             of
             men
             deceased
          
           :
           yet
           he
           brings
           in
           two
           examples
           besides
           ;
           one
           of
           the
           Sichemites
           ,
           in
           his
           time
           ,
           who
           had
           a
           Goddesse
           or
           Daemonesse
           under
           the
           name
           of
           
             Jephta's
             daughter
          
           ;
           another
           of
           the
           Aegyptians
           ,
           who
           worshipped
           Thermutis
           ,
           that
           daughter
           of
           Pharaoh
           ,
           which
           brought
           up
           Moses
           .
           Some
           ,
           as
           Beza
           ,
           would
           have
           these
           words
           of
           Epiphanius
           to
           be
           a
           part
           of
           the
           text
           it selfe
           in
           some
           copy
           which
           he
           used
           .
           But
           how
           is
           that
           likely
           ,
           when
           no
           other
           Father
           once
           mentions
           any
           such
           reading
           ;
           nay
           it
           appeares
           moreover
           ,
           that
           Epiphanius
           intended
           to
           explaine
           the
           words
           as
           he
           quoteth
           them
           ,
           as
           he
           doth
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           by
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           and
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           by
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           and
           so
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           by
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           Otherwise
           wee
           must
           say
           he
           used
           a
           very
           corrupt
           copy
           ,
           or
           quoted
           very
           carelesly
           .
           But
           grant
           that
           Epiphanius
           read
           so
           ,
           either
           this
           reading
           was
           true
           ,
           and
           so
           I
           have
           enough
           ;
           because
           then
           the
           Apostle
           with
           his
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           &c.
           should
           expound
           himselfe
           by
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           to
           meane
           the
           deifying
           of
           the
           dead
           :
           or
           it
           was
           not
           the
           originall
           reading
           ,
           but
           added
           by
           some
           other
           for
           explication
           sake
           ;
           and
           so
           it
           will
           follow
           ,
           that
           those
           who
           did
           it
           ,
           made
           no
           question
           ,
           but
           that
           the
           words
           there
           ,
           contained
           some
           such
           thing
           as
           worshipping
           the
           dead
           :
           Therefore
           take
           it
           which
           way
           you
           will
           ,
           it
           will
           follow
           ,
           that
           some
           such
           matter
           as
           wee
           speak
           of
           ,
           was
           in
           times
           past
           supposed
           to
           bee
           in
           this
           text
           and
           prophesie
           .
        
         
           Now
           I
           come
           to
           the
           second
           point
           ,
           to
           maintaine
           and
           prove
           ,
           that
           
             praying
             to
             Saints
             glorified
             ,
             as
             mediators
             and
             agents
             for
             us
             with
             God
             is
          
           justly
           charged
           with
           Idolatry
           :
           for
           this
           is
           the
           hinge
           whereupon
           not
           the
           application
           only
           of
           my
           text
           ,
           but
           the
           interpretation
           thereof
           chiefly
           turneth
           :
           for
           this
           is
           that
           which
           I
           told
           you
           in
           the
           beginning
           ,
           that
           my
           text
           depended
           upon
           the
           
             last
             words
          
           of
           the
           former
           chapter
           and
           verse
           ;
           
             received
             into
             glory
          
           :
           which
           were
           therefore
           out
           of
           their
           due
           order
           ,
           put
           in
           the
           last
           place
           ,
           because
           my
           text
           was
           immediately
           to
           bee
           inferred
           upon
           them
           ;
           the
           
           like
           mis-placing
           ,
           and
           for
           the
           like
           reason
           ,
           see
           Heb.
           12.23
           “
           .
           where
           ,
           in
           a
           catalogue
           or
           recension
           of
           the
           parts
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           
             Christ
             the
             head
          
           ,
           and
           the
           
             sprinkling
             of
             his
             blood
          
           ,
           is
           mentioned
           in
           the
           last
           place
           ,
           and
           after
           the
           spirits
           of
           just
           men
           ,
           because
           the
           next
           verses
           are
           continued
           upon
           this
           sprinkling
           of
           Christs
           blood
           :
           
             Yee
             are
             come
             to
             the
             generall
             assembly
             ,
             and
             Church
             of
             the
             first
             borne
             ,
             which
             are
             written
             in
             heaven
             ,
          
           and
           
             to
             God
             the
             judge
             of
             all
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             Spirits
             of
             just
             men
             made
             perfect
             ,
             and
             to
             Jesus
             the
             Mediator
             of
             the
             new
             Covenant
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             blood
             of
             Sprinkling
             ,
             which
             speaketh
             better
             things
             than
             that
             of
             Abel
          
           :
           whereas
           the
           right
           order
           should
           have
           beene
           ;
           first
           ,
           
             God
             the
             judge
             of
             all
          
           :
           Secondly
           ,
           
             Christ
             the
             mediator
             of
             the
             new
             Covenant
          
           :
           Thirdly
           ,
           in
           the
           last
           place
           ,
           the
           
             Spirits
             of
             just
             men
             made
             perfect
          
           ;
           agreeable
           therefore
           to
           this
           dependance
           of
           my
           text
           I
           am
           to
           shew
           ,
           that
           the
           
             Invocation
             of
             Saints
             glorified
          
           implyes
           an
           
             Apostasie
             from
             Christ
          
           ,
           and
           a
           deniall
           of
           his
           glory
           and
           majesty
           whereunto
           hee
           is
           installed
           by
           his
           
             assumption
             into
             heaven
             ,
             to
             sit
             at
             the
             right
             hand
             of
             God
          
           :
           which
           before
           I
           doe
           ,
           I
           must
           premise
           some
           generall
           grounds
           ,
           which
           are
           as
           followeth
           .
        
         
           That
           as
           God
           is
           
             most
             one
          
           ,
           and
           without
           
             all
             multiplicity
          
           ,
           so
           must
           the
           honour
           and
           service
           which
           is
           given
           unto
           him
           have
           
             no
             communicability
             :
             Esa.
          
           42.8
           .
           
             I
             am
             the
             Lord
             ,
             that
             is
             my
             name
             ,
             my
             glory
             will
             I
             not
             give
             unto
             another
             ,
             nor
             my
             prayse
             to
             graven
             Images
          
           ;
           for
           the
           
             one-most
             God
          
           must
           have
           an
           
             one-most
             service
          
           ;
           Therefore
           in
           that
           action
           whereof
           God
           is
           the
           object
           ,
           nothing
           must
           be
           an
           object
           but
           God
           ,
           or
           in
           the
           Scripture
           phrase
           thus
           ,
           in
           those
           actions
           which
           look
           towards
           the
           
             face
             of
             God
          
           ,
           nothing
           may
           come
           betweene
           ,
           whose
           face
           such
           actions
           may
           look
           upon
           besides
           him
           ,
           whether
           by
           way
           of
           subordination
           to
           him
           ,
           or
           representation
           of
           him
           :
           for
           
             I
             am
             the
             Lord
             thy
             God
          
           (
           saith
           hee
           )
           
             thou
             shalt
             have
             no
             other
             Gods
             before
             my
             face
             .
          
           Secondly
           ,
           this
           
             face
             of
             God
          
           is
           not
           only
           the
           object
           of
           
             his
             person
          
           ,
           but
           also
           the
           place
           of
           
             his
             presence
          
           ,
           where
           his
           glory
           is
           revealed
           
           in
           the
           heavens
           ,
           where
           
             we
             shall
             see
             him
             face
             to
             face
             ,
          
           1
           Cor.
           13.12
           .
           Revel
           .
           22.4
           .
           and
           where
           the
           Angels
           in
           heaven
           behold
           the
           
             face
             of
             the
             Father
             which
             is
             in
             heaven
             ,
             Matth.
          
           18.11
           .
           No
           action
           therefore
           directed
           thitherward
           ,
           to
           the
           face
           of
           his
           revealed
           presence
           and
           glory
           ,
           may
           so
           much
           as
           
             look
             asquint
          
           upon
           any
           other
           object
           ,
           or
           behold
           any
           other
           face
           but
           the
           
             face
             of
             God
          
           alone
           ,
           for
           we
           must
           have
           
             no
             other
             Gods
             before
             his
             face
             .
          
        
         
           I
           say
           not
           ,
           that
           a
           man
           may
           not
           turne
           his
           face
           upon
           the
           
             face
             of
             any
             other
             thing
          
           when
           he
           turnes
           his
           face
           towards
           the
           
             face
             of
             God
          
           ;
           for
           how
           then
           should
           we
           worship
           him
           at
           all
           ,
           seeing
           which
           way
           soever
           we
           turne
           us
           ,
           something
           will
           alwayes
           bee
           before
           us
           ?
           but
           it
           is
           not
           the
           face
           of
           our
           bodies
           ,
           or
           their
           posture
           ,
           but
           the
           face
           and
           posture
           of
           the
           act
           wee
           doe
           ,
           which
           must
           not
           have
           the
           face
           turned
           upon
           any
           thing
           else
           ,
           when
           it
           is
           directed
           at
           the
           
             face
             of
             God
          
           :
           namely
           ,
           that
           action
           in
           which
           God
           is
           faced
           ,
           must
           face
           nothing
           else
           but
           God
           ,
           where
           God
           is
           the
           object
           ,
           whether
           in
           regard
           of
           his
           person
           when
           we
           pray
           unto
           him
           ,
           or
           of
           his
           throne
           of
           presence
           when
           we
           would
           approach
           it
           or
           direct
           our
           supplica-towards
           it
           ,
           there
           nothing
           is
           to
           have
           any
           respect
           of
           an
           object
           ,
           but
           God
           alone
           .
           So
           although
           when
           we
           pray
           unto
           God
           ,
           wee
           turne
           the
           face
           of
           our
           bodies
           towards
           Heaven
           ,
           the
           Sunne
           ▪
           the
           Moon
           ,
           and
           Starres
           ,
           yet
           doe
           we
           not
           worship
           the
           host
           of
           heaven
           therefore
           ,
           because
           our
           action
           hath
           no
           relation
           to
           them
           as
           to
           an
           object
           ,
           but
           to
           
             God
             alone
          
           ;
           and
           howsoever
           they
           are
           betweene
           God
           and
           us
           in
           place
           ,
           yet
           as
           an
           object
           of
           our
           devotion
           neither
           they
           nor
           any
           thing
           in
           them
           come
           any
           way
           betweene
           us
           and
           him
           :
           Now
           for
           the
           reason
           (
           if
           you
           ask
           it
           )
           of
           this
           incommunicablenesse
           of
           all
           actions
           and
           services
           directed
           to
           God-ward
           ,
           you
           shall
           have
           it
           ,
           because
           the
           Lord
           whose
           name
           is
           jealous
           ,
           is
           a
           
             jealous
             God
             ,
             jealous
          
           not
           only
           lest
           he
           should
           not
           be
           honoured
           as
           God
           ,
           but
           jealous
           lest
           he
           should
           not
           be
           honoured
           as
           
             one
             God
          
           ;
           for
           as
           by
           honouring
           him
           ,
           we
           acknowledge
           him
           God
           ,
           so
           by
           the
           incommunicablenesse
           of
           honour
           we
           acknowledge
           
           him
           
             one
             God
          
           :
           For
           this
           cause
           ,
           God
           being
           to
           give
           us
           a
           Mediator
           ,
           by
           whom
           we
           should
           have
           accesse
           unto
           his
           presence
           ,
           and
           whom
           ,
           without
           his
           jealousie
           ,
           wee
           might
           interpose
           in
           our
           devotions
           and
           supplications
           unto
           himselfe
           ,
           or
           offered
           at
           the
           throne
           of
           his
           majesty
           and
           glory
           in
           the
           heavens
           ,
           provided
           that
           admirable
           mystery
           of
           communicating
           to
           the
           nature
           of
           a
           man
           borne
           of
           a
           woman
           ,
           the
           
             hypostaticall
             union
          
           of
           the
           
             second
             Person
          
           of
           the
           Deity
           :
           and
           him
           ,
           after
           he
           had
           vanquished
           death
           ,
           to
           exalt
           ,
           to
           
             sit
             at
             his
             right
             hand
          
           of
           glory
           ,
           and
           power
           ,
           in
           the
           heavens
           ,
           there
           in
           his
           owne
           presence
           and
           throne
           ,
           to
           receive
           our
           requests
           ,
           and
           to
           deale
           as
           an
           agent
           betweene
           us
           and
           him
           .
        
         
           Thus
           at
           length
           I
           am
           arrived
           at
           that
           port
           which
           I
           all
           this
           while
           made
           for
           :
           viz.
           to
           shew
           that
           this
           glory
           of
           Christ
           which
           is
           stiled
           his
           
             sitting
             at
             the
             right
             hand
             of
             God
             ,
          
           is
           that
           
             incommunicable
             royalty
          
           to
           which
           of
           right
           belongeth
           in
           the
           presence
           of
           God
           to
           receive
           and
           present
           our
           devotions
           to
           the
           
             divine
             Majesty
          
           ,
           as
           in
           it
           ,
           which
           now
           followeth
           ,
           shall
           appeare
           .
           
             Sessio
             ad
             dextram
             Dei
          
           is
           to
           be
           
             installed
             in
             Gods
             throne
          
           ,
           or
           to
           have
           a
           
             God-like
             royalty
          
           ,
           which
           is
           defined
           in
           Scripture
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           
             the
             Majesty
             of
             Christ
             in
             heaven
          
           ;
           whence
           it
           is
           said
           ,
           Heb.
           1.
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           
             he
             sate
             downe
             on
             the
             right
             hand
             of
             Majesty
             on
             high
             .
             Heb.
          
           8.1
           .
           it
           is
           called
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           
             the
             right
             hand
             of
             the
             throne
             of
             Majesty
             in
             the
             heavens
          
           :
           it
           is
           called
           also
           by
           Christ
           himselfe
           ,
           Mark.
           14.62
           .
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           Luke
           22.69
           .
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           
             the
             right
             hand
             of
             power
             ,
             and
             the
             right
             hand
             of
             the
             power
             of
             God
             :
          
           For
           as
           to
           the
           
             right
             hand
          
           belongeth
           both
           dignity
           and
           strength
           ,
           so
           doth
           this
           
             glory
             of
             Christ
          
           include
           both
           a
           
             God-like
             sublimity
          
           and
           a
           
             God-like
             power
          
           ;
           the
           first
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           the
           second
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           The
           proper
           place
           where
           the
           
             Majesticall
             glory
          
           is
           revealed
           ,
           is
           the
           heavens
           ,
           as
           may
           appeare
           almost
           wheresoever
           this
           
             sitting
             at
             the
             right
             hand
             of
             God
          
           is
           mentioned
           ,
           Eph.
           1.20
           .
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           :
           Colos.
           3.1
           .
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           
           Heb.
           1.
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           Heb.
           7.26
           .
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           1
           Pet.
           3.22
           .
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           &c.
           
             heaven
             ,
             heavenly
             places
             ,
             high
             places
          
           and
           the
           like
           ,
           being
           alwayes
           thereto
           annexed
           ,
           and
           everywhere
           appeareth
           to
           be
           a
           consequent
           of
           his
           ascension
           into
           heaven
           ,
           as
           we
           say
           in
           our
           Creed
           ,
           
             he
             ascended
             into
             heaven
             ,
             and
             sitteth
             at
             the
             right
             hand
             of
             God
          
           ;
           and
           therefore
           in
           the
           words
           whereon
           my
           text
           depends
           ,
           is
           expressed
           by
           assumed
           or
           
             taken
             up
             into
             glory
          
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           for
           as
           God
           himselfe
           is
           stiled
           
             Pater
             in
             Coelis
          
           ,
           not
           because
           not
           elsewhere
           ,
           but
           because
           his
           glory
           is
           there
           revealed
           :
           So
           Christ
           sits
           
             ad
             dextram
             in
             Coelis
          
           ,
           because
           there
           the
           beames
           of
           the
           Majesty
           given
           him
           by
           his
           Father
           ,
           are
           revealed
           ;
           whence
           it
           comes
           that
           his
           Kingdome
           is
           called
           the
           
             Kingdome
             of
             heaven
          
           ,
           a
           Kingdome
           whose
           Kings
           residence
           and
           Kingly
           Throne
           are
           both
           in
           heaven
           :
           This
           glorious
           Throne
           of
           Majesty
           ,
           this
           
             sitting
             at
             the
             right
             hand
          
           of
           the
           power
           of
           the
           Almighty
           is
           a
           name
           incommunicable
           ,
           an
           exaltation
           whereof
           no
           creature
           in
           heaven
           or
           earth
           is
           capable
           ,
           which
           is
           that
           the
           Apostle
           meanes
           to
           tell
           us
           when
           he
           saith
           ,
           Eph.
           1.21
           .
           
             Farre
             above
             all
             principalities
             and
             powers
             ,
             and
             might
             ,
             and
             dominion
             ,
             and
             every
             name
             that
             it
             named
             ,
             not
             only
             in
             this
             world
             ,
             but
             in
             the
             world
             to
             come
          
           :
           and
           Phil.
           2.9
           ,
           10.
           
             wherfore
             God
             also
             hath
             highly
             exalted
             him
             ,
             and
             given
             him
             a
             name
             which
             is
             above
             every
             name
          
           (
           that
           is
           created
           name
           )
           
             that
             at
             the
             name
             of
             Jesus
             every
             knee
             should
             bow
             ,
             both
             of
             things
             in
             heaven
             ,
             and
             things
             in
             earth
             ,
             and
             things
             under
             the
             earth
             .
             Revel
             .
          
           3.21
           .
           
             he
             that
             overcommeth
          
           (
           saith
           Christ
           )
           
             I
             will
             give
             him
             to
             sit
             with
             me
             in
             my
             throne
             ,
             even
             as
             I
             have
             overcome
             ,
             and
             am
             set
             with
             my
             Father
             in
             his
             throne
          
           ;
           here
           is
           mention
           of
           two
           thrones
           ,
           you
           see
           ,
           of
           which
           ,
           
             my
             throne
          
           ,
           that
           is
           ,
           Christs
           throne
           ,
           is
           the
           condition
           of
           a
           glorified
           man
           ;
           in
           this
           throne
           his
           Saints
           shall
           sit
           with
           him
           ;
           but
           his
           
             Fathers
             throne
          
           is
           the
           
             power
             of
             divine
             Majesty
          
           ,
           wherin
           none
           must
           sit
           but
           God
           ,
           &
           the
           
             God-Man
             Jesus
             Christ.
          
           
        
         
           These
           grounds
           layd
           ,
           I
           say
           ,
           that
           the
           honour
           of
           being
           prayd
           to
           in
           heaven
           ,
           and
           before
           the
           
             throne
             of
             presence
          
           ,
           is
           a
           prerogative
           of
           
             dextra
             Dei
          
           ,
           and
           to
           receive
           our
           devotions
           
           there
           ,
           a
           flower
           of
           
             Christs
             sitting
             at
             the
             right
             hand
             of
             God
             ,
          
           as
           S.
           
             Paul
             ,
             Rom.
          
           8.34
           .
           conjoines
           them
           ,
           saying
           ,
           
             Who
             is
             he
             that
             condemneth
             ?
             it
             is
             Christ
             that
             died
             ,
             yea
             rather
             that
             is
             risen
             againe
             ,
             who
             is
             at
             the
             right
             hand
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             who
             makes
             intercession
             for
             us
          
           :
           for
           by
           right
           of
           this
           his
           exaltation
           and
           majesty
           hee
           comes
           to
           bee
           a
           
             Priest
             after
             the
             order
             of
             Melchisedech
             ,
          
           as
           appeares
           Psalme
           110.
           
           
             The
             Lord
             said
             unto
             my
             Lord
             ,
             sit
             thou
             on
             my
             right
             hand
             ,
             till
             I
             make
             thine
             enemies
             thy
             footstoole
          
           ;
           then
           followes
           the
           effect
           thereof
           verse
           4.
           
           
             The
             Lord
             hath
             sworne
             and
             will
             not
             repent
             ,
             thou
             art
             a
             Priest
             for
             ever
             after
             the
             order
             of
             Melchisedech
          
           ;
           and
           by
           the
           same
           right
           also
           he
           becomes
           the
           only
           and
           
             eternall
             Priest
          
           wh●ch
           hath
           to
           doe
           in
           the
           
             most
             holy
             place
          
           ,
           the
           heavens
           :
           For
           as
           the
           high
           Priest
           only
           entred
           the
           
             most
             holy
             place
          
           beyond
           the
           vaile
           in
           the
           earthly
           Tabernacle
           ;
           so
           Christ
           Jesus
           our
           only
           
             high
             Priest
          
           ,
           through
           his
           body
           ,
           as
           the
           first
           Tabernacle
           ,
           by
           his
           owne
           blood
           ,
           entred
           into
           the
           second
           Tabernacle
           or
           
             holy
             place
          
           ,
           not
           made
           with
           hands
           ,
           as
           was
           the
           figure
           ,
           but
           into
           
             heaven
             it selfe
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             to
             appeare
             in
             the
             presence
             of
             God
             for
             us
             :
          
           all
           this
           you
           have
           in
           the
           same
           words
           at
           large
           ,
           Heb
           9
           7.11.12.24
           .
           Now
           in
           the
           Tabernacle
           of
           this
           world
           ,
           as
           was
           in
           the
           first
           Tabernacle
           ,
           we
           may
           happily
           finde
           many
           Priests
           whom
           to
           imploy
           as
           agents
           for
           us
           with
           God
           :
           But
           in
           the
           second
           Tabernacle
           which
           is
           heaven
           ,
           there
           is
           but
           
             one
             agent
          
           to
           be
           imployed
           ,
           but
           one
           who
           hath
           
             royall
             commission
          
           to
           deale
           betweene
           God
           and
           men
           ,
           that
           Angel
           of
           the
           presence
           ,
           as
           Isaiah
           calls
           him
           ,
           63.9
           .
           and
           
             one
             only
             Mediator
          
           Jesus
           Christ
           the
           Lord
           of
           glory
           ,
           who
           in
           this
           prerogative
           is
           above
           both
           Saints
           and
           Angells
           :
           For
           to
           which
           of
           the
           Saints
           and
           Angells
           ,
           said
           God
           at
           any
           time
           ,
           
             Sit
             on
             my
             right
             hand
             till
             I
             make
             thine
             enemies
             thy
             footstoole
             ,
             Heb.
          
           1.4.9.13
           .
           neither
           will
           this
           demonstration
           admit
           that
           vulgar
           acception
           to
           be
           of
           any
           force
           ,
           namely
           that
           
             expiatory
             mediation
          
           ,
           or
           
             meritorious
             intercession
          
           in
           heaven
           should
           indeed
           appertaine
           to
           Christ
           
           alone
           ,
           but
           
             favourable
             intercession
          
           to
           pray
           for
           us
           ,
           not
           so
           :
           and
           therefore
           for
           this
           ,
           wee
           may
           without
           derogation
           to
           Christ
           sollicite
           either
           Saints
           or
           Angels
           ;
           I
           could
           say
           ,
           that
           this
           ragge
           is
           too
           too
           narrow
           and
           short
           to
           cover
           their
           nakednesse
           ,
           who
           lay
           hold
           of
           it
           ,
           in
           whose
           supplication
           to
           Saints
           and
           to
           God
           too
           in
           their
           names
           ,
           nothing
           is
           more
           usuall
           than
           the
           expresse
           mention
           of
           their
           
             merits
             ,
             blood
          
           ,
           and
           sufferings
           ,
           as
           motives
           to
           God
           to
           heare
           them
           ;
           but
           we
           shall
           not
           need
           this
           answer
           ;
           for
           we
           have
           demonstrated
           ,
           that
           as
           in
           the
           Law
           ,
           none
           but
           the
           
             high
             Priest
             alone
          
           was
           to
           doe
           office
           in
           the
           
             holiest
             place
          
           ;
           so
           Christ
           Jesus
           now
           is
           the
           
             only
             agent
          
           for
           whatsoever
           is
           to
           be
           done
           for
           us
           in
           the
           
             holiest
             Tabernacle
          
           of
           heaven
           :
           besides
           ,
           wee
           read
           that
           none
           but
           the
           high
           Priest
           alone
           was
           to
           offer
           Incense
           ,
           or
           to
           incense
           the
           most
           holy
           place
           when
           hee
           entred
           into
           it
           :
           But
           Incense
           is
           the
           Prayers
           of
           the
           Saints
           ,
           sent
           thither
           from
           this
           outward
           Temple
           of
           the
           militant
           Church
           as
           the
           Incense
           of
           the
           Law
           was
           fetched
           from
           without
           the
           vaile
           :
           This
           therefore
           none
           in
           heaven
           but
           Christ
           alone
           must
           receive
           from
           us
           ,
           to
           offer
           for
           us
           ;
           and
           this
           is
           that
           Angel
           with
           the
           
             golden
             Censer
             ,
             Revel
          
           .
           8.
           who
           there
           offers
           the
           Incense
           of
           the
           prayers
           of
           the
           Saints
           there
           given
           him
           to
           offer
           upon
           the
           
             golden
             Altar
             before
             the
             Throne
          
           ,
           alluding
           expresly
           to
           the
           
             golden
             Altar
          
           before
           the
           Testimony
           .
        
         
           For
           the
           fuller
           understanding
           ,
           and
           farther
           confirmation
           of
           what
           hath
           beene
           spoken
           ,
           take
           this
           also
           ;
           that
           notwithstand●ng
           the
           man
           
             Christ
             Jesus
          
           in
           regard
           of
           his
           person
           ,
           being
           God
           as
           well
           as
           Man
           ,
           was
           from
           his
           first
           incarnation
           capable
           of
           this
           royalty
           and
           glory
           ;
           not
           only
           for
           the
           incomparable
           sufficiency
           of
           his
           person
           ,
           which
           by
           reason
           of
           his
           twofold
           nature
           ,
           is
           alwayes
           and
           in
           all
           places
           present
           both
           with
           God
           and
           men
           ;
           and
           so
           at
           one
           instant
           able
           and
           ready
           at
           every
           need
           ,
           to
           present
           to
           the
           one
           what
           he
           should
           receive
           from
           the
           other
           ;
           but
           cheifly
           and
           most
           of
           all
           ,
           for
           that
           being
           very
           God
           himselfe
           ,
           his
           Fathers
           
           jealousie
           ,
           which
           could
           never
           have
           brooked
           the
           communication
           of
           this
           glory
           to
           any
           other
           ,
           which
           should
           not
           have
           beene
           the
           selfe-same
           with
           himselfe
           ,
           was
           by
           this
           condition
           of
           his
           person
           prevented
           and
           secured
           .
        
         
           Neverthelesse
           and
           notwithstanding
           ,
           all
           this
           capability
           of
           his
           person
           ,
           it
           was
           the
           will
           of
           his
           Father
           in
           the
           dispensation
           of
           the
           mystery
           of
           our
           redemption
           ,
           not
           to
           conferre
           it
           upon
           him
           ,
           but
           as
           purchased
           and
           attained
           by
           suffering
           and
           undergoing
           that
           death
           which
           no
           creature
           in
           heaven
           or
           in
           earth
           was
           able
           to
           undergoe
           but
           himselfe
           ,
           being
           a
           suffering
           of
           a
           death
           ,
           whereby
           death
           it selfe
           was
           overcome
           and
           vanquished
           ,
           to
           the
           end
           that
           none
           by
           death
           save
           Jesus
           Christ
           alone
           might
           be
           ever
           thought
           or
           deemed
           capable
           of
           the
           like
           glory
           and
           sublimity
           ;
           but
           that
           it
           might
           appeare
           for
           ever
           to
           be
           a
           peculiar
           right
           to
           him
           .
        
         
           And
           this
           ,
           I
           think
           ,
           is
           not
           only
           agreeable
           to
           the
           tenour
           of
           the
           Scripture
           ,
           but
           expresse
           Scripture
           it selfe
           ,
           Heb.
           2.9
           .
           
             But
             we
             see
             Jesus
             who
             was
             made
             a
             little
             lower
             than
             the
             Angels
             by
             the
             suffering
             of
             death
             ,
             crowned
             with
             glory
             and
             honour
             :
          
           for
           it
           became
           him
           for
           whom
           are
           all
           things
           ,
           and
           by
           whom
           are
           all
           things
           ,
           in
           bringing
           many
           sonnes
           to
           glory
           ,
           to
           make
           the
           captaine
           of
           their
           salvation
           perfect
           by
           sufferings
           .
           Phil.
           2.8
           .
           
             And
             being
             found
             in
             fashion
             of
             a
             man
             ,
             he
             humbled
             himselfe
             ,
             and
             became
             obedient
             unto
             death
             ,
             even
             the
             death
             of
             the
             Crosse
             :
          
           and
           the
           ninth
           verse
           ,
           
             Wherefore
             God
             hath
             also
             highly
             exalted
             him
             ,
             and
             given
             him
             a
             name
             above
             every
             name
             ,
             that
             at
             the
             name
             of
             Jesus
             every
             knee
             should
             bow
             ,
             Heb.
          
           10.12
           .
           
             But
             this
             man
             ,
             after
             he
             had
             offered
             one
             sacrifice
             for
             sinnes
             ,
             for
             ever
             sate
             down
             on
             the
             right
             hand
             of
             God.
             Rom.
          
           14.9
           .
           
             For
             to
             this
             end
             Christ
             both
             died
             ,
             rose
             ,
             and
             revived
             ,
             that
             he
             might
             be
             Lord
             both
             of
             the
             dead
             and
             living
             :
          
           See
           besides
           ,
           Acts
           5.30
           ,
           31.
           
           Rom.
           8.34
           .
           Ephes.
           1.20
           .
           1
           Pet.
           1.11
           .
        
         
           Lastly
           ,
           for
           that
           particular
           parcell
           of
           this
           glory
           of
           Christ
           (
           viz.
           )
           to
           be
           that
           only
           name
           in
           which
           we
           are
           to
           ask
           at
           the
           hands
           of
           God
           whatsoever
           we
           have
           to
           ask
           ,
           is
           not
           this
           also
           annexed
           and
           ascribed
           to
           his
           triumph
           over
           
           death
           ?
           John
           14.13
           .
           I
           go
           unto
           my
           Father
           ,
           viz.
           through
           death
           ,
           
             and
             whatsoever
             yee
             ask
             in
             my
             name
             ,
             that
             will
             I
             doe
             .
             John
          
           16.16
           .
           &
           23.
           
           
             A
             little
             while
             yee
             shall
             not
             see
             me
             ,
             and
             a
             little
             while
             ye
             shall
             see
             me
             ,
             because
             I
             goe
             to
             my
             Father
             ,
             and
             in
             that
             day
             when
             I
             am
             gone
             to
             my
             Father
             ,
             yee
             shall
             ask
             me
             nothing
             :
             Verily
             ,
             verily
             I
             say
             unto
             you
             ,
             whatsoever
             yee
             shall
             ask
             the
             Father
             in
             my
             name
             ,
             he
             will
             give
             it
             you
             ,
          
           vers
           .
           24.
           
           
             Hitherto
             yee
             have
             asked
             nothing
             in
             my
             name
             ,
             ask
             and
             yee
             shall
             receive
             .
             Heb.
          
           7.25
           .
           
             Wherefore
             he
             is
             able
             to
             save
             them
             to
             the
             uttermost
             that
             come
             unto
             God
             by
             him
             ,
             seeing
             he
             ever
             liveth
             to
             make
             intercession
             for
             them
             ,
             for
             such
             an
             high
             Priest
             became
             us
             who
             is
             made
             higher
             than
             the
             heavens
             .
          
        
         
           How
           is
           it
           then
           that
           some
           extenuate
           that
           kinde
           of
           Saint-worship
           ,
           wherein
           prayers
           are
           not
           made
           unto
           them
           directly
           ,
           but
           God
           is
           prayed
           unto
           in
           their
           names
           ,
           and
           for
           their
           mediation
           sake
           to
           grant
           our
           requests
           .
           Is
           it
           not
           a
           deniall
           of
           Christs
           prerogative
           ,
           to
           ascribe
           unto
           any
           other
           ,
           for
           any
           respect
           of
           glory
           or
           neernesse
           to
           God
           after
           death
           or
           otherwise
           ,
           that
           whereof
           he
           alone
           is
           infeoffed
           by
           his
           unimitable
           Death
           ,
           triumphant
           Resurrection
           ,
           and
           glorious
           Ascension
           ?
           certainly
           that
           which
           he
           holds
           by
           incommunicable
           title
           ,
           is
           it selfe
           also
           incommunicable
           .
           To
           conclude
           therefore
           with
           the
           words
           of
           S.
           Paul
           ,
           1
           Tim.
           2.5
           .
           
             There
             is
             but
             one
             God
             and
             one
             Mediator
             between
             God
             and
             men
             ,
             the
             man
             Christ
             Jesus
          
           :
           as
           God
           is
           one
           ,
           so
           the
           Mediator
           is
           one
           ,
           for
           it
           is
           a
           God-like
           royalty
           ,
           and
           therefore
           can
           belong
           but
           to
           one
           :
           There
           is
           but
           one
           God
           in
           heaven
           ,
           without
           any
           other
           gods
           subordinate
           unto
           him
           ;
           therefore
           but
           one
           Mediator
           there
           ,
           without
           any
           other
           mediators
           besides
           him
           :
           as
           for
           the
           Angels
           and
           blessed
           Saints
           ,
           they
           have
           indeed
           a
           light
           of
           glory
           too
           ,
           but
           they
           are
           but
           as
           lesser
           lights
           in
           that
           heaven
           of
           heavens
           :
           And
           therefore
           as
           where
           the
           sunne
           shines
           ,
           the
           lesser
           stars
           of
           heaven
           ,
           though
           stars
           ,
           give
           not
           their
           light
           to
           us
           :
           so
           where
           this
           glorious
           Sunne
           Christ
           Jesus
           continually
           shineth
           ,
           by
           his
           presence
           ,
           sitting
           at
           the
           right
           hand
           of
           God
           ;
           there
           the
           glory
           of
           the
           Saints
           
           and
           Angels
           is
           not
           sufficient
           to
           make
           them
           capable
           of
           any
           flower
           of
           this
           divine
           honour
           ,
           which
           is
           God-like
           and
           so
           appropriate
           to
           Christ
           ,
           by
           right
           of
           his
           heavenly
           exaltation
           in
           the
           throne
           of
           Majesty
           ;
           whatsoever
           Spirit
           saith
           otherwise
           ,
           
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           
             holds
             not
             the
             head
          
           ,
           but
           is
           a
           Christ-apostate-spirit
           which
           denies
           the
           faith
           of
           Christs
           assumption
           into
           glory
           ,
           and
           revives
           the
           doctrines
           of
           Daemons
           .
        
         
           The
           way
           being
           now
           cleared
           ,
           I
           may
           (
           I
           hope
           )
           now
           safely
           resume
           my
           application
           which
           I
           have
           already
           given
           some
           taste
           of
           ,
           that
           the
           doctrine
           of
           Daemons
           comprehends
           in
           most
           expresse
           manner
           the
           whole
           
             idolatry
             of
             the
             mystery
             of
             iniquity
             ,
             the
             deifying
             ,
             and
             invocating
             of
             Saints
             and
             Angels
             ,
             the
             bowing
             downe
             to
             Images
             ,
             the
             worshipping
             of
             Crosses
             as
             new
             idol-columnes
             ,
             the
             adoring
             and
             templing
             of
             reliques
             ,
             the
             worshipping
             of
             any
             other
             visible
             thing
             upon
             supposall
             of
             any
             Divinity
             therein
          
           :
           what
           coppy
           was
           ever
           so
           like
           the
           sample
           ,
           as
           all
           this
           to
           the
           doctrine
           of
           Daemons
           ?
           and
           for
           the
           Idolatry
           of
           the
           Eucharist
           or
           bread-worship
           ,
           though
           it
           may
           be
           reduced
           to
           Image-worship
           ,
           as
           being
           the
           adoration
           of
           a
           signe
           or
           symbole
           ;
           yet
           let
           it
           bee
           considered
           whether
           for
           the
           equality
           thereof
           it
           may
           not
           be
           taken
           rather
           for
           an
           
             idolatry
             of
             reliques
          
           ,
           the
           body
           and
           blood
           of
           Christ
           in
           the
           Sacrament
           being
           the
           
             mysticall
             reliques
          
           which
           he
           left
           us
           as
           monuments
           of
           his
           death
           till
           he
           come
           :
           whichsoever
           it
           bee
           I
           must
           confesse
           it
           hath
           a
           straine
           above
           the
           abomination
           of
           the
           Gentiles
           ,
           who
           though
           they
           supposed
           some
           presence
           of
           their
           Daemons
           in
           their
           Images
           and
           reliques
           ,
           yet
           were
           they
           never
           so
           blockish
           ,
           as
           to
           think
           their
           Images
           and
           reliques
           to
           be
           transubstantiated
           into
           Daemons
           :
           But
           to
           come
           to
           the
           maine
           againe
           ,
           I
           will
           confesse
           for
           my selfe
           that
           I
           cannot
           think
           of
           this
           Daemon-resemblance
           without
           admiration
           ,
           nor
           doe
           I
           beleeve
           that
           you
           will
           heare
           without
           some
           astonishment
           ,
           that
           which
           I
           am
           now
           to
           adde
           farther
           :
           That
           the
           advancers
           of
           Saint-worship
           in
           the
           beginning
           did
           not
           only
           see
           it
           ,
           but
           even
           gloried
           
           
             (
             sed
             gloriatione
             non
             bona
          
           )
           that
           they
           had
           a
           thing
           in
           Christian
           practice
           so
           like
           the
           doctrines
           of
           Daemons
           :
           we
           heard
           before
           ,
           that
           Plato
           in
           his
           Repub.
           would
           have
           the
           soules
           of
           such
           as
           died
           valiantly
           in
           the
           battell
           ,
           to
           be
           accounted
           for
           Daemons
           after
           death
           ,
           and
           their
           Sepulchers
           and
           Coffins
           to
           bee
           adored
           and
           served
           as
           the
           Sepulchers
           of
           Daemons
           .
           
             Eusebius
             lib.
          
           13.
           
           
             Praepar
             .
             Evangel
          
           .
           quoting
           this
           place
           ,
           adds
           with
           it
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           
             these
             things
             doe
             befit
             at
             (
             or
             after
             )
             the
             decease
             of
             the
             favourites
             of
             God
             ,
             whom
             if
             thou
             shalt
             affirme
             to
             be
             taken
             for
             the
             champions
             of
             true
             Religion
             ,
             thou
             shalt
             not
             say
             amisse
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             whence
             it
             is
             our
             custome
             to
             goe
             unto
             their
             tombs
             ,
             and
             to
             make
             our
             prayers
             at
             them
             ,
             and
             to
             honour
             their
             blessed
             soules
             .
          
        
         
           The
           purpose
           of
           Eusebius
           was
           here
           to
           shew
           ,
           as
           a
           preparation
           to
           draw
           men
           to
           Christianity
           ,
           how
           well
           the
           present
           use
           of
           Christians
           in
           honouring
           the
           memories
           of
           their
           Martyrs
           ,
           by
           keeping
           their
           assemblies
           at
           their
           Sepulchers
           ,
           did
           agree
           with
           that
           of
           the
           Gentiles
           (
           so
           much
           by
           Plato
           commended
           )
           in
           honouring
           their
           champions
           and
           worthies
           for
           Daemons
           after
           death
           :
           But
           alas
           ,
           in
           the
           age
           next
           after
           ,
           it
           proved
           too
           too
           like
           it
           indeed
           :
           For
           these
           earerings
           which
           the
           Christians
           had
           borrowed
           or
           stolen
           from
           the
           Gentiles
           at
           their
           comming
           out
           of
           Aegypt
           ,
           presently
           became
           a
           golden
           calfe
           ,
           as
           soone
           as
           the
           woman
           the
           Church
           came
           into
           the
           wildernesse
           ,
           yea
           and
           Aaron
           the
           Priest
           had
           a
           foule
           part
           in
           it
           too
           .
        
         
           Read
           the
           eighth
           book
           of
           
             Theodoret
             de
             curandis
             Graecorum
             affectionibus
          
           ,
           whose
           title
           is
           
             de
             Martyribus
          
           ,
           or
           in
           the
           meane
           time
           take
           these
           few
           passages
           thereof
           :
           Thus
           hee
           speaks
           having
           quoted
           that
           passage
           of
           Hesiod
           for
           Daemons
           ,
           commended
           by
           
             Plato
             ;
             Quod
             si
             Poëta
             Hesiodus
             auxiliares
             custodesque
             mortalium
             eos
             vocat
             qui
             sanctè
             olim
             beneque
             vixerunt
             ,
             eamque
             hujus
             Poëtae
             sententiam
             ,
             Philosophorum
             
             optimus
             Plato
             adeò
             confirmavit
             ,
             ut
             eorum
             hominum
             Sepulchra
             ●olenda
             esse
             atque
             adoranda
             censuerit
             ;
             Quid
             ita
             quaeso
             ,
             boni
             viri
             (
             i.
             e.
             )
             Graeci
             ,
             quae
             ipsi
             facimus
             ,
             accusatis
             ?
             nos
             etenim
             pari
             modo
             (
             N.
             B.
             )
             eos
             qui
             illustri
             pietate
             viguerunt
             ,
             proque
             eâ
             jugulati
             ac
             caesi
             sunt
             ,
             &
             auxiliares
             &
             medicos
             nominamus
             ;
             at
             non
             Daemones
             tamen
             ;
             absit
             à
             nobis
             absit
             hic
             furor
             :
             sed
             amicos
             Dei
             ,
             fidelesque
             servos
             dicimus
             fuisse
             —
             Ibid.
             posse
             sanctorum
             animas
             ,
             vel
             cum
             extra
             hoc
             corpus
             fuerint
             hominum
             curare
             negotia
             ,
             Plato
             etiam
          
           II
           
             legum
             libro
             affirmat
             verba
             Platonis
             citantur
          
           —
        
         
           
             Cum
             itaque
             Philosophus
             credendum
             esse
             rumoribus
             censeat
             (
             id
             est
             sermonibus
             qui
             vulgò
             habentur
             de
             illâ
             animarum
             defunctarum
             curâ
             circa
             homines
             )
             vos
             tamen
             nobis
             non
             solùm
             fidei
             nihil
             habetis
             ,
             clamantemque
             eventorum
             vocem
             audire
             non
             vultis
             ,
             &c.
             Ibid.
             Martyrum
             templa
             conspicua
          
           —
        
         
           
             Quique
             homines
             prosperá
             valetudine
             sunt
             ,
             conservari
             eam
             sibi
             à
             martyribus
             petunt
             :
             Qui
             verò
             agritudinem
             aliquam
             patiuntur
             ,
             sanitatem
             exposcunt
             ,
             —
             Insuper
             &
             steriles
             &c.
             —
             Item
             qui
             peregrè
             proficiscuntur
             &c.
             —
             non
             qui
             se
             ad
             Deos
             accedere
             arbitrentur
             ,
             sed
             qui
             orent
             Dei
             martyres
             tanquam
             divinos
             homines
             ,
             intercessoresque
             sibi
             eos
             apud
             Deum
             advocent
             &
             precentur
          
           —
        
         
           
             Piè
             verò
             &
             fideliter
             precatos
             ●a
             maximè
             consequi
             quae
             desiderant
             ,
             testantur
             illa
             quae
             votorum
             rei
             dona
             persolvunt
             ,
             manifesta
             nimirum
             sanitatis
             adepti
             iudicia
             :
          
        
         
           
             Nam
             alii
             oculorum
             ,
             alii
             manuum
             simulachra
             suspendunt
             ,
             exargento
             auroque
             confecta
             ,
             —
             paulò
             post
             —
             Quid
             ,
             quod
             eorum
             qui
             passim
             Dii
             ferebantur
             memoriam
             è
             mente
             hominum
             martyres
             aboleverint
             —
             Suos
             mortuos
             Dominus
             Deus
             noster
             in
             templa
             ,
             pro
             Diis
             vestris
             (
             i.
             e.
             )
             Daemonibus
             iduxit
             ,
             ac
             illos
             quidem
             cassos
             gloriâ
             vanosque
             reddidit
             ,
             suis
             autem
             martyribus
             honorem
             illorum
             dedit
             :
          
        
         
           
             Propandiis
             enim
             Diasiisque
             ,
             &
             Dionysiis
             (
             i.
             e.
             )
             Jovis
             ,
             Liberique
             Patris
             solennitatibus
             ;
             Petro
             ,
             Paulo
             ,
             Thomae
             ,
             Sergio
             ,
             aliisque
             sanctis
             martyribus
             solennitates
             epulo
             populari
             peraguntur
             :
             Cùm
             itaque
             tantam
             utilitatem
             ex
             honore
             martyribus
             
             collato
             provenire
             ,
             homines
             videatis
             ,
             fugite
             (
             quaeso
             )
             errorem
             Daemonum
             ,
             pravioque
             ductu
             martyrum
             ,
             facibusque
             utentes
             ,
             viam
             capessite
             quae
             ad
             Deum
             perducit
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           Now
           judge
           whether
           hitherto
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           hath
           beene
           fitly
           applyed
           or
           not
           :
           I
           will
           goe
           on
           .
        
         
           Having
           therefore
           by
           so
           many
           arguments
           made
           apparant
           (
           I
           hope
           )
           what
           I
           endeavoured
           to
           prove
           :
           I
           desire
           we
           may
           observe
           ,
           among
           so
           many
           corruptions
           ,
           both
           now
           and
           heretofore
           over-whelming
           the
           Church
           of
           Christ
           ,
           what
           it
           is
           wherein
           the
           Holy
           Ghost
           placeth
           the
           essence
           ,
           and
           counteth
           as
           the
           very
           soule
           of
           the
           great
           Apostasie
           under
           the
           man
           of
           sinne
           ,
           and
           would
           have
           us
           to
           make
           the
           pole-starre
           of
           our
           discovery
           thereof
           .
        
         
           Not
           every
           errour
           ,
           not
           every
           heresie
           ,
           how
           fowle
           soever
           ;
           but
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           Idolatry
           ,
           and
           
             Spirituall
             fornication
          
           :
           as
           for
           other
           heresies
           ,
           though
           accompanying
           this
           ,
           yet
           are
           they
           but
           accidentall
           ,
           and
           not
           of
           the
           essence
           of
           the
           great
           Apostasie
           which
           was
           to
           come
           .
        
         
           Even
           as
           whores
           are
           seldome
           without
           other
           great
           faults
           ,
           which
           yet
           are
           no
           part
           of
           whoredome
           :
           so
           hath
           the
           spirituall
           whore
           many
           other
           heresies
           ,
           but
           her
           whoredome
           is
           only
           Idolatry
           and
           the
           doctrine
           of
           Daemons
           .
        
         
           Neither
           is
           heresie
           of
           it selfe
           ,
           no
           though
           damnable
           heresie
           ,
           a
           character
           whereby
           the
           great
           Apostasie
           can
           bee
           knowne
           from
           other
           sects
           and
           blasphemies
           .
        
         
           Fowle
           heresies
           were
           in
           the
           first
           ages
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           yet
           Antichrist
           and
           his
           time
           were
           neither
           of
           them
           yet
           ,
           come
           ;
           when
           his
           time
           approached
           neerer
           ,
           the
           Arrians
           ,
           Macedonians
           ,
           Nestorians
           ,
           Eutychians
           ,
           were
           abominable
           heretiques
           .
        
         
           And
           the
           Arrians
           possessed
           for
           a
           time
           the
           face
           of
           the
           visible
           Church
           ;
           yet
           was
           not
           theirs
           the
           solemne
           Apostasie
           looked
           for
           .
        
         
           But
           Idolatry
           or
           spirituall
           whoredome
           ,
           
           which
           in
           that
           storme
           the
           Devill
           was
           a
           working
           ,
           this
           is
           the
           only
           character
           and
           note
           whereby
           the
           Apostasie
           under
           the
           man
           
           of
           sinne
           is
           discovered
           and
           distinguished
           from
           all
           other
           blasphemies
           ,
           sects
           ,
           and
           heresies
           of
           what
           age
           or
           time
           soever
           .
           Which
           that
           I
           may
           not
           seem
           to
           ground
           only
           upon
           the
           exposition
           of
           my
           text
           ,
           which
           whatsoever
           the
           probability
           thereof
           be
           ,
           may
           yet
           be
           thought
           alone
           too
           weak
           to
           support
           the
           weight
           of
           so
           maine
           a
           conclusion
           :
           I
           desire
           you
           to
           take
           these
           arguments
           for
           a
           full
           confirmaiion
           thereof
           ;
           some
           of
           them
           have
           already
           beene
           intimated
           ,
           but
           now
           all
           are
           mustered
           up
           together
           .
        
         
           First
           ,
           that
           Babylon
           is
           entitled
           in
           the
           Revelation
           of
           S.
           John
           ,
           not
           the
           
             Lyar
             of
             Babylon
          
           ,
           not
           the
           
             Tyrant
             of
             Babylon
          
           ,
           not
           the
           
             Heretique
             of
             Babylon
          
           ,
           nor
           the
           
             Murdresse
             of
             Babylon
          
           ,
           but
           the
           
             Whore
             of
             Babylon
          
           ,
           yea
           that
           
             Great
             Whore
          
           and
           the
           
             Mother
             of
             fornications
             ,
             and
             abominations
             of
             the
             earth
             .
          
           Doth
           not
           God
           (
           think
           we
           )
           give
           the
           name
           as
           he
           accounts
           the
           nature
           ?
           or
           is
           there
           any
           one
           will
           deny
           that
           this
           Babylon
           is
           that
           mystery
           of
           iniquity
           which
           our
           Apostle
           so
           calleth
           ,
           as
           being
           in
           opposition
           to
           the
           great
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           
             mystery
             of
             true
             worship
             and
             Religion
             ?
          
           if
           any
           should
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           
             mystery
             Babylon
          
           in
           her
           forehead
           ,
           would
           help
           to
           reclaim
           him
           :
           And
           what
           Whore
           is
           that
           with
           whom
           
             the
             Kings
             and
             Nations
             and
             Kingdomes
             of
             the
             earth
             commit
             fornication
             ▪
          
           can
           it
           be
           any
           other
           but
           a
           
             spirituall
             Whore
          
           ?
           Without
           question
           therefore
           S.
           John
           meanes
           no
           other
           thing
           here
           than
           what
           he
           foretold
           in
           the
           eleventh
           chapter
           ,
           That
           the
           
             Second
             and
             outmost
             court
             of
             the
             Temple
          
           (
           which
           is
           the
           second
           state
           of
           the
           Christian
           Church
           )
           
             together
             with
             the
             holy
             City
             ,
             should
             bee
             trodden
             downe
             ,
             and
             overtrampled
             by
             the
             Gentiles
             forty
             two
             moneths
             ,
          
           that
           is
           ,
           overwhelmed
           with
           the
           Idolaty
           of
           the
           Gentiles
           ,
           which
           is
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           as
           long
           as
           power
           shall
           bee
           given
           to
           the
           Beast
           to
           make
           warre
           with
           the
           Saints
           ,
           as
           long
           as
           the
           witnesses
           must
           weare
           sackcloth
           ,
           and
           the
           woman
           which
           escaped
           the
           fury
           of
           the
           Ethnicall
           Dragon
           ,
           be
           fed
           in
           the
           wildernesse
           .
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           S.
           Paul
           tels
           us
           ,
           that
           the
           great
           Apostasie
           
           should
           enter
           by
           strong
           delusions
           ,
           by
           signes
           and
           lying
           wonders
           ;
           consider
           then
           what
           corruptions
           of
           the
           Christian
           faith
           were
           thus
           ushered
           in
           to
           begin
           with
           the
           begining
           and
           first
           corruption
           of
           that
           kinde
           ;
           Invocation
           of
           Saints
           ;
           with
           the
           adoration
           of
           their
           shrines
           ;
           and
           reliques
           ;
           how
           were
           these
           advanced
           in
           the
           Church
           ,
           was
           it
           not
           by
           miraculous
           cures
           of
           the
           sick
           ,
           healing
           of
           the
           lame
           ,
           restoring
           of
           the
           blinde
           ,
           yea
           raising
           of
           the
           dead
           (
           as
           seemed
           )
           sometimes
           by
           the
           only
           touch
           and
           aire
           ,
           sometimes
           of
           the
           shrines
           and
           reliques
           of
           soules
           deceased
           ?
           was
           it
           not
           still
           confirmed
           by
           strange
           apparitions
           ,
           and
           other
           meanes
           wonderfull
           to
           heare
           ?
           for
           discovery
           of
           bones
           and
           reliques
           unknowne
           and
           forgotten
           ,
           yea
           of
           men
           whose
           names
           they
           never
           heard
           of
           before
           .
           And
           which
           I
           shall
           shew
           better
           hereafter
           :
           no
           such
           experience
           for
           thirty
           yeares
           together
           observed
           in
           the
           Church
           ,
           untill
           the
           totall
           and
           fixed
           time
           began
           to
           enter
           .
           The
           worshipping
           of
           Images
           ,
           the
           second
           ,
           for
           time
           ,
           of
           the
           Churches
           fornications
           :
           was
           not
           this
           also
           allowed
           and
           at
           length
           fully
           ratified
           by
           like
           signes
           and
           miracles
           ,
           shewed
           upon
           those
           who
           approached
           them
           in
           their
           devotions
           ?
           Read
           the
           legend
           ,
           and
           see
           what
           store
           there
           is
           of
           strong
           delusions
           and
           lying
           wonders
           .
           That
           which
           for
           time
           came
           in
           last
           ,
           but
           deserves
           a
           place
           among
           the
           foremost
           ,
           I
           meane
           the
           Idolatry
           of
           the
           Masse
           ,
           and
           adoration
           of
           the
           breaden
           god
           ;
           search
           and
           see
           if
           it
           be
           not
           also
           thus
           attented
           !
        
         
           If
           all
           this
           be
           true
           ,
           then
           would
           I
           know
           what
           doctrine
           of
           theirs
           besides
           was
           installed
           with
           these
           solemnities
           ;
           there
           is
           but
           one
           only
           left
           for
           exception
           ,
           and
           it
           is
           Purgatory
           ;
           but
           what
           if
           all
           the
           delusions
           of
           Purgatory
           ,
           with
           all
           the
           apparitions
           of
           Purgatorian
           Ghosts
           ,
           were
           but
           an
           indirect
           device
           of
           Satan
           ayming
           partly
           to
           advance
           the
           Masse
           into
           an
           Idoll
           by
           the
           miraculous
           efficacy
           (
           forsooth
           as
           the
           Ghosts
           report
           )
           of
           the
           oblation
           thereof
           for
           them
           ;
           partly
           to
           install
           the
           Sonne
           of
           perdition
           (
           a
           Daemon
           I
           yet
           speak
           not
           of
           ,
           and
           yet
           a
           Daemon
           )
           
             to
             sit
             as
             God
             in
             the
             
             Temple
             and
             Throne
             of
             Christ
             ,
             with
             the
             keyes
             of
          
           *
           
             Hades
             and
             death
          
           ,
           to
           deliver
           them
           ?
           what
           stronger
           presumption
           can
           there
           be
           of
           this
           than
           the
           event
           ;
           and
           that
           the
           errour
           of
           Purgatory
           had
           so
           long
           beene
           working
           before
           the
           Devill
           seemed
           to
           know
           how
           to
           make
           this
           use
           of
           it
           ,
           which
           at
           length
           he
           spied
           out
           and
           plied
           lustily
           with
           signes
           and
           wonders
           .
           If
           all
           this
           be
           true
           ,
           then
           it
           followes
           still
           that
           it
           is
           spirituall
           fornication
           which
           the
           Holy
           Ghost
           in
           Scripture
           intendeth
           ,
           and
           the
           event
           hath
           marked
           out
           for
           the
           soule
           of
           Antichristian
           abomination
           and
           impiety
           ;
           But
           of
           the
           matter
           of
           miracles
           and
           lying
           wonders
           more
           in
           the
           second
           part
           of
           my
           text
           ,
           which
           is
           the
           proper
           place
           thereof
           .
        
         
           Thirdly
           and
           lastly
           ,
           the
           great
           Apostasie
           is
           a
           thing
           proper
           to
           the
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           
             the
             latter
             times
          
           ;
           which
           I
           will
           shew
           (
           when
           I
           come
           at
           it
           )
           to
           be
           the
           last
           times
           of
           the
           fourth
           kingdome
           of
           
             Daniel
             ,
             Dan.
          
           7.25
           .
           
             &
             alibi
          
           ;
           but
           amongst
           all
           other
           corruptions
           ,
           only
           the
           spirituall
           fornication
           of
           the
           Church
           and
           spouse
           of
           Christ
           will
           bee
           found
           proper
           to
           these
           times
           .
        
         
           But
           you
           will
           say
           ,
           if
           Idolatry
           and
           Spirituall
           fornication
           bee
           the
           matter
           ,
           why
           should
           not
           this
           rather
           be
           laid
           upon
           Painims
           ,
           and
           Turks
           ,
           and
           Saracens
           ,
           who
           acknowledge
           not
           Christ
           ,
           rather
           than
           upon
           Christians
           who
           doe
           ?
        
         
           I
           answer
           ,
           S.
           John
           and
           S.
           Paul
           prophesied
           of
           things
           to
           come
           ,
           not
           of
           that
           which
           was
           in
           being
           when
           they
           prophesied
           .
           But
           Ethnicall
           and
           Painim
           Idolatry
           at
           that
           time
           overwhelmed
           the
           whole
           earth
           ,
           yea
           and
           persecuted
           and
           made
           warre
           with
           the
           Saints
           ,
           and
           no
           time
           hath
           yet
           beene
           when
           this
           Idolatry
           was
           not
           to
           be
           found
           .
           It
           must
           needs
           be
           then
           some
           other
           whoredome
           (
           for
           whoredome
           it
           was
           to
           be
           )
           which
           was
           prophesied
           of
           to
           come
           .
        
         
           
           Againe
           ,
           neither
           Saracen
           nor
           Turk
           (
           the
           greatest
           unchristian
           
           States
           since
           Christ
           )
           neither
           of
           these
           ,
           I
           say
           ,
           can
           bee
           Antichrist
           wee
           speak
           of
           ,
           nor
           their
           blasphemy
           that
           mystery
           of
           iniquity
           foretold
           by
           the
           Apostles
           and
           Prophets
           .
        
         
           For
           there
           are
           two
           unquestionable
           charactes
           of
           that
           mystery
           ,
           which
           will
           neither
           of
           them
           ,
           
           without
           doubt
           not
           both
           of
           them
           ,
           agree
           to
           Turk
           or
           Saracen
           ;
           videlicet
           ,
           first
           ,
           that
           it
           should
           sit
           in
           the
           
             Great
             City
          
           ,
           which
           in
           S.
           Johns
           time
           
             reigned
             over
             the
             nations
             of
             the
             earth
             .
          
           Secondly
           ,
           that
           it
           should
           bee
           an
           Apostasie
           from
           the
           Christian
           faith
           once
           embraced
           :
           But
           the
           Turk
           ,
           whatsoever
           he
           be
           ,
           is
           no
           Apostate
           ,
           being
           of
           a
           nation
           which
           never
           was
           Christian
           ;
           nor
           was
           the
           seat
           of
           the
           Saracen
           Empire
           ,
           whilst
           it
           stood
           ,
           either
           in
           the
           old
           or
           new
           Rome
           ,
           or
           neere
           unto
           either
           ;
           
           for
           I
           would
           seeme
           to
           yeeld
           for
           this
           time
           ,
           that
           new
           Rome
           or
           Constantinople
           would
           serve
           the
           turne
           ,
           though
           I
           am
           farre
           enough
           from
           beleeving
           it
           .
           Nor
           will
           I
           alleadge
           ,
           that
           Mahomet
           himselfe
           and
           his
           nation
           were
           both
           Painims
           when
           they
           began
           their
           blasphemies
           ;
           for
           you
           would
           tell
           me
           ,
           that
           Sergius
           the
           Monk
           taught
           him
           to
           make
           the
           Alchoran
           :
           nor
           will
           I
           question
           now
           ,
           whether
           the
           Christian
           or
           Mahumetan
           be
           the
           greater
           Idolater
           ,
           though
           the
           doubt
           might
           soone
           bee
           resolved
           ,
           seeing
           it
           is
           well
           knowne
           the
           Mahumetans
           worship
           no
           Images
           .
           But
           I
           have
           alleaged
           nothing
           save
           what
           is
           without
           exception
           ,
           that
           both
           these
           characters
           I
           spake
           of
           cannot
           bee
           applied
           either
           to
           Turk
           or
           Saracen
           ,
           though
           I
           beleeve
           that
           neither
           can
           be
           .
           When
           I
           spake
           of
           Painims
           and
           Mahumetans
           ,
           I
           would
           have
           you
           remember
           ,
           that
           there
           were
           some
           blasphemous
           sects
           in
           the
           first
           ages
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           which
           are
           no
           more
           to
           be
           accounted
           of
           as
           Christians
           than
           Mahumetans
           and
           Painims
           are
           ;
           nay
           Mahumetanism
           is
           neerer
           Christianity
           than
           many
           of
           them
           were
           :
           for
           amongst
           whom
           the
           Christians
           Deity
           is
           not
           worshipped
           and
           received
           ;
           those
           ,
           though
           they
           spring
           up
           in
           imitation
           of
           Christianity
           ,
           I
           account
           but
           new
           Painim
           blasphemies
           and
           not
           Christian
           heresies
           :
           such
           were
           
           the
           *
           Cerinthians
           ,
           Marcionites
           ,
           Saturnians
           ,
           Valentinians
           ,
           and
           Manichees
           ,
           &c.
           which
           neither
           professed
           the
           same
           Deity
           ,
           nor
           acknowledged
           that
           divine
           word
           which
           we
           Christians
           doe
           ;
           whereas
           yet
           the
           Mahumetans
           worship
           the
           same
           God
           with
           Jewes
           and
           Christians
           ,
           God
           the
           Creatour
           of
           heaven
           and
           earth
           ,
           and
           God
           the
           father
           of
           
             Abraham
             ,
             Isaac
          
           ,
           and
           Jacob
           ;
           howsoever
           they
           conceive
           otherwise
           of
           his
           nature
           and
           properties
           than
           Christians
           doe
           :
           But
           this
           by
           the
           way
           (
           lest
           it
           may
           put
           a
           rub
           in
           our
           discourse
           )
           of
           spirituall
           fornication
           .
        
         
           But
           you
           will
           still
           alledge
           in
           her
           behalfe
           ,
           who
           seemes
           all
           this
           while
           to
           be
           charged
           ,
           that
           Antichrist
           ,
           and
           the
           
             man
             of
             sin
          
           in
           Scripture
           ,
           is
           set
           forth
           as
           the
           most
           hatefull
           and
           execrable
           thing
           that
           can
           be
           in
           the
           eyes
           of
           God
           Almighty
           .
           But
           how
           can
           such
           a
           thing
           be
           said
           ,
           and
           comparatively
           to
           be
           where
           the
           true
           God
           ,
           with
           Christ
           his
           son
           ,
           God
           and
           man
           ,
           are
           in
           any
           sort
           acknowledged
           and
           worshipped
           ?
        
         
           Lord
           !
           that
           the
           whole
           straine
           of
           Scripture
           ,
           in
           the
           Prophets
           especially
           ,
           and
           the
           example
           of
           the
           
             Church
             of
             Israel
          
           ,
           should
           not
           cure
           this
           web
           ,
           and
           take
           this
           filme
           from
           the
           eyes
           of
           men
           !
           Doth
           not
           the
           Lord
           say
           of
           Israel
           ,
           that
           
             he
             had
             chosen
             them
             to
             be
             a
             speciall
             people
             to
             himselfe
             ,
             above
             all
             people
             that
             are
             upon
             the
             face
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
          
           Deut.
           7.6
           .
           
             You
             onely
             have
             I
             knowne
          
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             of
             all
             the
             families
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             Amos
          
           3.2
           .
           And
           is
           not
           Christ
           the
           Lord
           of
           Christians
           ?
           and
           is
           not
           the
           Church
           his
           Spouse
           ?
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           saith
           Saint
           
             Paul
             ,
             Ephes.
          
           5.
           
           
             This
             is
             a
             great
             mystery
          
           No
           warvell
           then
           where
           this
           mystery
           is
           not
           considered
           ,
           if
           the
           
             mystery
             of
             iniquity
          
           be
           not
           understood
           .
           Alas
           poore
           Church
           of
           Israel
           ,
           thy
           case
           it
           seemes
           should
           have
           beene
           a
           very
           hard
           one
           !
           for
           what
           Nation
           in
           the
           world
           ever
           suffered
           so
           much
           rebukes
           ,
           so
           many
           plagues
           ,
           so
           much
           wrath
           ,
           as
           thou
           hast
           done
           ?
           yet
           couldest
           thou
           say
           for
           thy selfe
           ,
           thou
           never
           forsakedst
           the
           true
           God
           altogether
           ,
           but
           wast
           still
           called
           by
           his
           name
           ;
           onely
           thou
           wouldest
           faine
           worship
           him
           in
           Calves
           and
           Images
           ,
           as
           other
           Nations
           thy
           
           neighbours
           did
           their
           Gods
           ;
           thou
           wouldest
           needs
           follow
           the
           fashion
           ,
           and
           this
           was
           thine
           errour
           ;
           thou
           never
           meanedst
           to
           cast
           of
           thy
           Jehovah
           altogether
           ,
           but
           still
           wouldest
           have
           him
           to
           be
           thy
           God
           ,
           and
           thy selfe
           to
           be
           his
           people
           ;
           yet
           thou
           tookest
           this
           liberty
           ,
           to
           have
           other
           gods
           besides
           the
           Lord
           thy
           God
           ,
           viz.
           thy
           Baalims
           and
           
             Daemon
             gods
          
           of
           other
           Nations
           about
           thee
           ,
           and
           yet
           hopedst
           Jehovah
           the
           God
           of
           heaven
           ,
           thy
           onely
           Soveraigne
           God
           ,
           would
           not
           be
           offended
           thereat
           ,
           since
           thou
           retainedst
           him
           in
           chiefe
           place
           and
           honour
           with
           thee
           still
           .
        
         
           Why
           was
           thy
           God
           then
           so
           unkinde
           and
           cruell
           unto
           thee
           ,
           to
           call
           thee
           Whore
           ,
           and
           
             Prostitute
             Whore
          
           ,
           so
           often
           ?
           All
           his
           Prophets
           continually
           baiting
           thee
           with
           that
           so
           foul
           and
           odious
           a
           name
           of
           
             abominable
             Harlot
          
           ?
           Why
           did
           hee
           scatter
           thee
           ,
           and
           cart
           thee
           even
           naked
           among
           the
           Nations
           ,
           afore
           his
           Jealousie
           would
           be
           satisfied
           ?
           for
           it
           seemes
           he
           is
           farre
           more
           indulgent
           to
           his
           
             second
             wife
          
           the
           
             Church
             of
             the
             Gentiles
          
           ,
           for
           she
           worships
           her
           God
           in
           Images
           and
           Crucifixes
           ,
           yea
           calls
           a
           piece
           of
           bread
           ,
           her
           Lord
           and
           her
           god
           ,
           and
           yet
           saith
           ,
           he
           is
           no
           whit
           jealous
           of
           her
           ,
           but
           well
           pleased
           .
           She
           ,
           though
           espoused
           to
           Christ
           Jesus
           the
           Son
           of
           the
           living
           God
           ,
           as
           the
           sole
           Intercessor
           and
           Mediator
           in
           the
           presence
           of
           God
           his
           Father
           ,
           yet
           thinks
           she
           may
           fall
           downe
           to
           Saints
           and
           Angels
           ,
           yea
           to
           as
           many
           Images
           of
           them
           as
           ever
           the
           Jewes
           had
           of
           their
           Baalims
           ,
           or
           the
           Gensiles
           of
           their
           Daemons
           .
        
         
           And
           yet
           forsooth
           because
           she
           makes
           her
           Lord
           the
           chiefest
           still
           in
           the
           honour
           of
           her
           affections
           ,
           and
           uses
           the
           rest
           of
           her
           lovers
           no
           farther
           than
           she
           may
           still
           yeeld
           the
           first
           and
           chiefe
           place
           to
           him
           ,
           she
           verily
           supposes
           he
           is
           no
           whit
           offended
           with
           her
           ;
           whereas
           Israel
           should
           have
           been
           called
           Whore
           a
           thousand
           times
           over
           for
           as
           little
           as
           this
           ;
           yea
           and
           like
           enough
           to
           have
           beene
           carted
           too
           ,
           and
           her
           nose
           slit
           ,
           Ezek.
           23.25
           .
           long
           before
           this
           time
           .
        
         
           Nay
           but
           she
           wipes
           her
           mouth
           ,
           and
           asketh
           why
           her
           Lord
           should
           be
           angry
           ,
           for
           she
           calls
           him
           still
           her
           Lord
           ,
           
           and
           acknowledges
           and
           professeth
           him
           still
           to
           be
           her
           Husband
           .
           If
           he
           hath
           a
           minde
           to
           be
           angry
           with
           any
           ,
           let
           him
           goe
           to
           the
           Turks
           ,
           Tartars
           ,
           and
           other
           Mahumetans
           ,
           or
           to
           the
           Painims
           ,
           who
           will
           not
           acknowledge
           him
           at
           all
           to
           be
           their
           Lord
           God
           ,
           though
           he
           hath
           offered
           himselfe
           ,
           and
           perhaps
           woo●d
           some
           of
           them
           ,
           but
           they
           would
           none
           of
           him
           ,
           but
           married
           themselves
           to
           other
           husbands
           :
           here
           if
           he
           will
           be
           jealous
           ,
           is
           matter
           for
           his
           jealousie
           .
        
         
           But
           thou
           
             Christ-apostaticall
             S●rumpet
          
           ,
           knowest
           thou
           not
           the
           first
           Commandment
           of
           thy
           Christian
           Decalogue
           to
           be
           ,
           
           
             Thou
             shalt
             have
             none
             other
             Gods
             (
             nor
             Christs
             )
             but
             m●
             .
          
           What
           dost
           thou
           with
           so
           many
           Christlings
           ?
           knowest
           thou
           not
           that
           an
           husband
           is
           more
           grieved
           and
           dishonoured
           by
           his
           wises
           adultery
           ,
           than
           if
           any
           other
           woman
           whatsoever
           ,
           yea
           suppose
           his
           kinswomen
           and
           daughters
           ,
           should
           play
           the
           harlots
           ?
        
         
           What
           are
           Turks
           and
           Tartars
           ,
           and
           any
           other
           unbeleeving
           Nation
           under
           heaven
           ,
           unto
           thy
           Lord
           and
           Saviour
           ?
           are
           they
           not
           all
           as
           strangers
           to
           him
           ,
           and
           he
           to
           them
           ?
           But
           as
           for
           thee
           ,
           he
           had
           chosen
           thee
           out
           of
           many
           nations
           to
           espouse
           thee
           to
           himselfe
           ;
           so
           that
           thou
           mayest
           say
           with
           Israel
           ,
           Isay
           63.19
           .
           
             We
             are
             thine
             ,
             but
             as
             for
             them
             ,
             thou
             never
             barest
             rule
             over
             them
             ,
             they
             were
             not
             called
             by
             thy
             name
             :
             but
             to
             thee
             ,
          
           to
           use
           the
           words
           of
           
             Ezekiel
             ,
             c.
          
           16.
           
             he
             sware
             an
             oath
             ,
             and
             entered
             into
             a
             covenant
             with
             thee
             ,
             and
             thou
             becamest
             his
             ,
             and
             wert
             called
             and
             wilt
             still
             be
             called
             by
             his
             name
             :
             Thee
             he
             washed
             with
             water
             ,
             yea
             ,
             throughly
             washed
             thee
             from
             the
             pollution
             of
             thy
             birth
             ,
             and
             anointed
             the●
             with
             oyle
             .
             Thou
             wast
             decked
             with
             gold
             and
             silver
             ,
             and
             thy
             raiment
             was
             of
             fine
             linnen
             ,
             and
             silke
             ,
             and
             broydered
             worke
             ,
             thou
             diddest
             eat
             fine
             flower
             ,
             and
             honey
             ,
             and
             oyle
             ,
             and
             wast
             exceeding
             beautifull
             ,
             and
             didst
             prosper
             into
             a
             kingdome
             .
             And
             thy
             renowne
             went
             forth
             among
             the
             heathen
             for
             thy
             beauty
             ;
             for
             it
             was
             perfect
             through
             the
             comelinesse
             which
             the
             Lord
             thy
             God
             had
             put
             upon
             thee
             .
             But
             thou
             didst
             trust
             i●
             thine
             owne
             beauty
             ,
             and
             playedst
             the
             harlot
             because
             of
             thy
             〈◊〉
             ,
             
             and
             pouredst
             out
             thy
             fornications
             upon
             every
             one
             that
             passed
             by
             .
             And
             of
             thy
             garments
             th●●
             didst
             take
             ,
             and
             deckedst
             thy
             high
             places
             with
             divers
             colours
             ,
             and
             playedst
             the
             har●●
             thereupon
             .
             Thou
             hast
             also
             taken
             thy
             faire
             jewels
             of
             thy
             Lords
             gold
             ,
             and
             of
             thy
             Lords
             silver
             ,
             which
             he
             had
             given
             thee
             ,
             and
             madest
             to
             thy selfe
             images
             of
             men
             ,
             and
             didst
             commit
             whoredome
             with
             them
             .
             And
             tookest
             thy
             braydered
             garments
             and
             coveredst
             them
             :
             and
             thou
             hast
             set
             the
             Lords
             oyle
             and
             hi●
             incense
             before
             them
             .
          
           Judge
           now
           betweene
           the
           Lord
           and
           his
           people
           ye
           that
           have
           wives
           ,
           and
           give
           sentence
           ye
           husbands
           whether
           of
           the
           two
           in
           question
           hath
           most
           dishonoured
           our
           Lord
           and
           Saviour
           ,
           which
           of
           the
           two
           is
           most
           like
           to
           fret
           him
           ,
           and
           kindle
           the
           co●les
           of
           fury
           and
           jealousie
           :
           those
           who
           never
           yet
           were
           in
           covenant
           with
           him
           ,
           nor
           yet
           are
           called
           by
           his
           name
           :
           or
           whether
           his
           Spouse
           ,
           his
           darling
           ,
           his
           beloved
           one
           ,
           to
           whom
           he
           was
           betrothed
           and
           married
           ?
           Judge
           according
           to
           the
           manner
           of
           wedlock
           ,
           and
           the
           notorious
           president
           of
           Israel
           ▪
           he
           that
           is
           a
           father
           (
           we
           say
           )
           is
           best
           able
           to
           understand
           the
           love
           of
           a
           father
           ,
           and
           therefore
           Gods
           love
           to
           his
           children
           for
           the
           like
           reason
           :
           he
           that
           is
           an
           husband
           is
           sensible
           of
           the
           jealousie
           of
           an
           husband
           ,
           and
           so
           of
           the
           case
           of
           Christ
           with
           his
           unfaithfull
           and
           
             trecherous
             Spouse
          
           the
           
             Christian
             Jezabel
          
           .
        
         
           The
           decision
           and
           summe
           of
           all
           this
           ,
           is
           this
           ,
           That
           the
           whoredome
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           God
           is
           a
           spirituall
           adultery
           ;
           and
           therefore
           betweene
           the
           Idolatry
           of
           Christians
           ,
           and
           that
           of
           Infidels
           ,
           and
           of
           Painims
           ,
           is
           as
           much
           difference
           in
           Gods
           esteeme
           ,
           as
           is
           between
           adultery
           and
           simple
           fornication
           .
           The
           one
           ,
           as
           equall
           to
           murther
           ,
           was
           in
           the
           law
           punished
           with
           death
           ;
           the
           other
           with
           a
           much
           lighter
           punishment
           :
           whence
           in
           Ezekiel
           (
           in
           whose
           words
           I
           have
           beene
           so
           long
           )
           chap.
           16.
           ver
           .
           38.
           
           God
           saith
           to
           Jerusalem
           for
           their
           Idolatry
           ,
           that
           he
           would
           
             ●udge
             her
             as
             women
             that
             break
             wedlock
             and
             shed
             blood
             are
             judged
             :
          
           he
           would
           
             give
             her
             blood
             in
             fury
             and
             jealousie
             .
          
           And
           this
           was
           the
           resolution
           
           of
           God
           himselfe
           against
           Israel
           ,
           Amos
           3.1
           ,
           2.
           
           
             Heare
             the
             word
             that
             the
             Lord
             hath
             spoken
             against
             you
             ,
             O
             children
             of
             Israel
             ,
             saying
             ,
             You
             onely
             have
             I
             known
             of
             all
             the
             families
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             therefore
             will
             I
             punish
             you
             for
             all
             your
             iniquities
             .
          
           And
           the
           same
           will
           be
           the
           judgement
           of
           the
           
             Christian
             Jezabel
          
           (
           howsoever
           Painims
           and
           Infidels
           speed
           )
           when
           
             Great
             Babylon
             shall
             come
             in
             remembrance
             before
             God
             ,
             to
             give
             unto
             her
             the
             cup
             of
             the
             wine
             of
             the
             fiercenesse
             of
             his
             wrath
             .
          
           This
           I
           would
           have
           well
           considered
           and
           weighed
           by
           those
           whom
           the
           Mahumetan
           blasphemy
           hath
           so
           dazeled
           ,
           that
           they
           can
           hardly
           beleeve
           that
           so
           hated
           and
           execrable
           a
           name
           of
           Babylon
           should
           belong
           unto
           any
           other
           ,
           unlesse
           there
           be
           yet
           to
           come
           some
           other
           like
           barbarous
           Tyrant
           and
           Seducer
           after
           them
           :
           the
           cause
           of
           which
           errour
           is
           ,
           That
           men
           have
           fancied
           another
           manner
           of
           Antichrist
           than
           the
           Holy
           Ghost
           meant
           of
           ,
           and
           placed
           their
           eyes
           farre
           wide
           of
           the
           ground
           of
           Gods
           hatred
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           nature
           of
           that
           mysterie
           of
           abomination
           .
           But
           Israels
           Apostasie
           ,
           Gods
           Iealousie
           ,
           and
           their
           unparalled
           punishment
           therefore
           ,
           such
           as
           no
           Nation
           in
           the
           world
           ,
           how
           Idolatrous
           soever
           ,
           endured
           besides
           themselves
           ,
           are
           in
           this
           case
           the
           onely
           Polestarre
           to
           direct
           us
           .
        
         
           But
           even
           this
           mistake
           ,
           which
           is
           and
           hath
           beene
           of
           the
           
             mystery
             of
             iniquity
          
           ,
           is
           it selfe
           a
           kinde
           of
           mystery
           ,
           or
           not
           without
           one
           ;
           for
           Antichrist
           is
           a
           Counter-Christ
           ,
           and
           therefore
           his
           comming
           to
           be
           a
           counter-resemblance
           of
           the
           
             comming
             of
             Christ.
          
           
        
         
           Christ
           was
           both
           to
           come
           ,
           and
           accordingly
           looked
           for
           
             in
             the
             last
             times
          
           (
           that
           is
           )
           in
           the
           time
           of
           the
           fourth
           kingdome
           of
           Daniel
           ;
           so
           Antichrist
           and
           his
           mystery
           of
           impiety
           was
           to
           be
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           in
           the
           
             latter
             times
             of
             these
             last
             times
             ,
          
           that
           is
           (
           as
           I
           shall
           better
           shew
           hereafter
           )
           in
           the
           last
           times
           ,
           or
           last
           Scene
           (
           as
           I
           may
           so
           speake
           )
           of
           the
           fourth
           kingdome
           of
           Daniel
           .
           When
           Christ
           came
           the
           Scepter
           was
           to
           depart
           from
           Judah
           ,
           and
           that
           Commonwealth
           to
           be
           dissolved
           :
           so
           when
           Antichrist
           was
           to
           come
           ,
           the
           
             Roman
             
             Empire
          
           was
           to
           fall
           ,
           and
           
             he
             that
             hindered
             was
             to
             be
             taken
             out
             of
             the
             way
             ,
          
           2
           Thes.
           2.8
           .
           The
           Jewes
           expected
           Christ
           to
           come
           when
           he
           did
           come
           ,
           and
           yet
           knew
           him
           not
           when
           he
           was
           come
           ,
           because
           they
           had
           fancied
           the
           manner
           and
           quality
           of
           his
           comming
           like
           some
           temporall
           Monarch
           ,
           with
           armed
           power
           to
           subdue
           the
           earth
           before
           him
           :
           So
           the
           Christians
           ,
           Gods
           second
           Israel
           ,
           looked
           the
           comming
           of
           Antichrist
           should
           be
           at
           that
           time
           when
           he
           came
           indeed
           ,
           and
           yet
           they
           knew
           him
           not
           when
           he
           was
           come
           ,
           because
           they
           had
           fancied
           his
           comming
           as
           of
           some
           barbarous
           Tyrant
           ,
           who
           should
           with
           armed
           power
           not
           onely
           persecute
           and
           destroy
           the
           Church
           of
           Christ
           ,
           but
           almost
           the
           world
           ,
           that
           is
           ,
           they
           looked
           for
           such
           an
           Antichrist
           as
           the
           Jewes
           looked
           for
           a
           Christ.
           
        
         
           Wherefore
           as
           Christ
           came
           unto
           his
           owne
           ,
           and
           his
           own
           received
           him
           not
           ;
           so
           Antichrist
           came
           upon
           those
           who
           were
           not
           his
           owne
           ,
           and
           yet
           they
           eschewed
           him
           not
           :
           but
           yet
           as
           some
           Jewes
           ,
           though
           few
           ,
           knew
           Christ
           when
           he
           came
           ,
           and
           received
           him
           ;
           so
           did
           some
           Christians
           ,
           though
           but
           few
           ,
           keep
           themselves
           from
           the
           pollution
           of
           Antichrist
           .
           Lastly
           ,
           as
           the
           Jewes
           ere
           long
           shall
           acknowledge
           ,
           and
           run
           unto
           him
           ,
           whom
           they
           pierced
           as
           not
           knowing
           him
           ;
           so
           hath
           the
           Christian
           Church
           ,
           for
           a
           great
           part
           ,
           discovered
           that
           Son
           of
           perdition
           ,
           whom
           a
           long
           time
           they
           had
           ignorantly
           worshipped
           ,
           because
           they
           knew
           him
           not
           .
           
             O
             the
             depth
             of
             the
             riches
             both
             of
             the
             wisedome
             and
             knowledge
             of
             God
             ,
             how
             unsearchable
             are
             his
             judgements
             ,
             and
             his
             wayes
             past
             finding
             out
             !
          
           But
           for
           our
           part
           ,
           seeing
           our
           case
           is
           so
           like
           unto
           that
           of
           the
           Jewes
           ,
           let
           their
           lamentable
           and
           wofull
           errour
           ,
           in
           mistaking
           their
           Messiah
           by
           wrongly
           fancying
           him
           ,
           be
           a
           warning
           and
           a
           caveat
           unto
           us
           ,
           that
           we
           likewise
           upon
           like
           conceits
           and
           prejudice
           mistake
           and
           misdeeme
           not
           the
           
             Man
             of
             sinne
          
           .
        
         
           
           
             TINEΣ
             ,
             Some
             .
          
           
             NOw
             I
             come
             unto
             the
             
               second
               point
            
             expressed
             in
             this
             description
             of
             the
             
               great
               Apostasie
               ,
               viz.
            
             the
             Persons
             Revolters
             ,
             they
             shall
             not
             be
             all
             ,
             but
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             some
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             some
             shall
             Apostatize
             :
             some
             ,
             that
             is
             not
             ,
             as
             we
             in
             ou●
             English
             doe
             often
             use
             it
             ,
             
               a
               few
            
             ,
             but
             some
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             
               not
               all
            
             ,
             yet
             some
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             so
             many
             as
             that
             the
             whole
             visible
             Church
             should
             be
             said
             thereof
             to
             be
             Apostatized
             ;
             so
             many
             as
             should
             like
             a
             cloud
             overspread
             the
             face
             of
             the
             Christian
             firmament
             ,
             in
             such
             sort
             ,
             as
             the
             starres
             and
             lights
             therein
             should
             not
             easily
             be
             discerned
             .
             For
             the
             
               great
               defection
            
             so
             much
             prophesied
             of
             ,
             was
             to
             be
             a
             solemne
             and
             generall
             one
             ;
             such
             a
             one
             ,
             as
             wherein
             the
             chiefest
             of
             the
             Churches
             ,
             honoured
             as
             
               a
               mother
               in
               Israel
            
             ,
             should
             become
             a
             
               Babylonish
               whore
               ,
               a
               mother
               of
               harlots
               ,
               and
               of
               the
               abominations
               of
               the
               earth
               ,
               Rev.
            
             17.
             such
             a
             one
             as
             whereby
             the
             
               outmost
               court
               of
               the
               Temple
               of
               God
            
             should
             not
             onely
             be
             prophaned
             ,
             but
             
               trodden
               downe
               by
               Gentilisme
               ,
               Rev.
            
             11.
             such
             a
             one
             as
             the
             world
             is
             said
             
               to
               wonder
               after
               the
               beast
               ,
               and
               to
               worship
               him
            
             ;
             and
             such
             a
             one
             as
             should
             not
             onely
             make
             
               warre
               with
               the
               Saints
               ,
               but
               overcome
               them
               ,
               Rev.
            
             13.
             
             Otherwise
             if
             our
             Apostle
             here
             ,
             and
             Saint
             John
             there
             ,
             should
             meane
             no
             more
             than
             the
             errours
             of
             some
             particular
             ones
             ,
             and
             their
             revolt
             from
             the
             faith
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             they
             should
             make
             either
             no
             prophesie
             at
             all
             ,
             or
             at
             the
             best
             ,
             but
             a
             needlesse
             one
             .
          
           
             For
             who
             knowes
             not
             ,
             that
             in
             Saint
             Pauls
             ,
             Saint
             Johns
             ,
             and
             the
             Apostles
             owne
             times
             ,
             were
             many
             Heresies
             and
             Hereticks
             growne
             up
             as
             weeds
             in
             the
             wheat
             field
             of
             Christ
             ?
             but
             as
             yet
             the
             wheat
             overtopped
             them
             ,
             and
             the
             visible
             body
             of
             the
             Church
             disclaimed
             them
             .
             If
             these
             had
             beene
             the
             worst
             the
             Church
             should
             look
             for
             ,
             the
             Apostles
             should
             seeme
             to
             prophesie
             of
             things
             present
             ,
             and
             not
             ,
             as
             they
             doe
             ,
             of
             things
             to
             come
             ,
             yea
             and
             more
             than
             
             this
             ,
             they
             should
             foretell
             of
             a
             thing
             as
             proper
             and
             peculiar
             to
             the
             last
             times
             ,
             which
             was
             no
             novelty
             in
             their
             owne
             times
             .
          
           
             We
             must
             take
             notice
             therefore
             that
             the
             Apostasie
             and
             corruption
             of
             faith
             so
             much
             prophesied
             of
             ,
             was
             another
             manner
             of
             one
             ,
             than
             that
             which
             was
             so
             frequent
             in
             those
             first
             times
             ;
             such
             a
             kind
             of
             one
             as
             should
             not
             be
             disclaimed
             by
             the
             visible
             body
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             but
             should
             surprise
             ,
             e●lipse
             ,
             and
             overcloud
             the
             beautifull
             face
             thereof
             :
             which
             manner
             of
             defection
             never
             had
             beene
             before
             ,
             nor
             should
             there
             be
             the
             like
             after
             it
             .
          
           
             Now
             that
             the
             word
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             or
             some
             ,
             useth
             in
             Scripture
             to
             to
             imply
             
               no
               small
               number
            
             ,
             but
             onely
             serves
             to
             intimate
             an
             
               exception
               of
               some
               particulars
            
             ,
             though
             there
             were
             but
             two
             or
             three
             to
             be
             excepted
             ,
             I
             will
             make
             manifest
             by
             a
             few
             examples
             ,
             lest
             our
             English
             use
             might
             deceive
             us
             .
          
           
             First
             ,
             Iohn
             6.60
             .
             
               Many
               of
               the
               Disciples
            
             (
             saith
             the
             Text
             )
             
               when
               they
               heard
               this
               ,
               said
               ,
               This
               is
               an
               hard
               saying
            
             :
             and
             verse
             66.
             
             
               Many
               of
               his
               Disciples
               from
               that
               time
               went
               back
               and
               walked
               no
               more
               with
               him
            
             ;
             neverthelesse
             concerning
             these
             many
             Christ
             himselfe
             saith
             verse
             64.
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               but
               there
               are
               some
               of
               you
               which
               beleeve
               not
               :
            
             here
             we
             see
             that
             some
             is
             a
             
               great
               many
            
             :
             So
             Rom.
             11.
             
             S.
             Paul
             there
             saith
             of
             the
             rejection
             of
             the
             Jewes
             ,
             
               some
               of
               the
               branches
               are
               broken
               off
            
             ;
             now
             what
             a
             some
             this
             was
             ,
             appeares
             in
             the
             same
             chapter
             ,
             when
             he
             saith
             ,
             
               God
               hath
               included
               them
               all
               in
               unbeleefe
               ,
               that
               he
               might
               have
               mercy
               upon
               all
            
             :
             but
             to
             search
             no
             further
             ,
             1
             Cor.
             10.
             will
             store
             us
             with
             examples
             ,
             as
             verse
             7.
             
               neither
               be
               yee
               Idolaters
               ,
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               as
               some
               of
               them
               were
               ,
            
             this
             was
             a
             
               great
               some
            
             ,
             for
             Moses
             saith
             of
             it
             ,
             Exod.
             32.3
             .
             
               And
               all
               the
               people
               brake
               off
               their
               golden
               earerings
               and
               brought
               them
               to
               Aaron
            
             :
             in
             verse
             8.
             
             
               Neither
               let
               us
               commit
               fornication
               as
               some
               of
               them
               ,
            
             which
             were
             so
             many
             ,
             Numb
             .
             25.4
             .
             that
             the
             Lord
             said
             to
             
               Moses
               ,
               Take
               all
               the
               heads
               of
               the
               people
               ,
               and
               hang
               them
               up
               before
               the
               Lord
               ,
               that
               the
               fierce
               anger
               of
               the
               Lord
               may
               
               be
               turned
               away
               from
               Israel
               :
            
             and
             verse
             5.
             it
             is
             said
             in
             generall
             ,
             
               And
               Israel
               joyned
               himselfe
               to
               Baal-Peer
               :
            
             againe
             in
             the
             same
             Epistle
             verse
             9.
             it
             is
             said
             ,
             
               Neither
               let
               us
               tempt
               Christ
               ,
               as
               some
               of
               them
               also
               tempted
               and
               were
               destroyed
               of
               Serpents
               :
            
             and
             verse
             10.
             
             
               Neither
               murmure
               as
               some
               of
               them
               also
               murmured
            
             ;
             this
             some
             was
             a
             
               great
               some
            
             indeed
             ,
             even
             all
             the
             people
             ,
             save
             
               Moses
               ,
               Joshua
            
             ,
             and
             Caleb
             ;
             whereof
             is
             said
             Numb
             .
             14.1
             .
             
               And
               all
               the
               Congregation
               lifted
               up
               their
               voyce
               and
               wept
            
             :
             and
             verse
             2.
             
             
               And
               all
               the
               Congregation
               murmured
               against
               Moses
               and
               Aaron
               ,
               and
               the
               whole
               Congregation
               said
               unto
               them
               ,
               would
               God
               that
               wee
               had
               died
               ,
               &c.
            
             wherefore
             they
             were
             as
             largely
             punished
             ,
             all
             of
             them
             dying
             in
             the
             wildernesse
             ,
             Joshua
             and
             Caleb
             excepted
             .
             These
             places
             of
             many
             will
             suffice
             ,
             to
             shew
             that
             the
             word
             [
             some
             ]
             in
             my
             text
             ,
             intends
             not
             to
             extenuate
             the
             number
             of
             Apostates
             ,
             as
             implying
             they
             should
             be
             but
             few
             ,
             but
             only
             shews
             they
             should
             not
             bee
             all
             ,
             for
             where
             the
             Apostates
             are
             but
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             some
             ,
             there
             some
             also
             are
             not
             Apostates
             but
             exempted
             from
             the
             common
             defection
             ,
             wherewith
             the
             rest
             were
             miserably
             overwhelmed
             .
             The
             observation
             therefore
             which
             this
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             affords
             us
             ,
             is
             ,
             
               That
               the
               true
               Church
               of
               Christ
               was
               never
               wholly
               extinguished
               ,
               nor
               the
               light
               of
               his
               Gospell
               ever
               quite
               put
               out
               ,
               no
               ,
               not
               in
               the
               greatest
               darknesse
               that
               ever
               was
               to
               overwhelme
               it
               .
            
             By
             the
             true
             Church
             of
             Christ
             I
             understand
             that
             holy
             society
             and
             company
             of
             beleevers
             ,
             which
             as
             they
             accord
             and
             are
             joyned
             together
             in
             one
             common
             faith
             of
             all
             divine
             truths
             needfull
             to
             salvation
             ,
             so
             are
             they
             also
             free
             from
             the
             fellowship
             of
             such
             erroneous
             abominations
             and
             mortall
             errours
             as
             destroy
             and
             overturne
             it
             .
             This
             is
             that
             society
             ,
             whereof
             by
             the
             grace
             of
             Almighty
             God
             ,
             we
             glory
             to
             be
             the
             members
             ;
             this
             that
             society
             ,
             which
             in
             the
             primitive
             times
             grew
             and
             flourished
             :
             this
             that
             society
             ,
             which
             (
             when
             the
             times
             foretold
             of
             the
             Churches
             eclipse
             came
             ,
             and
             the
             great
             Apostasie
             had
             over-spread
             the
             face
             thereof
             )
             was
             indeed
             much
             impaired
             ,
             indangered
             ,
             and
             obscured
             ,
             but
             
             never
             was
             totally
             extinguished
             ,
             but
             continued
             even
             under
             the
             jurisdiction
             of
             the
             
               man
               of
               sinne
            
             ,
             yea
             in
             Babylon
             it selfe
             where
             he
             had
             this
             throne
             ;
             for
             doth
             not
             Christ
             at
             length
             say
             ?
             Apoc.
             18.4
             .
             
               Come
               out
               of
               her
               my
               people
            
             :
             how
             could
             they
             come
             out
             thence
             unlesse
             they
             had
             beene
             there
             ?
             or
             how
             should
             Antichrist
             
               sit
               in
               the
               Temple
               of
               God
               ,
            
             2
             Thes.
             2.9
             .
             unlesse
             
               Gods
               Temple
            
             were
             even
             there
             where
             Antichrist
             sate
             ?
             as
             a
             few
             living
             embers
             in
             a
             heape
             of
             dying
             ashes
             :
             as
             a
             little
             wheat
             in
             a
             field
             overgrowne
             with
             weeds
             :
             as
             the
             lights
             of
             the
             heaven
             in
             a
             firmament
             overcast
             with
             clouds
             :
             as
             a
             little
             pure
             gold
             in
             a
             great
             masse
             of
             drosse
             and
             mixed
             metal
             :
             such
             was
             the
             faithfull
             company
             of
             Christ
             in
             the
             Apostate
             body
             of
             Christendome
             ,
             the
             *
             
               Virgin
               Church
            
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             Babylon
             .
          
           
             But
             will
             our
             adversaries
             say
             ,
             this
             is
             not
             sufficient
             to
             make
             you
             the
             true
             Church
             of
             Christ
             ,
             because
             some
             of
             you
             have
             alwayes
             beene
             ;
             but
             you
             must
             prove
             also
             that
             you
             have
             alwayes
             visibly
             beene
             ;
             for
             the
             true
             Catholick
             Church
             must
             not
             only
             never
             have
             beene
             interrupted
             or
             extinguished
             ,
             but
             it
             must
             have
             beene
             a
             society
             visibly
             knowne
             unto
             the
             world
             ,
             and
             not
             as
             embers
             in
             the
             ashes
             ,
             but
             as
             a
             burning
             and
             shining
             flame
             .
          
           
             But
             this
             objection
             deserves
             no
             answering
             :
             because
             our
             adversaries
             ,
             howsoever
             they
             would
             dissemble
             it
             ,
             doe
             but
             play
             upon
             the
             present
             advantage
             which
             they
             think
             their
             owne
             Church
             hath
             in
             this
             point
             above
             ours
             :
             otherwise
             ▪
             when
             they
             forget
             the
             contention
             they
             have
             with
             us
             ,
             and
             are
             in
             a
             calmer
             mood
             ,
             they
             can
             bee
             pleased
             to
             deliver
             other
             doctrine
             ,
             which
             (
             if
             they
             would
             be
             ingenuous
             so
             much
             as
             to
             remember
             it
             )
             we
             needed
             not
             such
             a
             stirre
             about
             the
             point
             of
             the
             Churches
             visibility
             ;
             for
             the
             difference
             betweene
             them
             and
             us
             hereabout
             ,
             is
             not
             so
             great
             as
             they
             would
             make
             it
             seeme
             :
             They
             themselves
             and
             the
             Fathers
             also
             teach
             ,
             that
             when
             Antichrist
             commeth
             ,
             the
             visibility
             of
             the
             Church
             shall
             be
             eclipsed
             :
             nay
             ,
             they
             affirme
             more
             than
             we
             usually
             in
             that
             case
             require
             ;
             for
             then
             they
             
             say
             the
             use
             of
             the
             Sacraments
             shall
             cease
             ,
             no
             Eucharist
             ,
             no
             Masse
             ,
             no
             publick
             Assemblies
             ,
             yea
             all
             Ecclesiasticall
             jurisdiction
             shall
             be
             extinguished
             ;
             but
             here
             lies
             all
             the
             difference
             ,
             they
             hold
             the
             glorious
             visibility
             of
             the
             true
             Church
             to
             have
             continued
             from
             the
             beginning
             unto
             this
             present
             ,
             and
             the
             overshadowing
             of
             the
             light
             ,
             and
             eclipse
             of
             the
             glory
             thereof
             under
             Antichrist
             to
             be
             
               yet
               to
               come
            
             ;
             we
             on
             the
             contrary
             maintaine
             ,
             the
             clouding
             of
             the
             Churches
             visibility
             under
             the
             
               man
               of
               sinne
            
             to
             have
             
               beene
               already
            
             ,
             and
             
               some
               part
            
             of
             the
             
               visible
               splendor
            
             thereof
             to
             be
             
               yet
               to
               come
            
             :
             both
             agreeing
             in
             this
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             
               fatall
               Apostasie
            
             the
             Churches
             visibility
             and
             glory
             should
             cease
             ;
             but
             we
             say
             that
             the
             time
             hath
             
               been
               already
            
             ,
             they
             say
             that
             it
             is
             
               yet
               to
               come
            
             ;
             we
             say
             ,
             that
             time
             of
             darknesse
             was
             to
             continue
             
               many
               ages
            
             ,
             they
             say
             ,
             when
             it
             comes
             it
             shall
             
               last
               but
               three
               single
               yeares
               ,
               and
               a
               halfe
               .
            
             Seeing
             therefore
             the
             whole
             controversie
             lies
             in
             the
             point
             of
             time
             ,
             whether
             the
             Churches
             fatall
             Apostasie
             be
             already
             past
             or
             yet
             to
             come
             ,
             it
             would
             be
             much
             the
             shorter
             and
             quicker
             course
             both
             for
             them
             and
             us
             to
             decide
             this
             controversie
             ,
             to
             examine
             the
             condition
             and
             quality
             of
             both
             religions
             by
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             ,
             where
             we
             have
             also
             ,
             as
             Saint
             Peter
             speakes
             ,
             
               a
               most
               sure
               word
               of
               prophesie
               ,
               whereunto
               wee
               shall
               doe
               well
               if
               wee
               take
               heed
               ,
               as
               to
               a
               light
               shining
               in
               a
               dark
               place
               .
            
          
           
             Now
             though
             this
             answer
             be
             sufficient
             enough
             for
             the
             objection
             of
             our
             Adversaries
             ,
             yet
             for
             the
             better
             understanding
             and
             clearer
             insight
             into
             the
             matter
             questioned
             ,
             we
             will
             further
             consider
             whether
             and
             in
             what
             manner
             or
             measure
             our
             Church
             may
             be
             said
             to
             have
             been
             visible
             ,
             during
             the
             prevailing
             Apostasie
             ,
             and
             in
             what
             respects
             again
             it
             was
             not
             visible
             ,
             and
             in
             both
             agreeable
             unto
             the
             state
             of
             the
             true
             Church
             under
             the
             frequent
             Apostasies
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             Israel
             .
          
           
             First
             therefore
             we
             must
             know
             that
             by
             a
             
               visible
               Christian
               society
            
             in
             this
             question
             is
             meant
             a
             society
             or
             company
             of
             Christian
             beleevers
             joyned
             together
             in
             one
             externall
             
             fellowship
             ,
             and
             communion
             of
             the
             same
             publike
             profession
             ,
             and
             rule
             of
             faith
             ,
             use
             of
             Sacraments
             ,
             and
             Ecclesiasticall
             jurisdiction
             ;
             for
             these
             make
             the
             outward
             forme
             ,
             and
             as
             it
             were
             the
             shape
             of
             a
             Church
             ,
             whereby
             this
             society
             is
             discernable
             from
             other
             societies
             of
             men
             :
             so
             that
             a
             society
             by
             this
             outside
             severed
             and
             distinguished
             from
             other
             societies
             ,
             is
             a
             society
             visible
             and
             conspicuous
             to
             other
             societies
             of
             men
             .
             The
             question
             therefore
             is
             ,
             whether
             that
             holy
             society
             of
             beleevers
             before
             mentioned
             ,
             who
             accorded
             together
             in
             one
             common
             faith
             with
             us
             of
             all
             divine
             truths
             needfull
             to
             salvation
             ,
             and
             kept
             themselves
             free
             from
             such
             enormious
             abominations
             and
             mortall
             errours
             which
             we
             now
             disclaime
             ,
             as
             utterly
             annihilating
             that
             common
             faith
             ;
             whether
             such
             a
             society
             as
             this
             has
             beene
             in
             all
             ages
             ,
             joyned
             and
             distinguished
             by
             such
             a
             common
             outside
             from
             other
             companies
             ,
             either
             of
             men
             in
             generall
             ,
             or
             Christians
             in
             speciall
             ?
             or
             in
             shorter
             and
             perhaps
             plainer
             termes
             thus
             :
             whether
             the
             society
             of
             men
             of
             our
             Christian
             beleefe
             hath
             beene
             in
             all
             ages
             for
             the
             outside
             a
             distinct
             ecclesiasticall
             corporation
             from
             other
             societies
             of
             men
             ?
          
           
             My
             answer
             is
             ,
             That
             for
             the
             first
             ages
             it
             was
             so
             not
             only
             thus
             visible
             ,
             but
             easily
             discernable
             from
             all
             other
             societies
             of
             men
             whatsoever
             ;
             but
             afterward
             when
             the
             great
             Apostasie
             we
             spake
             of
             surprized
             and
             deformed
             the
             bountifull
             Spouse
             of
             Christ
             ,
             then
             was
             not
             that
             virgin
             company
             of
             Saints
             ,
             our
             Mother
             ,
             a
             distinct
             externall
             society
             from
             the
             rest
             of
             Christendome
             ,
             but
             a
             part
             ,
             yea
             and
             the
             only
             found
             part
             of
             that
             externall
             and
             visible
             body
             whereof
             our
             adversaries
             boast
             their
             predecessors
             to
             have
             beene
             members
             :
             for
             howsoever
             this
             our
             Virgin-mother
             ,
             for
             the
             internall
             and
             invisible
             communion
             of
             her
             sincere
             and
             unstained
             faith
             ,
             we●e
             a
             distinct
             and
             severed
             company
             from
             the
             rest
             with
             whom
             she
             lived
             ,
             yet
             ,
             for
             the
             common
             principles
             of
             the
             Christian
             faith
             still
             acknowledged
             in
             that
             corrupt
             body
             of
             Christendome
             ,
             she
             retained
             communion
             
             with
             them
             ;
             and
             for
             the
             most
             part
             of
             that
             time
             of
             darknesse
             continued
             an
             externall
             part
             of
             the
             same
             visible
             body
             with
             the
             rest
             in
             grosse
             call'd
             Christians
             ,
             as
             being
             begotten
             by
             the
             same
             Sacrament
             of
             Baptisme
             (
             as
             the
             Israelites
             in
             like
             case
             of
             Circumcision
             )
             taught
             in
             some
             part
             by
             the
             same
             word
             ,
             and
             Pastours
             still
             continued
             amongst
             them
             ,
             and
             submitting
             to
             the
             same
             jurisdiction
             and
             government
             ,
             so
             farre
             as
             these
             or
             any
             of
             these
             had
             yet
             some
             soundnesse
             remaining
             in
             them
             ;
             but
             for
             the
             rest
             which
             was
             not
             compatible
             with
             her
             sincere
             and
             unstained
             faith
             ,
             and
             which
             annihilated
             in
             those
             it
             surprised
             ,
             even
             those
             common
             grounds
             of
             Christianity
             otherwise
             outwardly
             professed
             ,
             she
             with
             her
             children
             either
             wisely
             avoided
             all
             communion
             with
             it
             ,
             or
             if
             they
             could
             not
             ,
             then
             patiently
             suffered
             for
             their
             conscience
             sake
             under
             the
             hands
             of
             Tyrants
             ,
             called
             Christians
             ,
             untill
             that
             Tyranny
             growing
             insupportable
             ,
             and
             that
             mortall
             contagion
             unavoidable
             ,
             it
             pleased
             God
             ,
             lest
             we
             might
             have
             beene
             as
             Sodome
             and
             Gomorrah
             ,
             to
             begin
             to
             call
             us
             thence
             at
             the
             time
             appointed
             ,
             unto
             a
             greater
             liberty
             ,
             as
             we
             see
             this
             day
             .
             As
             therefore
             when
             a
             little
             gold
             is
             mixed
             with
             a
             great
             quantity
             of
             base
             and
             counterfeit
             metall
             ,
             so
             that
             of
             both
             is
             made
             but
             one
             masse
             or
             lump
             ;
             each
             metall
             we
             know
             still
             retaines
             its
             nature
             diverse
             from
             the
             other
             ,
             and
             yet
             outwardly
             and
             visibly
             is
             not
             to
             be
             discerned
             the
             one
             from
             the
             other
             ,
             but
             both
             are
             seene
             together
             as
             they
             are
             outwardly
             one
             ,
             but
             cannot
             be
             distinguished
             by
             the
             eye
             ,
             as
             they
             are
             diverse
             and
             severall
             ;
             the
             gold
             is
             visible
             as
             it
             is
             one
             masse
             ,
             and
             under
             the
             same
             outside
             and
             figure
             with
             the
             rest
             ,
             yet
             it
             is
             truly
             invisible
             as
             it
             is
             diverse
             from
             the
             rest
             :
             But
             when
             the
             Refiner
             comes
             and
             severs
             them
             ,
             then
             will
             each
             metall
             appeare
             in
             his
             own
             colours
             ,
             and
             put
             on
             his
             own
             outside
             ,
             and
             so
             become
             visible
             apart
             from
             the
             rest
             .
             Such
             is
             the
             case
             here
             ,
             and
             such
             was
             the
             state
             and
             condition
             of
             the
             Church
             in
             the
             prevailing
             and
             great
             Apostasie
             ;
             the
             purer
             metall
             of
             the
             Christians
             visible
             body
             outwardly
             was
             not
             discernable
             from
             the
             base
             
             and
             counterfeit
             ,
             while
             one
             outside
             covered
             them
             ,
             and
             so
             much
             the
             rather
             ,
             because
             the
             Apostate
             part
             in
             a
             great
             proportion
             exceeding
             the
             sound
             ,
             made
             it
             imperceptible
             ;
             but
             when
             the
             time
             of
             refining
             came
             ,
             then
             was
             our
             Church
             not
             first
             founded
             in
             the
             true
             faith
             (
             God
             forbid
             )
             but
             a
             part
             of
             the
             Christian
             body
             newly
             refined
             from
             such
             corruptitions
             as
             time
             had
             gathered
             ,
             even
             as
             
               gold
               refined
            
             begins
             no
             then
             first
             to
             be
             gold
             ,
             though
             it
             begin
             but
             then
             to
             be
             
               refined
               gold
            
             .
          
           
             Whatsoever
             we
             have
             hitherto
             spoken
             of
             the
             state
             of
             the
             true
             beleevers
             under
             the
             Apostasie
             of
             Antichrist
             ,
             is
             the
             same
             which
             befell
             the
             true
             Israelites
             in
             the
             Apostasie
             of
             Israel
             .
             And
             doth
             not
             Saint
             Peter
             intimate
             that
             the
             Apost●sie
             which
             should
             betide
             Christians
             should
             be
             like
             to
             that
             which
             we
             reade
             to
             have
             befallen
             Israel
             ,
             2
             Pet.
             2.1
             .
             
               There
               were
            
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             
               false
               Prophets
               also
               among
               the
               people
               i
               e.
            
             Israelites
             )
             
               even
               as
               there
               shall
               be
               false
               teachers
               among
               you
               ,
               who
               privily
               shall
               bring
               in
               damnable
               heresies
               ,
               even
               denying
               the
               Lord
               that
               bought
               them
               .
            
             If
             the
             Apostasie
             of
             Christians
             were
             to
             be
             of
             the
             same
             stamp
             with
             that
             of
             Israel
             ,
             and
             the
             Heresies
             brought
             into
             Christendome
             by
             the
             false
             Doctors
             of
             Babylon
             ,
             like
             unto
             those
             wherewith
             the
             false
             Prophets
             of
             Israel
             infected
             and
             poysoned
             the
             ancient
             people
             of
             God
             ;
             surely
             we
             cannot
             finde
             a
             better
             patterne
             whereby
             to
             know
             what
             was
             the
             estate
             and
             condition
             of
             the
             unstained
             Christian
             beleevers
             under
             that
             Apostasie
             of
             the
             man
             of
             sinne
             ,
             than
             that
             which
             was
             of
             the
             true
             Israelites
             under
             the
             Apostasie
             of
             Israel
             :
             for
             the
             right
             understanding
             whereof
             we
             must
             alwayes
             remember
             ,
             That
             the
             Israelitish
             Church
             did
             at
             no
             time
             altogether
             renounce
             the
             true
             and
             living
             God
             ,
             not
             in
             their
             worst
             times
             ,
             but
             in
             their
             owne
             conceit
             and
             profession
             acknowledged
             him
             still
             ,
             and
             were
             cald
             his
             people
             and
             he
             their
             God
             ,
             though
             they
             worshipped
             others
             beside
             him
             :
             so
             Christians
             in
             their
             Apostasie
             neither
             did
             nor
             were
             to
             make
             an
             absolute
             Apostasie
             from
             God
             the
             Father
             ,
             and
             Christ
             their
             Redeemer
             ,
             but
             in
             an
             
             outward
             profession
             still
             to
             acknowledge
             him
             ,
             and
             to
             be
             cald
             Christians
             ,
             though
             by
             their
             Idolatry
             and
             spirituall
             whoredomes
             they
             
               denied
               the
               Lord
               that
               bought
               them
               (
               i.
               e.
               )
            
             whom
             they
             profest
             to
             be
             their
             Redeemer
             ;
             just
             as
             Israel
             for
             the
             like
             is
             said
             to
             have
             forsaken
             the
             Lord
             their
             God
             that
             brought
             them
             out
             of
             the
             Land
             of
             Egypt
             :
             here
             therefore
             the
             case
             of
             both
             is
             alike
             ,
             let
             us
             also
             see
             the
             rest
             .
             You
             ask
             ,
             where
             was
             the
             true
             Church
             we
             speake
             of
             in
             Antichrists
             time
             ?
             I
             ask
             likewise
             ,
             where
             was
             the
             company
             of
             true
             worshippers
             in
             Ahabs
             time
             ?
             was
             it
             not
             so
             covered
             and
             scattered
             under
             the
             Apostate
             Israelites
             ,
             that
             Elias
             himselfe
             ,
             who
             was
             one
             of
             it
             ,
             could
             scarce
             finde
             it
             ?
             
               I
               am
               very
               jealous
            
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             
               for
               the
               Lord
               God
               of
               hoasts
               ,
               because
               the
               children
               of
               Israel
               have
               forsaken
               thy
               Covenant
               ,
               throwne
               downe
               thy
               Altars
               ,
               and
               slaine
               thy
               Prophets
               with
               the
               sword
               ,
               and
               I
               even
               I
               alone
               am
               left
               ,
               and
               they
               seeke
               my
               life
               to
               take
               it
               away
               ,
            
             1
             Kings
             19.14
             .
             yet
             the
             Lord
             tells
             him
             verse
             18.
             
             
               I
               have
               yet
               left
               me
            
             7000.
             
               in
               Israel
               ,
               all
               the
               knees
               which
               have
               not
               bowed
               unto
               Baal
               ,
               and
               every
               mouth
               which
               hath
               not
               kissed
               him
               :
            
             yet
             I
             trow
             these
             7000.
             were
             not
             outwardly
             severed
             from
             the
             rest
             of
             Israel
             ,
             but
             remained
             still
             externall
             members
             of
             the
             same
             visible
             body
             with
             them
             .
             But
             you
             will
             except
             ,
             that
             the
             true
             and
             unstained
             Church
             in
             Judah
             was
             still
             visible
             and
             apparent
             :
             I
             aske
             you
             then
             ,
             where
             was
             the
             company
             of
             the
             true
             worshippers
             of
             Jehovah
             in
             Manasses
             time
             ,
             the
             worst
             time
             of
             all
             others
             ?
             when
             the
             ten
             Tribes
             were
             carried
             captive
             ,
             and
             but
             Judah
             and
             Benjamin
             only
             left
             ,
             and
             they
             ,
             as
             far
             as
             the
             eye
             of
             man
             can
             see
             ,
             wholly
             and
             generally
             fallen
             from
             the
             Lord
             their
             God
             to
             all
             maner
             of
             Idols
             and
             Idolatries
             ,
             
             like
             unto
             the
             abominations
             of
             the
             heathen
             ,
             whom
             the
             Lord
             had
             cast
             out
             before
             the
             children
             of
             Israel
             ,
             when
             in
             the
             Temple
             it selfe
             ,
             the
             only
             place
             where
             the
             true
             God
             was
             to
             be
             worshipped
             legally
             ,
             were
             Idolatrous
             Altars
             erected
             ,
             even
             in
             the
             house
             whereof
             the
             Lord
             had
             said
             ,
             
               In
               this
               house
               and
               in
               Jerusalem
               will
               I
               put
               my
               name
               for
               ever
            
             ;
             even
             in
             this
             house
             ,
             this
             holy
             
             house
             ,
             were
             Idols
             and
             graven
             Images
             erected
             ,
             and
             in
             both
             Courts
             Altars
             to
             Baalim
             ,
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             the
             Moone
             ,
             and
             the
             whole
             hoast
             of
             heaven
             ,
             the
             like
             whereof
             never
             had
             beene
             untill
             that
             time
             .
             Besides
             also
             ,
             who
             is
             able
             to
             name
             the
             man
             almost
             50
             yeeres
             together
             that
             remained
             a
             faithfull
             servant
             and
             true
             worshipper
             of
             the
             living
             God
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             this
             hideous
             profanation
             ?
             Nor
             is
             it
             easie
             to
             be
             conceived
             how
             it
             was
             possible
             all
             that
             time
             to
             offer
             any
             legall
             sacrifice
             without
             Idolatry
             ,
             when
             Gods
             owne
             Temple
             and
             house
             was
             made
             a
             den
             of
             Idols
             ,
             nay
             his
             Altar
             ,
             the
             onely
             Altar
             of
             Israel
             destroyed
             ,
             to
             make
             roome
             for
             Altars
             erected
             to
             Idols
             ,
             as
             may
             be
             gathered
             2
             Chron.
             33.15
             ,
             16.
             where
             was
             the
             true
             Church
             of
             Israel
             now
             ?
             or
             had
             the
             Lord
             no
             Church
             at
             all
             ?
             yes
             certainely
             ,
             he
             had
             a
             Church
             and
             a
             company
             which
             defiled
             not
             their
             garments
             ,
             a
             company
             (
             I
             say
             )
             but
             not
             visibly
             distinguished
             from
             the
             rest
             of
             their
             nation
             ,
             but
             hidden
             as
             it
             were
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             that
             Apostate
             body
             ,
             and
             yet
             knowne
             together
             with
             the
             rest
             to
             be
             Israelites
             and
             people
             of
             Jehovah
             ;
             but
             knowne
             to
             God
             only
             and
             themselves
             to
             be
             true
             Israelites
             and
             faithfull
             servants
             to
             Jehovah
             their
             God.
             And
             that
             such
             a
             company
             there
             was
             ,
             and
             a
             strong
             party
             too
             ,
             though
             not
             seene
             ,
             appeared
             presently
             upon
             the
             death
             of
             Manasses
             and
             his
             wicked
             son
             ,
             when
             Josiah
             began
             to
             reign
             at
             eight
             yeares
             of
             age
             ,
             for
             they
             then
             prevailed
             even
             in
             the
             Court
             it selfe
             ,
             and
             so
             brought
             up
             the
             King
             ,
             that
             even
             yet
             while
             he
             was
             young
             ,
             in
             the
             eighth
             yeare
             of
             his
             reigne
             ,
             he
             began
             to
             seek
             after
             the
             Lord
             God
             of
             David
             his
             father
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             twelfth
             yeare
             to
             make
             a
             publick
             and
             powerfull
             reformation
             ,
             such
             as
             the
             like
             was
             never
             done
             before
             him
             .
             Could
             all
             this
             have
             been
             done
             so
             soon
             ,
             and
             by
             a
             King
             so
             young
             in
             yeares
             ,
             and
             to
             carry
             all
             before
             it
             like
             a
             torrent
             ,
             unlesse
             there
             had
             beene
             a
             strong
             party
             ,
             which
             now
             having
             a
             King
             for
             them
             ,
             began
             quickly
             to
             shew
             themselves
             ,
             and
             to
             sway
             the
             state
             ,
             though
             before
             they
             were
             hardly
             to
             be
             seene
             .
          
           
           
             When
             therefore
             our
             adversaries
             ask
             us
             where
             our
             Church
             was
             before
             Luther
             ,
             we
             see
             by
             this
             what
             we
             have
             to
             answer
             .
          
           
             OF
             the
             two
             first
             particulars
             of
             the
             foure
             ,
             whereby
             the
             
               great
               Apostasie
            
             of
             Christian
             beleevers
             is
             here
             deciphered
             ,
             I
             have
             spoken
             sufficiently
             ;
             viz.
             first
             ,
             for
             the
             kind
             and
             quality
             thereof
             ,
             it
             should
             be
             a
             new
             
               Doctrine
               of
               Daemons
            
             :
             secondly
             ,
             that
             for
             the
             
               persons
               revolting
            
             ,
             they
             should
             not
             be
             all
             ,
             but
             some
             .
             Now
             I
             am
             to
             speak
             of
             the
             third
             ,
             the
             
               time
               when
               ,
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               in
               the
               latter
               times
               .
            
          
           
             For
             the
             easier
             understanding
             whereof
             ,
             we
             must
             know
             that
             speeches
             of
             
               last
               times
            
             in
             Scripture
             meane
             sometimes
             a
             
               continuation
               or
               length
               of
               time
            
             ,
             sometimes
             an
             
               end
               of
               time
            
             :
             A
             
               continuation
               of
               time
            
             I
             meane
             ,
             as
             when
             we
             say
             the
             winter
             is
             the
             last
             time
             or
             season
             of
             the
             yeare
             ,
             or
             old
             age
             the
             
               latter
               time
            
             of
             life
             ,
             neither
             of
             them
             being
             the
             very
             end
             ,
             but
             a
             space
             of
             time
             next
             the
             end
             ,
             which
             therefore
             ,
             in
             respect
             of
             some
             
               whole
               systeme
               of
               time
            
             ,
             whereof
             it
             is
             the
             last
             part
             ,
             is
             truly
             termed
             the
             last
             time
             thereof
             .
             Mans
             life
             is
             a
             systeme
             of
             
               divers
               ages
            
             ,
             the
             
               last
               space
            
             whereof
             is
             the
             
               last
               time
            
             of
             life
             .
             The
             yeare
             is
             a
             systeme
             of
             foure
             seasons
             ,
             and
             therefore
             the
             
               last
               season
            
             thereof
             ,
             winter
             ,
             may
             be
             cald
             the
             
               last
               time
            
             of
             the
             yeare
             .
             But
             by
             an
             
               end
               of
               time
            
             I
             meanethe
             very
             expiring
             of
             time
             ,
             as
             the
             
               last
               day
            
             of
             December
             is
             the
             end
             or
             
               last
               time
            
             of
             the
             yeare
             ;
             the
             moment
             when
             a
             man
             dies
             ,
             is
             the
             
               last
               time
               (
               i.
               e.
            
             )
             the
             end
             of
             his
             life
             .
             Now
             in
             the
             New
             Testament
             ,
             when
             by
             mention
             of
             
               last
               time
            
             is
             meant
             an
             end
             or
             
               terminus
               temporis
            
             ,
             I
             observe
             it
             to
             be
             exprest
             in
             the
             
               singular
               number
            
             ▪
             as
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             being
             foure
             times
             mentioned
             in
             the
             sixth
             of
             John
             ,
             and
             once
             in
             the
             eleventh
             ,
             is
             in
             every
             one
             of
             them
             meant
             of
             the
             day
             of
             the
             resurrection
             at
             the
             end
             of
             the
             world
             ;
             
               I
               will
               raise
               him
               up
            
             ,
             saith
             our
             Saviour
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             John●
             .
             39
             ,
             40.44
             ,
             54.
             
             And
             Marthae
             of
             her
             brother
             
               Lazarus
               ,
               I
               know
            
             (
             saith
             she
             )
             
               he
               shall
               rise
               againe
               in
               the
               resurrection
               ,
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               
               at
               the
               last
               day
               ,
               John
            
             11.24
             .
             So
             1
             Pet.
             1.5
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             
               the
               last
               time
            
             ,
             is
             used
             in
             the
             selfe
             same
             sense
             ,
             being
             spoken
             of
             the
             
               incorruptible
               inheritance
               reserved
               in
               heaven
               ,
               and
               to
               be
               revealed
            
             (
             saith
             the
             Apostle
             )
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             
               in
               the
               last
               time
            
             ;
             in
             all
             which
             is
             meant
             the
             end
             of
             the
             world
             .
             But
             in
             1
             John
             2.18
             .
             we
             have
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             
               the
               last
               houre
               ;
               Little
               children
               it
               is
               the
               last
               houre
               ,
            
             where
             no
             doubt
             he
             meaneth
             an
             end
             of
             
               some
               time
            
             ,
             but
             not
             an
             end
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             which
             was
             then
             afarre
             off
             ;
             but
             an
             end
             of
             their
             time
             ,
             to
             whom
             he
             then
             wrote
             his
             Epistle
             (
             
               i.
               e.
            
             )
             an
             end
             of
             the
             
               Jewish
               state
            
             ,
             and
             religion
             ,
             which
             was
             then
             at
             the
             very
             doore
             :
             which
             exposition
             I
             will
             make
             more
             plain
             hereafter
             .
          
           
             But
             when
             a
             continuation
             or
             
               longer
               space
               of
               time
            
             is
             signified
             ,
             then
             I
             find
             the
             
               plurall
               number
            
             to
             be
             used
             ,
             as
             1
             Pet.
             1.20
             .
             of
             the
             Incarnation
             of
             Christ
             it
             is
             said
             ,
             that
             
               he
               was
               fore-ordained
               before
               the
               foundation
               of
               the
               world
               ,
               but
               was
               made
               manifest
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               in
               the
               last
               times
               ,
            
             which
             times
             have
             continued
             these
             1600
             yeares
             at
             the
             least
             :
             so
             Heb.
             1.2
             .
             God
             (
             saith
             Saint
             
               Paul
               )
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               in
               these
               last
               dayes
               hath
               spoken
               unto
               us
               by
               his
               sonne
            
             ;
             and
             2
             Tim.
             3.1
             .
             
               This
               know
               also
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               that
               in
               the
               last
               dayes
               perillous
               times
               shall
               come
               .
            
             Again
             ,
             Acts.
             2.17
             .
             
               In
               the
               last
               dayes
               I
               will
               poure
               out
               my
               spirit
               upon
               all
               flesh
            
             ;
             and
             in
             2
             Pet.
             3.3
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             
               in
               the
               last
               dayes
               shall
               come
               scoffers
               .
            
             And
             so
             in
             my
             Text
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               In
               the
               latter
               times
               some
               shall
               revolt
               from
               the
               faith
               ,
               and
               give
               heed
               to
               doctrines
               of
               Daemons
               .
            
          
           
             Whatsoever
             the
             validity
             of
             this
             observation
             be
             ,
             for
             the
             rest
             I
             make
             no
             question
             but
             it
             will
             be
             granted
             ,
             that
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             in
             my
             Text
             means
             some
             
               continued
               space
            
             of
             time
             ,
             and
             not
             
               terminus
               temporis
            
             ,
             or
             the
             
               very
               end
               of
               time
            
             :
             which
             therefore
             presupposed
             ,
             I
             approach
             one
             step
             neerer
             ,
             laying
             this
             for
             a
             second
             ground
             of
             our
             discovery
             ,
             that
             these
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             whereof
             Saint
             Paul
             speakes
             and
             meanes
             ,
             were
             times
             not
             
               then
               present
            
             ,
             but
             
               afterward
               to
               come
            
             ;
             for
             the
             words
             of
             the
             Text
             are
             not
             a
             narration
             of
             things
             present
             ,
             but
             a
             prediction
             
             (
             as
             I
             have
             already
             admonished
             )
             of
             what
             should
             betide
             the
             Christian
             faith
             in
             after
             times
             ,
             yet
             notwithstanding
             were
             the
             times
             wherein
             Saint
             
               Paul
               lived
            
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             times
             of
             Christianity
             ,
             the
             
               last
               times
            
             ,
             and
             so
             stiled
             in
             Scripture
             even
             by
             our
             Apostle
             himselfe
             ,
             as
             by
             some
             of
             the
             fore-cited
             examples
             evidently
             appeareth
             :
             wherefore
             it
             must
             needs
             follow
             ,
             that
             times
             here
             meant
             and
             mentioned
             in
             my
             Text
             ,
             are
             not
             the
             
               last
               times
            
             in
             generall
             and
             simply
             ,
             but
             the
             
               last
               times
            
             in
             speciall
             and
             
               comparatively
               (
               i.
               e.
            
             )
             the
             
               latter
               times
            
             of
             the
             
               last
               times
            
             .
             That
             as
             the
             
               last
               times
            
             in
             generall
             were
             the
             times
             wherein
             Christ
             the
             Sunne
             of
             righteousnesse
             was
             to
             be
             revealed
             ,
             and
             his
             kingdome
             founded
             in
             the
             world
             ;
             so
             the
             
               latter
               times
            
             of
             these
             
               last
               times
            
             should
             be
             the
             times
             wherein
             the
             Apostasie
             of
             the
             
               Christian
               faith
            
             should
             prevaile
             ,
             and
             that
             wicked
             one
             usurp
             the
             throne
             of
             Christ.
             
          
           
             Before
             therefore
             that
             we
             can
             know
             what
             are
             the
             
               last
               times
               comparatively
               (
               i
               e.
               )
            
             the
             
               latter
               times
            
             ,
             or
             the
             last
             of
             the
             last
             ,
             we
             must
             first
             understand
             ,
             what
             are
             the
             
               last
               times
               simply
            
             and
             in
             generall
             ,
             why
             so
             called
             ,
             whence
             reckoned
             ,
             and
             how
             limited
             ;
             for
             then
             will
             these
             
               latter
               times
            
             in
             my
             Text
             ,
             which
             are
             the
             
               last
               part
            
             of
             them
             ,
             be
             easily
             found
             ,
             and
             in
             a
             manner
             demonstrated
             .
          
           
             
             As
             for
             the
             
               last
               times
            
             therefore
             in
             generall
             ,
             most
             use
             to
             describe
             them
             onely
             thus
             ,
             to
             be
             the
             times
             of
             the
             kingdome
             of
             Christ
             which
             began
             at
             his
             passion
             to
             continue
             to
             the
             end
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             which
             in
             respect
             that
             it
             succeeds
             the
             legall
             worship
             and
             no
             other
             shall
             succeed
             ,
             it
             is
             therefore
             the
             
               last
               time
            
             .
             In
             like
             manner
             the
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             allotted
             to
             the
             man
             of
             sinne
             are
             (
             as
             I
             take
             it
             )
             usually
             no
             otherwise
             described
             ,
             then
             to
             be
             the
             times
             wherein
             the
             Apostasie
             should
             appeare
             ,
             which
             in
             that
             it
             should
             immediately
             precede
             the
             second
             coming
             of
             Christ
             ,
             is
             therefore
             to
             be
             esteemed
             the
             last
             times
             of
             all
             ;
             but
             these
             descriptions
             are
             
               obscurum
               per
               magis
               obscurum
            
             ,
             they
             doe
             declare
             an
             obscure
             thing
             by
             that
             which
             was
             and
             is
             more
             obscure
             than
             it
             ,
             and
             therefore
             
             come
             short
             of
             making
             good
             the
             intent
             of
             the
             
               Holy
               Ghost
            
             in
             his
             so
             often
             mention
             of
             the
             
               last
               times
            
             ,
             especially
             in
             the
             New
             Testament
             ;
             for
             the
             
               lact
               times
            
             or
             
               fulnesse
               of
               time
            
             were
             both
             a
             ground
             of
             the
             Jewes
             expectation
             of
             Christ
             when
             he
             came
             ,
             and
             are
             without
             doubt
             so
             often
             propounded
             and
             alledged
             by
             the
             Apostles
             for
             a
             confirmation
             of
             the
             truth
             of
             his
             comming
             :
             
             but
             if
             the
             
               last
               times
            
             could
             not
             be
             knowne
             but
             by
             his
             comming
             ,
             how
             should
             his
             comming
             be
             knowne
             by
             them
             ?
             so
             also
             the
             Holy
             Ghost
             in
             my
             Text
             mentions
             these
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             for
             an
             argument
             or
             signe
             of
             the
             Apostasie
             to
             fall
             out
             therein
             ,
             or
             for
             a
             note
             or
             mark
             of
             time
             wherein
             we
             should
             look
             for
             it
             ,
             and
             therefore
             as
             forewarned
             beware
             of
             being
             carried
             away
             in
             that
             defection
             ;
             but
             if
             these
             times
             cannot
             be
             knowne
             nor
             described
             any
             other
             way
             than
             by
             the
             defection
             to
             fall
             out
             in
             them
             ,
             we
             should
             be
             never
             a
             whit
             the
             nearer
             ,
             and
             this
             mark
             of
             time
             which
             the
             Holy
             Ghost
             gives
             us
             would
             stand
             us
             in
             no
             stead
             at
             all
             .
             Let
             us
             therefore
             now
             take
             this
             as
             a
             truth
             to
             be
             supposed
             ,
             that
             the
             times
             are
             set
             out
             unto
             us
             to
             be
             as
             markes
             to
             informe
             us
             when
             that
             should
             come
             to
             passe
             which
             was
             to
             fall
             out
             in
             them
             ,
             and
             not
             the
             things
             which
             were
             to
             befall
             ,
             intended
             for
             signes
             to
             know
             the
             times
             by
             ;
             and
             therefore
             we
             are
             not
             to
             doubt
             but
             that
             the
             Holy
             Ghost
             hath
             somewhere
             else
             ,
             by
             some
             other
             marks
             and
             grounds
             of
             computation
             ,
             made
             knowne
             unto
             us
             when
             to
             reckon
             
               both
               the
               last
               times
            
             ,
             wherein
             was
             foretold
             that
             Christ
             should
             be
             anointed
             ,
             and
             these
             
               latter
               times
               of
               them
            
             wherein
             the
             Christian
             Apostasie
             should
             be
             revealed
             ,
             that
             so
             we
             might
             have
             a
             sure
             beliefe
             in
             the
             one
             ,
             and
             a
             certaine
             and
             sufficient
             mark
             when
             to
             beware
             of
             the
             other
             .
          
           
             The
             prophanation
             of
             the
             legall
             Sanctuary
             ,
             and
             trampling
             down
             the
             holy
             people
             by
             
               Antiochus
               Epiphanes
            
             was
             marked
             out
             in
             Daniels
             prophesie
             by
             the
             like
             circumstance
             and
             determination
             of
             time
             ,
             as
             is
             this
             Apostasie
             here
             in
             our
             Apostles
             prediction
             ,
             Dan.
             8.23
             .
             
               In
               the
               latter
               time
            
             ,
             or
             ,
             
               in
               the
               
               latter
               end
               of
               the
               kingdome
               of
               Graecia
               ,
            
             
             
               a
               King
               of
               a
               fierce
               countenance
               shall
               stand
               up
               ,
               viz.
            
             he
             who
             should
             
               magnifie
               himselfe
               against
               the
               Prince
               of
               the
               hoast
               of
               heaven
               ,
               and
               take
               away
               the
               daily
               sacrifice
               ,
               &c.
            
             as
             it
             is
             in
             the
             vision
             which
             was
             foreshewed
             of
             him
             ver
             .
             10.11
             .
             where
             it
             would
             be
             preposterous
             to
             think
             ,
             that
             this
             
               latter
               time
            
             or
             end
             of
             the
             Greekes
             kingdome
             could
             not
             be
             defined
             otherwise
             than
             by
             the
             event
             to
             fall
             out
             therein
             ,
             and
             not
             rather
             conceive
             that
             this
             determination
             of
             time
             ,
             being
             such
             as
             might
             otherwise
             well
             enough
             be
             knowne
             ,
             was
             therefore
             intended
             for
             a
             character
             to
             observe
             the
             event
             by
             .
             For
             when
             was
             this
             latter
             end
             of
             the
             Greekes
             kingdome
             to
             be
             taken
             notice
             of
             ,
             but
             then
             when
             they
             should
             see
             that
             kingdome
             begin
             to
             be
             given
             to
             another
             people
             ?
             when
             the
             
               fourth
               kingdome
            
             ,
             the
             Romane
             state
             ,
             should
             once
             begin
             to
             encroach
             upon
             the
             third
             ,
             especially
             when
             they
             should
             see
             the
             head
             Province
             thereof
             Greece
             it selfe
             to
             come
             under
             their
             obedience
             :
             when
             they
             should
             see
             this
             ,
             then
             were
             they
             to
             prepare
             themselves
             for
             the
             
               abomination
               of
               desolation
            
             that
             was
             now
             at
             the
             door
             .
             And
             surely
             the
             event
             was
             most
             punctuall
             ;
             for
             this
             Roman
             encroachment
             ,
             having
             beene
             for
             28
             yeeres
             together
             attempting
             manifestly
             and
             advancing
             ,
             was
             at
             length
             accomplished
             ,
             when
             Aemilius
             the
             Consul
             having
             quite
             vanquished
             Perseus
             the
             King
             of
             Macedon
             ,
             all
             Greece
             came
             under
             the
             Romane
             obedience
             ,
             166
             yeers
             afore
             the
             birth
             of
             Christ
             ;
             which
             no
             sooner
             was
             come
             to
             passe
             ,
             but
             the
             very
             selfe
             same
             yeere
             ,
             within
             lesse
             than
             three
             moneths
             after
             ,
             Antiochus
             sets
             up
             the
             
               abomination
               of
               desolation
            
             in
             the
             Temple
             of
             Jerusalem
             .
             Why
             should
             we
             not
             then
             beleeve
             that
             the
             Holy
             Ghost
             intendeth
             here
             to
             give
             us
             as
             sure
             a
             watch-word
             ,
             when
             to
             beware
             of
             the
             man
             of
             sinne
             ,
             by
             this
             circumstance
             of
             
               latter
               times
            
             here
             in
             my
             text
             ,
             as
             we
             see
             he
             gave
             the
             Jewes
             to
             look
             for
             the
             persecution
             and
             prophanation
             by
             Antiochus
             .
          
           
             Therefore
             without
             any
             more
             preambles
             ,
             I
             come
             now
             directly
             to
             resolve
             what
             was
             before
             propounded
             ,
             viz.
             
             what
             is
             meant
             by
             last
             times
             in
             generall
             ,
             whence
             and
             how
             we
             are
             to
             reckon
             them
             ;
             and
             then
             in
             the
             second
             place
             what
             are
             these
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             in
             my
             text
             ,
             which
             must
             be
             ,
             as
             I
             said
             before
             ,
             a
             latter
             part
             of
             that
             generall
             .
          
           
             For
             the
             true
             account
             therefore
             of
             times
             in
             Scripture
             ,
             we
             must
             have
             recourse
             to
             that
             SACRED
             KALENDAR
             and
             GREAT
             ALMANACK
             of
             PROPHESIE
             ,
             the
             foure
             kingdomes
             of
             Daniel
             ,
             which
             are
             a
             
               propheticall
               chronology
            
             of
             times
             measured
             by
             the
             succession
             of
             foure
             principall
             kingdomes
             ,
             from
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             captivity
             of
             Israel
             ,
             untill
             the
             mystery
             of
             God
             should
             be
             finished
             ;
             a
             course
             of
             time
             during
             which
             the
             Church
             and
             Nation
             of
             the
             Jewes
             ,
             together
             with
             those
             whom
             by
             occasion
             of
             their
             unbeleefe
             in
             Christ
             ,
             God
             should
             surrogate
             in
             their
             roomes
             ,
             was
             to
             remain
             under
             the
             bondage
             of
             the
             Gentiles
             ,
             and
             oppression
             of
             Gentilisme
             ;
             but
             these
             times
             once
             finished
             ,
             all
             the
             kingdomes
             of
             this
             world
             should
             become
             the
             
               kingdome
               of
               our
               Lord
               and
               his
               Christ.
            
             And
             to
             this
             
               great
               Calendar
               of
               times
            
             ,
             together
             with
             that
             other
             but
             
               lesser
               Calendar
               of
            
             70
             weekes
             ,
             all
             mention
             of
             times
             in
             Scripture
             seemes
             to
             have
             reference
             .
             Now
             these
             
               foure
               kingdomes
            
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             truth
             infallibly
             to
             be
             demonstrated
             if
             need
             were
             ,
             and
             agreeable
             both
             to
             the
             ancient
             opinion
             of
             the
             Jewish
             a
             Church
             whom
             they
             most
             concerned
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             most
             ancient
             and
             universall
             b
             opinions
             of
             Christians
             derived
             from
             the
             times
             of
             the
             Apostles
             (
             untill
             now
             of
             late
             time
             some
             have
             questioned
             it
             )
             are
             ,
             1
             The
             Babylonian
             .
             2
             That
             of
             the
             Medes
             and
             Persians
             .
             3
             The
             Greekes
             .
             4
             The
             Romane
             .
             In
             which
             quaternary
             of
             kingdomes
             ,
             as
             the
             Romane
             ,
             being
             the
             last
             of
             the
             foure
             ,
             is
             the
             
               last
               kingdome
            
             ,
             so
             are
             the
             times
             thereof
             these
             
               last
               times
            
             we
             seeke
             for
             ,
             during
             which
             times
             saith
             
               Daniel
               ,
               cap.
            
             2.
             v.
             44.
             
             
               The
               God
               of
               heaven
               shall
               set
               up
               a
               kingdome
               which
               shall
               never
               be
               destroyed
               ,
               nor
               left
               unto
               another
               people
               ,
               but
               it
               shall
               breake
               in
               pieces
               ,
               and
               consume
               all
               these
               kingdomes
               ,
               and
               it
               shall
               stand
               for
               ever
               :
            
             which
             is
             figured
             by
             a
             
             
               stone
               hewen
               out
               of
               the
               mountaine
               without
               hands
               ,
            
             before
             the
             times
             of
             the
             Image
             were
             yet
             spent
             :
             which
             stone
             at
             length
             
               smote
               the
               Image
               upon
               his
               feet
               of
               Iron
               and
               Clay
               ,
            
             and
             so
             utterly
             destroyed
             it
             ;
             that
             done
             ,
             the
             stone
             that
             
               smote
               the
               Image
               upon
               the
               feet
            
             became
             a
             great
             
               mountaine
               ,
               and
               filled
               the
               whole
               earth
               :
            
             the
             meaning
             of
             all
             which
             is
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             
               last
               times
            
             ,
             or
             under
             the
             times
             of
             the
             
               last
               kingdome
            
             ,
             (
             the
             Romane
             )
             should
             the
             
               kingdome
               of
               Christ
            
             appeare
             in
             the
             world
             ,
             as
             we
             see
             it
             hath
             done
             ;
             and
             this
             is
             that
             which
             the
             Apostle
             saith
             Heb.
             1.2
             .
             
               God
               in
               these
               last
               dayes
            
             ,
             or
             last
             times
             ,
             
               hath
               spoken
               to
               us
               by
               his
               Sonne
               :
            
             and
             Saint
             Peter
             1
             Ep.
             1.20
             .
             that
             he
             was
             
               fore-ordained
               before
               the
               foundation
               of
               the
               world
               ,
               but
               was
               manifested
               in
               these
               last
               times
               .
            
             This
             is
             that
             
               fulnesse
               of
               time
            
             whereof
             the
             Apostle
             speaks
             Gal.
             4.4
             .
             
               When
               the
               fulnesse
               of
               time
               was
               come
               ,
               God
               sent
               forth
               his
               Son
               made
               of
               a
               woman
               :
            
             and
             Ephes.
             7.10
             .
             
               Having
               made
               knowne
               to
               us
               the
               mystery
               of
               his
               will
               ,
               that
               in
               the
               dispensation
               of
               the
               fulnesse
               of
               times
               ,
               he
               might
               gather
               together
               in
               one
               all
               things
               in
               Christ.
               
            
          
           
             
             Agreeable
             unto
             all
             which
             is
             that
             Heb.
             9.26
             .
             
               Christ
               hath
               once
               appeared
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               in
               the
               end
               of
               times
               ,
            
             or
             ages
             ,
             
               to
               put
               away
               sinne
               by
               the
               sacrifice
               of
               himself
            
             :
             where
             these
             
               last
               times
               ,
               fulnesse
               of
               time
               ,
            
             and
             
               conclusion
               of
               ages
            
             ,
             are
             nothing
             else
             but
             the
             times
             of
             the
             
               fourth
               kingdome
            
             ,
             whose
             times
             are
             the
             last
             period
             of
             Daniels
             foure
             ;
             the
             fulnesse
             of
             propheticall
             chronologie
             ,
             and
             conclusion
             of
             the
             
               sacred
               Calendar
            
             :
             during
             these
             times
             ,
             Christ
             was
             looked
             for
             ,
             and
             accordingly
             came
             ,
             and
             reigned
             ;
             whose
             kingdome
             shall
             at
             length
             abolish
             the
             brittle
             remainder
             of
             the
             Romane
             state
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             other
             part
             of
             the
             prophesie
             ,
             when
             the
             fulnesse
             of
             the
             Gentiles
             shall
             come
             in
             ,
             and
             our
             Lord
             subdue
             all
             his
             enemies
             under
             his
             feet
             ,
             and
             at
             the
             last
             death
             it selfe
             .
          
           
             Having
             thus
             found
             what
             times
             are
             termed
             the
             
               last
               times
            
             in
             generall
             ,
             let
             us
             now
             see
             if
             we
             can
             discover
             which
             are
             the
             
               latter
               times
            
             of
             these
             
               last
               times
            
             ,
             or
             the
             
               last
               times
            
             in
             
             speciall
             ,
             which
             are
             these
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             in
             my
             Text
             :
             which
             will
             not
             be
             hard
             to
             doe
             ;
             for
             if
             the
             
               last
               times
            
             in
             generall
             are
             all
             the
             times
             of
             the
             
               fourth
               kingdome
            
             ,
             then
             must
             our
             
               latter
               times
            
             as
             a
             part
             thereof
             needs
             be
             the
             latter
             times
             of
             that
             kingdome
             .
             Let
             us
             therefore
             againe
             to
             our
             
               propheticall
               Calendar
            
             ,
             and
             survey
             Daniels
             description
             of
             the
             fourth
             or
             Romane
             kingdome
             as
             it
             is
             cap.
             7.
             from
             ver
             .
             29.
             where
             we
             shall
             finde
             the
             latter
             times
             thereof
             to
             be
             that
             period
             of
             a
             
               time
               ,
               times
               ,
               and
               halfe
               a
               time
               ,
            
             
             during
             which
             that
             prodigious
             
               Horne
               with
               eyes
               like
               a
               man
               ,
               and
               mouth
               speaking
               great
               things
               ,
               should
               make
               warre
               with
               the
               Saints
               ,
               prevaile
               against
               them
               ,
               and
               weare
               them
               out
               ,
               and
               thinke
               to
               change
               times
               and
               lawes
               ,
               untill
               the
               judgement
               should
               sit
               ,
               and
               his
               dominions
               be
               taken
               away
            
             ;
             and
             in
             him
             that
             long-liv'd
             Beast
             finally
             be
             destroyed
             ,
             and
             his
             
               body
               given
               to
               the
               burning
               flame
               ,
               v.
            
             11.
             for
             this
             
               Hornish
               soveraignty
            
             is
             the
             
               last
               Scene
            
             of
             that
             
               long
               Tragedy
            
             ,
             and
             the
             conclusion
             of
             the
             
               fourth
               beast
            
             ,
             and
             therefore
             the
             times
             thereof
             are
             those
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             whereof
             the
             
               Spirit
               speakes
               expresly
            
             ,
             that
             in
             them
             there
             should
             be
             an
             
               Apostasie
               from
               the
               Christian
               faith
            
             .
          
           
             Concerning
             these
             times
             thus
             found
             ,
             we
             will
             now
             further
             enquire
             ,
             1
             What
             durance
             they
             may
             be
             of
             .
             2
             When
             they
             take
             beginning
             ,
             and
             by
             what
             mark
             their
             beginning
             may
             be
             knowne
             .
             For
             the
             first
             ,
             we
             will
             make
             no
             question
             but
             these
             are
             the
             selfe
             same
             times
             whereof
             Saint
             John
             speakes
             ,
             telling
             us
             the
             Church
             should
             be
             in
             the
             wildernesse
             a
             
               Time
               ,
               Times
               ,
               and
               halfe
               a
               Time
            
             ;
             the
             same
             with
             those
             
               two
               and
               forty
               moneths
            
             wherein
             
               Johns
               restored
               beast
            
             should
             domineere
             ,
             and
             play
             the
             selfe-same
             reax
             which
             
               Daniels
               hornish
               tyrant
            
             doth
             ;
             the
             same
             time
             with
             those
             two
             and
             forty
             moneths
             during
             which
             the
             
               Church
               is
               trodden
               downe
               of
               the
               Gentiles
            
             :
             lastly
             ,
             the
             same
             times
             with
             1260.
             dayes
             ,
             during
             which
             the
             
               witnesses
               of
               Christ
               prophesied
               in
               sackcloth
               ,
               for
               a
               time
               ,
               times
               ,
               and
               halfe
               a
               time
            
             ;
             or
             a
             yeare
             ,
             two
             yeares
             ,
             and
             halfe
             ,
             are
             42
             moneths
             ,
             and
             42
             moneths
             make
             1260.
             dayes
             :
             if
             therefore
             we
             can
             finde
             
             the
             beginning
             and
             continuance
             of
             any
             of
             these
             ,
             we
             have
             found
             the
             beginning
             and
             continuance
             of
             them
             all
             .
             For
             the
             duration
             and
             length
             of
             them
             ,
             they
             must
             imply
             some
             
               definitive
               times
            
             ,
             because
             the
             Scripture
             followes
             that
             use
             of
             speech
             ,
             and
             useth
             no
             number
             indefinitely
             ,
             but
             those
             which
             the
             use
             of
             speech
             had
             made
             such
             ,
             as
             1.10.1000
             .
             but
             mixt
             and
             compound
             numbers
             ,
             as
             these
             are
             ,
             3
             ½.
             42.1260
             .
             are
             neither
             in
             the
             Hebrew
             ,
             nor
             I
             think
             in
             any
             other
             language
             used
             indefinitely
             .
          
           
             Our
             adversaries
             would
             have
             them
             literally
             understood
             for
             
               three
               single
               yeers
               and
               a
               half
               ,
            
             as
             though
             it
             were
             an
             History
             ,
             and
             not
             a
             Prophesie
             :
             but
             besides
             the
             use
             of
             prophesie
             to
             reckon
             dayes
             for
             yeers
             ,
             I
             think
             it
             would
             trouble
             any
             man
             to
             conceive
             how
             so
             many
             things
             as
             should
             be
             performed
             in
             this
             time
             ,
             should
             be
             done
             in
             three
             single
             yeeres
             and
             a
             halfe
             .
             1
             Ten
             kingdomes
             founded
             at
             the
             same
             time
             with
             the
             Beast
             .
             2
             Peoples
             ,
             and
             multitudes
             of
             nations
             and
             tongues
             to
             serve
             and
             obey
             him
             .
             3
             To
             make
             warre
             with
             the
             Saints
             and
             overcome
             them
             .
             4
             To
             cause
             all
             that
             dwell
             upon
             the
             earth
             to
             worship
             him
             .
             5
             Babylon
             to
             ride
             the
             Beast
             so
             long
             ,
             that
             all
             nations
             shall
             drinke
             of
             the
             wine
             of
             her
             fornication
             ,
             the
             Kings
             of
             the
             earth
             commit
             fornication
             with
             her
             ,
             yea
             the
             Merchants
             and
             all
             those
             that
             had
             ships
             in
             the
             sea
             ,
             to
             grow
             rich
             by
             trading
             with
             her
             .
             Me
             thinks
             all
             this
             should
             ask
             much
             more
             than
             three
             yeeres
             works
             ,
             or
             foure
             either
             .
             To
             which
             I
             adde
             moreover
             ,
             that
             that
             state
             of
             government
             ,
             soveraignty
             or
             seigniory
             ,
             or
             what
             you
             will
             ,
             of
             the
             Beast
             ,
             under
             which
             the
             whore
             should
             ride
             him
             ,
             followeth
             immediately
             upon
             a
             former
             ,
             which
             in
             comparison
             is
             said
             to
             last
             but
             a
             
               short
               space
               ,
               Rev.
            
             17.20
             .
             But
             if
             the
             Antichristian
             state
             should
             continue
             but
             
               three
               yeers
               and
               a
               half
            
             literally
             taken
             ,
             how
             short
             must
             the
             time
             of
             that
             foregoing
             King
             or
             soveraignty
             be
             which
             should
             occasion
             the
             Holy
             Ghost
             to
             insert
             so
             singular
             a
             note
             of
             the
             difference
             thereof
             from
             that
             which
             followed
             ,
             that
             it
             should
             
               continue
               but
               a
               short
               space
            
             :
             doth
             not
             this
             imply
             ,
             that
             
             the
             next
             state
             wherin
             the
             whore
             should
             ride
             the
             beast
             ,
             was
             to
             continue
             a
             long
             space
             :
             therefore
             3
             yeers
             &
             a
             half
             historically
             taken
             ,
             cannot
             be
             the
             time
             of
             the
             Churches
             Apostasie
             ,
             and
             the
             Antichristian
             soveraignty
             of
             Rome
             :
             and
             if
             it
             cannot
             be
             taken
             historically
             ,
             it
             must
             be
             taken
             prophetically
             ,
             every
             day
             for
             a
             yeer
             ,
             &
             so
             1260
             dayes
             counted
             so
             many
             yeers
             ,
             shewes
             the
             extent
             of
             those
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             to
             be
             1260
             yeers
             .
          
           
             Now
             for
             the
             second
             thing
             proposed
             ,
             the
             beginning
             of
             these
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ;
             Saint
             John
             tells
             us
             in
             the
             Revelation
             ,
             that
             his
             blasphemous
             Beast
             of
             42
             moneths
             continuance
             should
             succeed
             upon
             the
             mortall
             wound
             of
             the
             Caesarian
             or
             Imperiall
             soveraignty
             of
             Rome
             :
             And
             Apoc.
             17.
             the
             Idolatrous
             Beast
             which
             carries
             the
             great
             Whore
             upon
             his
             back
             ,
             should
             have
             a
             plurality
             of
             Kings
             start
             up
             at
             the
             same
             time
             with
             him
             ,
             who
             should
             agree
             to
             submit
             their
             power
             and
             kingdome
             unto
             this
             whore-ridden
             Beast
             ;
             and
             would
             not
             he
             also
             in
             the
             same
             chapter
             have
             us
             take
             notice
             ,
             that
             the
             Antichristian
             state
             of
             the
             Beast
             which
             was
             to
             come
             ,
             should
             be
             next
             to
             that
             of
             the
             Caesars
             which
             then
             reigned
             ?
             for
             the
             Angell
             there
             tels
             him
             ,
             that
             that
             state
             of
             the
             beast
             ,
             wherein
             the
             Whore
             should
             ride
             him
             ,
             which
             was
             then
             not
             in
             being
             ,
             but
             should
             afterward
             ascend
             out
             of
             the
             bottomlesse
             pit
             ,
             and
             goe
             into
             perdition
             ;
             that
             this
             state
             or
             head
             of
             the
             beast
             should
             succeed
             so
             immediately
             upon
             the
             sixth
             state
             or
             head
             ,
             viz.
             the
             Caesarian
             then
             reigning
             ,
             that
             howsoever
             in
             some
             respects
             it
             might
             be
             called
             an
             eighth
             ,
             yet
             should
             in
             very
             deed
             be
             but
             the
             seventh
             ;
             for
             how
             could
             it
             be
             otherwise
             ,
             when
             the
             Beast
             in
             the
             vision
             hath
             but
             seven
             heads
             and
             no
             more
             ?
             
               vide
               ver
            
             .
             8.10.11
             .
             Agreeable
             to
             this
             is
             Saint
             Pauls
             Epocha
             ,
             2
             Thes.
             2.7
             .
             who
             tels
             us
             ,
             that
             as
             soone
             as
             the
             Imperiall
             soveraignty
             of
             Rome
             ,
             which
             then
             hindered
             ,
             should
             be
             taken
             out
             of
             the
             way
             ,
             then
             should
             
               that
               wicked
               one
               be
               revealed
            
             :
             *
             thus
             the
             Fathers
             generally
             expound
             it
             .
             Hence
             was
             that
             custome
             in
             the
             Church
             ,
             in
             the
             most
             ancient
             times
             of
             it
             ,
             to
             pray
             in
             their
             Lyturgy
             for
             the
             lasting
             of
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             ,
             that
             
             so
             Antichrist
             might
             be
             long
             acomming
             ,
             
               Tertul.
               apol
               .
               cap.
            
             32.
             
             &
             39.
             
             
               Ad
               Scap.
               c.
            
             2.
             
             Upon
             this
             ground
             Saint
             Jerome
             ,
             when
             ho
             heard
             of
             the
             taking
             of
             Rome
             by
             Alaricus
             the
             Goth
             ,
             presently
             expected
             the
             comming
             of
             Antichrist
             ,
             
               Ad
               Ageruchiam
               de
               Monogamia
               ;
               Qui
               tenebat
            
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             
               de
               medio
               sit
               ,
               &
               non
               intelligimus
               Antichristum
               appropinquare
               .
            
             Idem
             praefat
             .
             l.
             8.
             
             Comment
             .
             in
             Ezec.
             
               Pascitur
               animus
               ,
               &
               obliviscitur
               saeculi
               calamitatum
               ,
               quòd
               in
               extremo
               fine
               jam
               positum
               congemiseit
               ,
               &
               parturit
               ,
               donec
               qui
               tenet
               de
               medio
               fiat
               ,
               &
               pedes
               statuae
               quondam
               ferrei
               fragilitate
               digitorum
               fictilium
               conterantur
               :
               Cadit
               mundus
               ,
               &
               Cervix
               erect
               a
               non
               flectitur
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             Thus
             he
             .
             
               Postquam
               clarissimum
               terrarum
               omnium
               Lumen
               extinctum
               est
               ,
               imo
               Romani
               Imperii
               truncatum
               caput
               ,
               &
               in
               una
               urbe
               totus
               orbis
               interiit
               ,
            
             as
             he
             elsewhere
             deplores
             that
             wofull
             calamity
             ,
             
               Praef.
               l.
            
             1.
             
             
               Comment
               .
               in
               Ezek.
            
             Answerable
             to
             that
             which
             Saint
             John
             told
             us
             ;
             Daniels
             Calendar
             also
             informes
             us
             ,
             that
             the
             
               hornish
               Tyrant
            
             who
             was
             to
             act
             the
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             should
             then
             begin
             to
             appeare
             ,
             when
             ten
             kings
             should
             arise
             in
             the
             fourth
             kingdome
             ,
             for
             the
             
               ten
               horns
            
             which
             at
             last
             he
             espied
             upon
             the
             Beasts
             head
             ,
             and
             observed
             a
             
               little
               horn
            
             with
             eyes
             &
             a
             mouth
             to
             spring
             up
             amongst
             them
             ,
             &
             displant
             three
             of
             them
             ,
             v.
             8.
             the
             Angel
             v.
             24.
             expounds
             to
             be
             
               ten
               kings
            
             which
             should
             arise
             out
             of
             that
             kingdome
             ,
             and
             another
             ,
             to
             wit
             Antichrist
             ,
             should
             arise
             *
             
               behind
               them
            
             ,
             so
             it
             should
             be
             translated
             as
             the
             70
             doth
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               which
               should
               be
               diverse
               from
               the
               first
            
             ;
             (
             that
             is
             ,
             a
             King
             of
             another
             nature
             )
             and
             should
             
               bring
               downe
            
             or
             humble
             three
             Kings
             ,
             
             and
             play
             those
             reax
             which
             follow
             in
             the
             Text.
             Thus
             the
             Fathers
             universally
             and
             from
             the
             utmost
             antiquity
             expound
             this
             Scripture
             :
             
               Justin.
               Mart.
               Dialog
               .
               cum
               Tryphone
            
             takes
             it
             for
             granted
             that
             this
             horne
             is
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ▪
             
               qui
               iniqua
               in
               nos
               Christianos
               andebit
               .
               Irenaeus
            
             scholar
             to
             
               Policarp
               ,
               l.
            
             5.
             c.
             21.
             aliis
             25.
             saith
             ,
             
               Daniel
               novissimi
               regni
               finem
               respiciens
               ,
               id
               est
               ,
               novissimos
               decem
               reges
               ,
               in
               quo
               divideretur
               regnum
               illorum
               ,
               super
               quos
               filius
               perditionis
               veniet
               ,
               
               cornua
               dic●●
               dec●m
               ●asei
               bestiae
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             Yea
             a
             little
             after
             hee
             tels
             us
             ,
             that
             Saint
             John
             in
             his
             ten
             Kings
             which
             should
             re-receive
             their
             kingdomes
             at
             one
             houre
             with
             the
             Beast
             ,
             expounds
             this
             of
             
               Daniel
               ,
               Manifestius
               adhuc
               d●
               novissimo
               tempore
               &
               de
               his
               qui
               sunt
               in
               eo
               decem
               regibus
               ,
               in
               quos
               divid●tur
               quod
               nunc
               regna●
               imperium
               ;
               significavit
               Johannes
               Domini
               discipulus
               in
               Apocalypsi
               edisserens
               quae
               fuerint
               decem
               cornua
               qu●
               à
               Daniele
               visa
               sunt
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             Nay
             Saint
             Jerome
             in
             his
             Comment
             upon
             this
             seventh
             chapter
             of
             Daniel
             will
             give
             us
             to
             understand
             ,
             that
             all
             the
             Ecclesiasticall
             Writers
             delivered
             this
             to
             be
             the
             true
             exposition
             ;
             for
             having
             there
             confuted
             Porphyrie
             ,
             who
             to
             derogate
             from
             the
             divinity
             of
             this
             prophesie
             would
             have
             it
             meant
             of
             
               Antiochus
               Epiphanes
            
             ,
             and
             therefore
             written
             when
             the
             event
             was
             past
             :
             he
             concludeth
             thus
             ,
             
               Ergo
               dicamus
               quod
               omnes
               Scriptores
               Ecclesiastici
               tradiderunt
               :
               in
               consummatione
               mundi
               ,
               quando
               regnum
               destru●ndum
               est
               Romanorum
               ,
               decem
               futuros
               reges
               ,
               qui
               orbem
               Romanum
               inter
               se
               dividant
               ,
               &
               undecimum
               surrecturum
               esse
               Regem
               parvulum
               ,
               qui
               tres
               reges
               de
               decem
               regibus
               superaturus
               sit
               ,
               in
               quo
               totus
               Satanas
               habitaturus
               sit
               corporaliter
               .
            
             Who
             these
             three
             Kings
             were
             which
             this
             horne
             displanted
             to
             make
             himselfe
             elbow-roome
             ,
             you
             shall
             heare
             more
             anon
             :
             but
             I
             will
             not
             conceale
             what
             I
             have
             heard
             of
             another
             exposition
             ,
             which
             fits
             our
             turne
             for
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Apostasie
             no
             lesse
             than
             that
             of
             the
             Fathers
             ;
             namely
             ,
             that
             by
             ten
             kingdomes
             may
             be
             meant
             the
             full
             plurality
             of
             the
             Romane
             Provinces
             ,
             so
             much
             whereof
             as
             three
             is
             of
             ten
             should
             have
             the
             Imperiall
             power
             rooted
             out
             of
             them
             ,
             and
             fall
             under
             the
             Dominion
             of
             the
             Antichristian
             Horne
             ,
             who
             should
             act
             the
             soveraignty
             of
             the
             latter
             times
             ,
             or
             the
             last
             soveraignty
             of
             that
             kingdome
             .
             Now
             it
             is
             most
             true
             that
             the
             Popes
             Patriarchdome
             in
             the
             West
             holds
             just
             that
             scantling
             of
             the
             ancient
             Territory
             of
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             ,
             which
             a
             man
             may
             judge
             by
             his
             eyes
             ,
             or
             compasses
             in
             a
             Mapp
             :
             and
             yet
             I
             preferre
             the
             other
             exposition
             before
             it
             .
          
           
           
             To
             come
             up
             to
             an
             issue
             :
             It
             is
             apparent
             by
             all
             that
             hath
             bin
             said
             ,
             that
             these
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             with
             that
             wicked
             soveraignty
             which
             should
             domineer
             in
             them
             ,
             was
             to
             take
             beginning
             from
             the
             wound
             ,
             the
             fall
             ,
             the
             ruine
             ,
             the
             rending
             in
             pieces
             ,
             or
             rooting
             up
             of
             the
             Imperial
             soveraignty
             of
             the
             City
             of
             Rome
             ,
             when
             that
             City
             should
             cease
             to
             be
             the
             Lap
             of
             that
             soveraignty
             which
             the
             Casars
             once
             held
             over
             the
             Nations
             ;
             and
             many
             new
             upstart
             Kings
             should
             appeare
             in
             the
             place
             and
             Territory
             of
             that
             once
             one
             Empire
             ;
             then
             should
             the
             Apostasie
             be
             seen
             ,
             and
             the
             
               latter
               times
            
             with
             that
             wicked
             one
             make
             their
             entrance
             .
             Now
             in
             what
             age
             this
             fell
             out
             I
             think
             no
             man
             can
             be
             ignorant
             ,
             who
             hath
             but
             a
             little
             skill
             in
             Historie
             .
          
           
             But
             you
             will
             say
             ,
             The
             Imperiall
             soveraignty
             of
             old
             Rome
             fell
             not
             all
             at
             once
             ,
             but
             had
             divers
             steps
             and
             degrees
             of
             ruine
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             doubt
             will
             be
             notwithstanding
             ,
             from
             which
             of
             these
             steps
             of
             the
             fall
             thereof
             these
             
               latter
               times
            
             must
             be
             reckoned
             ?
          
           
             I
             answer
             ,
             From
             any
             of
             them
             .
             For
             as
             the
             Imperiall
             soveraignty
             fell
             by
             degrees
             ,
             so
             the
             Apostasie
             under
             the
             lattermost
             soveraignty
             grew
             up
             also
             by
             degrees
             ;
             and
             for
             every
             degree
             which
             the
             ruinous
             Empire
             decayed
             ,
             was
             the
             rising
             sonne
             of
             perdition
             a
             degree
             advanced
             .
             Secondly
             ,
             all
             the
             maine
             and
             evident
             degrees
             of
             the
             Empires
             ruine
             fell
             in
             the
             compasse
             of
             an
             age
             ,
             and
             the
             knowledge
             and
             observation
             of
             that
             age
             onely
             ,
             within
             which
             the
             times
             of
             this
             fall
             were
             comprehended
             ,
             was
             sufficient
             both
             to
             warn
             them
             which
             then
             lived
             ,
             that
             that
             which
             was
             to
             come
             ,
             was
             then
             a
             comming
             ,
             and
             to
             informe
             us
             who
             now
             live
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             already
             come
             .
          
           
             Now
             which
             were
             these
             maine
             and
             evident
             degrees
             of
             the
             Empires
             falling
             ,
             and
             at
             what
             time
             ,
             I
             will
             tell
             you
             as
             soon
             as
             I
             have
             removed
             an
             usuall
             mistake
             in
             this
             businesse
             ,
             which
             is
             to
             reckon
             the
             time
             of
             the
             Empires
             ruine
             ,
             and
             so
             likewise
             the
             Apostasie
             attending
             ,
             onely
             from
             the
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             or
             full
             heigth
             thereof
             ;
             but
             this
             is
             too
             much
             against
             reason
             ,
             
             and
             not
             agreeable
             to
             the
             course
             wee
             otherwise
             use
             in
             the
             like
             :
             for
             as
             when
             we
             reckon
             the
             age
             of
             a
             man
             ,
             we
             reckon
             not
             from
             the
             time
             since
             he
             came
             to
             mans
             estate
             ,
             but
             from
             his
             birth
             ;
             so
             should
             we
             doe
             here
             for
             the
             times
             of
             the
             man
             of
             sinne
             :
             I
             say
             not
             ,
             we
             should
             begin
             to
             count
             his
             age
             from
             his
             conception
             ,
             for
             that
             we
             use
             not
             in
             other
             things
             ;
             but
             from
             the
             time
             he
             was
             first
             
               editus
               in
               lucem
            
             ,
             when
             he
             first
             began
             to
             appeare
             in
             the
             world
             :
             and
             so
             likewise
             the
             fall
             of
             the
             Empire
             and
             the
             Apostasie
             ,
             not
             from
             the
             time
             they
             were
             consummate
             ,
             but
             from
             the
             time
             they
             first
             evidently
             appeared
             ;
             as
             therefore
             I
             hold
             their
             opinion
             the
             best
             and
             most
             agreeable
             to
             truth
             ,
             who
             begin
             the
             70
             yeeres
             of
             the
             Jewish
             captivity
             in
             Babylon
             ,
             not
             from
             the
             consummation
             thereof
             under
             Zedekiah
             ,
             when
             the
             City
             and
             Temple
             were
             utterly
             rased
             ,
             for
             that
             is
             impossible
             ,
             there
             being
             not
             *
             60
             yeeres
             in
             all
             betweene
             the
             nineteenth
             of
             Nebuchadnezzar
             ,
             and
             the
             last
             of
             Cyrus
             ;
             but
             from
             the
             beginning
             thereof
             under
             Jehojakim
             ,
             eighteen
             yeers
             before
             ,
             or
             at
             the
             most
             but
             from
             Jehojakim
             .
             So
             are
             these
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             of
             the
             Romane
             state
             to
             begin
             when
             the
             Empire
             first
             began
             to
             fall
             ,
             and
             not
             when
             it
             was
             utterly
             rooted
             up
             .
             Take
             for
             another
             example
             ,
             that
             computation
             of
             the
             time
             allotted
             to
             the
             calamity
             of
             the
             Jewes
             under
             Antiochus
             ,
             which
             I
             the
             rather
             alledge
             ,
             because
             he
             is
             commonly
             counted
             for
             a
             type
             of
             Antichrist
             :
             the
             beginning
             of
             that
             2300
             
               evenings
               and
               mornings
            
             ,
             or
             six
             yeeres
             ,
             or
             somewhat
             more
             than
             a
             quarter
             ,
             which
             that
             calamity
             was
             to
             continue
             ,
             from
             the
             beginning
             thereof
             ,
             untill
             the
             Temple
             should
             again
             be
             cleansed
             ,
             Dan.
             8.13
             ,
             14.
             was
             not
             to
             be
             reckoned
             from
             the
             heigth
             thereof
             ,
             when
             the
             daily
             sacrifice
             should
             be
             taken
             away
             (
             for
             thence
             it
             is
             but
             three
             yeers
             ,
             1
             Mac.
             1.54
             .
             &c.
             with
             c.
             4.52
             .
             )
             but
             from
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             transgression
             which
             occasioned
             this
             desolation
             ,
             and
             is
             described
             1
             Mac.
             1.11
             &c.
             so
             likewise
             the
             end
             of
             the
             kingdome
             of
             the
             Greekes
             ,
             wherein
             this
             calamity
             was
             to
             happen
             ,
             is
             not
             to
             be
             counted
             onely
             then
             when
             Aemilius
             the
             Consul
             had
             
             quite
             finished
             the
             conquest
             of
             Macedon
             (
             for
             this
             points
             out
             onely
             the
             heigth
             of
             that
             calamity
             )
             but
             from
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             last
             fatall
             
             warre
             which
             put
             an
             end
             to
             that
             kingdome
             ;
             which
             was
             about
             some
             three
             yeeres
             and
             an
             halfe
             before
             ,
             and
             jumps
             with
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             transgres●ion
             of
             desolation
             ,
             as
             the
             finishing
             of
             the
             conquest
             doth
             with
             the
             taking
             away
             of
             the
             daily
             sacrifice
             .
          
           
             But
             leaving
             this
             ,
             let
             us
             returne
             againe
             and
             see
             which
             were
             these
             maine
             and
             
               evident
               degrees
            
             of
             the
             Empires
             downfall
             ,
             and
             when
             they
             befell
             ;
             which
             I
             suppose
             may
             not
             unfitly
             be
             sampled
             by
             those
             of
             the
             Babylonish
             captivity
             .
             As
             therefore
             the
             Babylonish
             captivity
             had
             three
             steps
             or
             degrees
             ,
             the
             first
             in
             the
             dayes
             of
             Jehojakim
             ,
             when
             Daniel
             went
             captive
             ;
             the
             second
             under
             Jehoiachim
             ,
             or
             Jechonias
             ,
             when
             Ezechiel
             went
             captive
             ;
             the
             last
             under
             Zedekiah
             ,
             when
             the
             Temple
             and
             City
             were
             wholly
             razed
             and
             consumed
             :
             so
             (
             omitting
             the
             Politicall
             change
             under
             Constantine
             )
             the
             chiefe
             and
             principall
             moments
             of
             the
             ruine
             of
             the
             Empire
             by
             the
             sword
             (
             and
             by
             the
             sword
             the
             Beast
             had
             his
             deadly
             wound
             ,
             Apoc.
             13.14
             .
             )
             may
             fitly
             be
             reduced
             unto
             three
             .
          
           
             1
             The
             first
             was
             presently
             after
             the
             death
             of
             Julian
             ,
             the
             last
             of
             heathen
             Emperours
             ,
             about
             the
             yeere
             365.
             ominously
             marked
             with
             that
             universall
             ,
             stupendious
             ,
             and
             never
             but
             then
             sampled
             earthquake
             ,
             a
             whereby
             the
             waters
             of
             the
             Sea
             were
             rolled
             out
             of
             their
             channels
             ,
             and
             left
             ships
             hanging
             upon
             the
             tops
             of
             houses
             .
             From
             this
             time
             forwards
             all
             the
             nations
             on
             every
             side
             seeme
             as
             it
             were
             with
             one
             consent
             to
             have
             conspired
             the
             ruine
             of
             the
             Empire
             .
             b
             Now
             that
             terrible
             and
             fatall
             storme
             of
             the
             nations
             of
             the
             North
             ,
             
               Almaines
               ,
               Sarmatians
               ,
               Quades
               ,
               Picts
               ,
               Scots
               ,
            
             
             and
             Saxons
             ,
             especially
             the
             Goths
             ,
             began
             to
             break
             in
             upon
             it
             almost
             without
             intermission
             ,
             harrying
             ,
             burning
             ,
             wasting
             ,
             destroying
             the
             most
             part
             of
             the
             Provinces
             thereof
             almost
             for
             c
             45
             yeeres
             together
             .
             And
             to
             mend
             that
             matter
             ,
             the
             Goths
             sonne
             after
             their
             comming
             were
             admitted
             as
             Inhabitants
             ,
             and
             dispersed
             as
             free
             Denizens
             into
             the
             bowels
             and
             heart
             of
             the
             Empire
             ,
             advanced
             to
             be
             Commanders
             ,
             and
             bore
             the
             greatest
             sway
             in
             their
             Armies
             .
             d
             By
             which
             fatall
             errour
             the
             Empire
             received
             her
             bane
             ,
             and
             the
             Romanes
             were
             no
             longer
             masters
             of
             their
             owne
             strength
             ,
             which
             they
             quickly
             and
             often
             repented
             ;
             but
             even
             that
             cost
             them
             deare
             ,
             when
             they
             had
             indeed
             eyes
             to
             see
             it
             ,
             but
             never
             ability
             to
             amend
             it
             .
             This
             was
             the
             first
             degree
             of
             the
             Empires
             ruine
             .
          
           
           
             2
             The
             second
             was
             about
             the
             yeere
             410
             ,
             when
             Alaricus
             the
             Goth
             sacked
             Rome
             it selfe
             ,
             the
             Lady
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             when
             ,
             as
             Saint
             Jerome
             saith
             ,
             
               Capiebatur
               urbs
               quae
               totum
               cepit
               orbem
               ,
               imo
               fame
               periit
               antequam
               gladio
               ,
               &
               vix
               pauci
               qui
               caperentur
               inventi
               sunt
               .
            
             And
             from
             th●s
             very
             yeere
             the
             plurality
             of
             Kings
             foretold
             of
             ,
             began
             to
             come
             upon
             the
             stage
             ;
             five
             or
             six
             new
             kingdomes
             presently
             appeared
             within
             the
             Territories
             of
             the
             Empire
             ,
             of
             the
             Goths
             ,
             of
             the
             Burgundians
             ,
             and
             though
             somewhat
             later
             ,
             of
             the
             Franks
             in
             Gallia
             ,
             of
             the
             Suevians
             and
             Alans
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Vandals
             in
             Spaine
             ,
             and
             ,
             as
             Sigonius
             thinks
             ,
             of
             the
             Huns
             in
             Pannonia
             :
             certainly
             they
             could
             not
             be
             much
             later
             than
             this
             very
             yeere
             .
             But
             this
             number
             of
             Kings
             we
             will
             leave
             till
             they
             be
             better
             increased
             ,
             as
             continually
             they
             did
             .
             And
             thus
             you
             see
             the
             second
             degree
             of
             the
             ruine
             of
             the
             Empire
             .
          
           
             3
             The
             third
             was
             about
             the
             yeere
             455
             ,
             presently
             upon
             the
             death
             of
             the
             third
             Valentinian
             ,
             the
             last
             (
             as
             Sleidan
             well
             observed
             )
             of
             the
             Emperours
             of
             the
             West
             ,
             and
             consequently
             of
             the
             ancient
             Rome
             ;
             then
             when
             Gensericus
             the
             Vandall
             tooke
             the
             City
             now
             the
             second
             time
             ,
             fired
             it
             ,
             and
             spoiled
             it
             of
             all
             the
             goodly
             and
             glorious
             ornaments
             which
             Alaricus
             had
             spared
             ,
             amongst
             which
             were
             the
             golden
             and
             silver
             vessels
             of
             the
             Temple
             of
             Jerusalem
             ,
             *
             brought
             thither
             
             by
             Titus
             :
             All
             which
             ,
             with
             an
             innumerable
             multitude
             of
             Roman
             captives
             ,
             he
             carried
             away
             with
             him
             .
             Now
             was
             the
             prediction
             which
             Varro
             reports
             that
             
               Vect●us
               Valens
            
             the
             Augur
             made
             of
             12
             Vulturs
             to
             Romulus
             the
             founder
             ,
             that
             his
             city
             should
             continue
             12
             hundred
             yeeres
             ,
             fulfilled
             ,
             and
             those
             yeeres
             newly
             expired
             ;
             and
             ,
             which
             is
             more
             to
             be
             heeded
             ,
             now
             was
             the
             plurality
             of
             Kings
             lately
             risen
             in
             the
             ancient
             Territorie
             of
             the
             Empire
             ,
             as
             Daniel
             and
             Saint
             Iohn
             had
             prophesied
             ,
             increased
             unto
             the
             full
             number
             of
             ten
             ,
             which
             ,
             together
             with
             the
             Provinces
             wherein
             they
             were
             seated
             ,
             and
             the
             names
             of
             the
             Kings
             which
             reigned
             the
             next
             yeare
             after
             the
             City
             was
             taken
             ,
             are
             these
             which
             follow
             .
          
           
           
             
               
                 ANNO
                 DOMINI
                 456.
                 
              
               
                 
                   Kingdomes
                   of
                   the
                
                 
                   Provinces
                   .
                
                 
                   Names
                   of
                   the
                   Kings
                   reigning
                   .
                
                 
                   Somewhat
                   of
                   their
                   changes
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   1
                   Britans
                   .
                
                 
                   In
                   Britaine
                   .
                
                 
                   Vortimer
                   .
                
                 
                    
                
              
               
                 
                   2
                   Saxons
                   .
                
                 
                   Hengist
                   .
                
                 
                    
                
              
               
                 
                   3
                   Franks
                   .
                
                 
                   In
                   Gallia
                   .
                
                 
                   Childericke
                   .
                
                 
                   An.
                   526.
                   this
                   kingdome
                   was
                   subdued
                   by
                   the
                   Franks
                   ,
                   but
                   to
                   fill
                   up
                   the
                   number
                   ,
                   that
                   of
                   the
                   Ostrogoths
                   became
                   two
                   by
                   the
                   comming
                   of
                   the
                   Longobards
                   into
                   Pannonia
                   the
                   same
                   time
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   4
                   Burgundians
                   .
                
                 
                   Gundericke
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   5
                   Wisigothes
                   .
                
                 
                   In
                   the
                   South
                   of
                   Gallia
                   between
                   the
                   
                     Rhene
                     ,
                     Loyr
                  
                   and
                   the
                   Sea
                   ,
                   and
                   part
                   of
                   Spain
                   .
                
                 
                   Theodorick
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   6
                   Swevians
                   and
                   Alanes
                   .
                
                 
                   Spain
                   in
                   Gallicia
                   and
                   Portugal
                   .
                
                 
                   Riciarius
                   .
                
                 
                    
                
              
               
                 
                   7
                   Vandals
                   .
                
                 
                   In
                   Africke
                   ,
                   but
                   first
                   in
                   Spain
                   .
                
                 
                   Gensericus
                   .
                
                 
                    
                
              
               
                 
                   8
                   Almaines
                   .
                
                 
                   Germany
                   in
                   Rhetia
                   between
                   the
                   Rhene
                   ,
                   &c.
                   
                
                 
                   Sumanus
                   .
                
                 
                   This
                   kingdome
                   became
                   one
                   with
                   a
                   part
                   of
                   the
                   kingdome
                   of
                   the
                   Herules
                   ,
                   475.
                   during
                   their
                   short
                   reign
                   in
                   Italy
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   9
                   Ostrogothes
                   .
                
                 
                   In
                   Pannonia
                   ,
                   where
                   they
                   subdued
                   the
                   Huns
                   ,
                   and
                   not
                   long
                   after
                   propagated
                   their
                   kingdome
                   into
                   Italy
                   .
                
                 
                   Theodemir
                   .
                
                 
                   The
                   Longobards
                   succeeded
                   the
                   Ostrogoths
                   first
                   in
                   Pannonia
                   ,
                   upon
                   the
                   death
                   of
                   Theodorick
                   of
                   
                     Ve●ona
                     An.
                  
                   526.
                   
                   Then
                   in
                   Italy
                   ,
                   called
                   in
                   by
                   Narses
                   discontented
                   ,
                   soon
                   after
                   he
                   had
                   destroyed
                   the
                   kingdome
                   of
                   the
                   Goths
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   10
                   Greeks
                   .
                
                 
                   In
                   the
                   residue
                   of
                   the
                   Empire
                   .
                
                 
                   Marcianus
                   .
                
                 
                   Ancient
                   Romes
                   Empire
                   finished
                   ,
                   that
                   of
                   the
                   Greeks
                   is
                   but
                   on●
                   of
                   t●e
                   kingdomes
                   wh●reinto
                   〈◊〉
                   was
                   divide●
                   ▪
                
              
            
          
           
           
             Thus
             was
             the
             Empire
             divided
             and
             shared
             An.
             456.
             the
             yeere
             after
             Rome
             was
             sacked
             by
             Gensericus
             ,
             and
             the
             off-spring
             of
             these
             Nations
             through
             many
             alterations
             (
             partly
             by
             the
             inconstancie
             of
             humane
             things
             ,
             unions
             and
             dis-unions
             ,
             partly
             by
             the
             further
             enlargement
             of
             the
             Christian
             faith
             )
             are
             the
             body
             of
             the
             most
             of
             the
             Kingdomes
             and
             States
             of
             Christendome
             at
             this
             day
             .
             Three
             of
             these
             Kings
             ,
             saith
             Daniel
             ,
             should
             the
             Antichristian
             horne
             depresse
             and
             displant
             ,
             to
             advance
             himselfe
             ,
             which
             three
             are
             those
             whose
             dominions
             extended
             into
             Italy
             ,
             and
             so
             stood
             in
             his
             light
             .
          
           
             1
             That
             of
             the
             Greekes
             ,
             whose
             Emperour
             ,
             
               Leo
               Isaurus
            
             ,
             for
             the
             quarrell
             of
             Images
             ,
             he
             excommunicated
             ,
             and
             revolted
             his
             subjects
             of
             Italy
             from
             their
             allegiance
             ,
          
           
             2
             That
             of
             the
             Longobards
             ,
             successours
             of
             the
             Ostrogoths
             ,
             whose
             kingdome
             he
             caused
             ,
             by
             the
             aid
             of
             the
             Franks
             ,
             to
             be
             wholly
             ruinated
             ,
             thereby
             to
             get
             the
             Exarchate
             of
             Ravenna
             (
             which
             since
             their
             revolt
             from
             the
             Greekes
             they
             were
             seized
             on
             )
             for
             a
             Patrimony
             to
             Saint
             Peter
             .
          
           
             3
             The
             last
             was
             the
             kingdome
             of
             the
             Franks
             it selfe
             ,
             continued
             in
             the
             Empire
             of
             Germany
             ,
             whose
             Emperours
             from
             the
             day
             of
             Henry
             the
             fourth
             he
             excommunicated
             ,
             deposed
             and
             trampled
             under
             his
             feet
             ,
             and
             never
             suffered
             them
             to
             live
             in
             rest
             ,
             till
             he
             made
             them
             not
             onely
             quit
             their
             interest
             in
             election
             of
             Popes
             ,
             and
             investiture
             of
             Bishops
             ,
             but
             that
             remainder
             of
             jurisdiction
             in
             Italy
             ,
             wherewith
             ,
             together
             with
             the
             dignity
             of
             the
             Roman
             name
             ,
             he
             had
             once
             infeoffed
             their
             Predecessors
             ,
          
           
             These
             are
             the
             Kings
             ,
             by
             displanting
             ,
             or
             ,
             as
             the
             Vulgar
             hath
             it
             ,
             by
             humbling
             of
             whom
             the
             Pope
             by
             degrees
             got
             elbow-roome
             ,
             and
             advanced
             himselfe
             to
             the
             heigth
             of
             temporall
             Majesty
             ,
             and
             absolute
             greatnesse
             ,
             which
             made
             him
             so
             terrible
             in
             the
             world
             .
          
           
             This
             third
             blow
             therefore
             I
             suppose
             is
             to
             be
             counted
             the
             last
             of
             the
             ruine
             of
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             ,
             the
             Imperiall
             
             power
             of
             ancient
             Rome
             (
             untill
             the
             Pope
             some
             345
             yeeres
             after
             revived
             the
             name
             )
             henceforth
             ceasing
             ;
             for
             as
             for
             those
             who
             yet
             for
             some
             twenty
             yeeres
             after
             our
             date
             scuffled
             for
             that
             name
             ,
             one
             of
             them
             deposing
             another
             ,
             they
             were
             indeed
             but
             shadowes
             of
             Caesars
             ,
             and
             as
             it
             were
             struglings
             with
             the
             pangs
             of
             death
             ,
             untill
             with
             Augustulus
             it
             gave
             up
             the
             ghost
             :
             yea
             it
             is
             to
             be
             observed
             ,
             that
             two
             of
             them
             ,
             Avitus
             (
             the
             very
             next
             )
             and
             Glycerius
             ,
             being
             deposed
             from
             the
             Empire
             ,
             were
             made
             Bishops
             ,
             the
             one
             of
             Placentia
             or
             Piacenza
             ,
             the
             other
             of
             *
             Portus
             ,
             as
             a
             signe
             perhaps
             that
             the
             Emperour
             of
             Rome
             henceforth
             should
             be
             a
             Bishop
             ,
             and
             a
             Bishop
             the
             Emperour
             .
          
           
             To
             conclude
             therefore
             with
             the
             application
             of
             our
             Apostles
             prediction
             ,
             whether
             the
             Christian
             Apostasie
             in
             worshipping
             new
             Daemon-gods
             began
             not
             with
             the
             first
             of
             these
             degrees
             ,
             notably
             increased
             with
             the
             second
             ,
             and
             was
             established
             by
             the
             last
             ,
             I
             leave
             you
             to
             judge
             ,
             when
             you
             shall
             have
             surveyed
             the
             monuments
             and
             records
             of
             those
             times
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             commonly
             and
             truly
             affirmed
             by
             our
             Ecclesiasticall
             *
             Antiquaries
             ▪
             that
             before
             the
             yeere
             360
             ,
             there
             is
             no
             word
             to
             be
             found
             of
             the
             invocation
             of
             Saints
             glorified
             ,
             or
             worshipping
             their
             Reliques
             ,
             to
             which
             I
             add
             ,
             no
             not
             of
             any
             miracles
             done
             by
             them
             ;
             but
             presently
             after
             that
             yeere
             ,
             when
             our
             first
             date
             of
             the
             Empires
             ruine
             began
             ,
             search
             and
             you
             shall
             finde
             :
             I
             spare
             to
             name
             the
             Authors
             ,
             not
             willing
             to
             discover
             the
             nakednesse
             of
             the
             Fathers
             ;
             but
             whoso
             reads
             them
             ,
             will
             admire
             to
             see
             so
             truly
             verified
             what
             the
             Spirit
             foretold
             should
             be
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             in
             the
             latter
             times
             ▪
             And
             to
             make
             an
             end
             ,
             if
             any
             shall
             think
             this
             speculation
             of
             times
             to
             be
             a
             needlesse
             curiositie
             ,
             I
             desire
             him
             to
             remember
             how
             our
             Saviour
             reproved
             the
             Jewes
             for
             neglect
             hereof
             ,
             Mat.
             16.3
             .
             
               O
               ye
               Hypocrites
               ,
               ye
               can
               discerne
               the
               face
               of
               the
               skies
               ,
               but
               can
               ye
               not
               discerne
               the
               signes
               of
               the
               times
               ?
            
             or
             as
             Saint
             Luke
             12.56
             .
             
               How
               is
               it
               that
               yee
               doe
               not
               discerne
               this
               time
               ?
            
             they
             through
             neglecting
             the
             
             signes
             of
             the
             times
             ,
             when
             Christ
             came
             ,
             received
             him
             not
             :
             how
             many
             through
             ignorance
             of
             these
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             when
             the
             Apostasie
             hath
             appeared
             ,
             eschewed
             it
             not
             ?
          
           
             From
             which
             of
             these
             three
             beginnings
             of
             the
             Apostaticall
             times
             ,
             or
             whether
             from
             some
             other
             moment
             within
             or
             betweene
             them
             the
             Almighty
             will
             reckon
             that
             his
             computation
             of
             these
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             which
             ended
             ,
             will
             finish
             the
             dayes
             of
             the
             man
             of
             sinne
             ,
             I
             curiously
             enquire
             not
             ,
             but
             leave
             unto
             him
             who
             is
             Lord
             of
             times
             and
             seasons
             :
             nor
             doe
             I
             think
             that
             the
             Jewes
             themselves
             could
             certainly
             tell
             from
             which
             of
             their
             three
             captivities
             to
             begin
             that
             reckoning
             of
             70
             yeeres
             ,
             whose
             end
             should
             bring
             their
             returne
             from
             Babylon
             ,
             untill
             the
             event
             assured
             them
             thereof
             .
          
        
         
           
             AN
             APPENDIX
             .
          
           
             I
             Should
             now
             presently
             come
             to
             speak
             of
             the
             fourth
             particular
             which
             I
             observed
             in
             the
             verse
             ,
             but
             because
             in
             this
             discourse
             of
             times
             ,
             besides
             the
             great
             Calendar
             of
             times
             which
             I
             so
             much
             spake
             of
             ,
             there
             was
             some
             mention
             of
             a
             
               lesser
               Calendar
               ,
               viz.
            
             of
             Daniels
             70
             weekes
             ,
             give
             me
             leave
             to
             note
             some
             places
             of
             Scripture
             which
             I
             suppose
             to
             have
             refe●ence
             thereto
             ,
             for
             the
             better
             clearing
             not
             onely
             of
             our
             former
             discourse
             ,
             but
             of
             some
             scruples
             that
             might
             trouble
             our
             minds
             ,
             when
             mention
             is
             made
             of
             an
             end
             then
             supposed
             neere
             ,
             though
             the
             world
             hath
             lasted
             so
             many
             hundred
             yeeres
             ,
             and
             no
             end
             thereof
             is
             yet
             come
             .
          
           
             Know
             therefore
             ,
             that
             these
             70
             weeks
             are
             a
             
               little
               provinciall
               Calendar
            
             ,
             containi●g
             the
             time
             that
             the
             legall
             worship
             and
             Jewish
             state
             was
             to
             continue
             from
             the
             re-building
             of
             the
             Sanctuary
             under
             
               Darius
               Nothus
            
             ,
             untill
             the
             finall
             destruction
             thereof
             ,
             when
             the
             Calendar
             shall
             expire
             ,
             within
             the
             space
             whereof
             their
             Commonwealth
             and
             City
             should
             be
             restored
             ,
             and
             62
             weeks
             after
             that
             ,
             the
             
             Messias
             be
             slaine
             for
             sin
             ,
             and
             at
             the
             end
             of
             the
             whole
             70
             their
             City
             and
             Temple
             againe
             destroyed
             ,
             and
             their
             Commonwealth
             utterly
             dissolved
             .
             To
             these
             weeks
             therefore
             ,
             whose
             computation
             so
             especially
             concernes
             the
             Jewes
             ,
             is
             reference
             made
             in
             those
             Epistles
             which
             are
             written
             to
             the
             Christian
             Churches
             of
             that
             Nation
             ,
             whether
             being
             in
             Iewry
             ,
             or
             abroad
             dispersed
             ,
             in
             
               Pontus
               ,
               Galatia
               ,
               Cappadocia
               ,
               Asia
               ,
               Bythinia
               .
            
             Such
             is
             S.
             Pauls
             Epistle
             to
             the
             Hebrewes
             ,
             both
             Saint
             Peters
             to
             the
             Dispersion
             ,
             the
             Epistle
             of
             Saint
             Iames
             to
             the
             twelve
             Tribes
             ,
             and
             likewise
             the
             first
             Epistle
             of
             Saint
             Iohn
             ,
             which
             though
             the
             salutation
             expresseth
             not
             as
             in
             the
             former
             ,
             yet
             may
             appeare
             both
             because
             
               Peter
               ,
               Iames
            
             ,
             and
             Iohn
             ,
             were
             all
             three
             Apostles
             of
             the
             circumcision
             ,
             and
             from
             that
             passage
             cap.
             2.2
             .
             
               Christ
               Iesus
               is
               the
               propitiation
               for
               our
               sinnes
               ,
               and
               not
               for
               ours
               onely
               ,
               but
               for
               the
               sinnes
               of
               the
               whole
               world
            
             ;
             that
             is
             ,
             not
             for
             the
             sins
             of
             us
             onely
             who
             are
             Jewes
             ,
             but
             for
             the
             sinnes
             of
             the
             Gentiles
             also
             .
             And
             doth
             not
             the
             name
             of
             generall
             or
             catholicall
             Epistle
             given
             unto
             this
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             those
             of
             Saint
             Iames
             and
             Peter
             ,
             imply
             thus
             much
             ?
             for
             it
             cannot
             be
             thus
             called
             ,
             as
             written
             to
             all
             Christians
             indefinitely
             ,
             and
             generally
             ,
             since
             the
             contrary
             plainly
             appeares
             in
             the
             former
             ;
             but
             because
             this
             as
             well
             as
             the
             rest
             was
             written
             to
             those
             of
             the
             circumcision
             ,
             who
             were
             not
             a
             people
             confined
             to
             any
             one
             City
             or
             Region
             ,
             but
             dispersed
             through
             every
             Nation
             ,
             as
             we
             reade
             in
             the
             
               Acts
               ,
               cap.
            
             2.5
             .
             &c.
             that
             at
             the
             Feast
             of
             Pentecost
             ,
             when
             the
             Holy
             Ghost
             came
             downe
             upon
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             
               there
               were
               sojourning
               at
               Ierusalem
               Iewes
               ,
               devout
               men
               ,
               out
               of
               every
               nation
               under
               heaven
               ;
               Parthians
               ,
               Medes
               ,
               Elamites
               ,
               and
               the
               dwellers
               of
               Mesopotamia
               ,
               Iudaea
               ,
               and
               Cappadocia
               ,
               Pontus
               ,
               and
               Asia
               ,
               and
               strangers
               of
               Rome
               ,
               Jewes
               and
               Proselites
            
             (
             Jewes
             by
             race
             ,
             and
             Jewes
             by
             religion
             )
             &c.
             for
             we
             must
             not
             mistake
             those
             there
             numbred
             to
             be
             Gentiles
             ,
             but
             Israelites
             ;
             both
             of
             the
             ten
             Tribes
             captivated
             by
             Shalmaneser
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             two
             ;
             some
             of
             whom
             never
             returned
             from
             Babylon
             ,
             but
             lived
             still
             in
             Mesopotamia
             :
             
             but
             of
             these
             who
             returned
             ,
             great
             multitudes
             were
             dispersed
             afterwards
             in
             
               Egypt
               ,
               Lybia
            
             ,
             and
             many
             other
             Provinces
             before
             the
             time
             of
             our
             Saviours
             appearing
             in
             the
             flesh
             .
             So
             that
             the
             Apostles
             of
             the
             Circumcision
             had
             their
             Province
             for
             largenesse
             not
             much
             inferiour
             to
             that
             of
             the
             Gentiles
             .
          
           
             But
             I
             come
             to
             note
             the
             places
             I
             spake
             of
             :
             and
             first
             out
             of
             the
             fore-named
             Epistle
             of
             Saint
             John
             ,
             where
             from
             that
             prediction
             of
             our
             Saviour
             in
             the
             Gospel
             ,
             that
             the
             arising
             of
             the
             false
             Prophets
             should
             be
             one
             of
             the
             neare
             signes
             of
             the
             nigh
             approaching
             end
             of
             the
             Jewish
             state
             :
             the
             Apostle
             thus
             referres
             to
             it
             cap.
             2.
             ver
             .
             18.
             
             
               Little
               children
               this
               is
               the
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               the
               last
               houre
               :
               and
               as
               you
               have
               heard
               that
               Antichrist
               shall
               come
               ,
               even
               now
               there
               are
               many
               Antichrists
               ,
               whereby
               we
               know
               that
               it
               is
               the
               last
               time
               :
            
             here
             by
             the
             last
             time
             I
             suppose
             no
             other
             thing
             to
             be
             meant
             but
             the
             neare
             expiring
             of
             Daniels
             70
             weeks
             ,
             and
             with
             it
             the
             approaching
             end
             of
             the
             Jewish
             Commonwealth
             :
             and
             why
             might
             not
             this
             Epistle
             be
             written
             in
             the
             last
             weeke
             ,
             at
             the
             beginning
             whereof
             
               Jesus
               Ananiae
            
             began
             that
             wofull
             crie
             ,
             Woe
             unto
             Jerusalem
             ,
             and
             the
             Temple
             ,
             
               Joseph
               .
               l.
            
             7.
             
               belli
               Judaici
            
             .
             By
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             many
             Antichrists
             ,
             
             are
             meant
             no
             other
             but
             false
             Prophets
             ,
             Counter-prophets
             to
             the
             great
             Prophet
             ,
             pretending
             an
             unction
             and
             commission
             from
             heaven
             (
             as
             he
             had
             )
             to
             teach
             the
             world
             some
             new
             revelation
             and
             doctrine
             :
             for
             the
             name
             Christ
             implies
             the
             unction
             of
             prophecies
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             the
             unction
             of
             a
             kingdome
             ,
             and
             accordingly
             the
             name
             Antichrist
             :
             and
             therefore
             the
             Syriack
             here
             turnes
             it
             ,
             false
             Christs
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             such
             as
             should
             falsely
             pretend
             some
             extraordinary
             unction
             of
             prophecie
             like
             unto
             him
             .
             And
             the
             comming
             of
             such
             as
             these
             ,
             our
             Saviour
             in
             Saint
             Matthews
             Gospel
             ,
             a
             Gospel
             for
             the
             Hebrewes
             ,
             makes
             one
             of
             the
             last
             signes
             ushering
             the
             destruction
             of
             Jerusalem
             ;
             and
             if
             the
             harmony
             of
             this
             prophecy
             in
             the
             three
             Evangelists
             be
             well
             considered
             ,
             there
             was
             no
             more
             to
             come
             but
             the
             compassing
             of
             Jerusalem
             with
             
             armies
             .
             Well
             therefore
             might
             Saint
             John
             ,
             when
             he
             saw
             so
             many
             Antiprophets
             spring
             up
             ,
             say
             ,
             
               Hereby
               we
               know
               that
               it
               is
               the
               last
               time
               .
            
          
           
             Againe
             ,
             b●cause
             the
             desolation
             of
             the
             Jewish
             state
             and
             Temple
             would
             be
             a
             great
             confirmation
             to
             Christian
             faith
             ,
             therefore
             the
             beleeving
             Jewes
             ,
             whom
             nothing
             could
             so
             much
             stagger
             as
             the
             standing
             glory
             of
             that
             Temple
             and
             Religion
             ,
             are
             encouraged
             by
             the
             neerenesse
             of
             that
             time
             of
             expectation
             ,
             when
             so
             great
             a
             confirmation
             of
             their
             faith
             of
             their
             Messias
             already
             come
             should
             appeare
             .
             Heb.
             10.23.25
             .
             
               Let
               us
               hold
               fast
               the
               profession
               of
               our
               faith
               without
               wavering
               ,
               and
               so
               much
               the
               more
               as
               you
               see
               the
               day
               approaching
            
             ;
             namely
             ,
             that
             day
             when
             you
             shall
             be
             sufficiently
             confirmed
             :
             so
             I
             take
             the
             35.
             and
             37.
             verses
             of
             the
             same
             Chapter
             ,
             
               Cast
               not
               away
               your
               confidence
               which
               hath
               great
               recompence
               of
               reward
               ,
               for
               ye
               have
               need
               of
               patience
               .
               For
               yet
               a
               little
               while
               ,
               he
               that
               shall
               come
               ,
               will
               come
               ,
               and
               will
               not
               tarry
               .
            
             What
             (
             he
             )
             is
             this
             ,
             but
             even
             he
             of
             whom
             Daniel
             sayes
             ,
             
               The
               people
               of
               the
               Prince
               that
               shall
               come
               ,
               shall
               destroy
               the
               City
               and
               the
               Sanctuary
               ,
               Dan.
            
             9.26
             .
             For
             even
             as
             the
             destruction
             of
             Papall
             Rome
             would
             be
             a
             great
             confirmation
             of
             the
             reformed
             Christian
             ,
             who
             hath
             forsaken
             the
             Communion
             of
             that
             Religion
             ,
             the
             continuance
             and
             supposed
             stability
             of
             the
             glory
             thereof
             being
             that
             wherewith
             their
             Proctors
             endeavour
             most
             to
             shake
             and
             stager
             us
             :
             so
             was
             the
             destruction
             of
             the
             Jewish
             state
             and
             Temple
             to
             be
             unto
             those
             Jewes
             ,
             who
             had
             withdrawne
             themselves
             from
             that
             body
             and
             Religion
             whereof
             they
             had
             once
             beene
             ,
             to
             embrace
             the
             new
             faith
             of
             the
             Messiah
             ,
             preached
             by
             the
             Apostles
             .
             For
             if
             at
             the
             end
             of
             the
             70
             weeks
             approaching
             ,
             the
             legall
             Sanctuary
             were
             rased
             ,
             and
             the
             Jewish
             state
             dissolved
             ,
             then
             would
             it
             be
             apparent
             indeed
             ,
             that
             the
             Messiah
             was
             already
             come
             and
             slaine
             for
             sin
             ;
             because
             this
             was
             infallibly
             to
             come
             to
             passe
             within
             the
             compasse
             ,
             and
             before
             the
             expiration
             of
             those
             70
             weeks
             ,
             or
             490
             yeeres
             allotted
             for
             the
             last
             continuance
             of
             that
             City
             and
             Sanctuarie
             ,
             
             when
             it
             should
             be
             restored
             after
             the
             captivity
             of
             Babylon
             .
          
           
             Not
             without
             cause
             therefore
             doth
             Saint
             Peter
             in
             his
             second
             Epistle
             say
             to
             the
             Christian
             Jewes
             ,
             
               We
               have
               a
               more
               sure
               word
               of
               prophecie
               ,
               whereunto
               you
               doe
               well
               that
               you
               give
               heed
               as
               unto
               a
               light
               shining
               in
               a
               dark
               place
               ,
               untill
               the
               day
               dawn
               ,
               and
               the
               day-star
               arise
               in
               your
               hearts
               :
            
             yea
             and
             besides
             ,
             because
             Jesus
             also
             as
             well
             as
             Daniel
             had
             prophesied
             of
             the
             approaching
             desolation
             of
             that
             City
             and
             Temple
             ,
             mentioning
             all
             the
             signes
             that
             were
             to
             usher
             it
             ;
             if
             the
             event
             when
             time
             come
             should
             fall
             out
             accordingly
             ,
             then
             must
             Jesus
             of
             Nazareth
             ,
             who
             foretold
             the
             foregoing
             signes
             thereof
             ,
             be
             approved
             as
             a
             true
             Prophet
             ,
             by
             whom
             of
             a
             truth
             the
             Lord
             had
             spoken
             .
             Now
             for
             the
             last
             place
             I
             mean
             to
             alledge
             :
             thus
             must
             the
             last
             of
             Saint
             James
             also
             be
             expounded
             ,
             because
             the
             fall
             and
             shock
             of
             that
             state
             might
             shake
             the
             whole
             nation
             wheresoever
             dispersed
             ,
             unlesse
             God
             had
             spared
             the
             Christians
             ,
             and
             made
             them
             alone
             happy
             in
             that
             wofull
             day
             ,
             or
             rather
             because
             Christ
             had
             foretold
             that
             one
             of
             the
             next
             fore-runners
             thereof
             should
             be
             a
             generall
             persecution
             of
             Christians
             ,
             as
             it
             happened
             under
             Nero.
             Therefore
             the
             remembrance
             of
             the
             end
             of
             these
             70
             weekes
             so
             neere
             the
             expiring
             ,
             was
             a
             good
             caution
             to
             all
             the
             Christian
             Jewes
             to
             watch
             and
             pray
             :
             to
             this
             sence
             therefore
             I
             take
             that
             of
             Peter
             ,
             1
             Pet.
             4.7
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               the
               end
               of
               all
               things
               is
               at
               hand
               ,
               be
               yee
               sober
               therefore
               ,
               and
               watch
               unto
               prayer
            
             ;
             that
             is
             ,
             the
             end
             of
             all
             your
             Commonwealth
             ,
             legall
             worship
             ,
             Temple
             ,
             and
             service
             ,
             is
             now
             within
             a
             few
             yeeres
             :
             be
             ye
             therefore
             sober
             ,
             and
             watch
             unto
             prayer
             ,
             that
             ye
             may
             be
             more
             happy
             in
             the
             day
             of
             vengeance
             and
             wrath
             upon
             our
             Nation
             .
             Neither
             need
             we
             wonder
             that
             this
             desolation
             should
             be
             called
             the
             end
             ,
             for
             our
             Saviour
             himselfe
             taught
             them
             so
             to
             speak
             in
             his
             prophecie
             concerning
             it
             ,
             as
             may
             appeare
             if
             we
             consider
             that
             Antithesis
             in
             Saint
             
               Luke
               ,
               cap.
            
             21.9
             .
             
               Yee
               shall
               heare
               of
               warres
               ,
               and
               commotions
               ,
               but
               the
               end
               is
               not
               by
               
               and
               by
               .
               Ver.
            
             20.
             
             
               But
               when
               yee
               shall
               see
               Jerusalem
               encompassed
               with
               armies
               ,
               then
               know
               that
               the
            
             desolation
             
               thereof
               is
               nigh
            
             .
          
           
             And
             thus
             much
             I
             thought
             to
             add
             to
             my
             former
             discourse
             of
             latter
             times
             ,
             lest
             through
             ignorance
             thereof
             we
             might
             incline
             to
             that
             little
             better
             than
             blasphemous
             conceit
             which
             *
             Baronius
             by
             name
             ,
             and
             some
             other
             of
             Romes
             followers
             have
             taken
             up
             ;
             viz.
             that
             the
             Apostles
             in
             such
             like
             passages
             as
             we
             have
             noted
             ,
             were
             mistaken
             as
             beleeving
             that
             the
             end
             of
             the
             world
             should
             have
             been
             in
             their
             owne
             time
             ;
             God
             of
             purpose
             so
             ordering
             it
             ,
             to
             cause
             in
             them
             a
             greater
             measure
             of
             zeale
             ,
             and
             contempt
             of
             worldly
             things
             ;
             an
             opinion
             I
             thinke
             not
             well
             beseeming
             a
             Christian.
             
          
           
             1
             For
             ,
             first
             ,
             whatsoever
             we
             imagine
             ,
             the
             Apostles
             might
             here
             conceive
             in
             their
             private
             opinions
             as
             men
             ;
             yet
             we
             must
             know
             that
             the
             Holy
             Ghost
             ,
             by
             whose
             instinct
             they
             wrote
             the
             Scriptures
             ,
             is
             the
             Spirit
             of
             truth
             ,
             and
             therefore
             what
             is
             there
             affirmed
             must
             be
             true
             ,
             yea
             ,
             though
             the
             Pen-man
             himselfe
             understood
             it
             not
             .
          
           
             2
             Secondly
             ,
             it
             was
             not
             possible
             the
             Apostles
             should
             expect
             the
             end
             of
             the
             world
             to
             be
             in
             their
             owne
             time
             ,
             when
             they
             knew
             so
             many
             things
             were
             to
             come
             to
             passe
             before
             it
             ,
             as
             could
             not
             be
             fulfilled
             in
             a
             short
             time
             :
             As
             first
             ,
             the
             desolation
             of
             Jerusalem
             ,
             and
             that
             not
             till
             the
             70
             weeks
             were
             expired
             .
             
             Secondly
             ,
             then
             the
             Jewes
             to
             be
             carryed
             captives
             over
             all
             Nations
             ,
             and
             Jerusalem
             to
             be
             trodden
             downe
             of
             the
             Gentiles
             ,
             untill
             the
             time
             of
             the
             Gentiles
             be
             fulfilled
             ,
             Luke
             21.24
             .
             Thirdly
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             meane
             time
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             must
             be
             ruined
             ,
             and
             that
             which
             hindered
             taken
             out
             of
             the
             way
             ,
             2
             Thes.
             2.7
             .
             Fourtly
             ,
             that
             after
             that
             was
             done
             ,
             the
             man
             of
             sin
             should
             be
             revealed
             ,
             and
             domineere
             his
             time
             in
             the
             Temple
             and
             Church
             of
             God
             ,
             Ibid.
             Fifthly
             ,
             after
             all
             this
             ,
             viz.
             when
             the
             fulnesse
             of
             the
             Gentiles
             should
             come
             in
             ,
             that
             Israel
             should
             be
             received
             againe
             to
             mercy
             ,
             Rom.
             11.27
             .
             Sixthly
             ,
             that
             Christ
             
             should
             reigne
             in
             his
             Church
             on
             earth
             so
             long
             ,
             till
             he
             had
             put
             downe
             all
             rule
             ,
             all
             authority
             and
             power
             ,
             and
             subjected
             all
             his
             enemies
             under
             his
             feet
             ,
             before
             he
             should
             subdue
             the
             last
             enemy
             ,
             which
             is
             death
             ,
             and
             surrender
             his
             kingdome
             into
             the
             hands
             of
             his
             Father
             ,
             1
             Cor.
             15.24
             ,
             25
             ,
             
               &c.
               Heb.
            
             2.8
             .
             Seventhly
             ,
             that
             the
             time
             should
             be
             so
             long
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             last
             dayes
             should
             come
             Scoffers
             ,
             saying
             ,
             
               Where
               is
               the
               promise
               of
               his
               comming
               ,
            
             2
             Pet.
             3.4
             .
             How
             is
             it
             possible
             they
             should
             imagine
             the
             day
             of
             Doome
             to
             be
             so
             neere
             ,
             when
             all
             these
             things
             must
             first
             come
             to
             passe
             ,
             and
             not
             one
             of
             them
             was
             yet
             fulfilled
             ?
          
           
             And
             how
             could
             the
             expectation
             of
             this
             day
             be
             made
             a
             ground
             of
             exhortation
             ,
             and
             a
             motive
             to
             watchfulnesse
             ,
             and
             prayer
             ,
             as
             though
             it
             could
             suddenly
             and
             unawares
             surprize
             them
             which
             had
             so
             many
             wonderfull
             alterations
             to
             foregoe
             it
             ,
             and
             yet
             none
             of
             them
             come
             to
             passe
             .
             I
             have
             spoken
             hitherto
             of
             what
             was
             revealed
             to
             all
             the
             Apostles
             in
             generall
             ;
             but
             if
             we
             take
             Saint
             John
             apart
             from
             the
             rest
             ,
             and
             consider
             what
             was
             afterward
             revealed
             to
             him
             in
             Patmos
             ,
             we
             shall
             finde
             in
             his
             Apocalypticall
             vision
             ,
             besides
             other
             times
             more
             obscurely
             intimated
             ,
             an
             expresse
             prophecy
             of
             no
             lesse
             than
             a
             thousand
             yeers
             ,
             which
             whatever
             it
             meane
             ,
             cannot
             be
             a
             small
             time
             ,
             and
             must
             be
             fulfilled
             in
             this
             world
             ,
             and
             not
             in
             the
             world
             to
             come
             .
             Notwithstanding
             all
             this
             ,
             I
             make
             no
             question
             but
             in
             the
             Apostles
             times
             many
             of
             the
             beleeving
             Gentiles
             ,
             mistaking
             the
             Apostles
             admonition
             to
             the
             Jewes
             of
             the
             end
             of
             their
             state
             approaching
             ,
             thought
             the
             end
             of
             the
             whole
             world
             and
             the
             day
             of
             the
             Lord
             had
             beene
             also
             neere
             ,
             whom
             therefore
             Paul
             2
             Thes.
             2.
             beseeches
             to
             be
             better
             informed
             ,
             because
             that
             day
             should
             not
             come
             untill
             the
             Apostasie
             came
             first
             ,
             and
             that
             man
             of
             sin
             were
             revealed
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             Expresly
             ,
             or
             ,
             
               in
               expresse
               words
            
             .
          
           
             NOw
             I
             come
             to
             the
             fourth
             part
             of
             this
             prophecy
             ,
             the
             warrant
             or
             proofe
             thereof
             .
             The
             Spirit
             hath
             foretold
             it
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             or
             
               in
               expresse
               words
            
             ,
             in
             some
             place
             or
             other
             of
             divine
             Writ
             .
             The
             Spirit
             told
             
               Peter
               Acts
            
             10.19
             .
             
               Behold
               three
               men
               seeke
               thee
            
             .
             The
             Spirit
             said
             ,
             Separate
             Barnabas
             and
             Saul
             ,
             Acts
             13.2
             .
             The
             Spirit
             forbade
             Saint
             Paul
             to
             
               preach
               in
               Asia
            
             .
             The
             Spirit
             said
             that
             the
             Jewes
             should
             
               binde
               Saint
            
             Paul
             
               at
               Jerusalem
               ,
               Acts
            
             21.11
             .
             But
             in
             all
             these
             the
             Spirit
             spake
             not
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             :
             for
             these
             things
             were
             no
             where
             written
             ,
             and
             therefore
             what
             it
             spake
             ,
             it
             spake
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             onely
             by
             secret
             Instinct
             or
             Inspiration
             :
             but
             that
             which
             the
             Spirit
             speakes
             in
             the
             written
             Word
             ,
             that
             it
             speaketh
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             verbatim
             ,
             expresly
             .
             If
             therefore
             concerning
             this
             Apostasie
             of
             Christian
             beleevers
             ,
             to
             be
             in
             these
             latter
             times
             ,
             the
             Scripture
             speaketh
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             then
             is
             it
             to
             be
             found
             somewhere
             in
             the
             Old
             Testament
             :
             for
             there
             alone
             the
             Spirit
             could
             be
             said
             to
             speake
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             or
             verbatim
             ,
             in
             the
             Apostles
             time
             .
             Having
             therefore
             so
             good
             a
             hint
             given
             us
             ,
             let
             us
             see
             if
             we
             can
             finde
             where
             the
             Spirit
             speaketh
             of
             this
             matter
             so
             expresly
             .
          
           
             There
             are
             three
             maine
             things
             in
             this
             our
             Apostles
             prediction
             ,
             whereof
             I
             finde
             the
             Spirit
             to
             have
             spoken
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             or
             ,
             
               in
               expresse
               words
            
             ,
             and
             that
             in
             the
             prophecy
             of
             Daniel
             .
             1
             Of
             these
             last
             or
             latter
             times
             .
             2
             Of
             the
             new
             worship
             of
             Daemons
             in
             them
             .
             3
             Of
             a
             Prohibition
             of
             marriage
             to
             accompany
             them
             .
             As
             for
             the
             first
             of
             these
             ,
             the
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             Daniel
             ,
             as
             you
             heard
             before
             ,
             expresly
             names
             them
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               a
               time
               ,
               times
               ,
               and
               halfe
               a
               time
            
             ;
             being
             those
             
               last
               times
            
             of
             this
             
               last
               kingdome
            
             ,
             wheren
             the
             Hornish
             Tyrant
             should
             make
             warre
             with
             the
             Saints
             ,
             and
             prevaile
             against
             them
             .
             For
             the
             second
             ,
             a
             worship
             of
             new
             Daemons
             or
             Demi-gods
             with
             the
             profession
             of
             the
             name
             of
             Christ
             :
             you
             will
             perhaps
             think
             it
             strange
             if
             I
             should
             
             shew
             it
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             :
             but
             if
             I
             doe
             ,
             it
             was
             the
             Appendix
             of
             hindering
             or
             debarring
             marriage
             ,
             mentioned
             in
             the
             next
             verse
             ,
             which
             as
             a
             thread
             led
             me
             the
             way
             to
             the
             end
             of
             the
             eleventh
             chapter
             of
             Daniel
             ,
             where
             I
             found
             it
             ,
             and
             in
             a
             place
             too
             very
             suspicious
             ,
             being
             taken
             I
             think
             by
             almost
             all
             the
             Ancients
             for
             a
             prophecy
             of
             Antichrist
             ;
             yea
             and
             so
             expounded
             by
             the
             greatest
             part
             of
             our
             own
             ,
             though
             with
             much
             variety
             of
             reading
             and
             application
             .
             But
             heare
             the
             words
             themselves
             in
             the
             36
             ,
             37
             ,
             38
             ,
             39
             verses
             of
             the
             eleventh
             chapter
             of
             Daniel
             ,
             translated
             as
             I
             think
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             verbatim
             ,
             without
             any
             wresting
             or
             straining
             the
             Hebrew
             text
             :
             they
             are
             a
             description
             of
             the
             last
             or
             
               Roman
               Kingdome
            
             ,
             with
             the
             severall
             states
             thereof
             ;
             conquering
             nations
             ,
             persecuting
             Christians
             ,
             false
             worshipping
             Christ.
             
          
           
             
               
                 The
                 words
                 are
                 these
                 ,
                 
                   Daniel
                   cap.
                
                 11.36
                 ,
                 37
                 ,
                 38
                 ,
                 39.
                 verses
                 .
              
               
                 
                   36
                   Then
                   a
                   King
                   shall
                   doe
                   according
                   to
                   his
                   will
                   ,
                   &
                   shall
                   exalt
                   and
                   magnifie
                   himselfe
                   above
                   every
                   god
                   ,
                   yea
                   against
                   the
                   God
                   of
                   gods
                   shall
                   hee
                   speak
                   marvellous
                   things
                   ,
                   and
                   shall
                   prosper
                   untill
                   the
                   indignation
                   be
                   accomplished
                   :
                   for
                   the
                   determined
                   time
                   shall
                   be
                   fulfilled
                   .
                
                 
                   36
                   
                     Tunc
                     faciet
                     pro
                     libitu
                     suo
                     Rex
                     ,
                     &
                     extollet
                     ac
                     magnificabit
                     seipsum
                     supra
                     omnem
                     deum
                     ,
                     etiam
                     contra
                     Deum
                     deorum
                     loquetur
                     stupenda
                     ,
                     proficitque
                     donec
                     consummata
                     fuerit
                     indignatio
                     :
                     nam
                     statutum
                     perficietur
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   37
                   Then
                   he
                   shall
                   not
                   regard
                   the
                   gods
                   of
                   his
                   Ancestors
                   ,
                   nor
                   shall
                   he
                   regard
                   the
                   desire
                   of
                   women
                   ,
                   no
                   nor
                   any
                   god
                   :
                   but
                   he
                   shall
                   magnifie
                   himselfe
                   above
                   all
                   .
                
                 
                   37
                   
                     Tunc
                     ad
                     Deos
                     ma
                     jorum
                     suorum
                     non
                     attendet
                     ,
                     nec
                     ad
                     desiderium
                     mulierum
                     ,
                     nec
                     ad
                     ▪
                     ullum
                     numen
                     attendet
                     :
                     sed
                     supra
                     omne
                     se
                     magnificabit
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                
              
               
               
                 
                   38
                   For
                   to
                   [
                   or
                   together
                   with
                   ]
                   God
                   ,
                   in
                   his
                   seat
                   ,
                   hee
                   shall
                   honour
                   Mahuzzims
                   :
                   yea
                   together
                   with
                   that
                   God
                   whom
                   his
                   Ancestours
                   knew
                   not
                   ,
                   shall
                   he
                   honour
                   them
                   with
                   gold
                   ,
                   and
                   with
                   silver
                   ,
                   and
                   with
                   precious
                   stones
                   ,
                   and
                   with
                   pleasant
                   things
                   .
                
                 
                   38
                   
                     Nam
                     ad
                     [
                     vel
                     juxta
                     ]
                     Deum
                     ,
                     Mahuzzimos
                     ,
                     in
                     sede
                     ejus
                     honorabit
                     :
                     scilicet
                     ad
                     Deum
                     ,
                     quem
                     non
                     agnoverunt
                     majores
                     ejus
                     ,
                     honarabit
                     eos
                     auro
                     ,
                     &
                     argento
                     ,
                     &
                     lapidibus
                     pretiosis
                     ,
                     &
                     rebus
                     desideratissimis
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   39
                   And
                   hee
                   shall
                   make
                   the
                   holds
                   of
                   the
                   Mahuzzims
                   withall
                   (
                   or
                   joyntly
                   )
                   to
                   the
                   forreigne
                   god
                   :
                   whom
                   acknowledging
                   ,
                   hee
                   shall
                   increase
                   with
                   honour
                   ,
                   and
                   shall
                   cause
                   them
                   to
                   rule
                   over
                   many
                   ,
                   and
                   shall
                   distribute
                   the
                   earth
                   for
                   a
                   reward
                   .
                
                 
                   39
                   
                     Et
                     faciet
                     munimenta
                     Mauzzimorum
                     unà
                     deo
                     peregrino
                     (
                     seu
                     exotico
                     )
                     :
                     quem
                     agnoscendo
                     ,
                     multiplicabit
                     honores
                     ,
                     &
                     dominari
                     faciet
                     eos
                     in
                     multos
                     ,
                     terramque
                     partietur
                     in
                     mercedem
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                
              
            
          
           
             1
             Now
             for
             the
             understanding
             of
             this
             Prophecy
             ,
             wee
             must
             take
             notice
             that
             the
             Prophet
             Daniel
             at
             the
             begining
             of
             these
             verses
             ,
             leaves
             off
             the
             Greek
             kingdome
             with
             Antiochus
             ,
             of
             whom
             he
             was
             speaking
             before
             ,
             and
             falls
             about
             the
             Romane
             :
             the
             reason
             being
             ,
             because
             after
             Antiochus
             ,
             in
             whose
             time
             Macedonia
             (
             whence
             that
             kingdome
             sprung
             ,
             with
             all
             the
             rest
             of
             Greece
             )
             came
             under
             the
             Romane
             obedience
             ;
             the
             third
             kingdome
             comes
             no
             more
             into
             reckoning
             ,
             Daniel
             himselfe
             calling
             the
             time
             of
             Antiochus
             reigne
             ,
             the
             
               latter
               end
            
             of
             the
             Greek
             kingdome
             ,
             cap.
             8.23
             .
             and
             as
             I
             take
             it
             ,
             he
             intimates
             the
             same
             in
             this
             chapter
             in
             the
             verses
             immediately
             fore-going
             :
             these
             we
             have
             now
             to
             deale
             withall
             :
             from
             thence
             forward
             therefore
             the
             Romane
             succeeds
             in
             the
             account
             of
             the
             Great
             Calendar
             of
             time
             .
          
           
           
             2
             Under
             the
             name
             King
             we
             must
             understand
             the
             whole
             Roman
             State
             under
             what
             kind
             of
             government
             soever
             :
             for
             the
             Hebrewes
             use
             King
             for
             kingdome
             ,
             and
             kingdome
             for
             any
             Government
             ,
             State
             or
             Policy
             in
             the
             world
             :
             for
             the
             Divell
             in
             the
             Gospel
             is
             said
             to
             have
             shewn
             Christ
             all
             the
             kingdomes
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             Monarchies
             ,
             Aristocracies
             ,
             Democracies
             ,
             or
             what
             other
             kind
             soever
             .
          
           
             3
             Where
             it
             is
             said
             ,
             this
             King
             shall
             
               exalt
               himselfe
               above
               every
               God
            
             ,
             nothing
             is
             thereby
             meant
             ,
             but
             the
             generality
             ,
             and
             the
             greatnesse
             of
             his
             conquests
             and
             prevailings
             :
             and
             the
             reason
             of
             that
             phrase
             or
             manner
             of
             speech
             should
             seem
             to
             be
             ,
             because
             in
             the
             time
             of
             Paganisme
             every
             Citie
             and
             Country
             was
             supposed
             to
             have
             their
             proper
             and
             peculiar
             gods
             ,
             which
             were
             deemed
             as
             their
             guardians
             and
             protectors
             :
             whence
             in
             the
             Scripture
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             language
             of
             that
             time
             ,
             we
             may
             observe
             a
             threefold
             use
             of
             speech
             .
             First
             ,
             The
             Nations
             themselves
             are
             expressed
             and
             implyed
             under
             the
             names
             of
             their
             gods
             :
             The
             Israelites
             were
             called
             
               the
               people
               of
               Jehovah
            
             ,
             so
             are
             the
             Moabites
             
               the
               people
               of
               Chemosh
               ,
               Numb
               .
            
             21.29
             .
             The
             Lord
             threatned
             ,
             Deut.
             4.28
             .
             &
             28.64
             .
             Jer.
             16.13
             ▪
             to
             
               scatter
               Israel
               among
               the
               nations
               ,
               from
               one
               end
               of
               the
               earth
               even
               to
               another
               ,
               and
               that
               there
               they
               should
               serve
               other
               gods
               day
               and
               night
               ;
               gods
               the
               work
               of
               mens
               hands
               ,
               woed
               and
               stone
               ,
               which
               neither
               they
               nor
               their
               fathers
               had
               knowne
               :
            
             that
             is
             ,
             they
             should
             serve
             them
             ,
             not
             Religiously
             but
             Politically
             ,
             insomuch
             as
             they
             were
             to
             become
             slaves
             and
             vassals
             to
             
             Idolatrous
             nations
             ;
             even
             such
             Idolaters
             as
             neither
             they
             nor
             their
             fathers
             had
             ever
             heard
             of
             .
             For
             as
             for
             a
             religious
             service
             of
             Idols
             ,
             the
             Jewes
             were
             never
             so
             free
             as
             in
             the
             captivity
             ,
             as
             we
             see
             by
             experience
             at
             this
             day
             :
             but
             with
             the
             service
             of
             bondage
             they
             may
             be
             said
             Politically
             to
             have
             beene
             the
             vassals
             of
             Idols
             ,
             as
             being
             in
             bondage
             to
             the
             servants
             of
             other
             gods
             .
             As
             a
             Christian
             taken
             by
             the
             Turks
             may
             in
             the
             like
             sense
             be
             said
             to
             come
             in
             bondage
             ,
             and
             be
             a
             slave
             to
             Mahomet
             :
             for
             a
             slave
             to
             the
             servants
             is
             in
             a
             sense
             servant
             to
             their
             masters
             .
             Let
             it
             
             also
             be
             considered
             whether
             that
             of
             David
             ,
             1
             Sam.
             26.19
             .
             be
             not
             to
             be
             expounded
             according
             to
             this
             notion
             ,
             
               They
               have
               driven
               me
               out
               this
               day
               from
               abiding
               in
               the
               inheritance
               of
               the
               Lord
               ,
               saying
               ,
               goe
               serve
               other
               gods
            
             ;
             that
             is
             ,
             banished
             me
             into
             a
             nation
             of
             another
             Religion
             .
             Secondly
             ,
             The
             exploits
             of
             the
             nation
             are
             said
             to
             be
             done
             by
             their
             gods
             ,
             even
             as
             we
             by
             like
             priviledge
             of
             speech
             ascribe
             unto
             our
             Kings
             what
             is
             done
             by
             the
             people
             under
             them
             :
             thus
             2
             Chron
             28.23
             .
             the
             gods
             of
             Damascus
             are
             said
             to
             have
             smote
             
               Ahaz
               ;
               he
               sacrificed
               to
               the
               gods
               of
            
             Damascus
             
               that
               smote
               him
               :
               and
               he
               said
               ,
               Because
               the
               gods
               of
            
             Syria
             
               help
               them
               ,
               therefore
               will
               I
               sacrifice
               to
               them
               ,
               that
               they
               may
               help
               me
               .
               Jer.
            
             51.44
             .
             it
             is
             said
             of
             the
             dominion
             of
             Babylon
             ,
             that
             the
             nations
             flowed
             together
             unto
             Bel
             ,
             and
             that
             he
             had
             swallowed
             up
             their
             wealth
             ,
             which
             the
             Lord
             threatned
             there
             to
             bring
             forth
             again
             out
             of
             his
             mouth
             .
             Thirdly
             ,
             and
             that
             most
             frequently
             of
             all
             others
             ,
             What
             is
             attempted
             against
             the
             nation
             ,
             is
             said
             to
             be
             attempted
             against
             their
             gods
             :
             Even
             as
             Generals
             beare
             the
             name
             not
             onely
             of
             the
             exploits
             ,
             but
             also
             of
             the
             disadvantages
             of
             the
             armies
             led
             by
             them
             :
             so
             here
             the
             gods
             are
             said
             to
             receive
             the
             affronts
             ,
             defeatures
             ,
             and
             discomfitures
             given
             to
             the
             people
             under
             their
             patronage
             .
             *
             Rabshakeh
             vaunts
             in
             his
             masters
             name
             ,
             2
             Kings
             28.33
             .
             
               Hath
               any
               of
               the
               gods
               of
               the
               nations
               delivered
               at
               all
               his
               land
               out
               of
               the
               hand
               of
               the
               King
               of
            
             Assyria
             ?
             
               where
               are
               the
               gods
               of
            
             Hamath
             ,
             
               and
               of
            
             Arphad
             ?
             
               where
               are
               the
               gods
               of
            
             Sepharvaim
             ?
             Esay
             46.2
             .
             prophecieth
             thus
             of
             the
             taking
             of
             Babylon
             by
             Cyrus
             ;
             Bel
             
               boweth
               downe
            
             ,
             Nebo
             
               stoopeth
               ,
               they
               could
               not
               deliver
               the
               burden
               ,
               but
               they
               themselves
               are
               gone
               into
               captivity
               .
            
             In
             the
             like
             straine
             prophecieth
             
               Jeremy
               ,
               cap.
            
             50.2
             .
             Babylon
             
               is
               taken
            
             ,
             Bel
             
               is
               confounded
            
             ,
             Merodach
             
               is
               broken
               in
               pieces
               ,
               her
               Idols
               are
               confounded
               .
            
             And
             again
             ,
             Jer.
             51.44
             .
             
               I
               will
               punish
            
             Bel
             in
             Babylon
             ,
             
               and
               I
               will
               bring
               out
               of
               his
               mouth
               that
               which
               he
               hath
               swallowed
               up
               ,
               and
               the
               nations
               shall
               not
               flow
               together
               any
               more
               unto
               him
               :
               yea
               the
               wall
               of
            
             Babylon
             
               shall
               fall
            
             .
             The
             same
             Prophet
             
             saith
             of
             Moabs
             captivity
             ,
             cap.
             48.7
             .
             
               Thou
               shalt
               be
               taken
               ,
               and
            
             Chemosh
             
               shall
               go
               into
               captivity
               with
               his
               Priests
               and
               his
               Princes
               together
               .
               Moa●
            
             likewise
             in
             his
             affronts
             and
             derision
             of
             Israel
             is
             said
             to
             have
             magnified
             himselfe
             against
             the
             Lord
             :
             according
             to
             which
             manner
             of
             speech
             the
             successe
             and
             prevailing
             of
             the
             Roman
             in
             the
             advancing
             his
             dominion
             ,
             and
             subduing
             every
             nation
             under
             him
             ,
             is
             here
             expressed
             by
             his
             exalting
             and
             magnifying
             himselfe
             above
             every
             God.
             This
             I
             suppose
             to
             be
             the
             ground
             of
             that
             manner
             of
             speech
             ;
             though
             if
             any
             had
             rather
             ,
             as
             others
             doe
             ,
             take
             gods
             here
             for
             Kings
             and
             Potentates
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             it
             will
             I
             confesse
             come
             all
             to
             one
             purpose
             .
          
           
             4
             By
             the
             gods
             of
             their
             Ancestours
             ,
             whom
             the
             Roman
             State
             should
             at
             length
             cashiere
             and
             cast
             off
             ,
             are
             meant
             all
             the
             Pagan
             Deities
             ,
             and
             heathen
             Gods
             ,
             which
             were
             worshipped
             in
             that
             Empire
             .
          
           
             5
             By
             
               desire
               of
               women
            
             ,
             which
             the
             Roman
             of
             that
             time
             should
             not
             regard
             ,
             as
             he
             was
             wont
             ,
             is
             meant
             the
             
               desire
               of
               wiving
            
             ,
             or
             desire
             of
             having
             women
             for
             the
             society
             of
             life
             ;
             conjugall
             affection
             which
             is
             expressed
             Gen.
             2.24
             .
             to
             be
             such
             a
             desire
             for
             which
             a
             man
             should
             leave
             father
             and
             mother
             and
             cleave
             to
             his
             wife
             ,
             and
             they
             shall
             be
             both
             one
             flesh
             :
             and
             it
             might
             have
             beene
             in
             this
             place
             ,
             
               desire
               of
               wives
            
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             
               desire
               of
               women
            
             ;
             for
             there
             is
             no
             other
             word
             used
             in
             the
             Originall
             for
             wives
             above
             once
             or
             twice
             in
             the
             whole
             Scripture
             ,
             but
             this
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             which
             is
             here
             turned
             women
             .
             With
             the
             like
             use
             of
             the
             word
             desire
             ,
             the
             Spouse
             in
             the
             
               Canticles
               ,
               cap.
            
             7.10
             .
             expresseth
             her
             wel-beloved
             to
             be
             her
             husband
             :
             
               I
               am
               my
               wel-beloveds
            
             (
             saith
             she
             )
             
               and
               his
               desire
               is
               toward
               me
            
             ;
             that
             is
             ,
             he
             is
             my
             husband
             :
             for
             so
             twice
             before
             she
             expressed
             her selfe
             ,
             cap.
             2.16
             .
             
               My
               beloved
               is
               mine
               ;
               and
               I
               am
               his
               .
            
             Cap.
             6.3
             .
             
               I
               am
               my
               beloveds
               ,
               and
               my
               beloved
               is
               mine
               .
            
             So
             Ezek.
             24.16
             .
             the
             Lord
             threatning
             to
             take
             away
             Ezekiels
             wife
             ,
             saith
             ,
             Behold
             ,
             
             
               I
               take
               away
               from
               thee
               the
               desire
               of
               thine
               eyes
            
             ;
             and
             afterward
             ver
             .
             18.
             it
             followeth
             ,
             
               and
               at
               even
               my
               wife
               died
               .
            
             Yea
             ,
             the
             
             Roman
             language
             it selfe
             is
             not
             unacquainted
             with
             this
             speech
             :
             
               Cicero
               ad
               uxorem
               ,
               En
               mea
               lux
               ,
               meum
               desiderium
               .
            
             This
             desire
             of
             women
             and
             married
             life
             ,
             the
             Roman
             should
             discountenance
             ,
             when
             he
             shook
             off
             the
             gods
             of
             his
             Ancestors
             .
          
           
             6
             ▪
             By
             the
             
               strange
               and
               forraine
               God
            
             whom
             the
             Roman
             should
             at
             length
             acknowledge
             ,
             is
             meant
             a
             Christ
             ;
             for
             though
             to
             the
             Jew
             every
             strange
             and
             forreign
             god
             were
             a
             false
             god
             ,
             yet
             to
             the
             Gentiles
             ,
             who
             worshipped
             none
             but
             Idols
             ,
             the
             forreigne
             god
             was
             the
             True
             :
             therefore
             the
             Philosophers
             at
             Athens
             ,
             when
             Saint
             Paul
             preached
             Christ
             unto
             them
             ,
             said
             ,
             he
             preacheth
             b
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               a
               forreigne
               god
            
             .
             The
             want
             of
             which
             consideration
             hath
             much
             obscured
             this
             Prophecy
             ,
             this
             
               forreigne
               god
            
             being
             still
             supposed
             to
             be
             a
             
               false
               god
            
             ;
             when
             to
             those
             who
             worshipped
             all
             kinds
             of
             false
             gods
             ,
             as
             the
             c
             Roman
             did
             ,
             a
             
               forreigne
               god
            
             ,
             whom
             their
             fathers
             knew
             not
             ,
             must
             needs
             be
             the
             True.
             
          
           
             7
             Where
             it
             is
             said
             ,
             
               With
               this
               forreign
               god
               he
               shall
               honour
               Mahuzzims
               :
            
             these
             Mahuzzim
             ,
             or
             Mauzzims
             ,
             are
             these
             Daimons
             we
             seek
             for
             ,
             whom
             the
             Roman
             should
             worship
             with
             Christ
             ,
             whom
             he
             should
             embrace
             :
             For
             Mahuzzims
             are
             
               Protectores
               dii
            
             ,
             such
             as
             Saints
             and
             Angels
             are
             supposed
             to
             be
             ,
             as
             I
             shall
             shew
             by
             and
             by
             ;
             where
             though
             I
             shall
             be
             new
             for
             the
             particular
             ,
             yet
             for
             the
             generall
             I
             shall
             agree
             well
             enough
             with
             the
             Fathers
             ,
             who
             constantly
             thought
             that
             under
             this
             Mahuzzim
             was
             some
             Idol
             meant
             which
             Antichrist
             should
             worship
             ,
             and
             many
             of
             our
             times
             have
             taken
             it
             for
             the
             Masse
             .
          
           
             But
             I
             must
             first
             say
             something
             of
             the
             translation
             of
             this
             verse
             ,
             and
             then
             will
             come
             to
             the
             signification
             of
             this
             word
             Mahuzzims
             .
          
           
             For
             the
             first
             ,
             whereas
             the
             preposition
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             in
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             is
             usually
             neglected
             ,
             and
             the
             words
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             God
             and
             Mahuzzim
             construed
             together
             as
             one
             thing
             ,
             
               viz.
               God
               Mahuzzim
            
             ,
             or
             ,
             as
             some
             ,
             the
             
               God
               of
               forces
            
             ;
             I
             expresse
             
             the
             Preposition
             Lamed
             ,
             and
             construe
             God
             and
             Mahuzzim
             apart
             ,
             as
             here
             ,
             
               viz.
               to
            
             ,
             or
             ,
             
               together
               with
               God
               he
               shall
               honour
               Mahuzzims
               ,
            
             &c.
             
               Ad
               ,
               vel
               juxta
               Deum
               ,
               Mahuzzimos
               honorabit
               .
            
             For
             the
             preposition
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             is
             made
             of
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             and
             signifies
             the
             same
             with
             it
             ,
             viz.
             addition
             of
             ,
             or
             joyning
             of
             things
             ,
             
               ad
               ,
               juxta
               ,
               apud
               ,
               pro
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               in
               ,
               pro
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               pro
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               contra
               ,
               super
               ,
               to
               ,
               together
               ,
            
             and
             
               besides
               with
            
             ,
             as
             d
             Lev.
             18.18
             .
             
               Thou
               shalt
               not
               take
               a
               wife
               to
               her
               sister
               ,
            
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             sister·
             By
             this
             meanes
             the
             controversie
             betweene
             Junius
             and
             Graserus
             is
             taken
             away
             :
             for
             Junius
             ,
             as
             should
             seeme
             ,
             seeing
             no
             reason
             why
             the
             Preposition
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             should
             be
             neglected
             ,
             and
             that
             by
             so
             doing
             the
             Verb
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             was
             made
             irregularly
             and
             against
             use
             to
             governe
             a
             Dative
             case
             ,
             he
             expresses
             the
             Preposition
             by
             
               Quod
               ad
            
             ,
             or
             
               Quod
               attinet
               ad
               ,
               (
               id
               est
               )
               as
               concerning
               .
            
             But
             the
             words
             God
             and
             Mahuzzim
             he
             separateth
             not
             ,
             but
             turneth
             them
             as
             in
             
               statu
               constructo
               ,
               viz.
            
             the
             
               god
               of
               might
               and
               of
               forces
            
             ;
             understanding
             thereby
             the
             true
             and
             Almighty
             God
             himselfe
             .
             Against
             which
             Graserus
             excepts
             ,
             first
             ,
             that
             to
             render
             the
             Preposition
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               ad
               ,
               as
               concerning
            
             ,
             savours
             of
             a
             Latinisme
             rather
             than
             of
             an
             Hebraisme
             .
             Secondly
             ,
             that
             he
             doth
             as
             good
             as
             strike
             out
             the
             distinctive
             accent
             Athnach
             (
             )
             which
             is
             a
             Colon
             ;
             in
             as
             much
             as
             he
             makes
             the
             sentence
             being
             a
             full
             member
             to
             be
             imperfect
             and
             defective
             ,
             and
             yet
             would
             seeme
             to
             stand
             in
             awe
             of
             that
             smaller
             distinction
             Zakeph-katon
             (
             :
             )
             over
             the
             word
             Mahuzzim
             ,
             which
             yet
             stands
             there
             ,
             as
             e
             elsewere
             it
             doth
             ,
             but
             for
             a
             
               nota
               benè
            
             .
             Thirdly
             ,
             that
             to
             expound
             
               god
               Mahuzzim
            
             to
             be
             the
             true
             God
             ,
             against
             the
             consent
             not
             onely
             of
             the
             Jewes
             who
             ever
             take
             it
             for
             some
             Idol
             or
             other
             ,
             but
             of
             the
             ancient
             Christian
             writers
             who
             understand
             by
             it
             some
             Idol
             of
             Antichrist
             ,
             yea
             some
             ,
             the
             Divell
             himselfe
             ,
             and
             many
             of
             our
             owne
             who
             take
             it
             for
             the
             Idol
             of
             the
             Masse
             ,
             and
             some
             otherwise
             ,
             yet
             for
             some
             Idol-deity
             .
             To
             expound
             this
             of
             the
             true
             and
             mighty
             God
             without
             example
             in
             Scripture
             Graserus
             thinkes
             not
             tolerable
             ;
             
             wherefore
             himselfe
             had
             rather
             yeeld
             the
             construction
             of
             the
             verb
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             to
             be
             irregular
             :
             Junius
             himselfe
             having
             admitted
             it
             in
             the
             next
             member
             of
             the
             verse
             ,
             and
             to
             suppose
             it
             to
             be
             a
             mysticall
             Solecisme
             ,
             the
             Spirit
             intending
             by
             the
             Anomaly
             or
             incongruity
             of
             the
             Syntax
             to
             signifie
             an
             Anomaly
             or
             incongruity
             of
             Religion
             :
             but
             their
             inconveniences
             on
             both
             sides
             ,
             as
             farre
             as
             I
             can
             see
             ,
             are
             wholly
             accorded
             by
             that
             translation
             we
             have
             given
             .
             Whereof
             let
             the
             Reader
             judge
             .
          
           
             I
             come
             now
             to
             unfold
             the
             signification
             of
             the
             word
             Mahuzzim
             ;
             a
             word
             which
             most
             translations
             retain
             ,
             the
             Septuagint
             calling
             it
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ;
             Saint
             Jerome
             and
             the
             Vulgar
             Latine
             ,
             Maozim
             ;
             the
             Geneva
             and
             others
             ,
             Mahuzzim
             :
             this
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Mahuzzim
             I
             say
             is
             in
             the
             Plurall
             number
             ,
             the
             singular
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Mahoz
             ,
             which
             in
             the
             abstract
             signifies
             sometimes
             strength
             ,
             sometimes
             a
             Fortresse
             ,
             or
             Bulwarke
             ;
             of
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             
               robustus
               fuit
            
             :
             but
             the
             Hebrewes
             use
             Abstracts
             for
             Concretes
             :
             examples
             are
             many
             in
             the
             Old
             Testament
             ,
             as
             
               justitia
               pro
               justis
            
             ;
             captivity
             for
             captives
             ,
             &c.
             
             In
             the
             New
             Testament
             ,
             Principalities
             ,
             Powers
             ,
             and
             Dominions
             ,
             for
             Princes
             ,
             Potentates
             ,
             and
             Dominators
             ;
             so
             Mahoz
             ,
             strength
             ,
             or
             a
             Fortresse
             ,
             for
             him
             that
             strengthens
             or
             fortifies
             ,
             that
             is
             a
             Protector
             ,
             Defender
             ,
             Guardian
             ,
             and
             Helper
             .
             Wherefore
             the
             Septuagint
             five
             times
             in
             the
             Psalmes
             render
             the
             word
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Mahoz
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             and
             the
             Vulgar
             Latine
             as
             often
             Protector
             :
             the
             places
             are
             these
             ,
             Psal.
             27.1
             .
             
               The
               Lord
               is
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               the
               protector
               of
               my
               life
               ,
               of
               whom
               should
               I
               be
               affraid
               ?
               Psal.
            
             28.8
             .
             
               The
               Lord
               is
               their
               strength
               ,
               and
               he
               is
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               Mahoz
               Jeshuoth
               ,
               the
               Mahoz
               of
               salvation
               of
               his
               annointed
            
             :
             *
             where
             the
             Septuagint
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             and
             the
             Vulgar
             ,
             
               Protector
               salvationum
               .
               Psal.
            
             31.1
             .
             
               Bow
               downe
               thine
               eare
               to
               me
               ;
               deliver
               me
               speedily
               ,
               be
               thou
               unto
               me
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               for
               a
               Rock
               Mahoz
            
             :
             Septuagint
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ;
             Vulg.
             
               in
               Deum
               Protectorem
            
             :
             againe
             verse
             5.
             
             
               Pull
               me
               out
               of
               the
               net
               that
               they
               have
               laid
               privily
               for
               me
               .
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               Thou
               art
               my
               Protector
            
             ;
             Septuagint
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ;
             the
             Vulgar
             ,
             
               Protector
               .
               Psal.
            
             37.39
             .
             
               The
               salvation
               of
               the
               righteous
               is
               from
               the
               Lord
               ,
               he
               is
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               Mahuzzam
               ,
               their
               Mahoz
               in
               the
               time
               of
               trouble
               :
            
             where
             the
             Septuagint
             and
             the
             Vulgar
             render
             as
             before
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             and
             Protector
             .
             How
             think
             you
             now
             ,
             are
             not
             Saints
             and
             Angels
             worshipped
             as
             Mahuzzims
             ?
             True
             Christians
             have
             with
             David
             ,
             in
             the
             Psalme
             before
             quoted
             ,
             one
             
               Mahoz
               ,
               Jehovah
               Mahoz
            
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             Christ
             ;
             but
             Apostate
             Christians
             have
             their
             many
             Mahuzzims
             .
             Oh
             ,
             would
             they
             worshipped
             only
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             
               Mahoz
               of
               salvations
            
             ,
             as
             you
             heard
             David
             even
             now
             call
             him
             ,
             Psal.
             28.
             
             You
             may
             if
             you
             please
             compare
             with
             these
             places
             of
             the
             Psalmes
             that
             in
             the
             first
             verse
             of
             this
             eleventh
             of
             Daniel
             ,
             where
             the
             Angel
             said
             he
             stood
             in
             the
             first
             yeere
             of
             Darius
             the
             Mede
             to
             confirme
             and
             be
             a
             Mahoz
             to
             him
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             which
             we
             translate
             ,
             to
             
               strengthen
               him
            
             ;
             by
             which
             we
             may
             see
             how
             fitly
             this
             name
             may
             be
             applied
             to
             Angels
             and
             so
             to
             Saints
             ,
             supposed
             in
             helping
             ,
             protecting
             ,
             assisting
             ,
             to
             be
             like
             them
             .
             Thus
             you
             see
             the
             concrete
             sence
             of
             Mahoz
             for
             Helper
             ,
             Protector
             ,
             and
             Defender
             ,
             is
             not
             new
             .
             But
             what
             if
             we
             take
             the
             word
             passively
             ,
             force
             and
             strength
             ,
             for
             forts
             and
             strong
             ones
             ;
             will
             not
             then
             the
             valiant
             Martyrs
             and
             Champions
             of
             the
             faith
             well
             bear
             the
             name
             of
             Mahuzzims
             ?
             and
             these
             are
             they
             whom
             at
             the
             first
             Christians
             worshipped
             onely
             in
             this
             sort
             ,
             as
             an
             honour
             peculiarly
             due
             unto
             their
             sufferings
             .
             Moreover
             ,
             that
             you
             may
             not
             think
             this
             word
             and
             the
             notion
             thereof
             unproper
             to
             be
             given
             unto
             a
             Deity
             ,
             observe
             that
             the
             true
             God
             is
             called
             a
             Rock
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             seven
             times
             Deut.
             32.
             which
             the
             Vulgar
             turnes
             as
             often
             Deus
             ;
             yea
             in
             the
             same
             place
             
               false
               gods
            
             are
             termed
             also
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             
               Rockes
               ,
               ver
            
             .
             31.
             
             
               Their
               Rock
            
             ,
             i.
             e.
             
               the
               Gentiles
               Rock
               is
               not
               as
               our
               Rock
               ,
               even
               our
               enemies
               themselves
               being
               Judges
            
             :
             and
             ver
             .
             37.
             
             
               Where
               are
               their
               gods
            
             (
             that
             is
             ,
             
               Baalim
               )
               their
               Rock
               in
               whom
               they
               trusted
               ?
               which
               did
               eat
               the
               fat
               of
               their
               sacrifices
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             The
             like
             you
             shall
             finde
             in
             Hannahs
             song
             ,
             
             and
             other
             places
             of
             Scripture
             .
             See
             now
             the
             parity
             :
             The
             True
             God
             ,
             or
             Christ
             himself
             is
             often
             by
             David
             cald
             Mahoz
             ,
             why
             may
             not
             then
             False
             gods
             ,
             or
             Plurality
             of
             Christs
             be
             called
             Mahuzzim
             ?
             Rocke
             and
             Fortresse
             are
             not
             words
             of
             so
             great
             difference
             .
          
           
             Thus
             having
             cleared
             the
             chiefest
             difficulties
             in
             the
             Text
             ,
             and
             made
             the
             way
             smooth
             ,
             let
             us
             read
             over
             the
             words
             again
             ,
             and
             apply
             the
             interpretation
             unto
             them
             .
          
           
             
               
                 DAN
                 .
                 II.
                 
              
               
                 
                   
                   Verse
                   36.
                   
                   
                     Then
                     a
                     King
                     shall
                     doe
                     according
                     to
                     his
                     will
                     ,
                     and
                     shall
                     exalt
                     or
                     magnifie
                     himselfe
                     above
                     every
                     god
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   36
                   That
                   is
                   ,
                   toward
                   the
                   end
                   of
                   the
                   reigne
                   of
                   
                     Antiochus
                     Epiphanes
                  
                   the
                   Roman
                   shal
                   prevail
                   ,
                   and
                   set
                   up
                   the
                   Fourth
                   Kingdome
                   ,
                   making
                   himself
                   master
                   of
                   the
                   kingdome
                   of
                   Macedon
                   ,
                   and
                   advancing
                   himselfe
                   from
                   this
                   time
                   forward
                   by
                   continuall
                   conquests
                   ,
                   shall
                   Lord
                   it
                   over
                   every
                   King
                   and
                   Nation
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   
                     Yea
                     against
                     the
                     God
                     of
                     gods
                     shall
                     he
                     speake
                     marvellous
                     things
                     ,
                     and
                     shall
                     prosper
                     ,
                     untill
                     the
                     indignation
                     be
                     accomplished
                     ;
                     for
                     the
                     determined
                     time
                     shall
                     bee
                     fulfilled
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   Yea
                   Christ
                   the
                   God
                   of
                   gods
                   ,
                   and
                   King
                   of
                   the
                   kings
                   of
                   the
                   earth
                   ,
                   who
                   in
                   those
                   times
                   should
                   appear
                   in
                   the
                   world
                   ,
                   the
                   Roman
                   shall
                   mock
                   ,
                   blaspheme
                   ,
                   and
                   crucifie
                   ,
                   and
                   by
                   most
                   bloody
                   edicts
                   shall
                   persecute
                   and
                   massacre
                   his
                   servants
                   the
                   Christians
                   ,
                   and
                   yet
                   shall
                   prosper
                   in
                   his
                   Empire
                   ,
                   untill
                   these
                   outragious
                   times
                   be
                   ended
                   ,
                   that
                   is
                   ,
                   untill
                   the
                   dayes
                   of
                   Constantine
                   ;
                   for
                   the
                   time
                   God
                   hath
                   appointed
                   must
                   be
                   fulfilled
                   .
                
              
               
               
                 
                   Verse
                   37.
                   
                   
                     Then
                     he
                     shall
                     not
                     regard
                     the
                     gods
                     of
                     his
                     Ancestors
                     ,
                     nor
                     shall
                     he
                     regard
                     the
                     desire
                     of
                     women
                     ,
                     no
                     nor
                     any
                     God
                     :
                     but
                     he
                     shall
                     magnifie
                     himselfe
                     above
                     all
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   37
                   When
                   that
                   appointed
                   time
                   for
                   the
                   date
                   of
                   his
                   prosperitie
                   comes
                   to
                   his
                   period
                   ,
                   and
                   the
                   time
                   of
                   his
                   ruine
                   and
                   change
                   of
                   his
                   dominion
                   drawes
                   neere
                   ,
                   then
                   this
                   Roman
                   state
                   shall
                   cashiere
                   and
                   forsake
                   the
                   Idols
                   and
                   False
                   gods
                   ,
                   whom
                   their
                   Fathers
                   worshipped
                   ,
                   and
                   shall
                   acknowledge
                   Christ
                   a
                   God
                   whom
                   their
                   fathers
                   knew
                   not
                   :
                   at
                   that
                   time
                   the
                   desire
                   of
                   women
                   and
                   married
                   life
                   shall
                   be
                   discountenanced
                   ,
                   and
                   shall
                   not
                   be
                   of
                   that
                   account
                   and
                   regard
                   it
                   had
                   been
                   ;
                   but
                   contrary
                   to
                   the
                   long
                   continued
                   custome
                   of
                   the
                   Romans
                   ,
                   single
                   life
                   shall
                   be
                   honoured
                   and
                   priviledged
                   aboue
                   it
                   ;
                   yea
                   and
                   soone
                   after
                   the
                   Romane
                   shall
                   beare
                   himselfe
                   so
                   ,
                   as
                   if
                   he
                   regarded
                   not
                   any
                   God
                   ;
                   and
                   with
                   Antichristian
                   pride
                   shall
                   magnifie
                   himselfe
                   over
                   all
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   Verse
                   38
                   
                     For
                     to
                     (
                     or
                     together
                     with
                     )
                     God
                     in
                     his
                     seat
                     ,
                     he
                     shal
                     honour
                     Mahuzzims
                     :
                     yea
                     together
                     with
                     that
                     God
                     ,
                     whom
                     his
                     Ancestours
                     knew
                     not
                     ,
                     shall
                     he
                     honor
                     them
                     with
                     gold
                     ,
                     and
                     with
                     silver
                     ,
                     and
                     with
                     precious
                     stones
                     ,
                     and
                     with
                     pleasant
                     things
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   38
                   That
                   is
                   ,
                   together
                   with
                   the
                   Christian
                   God
                   ,
                   who
                   is
                   a
                   jealous
                   God
                   ,
                   and
                   to
                   be
                   worshipped
                   alone
                   ,
                   hee
                   shall
                   worship
                   Mahuzzims
                   ,
                   even
                   in
                   his
                   seat
                   and
                   Temple
                   ;
                   even
                   with
                   a
                   forreine
                   God
                   ,
                   whom
                   his
                   Ancestors
                   acknowledged
                   not
                   ,
                   shall
                   hee
                   honour
                   Mahuzzims
                   ,
                   with
                   gold
                   and
                   silver
                   ,
                   and
                   with
                   precious
                   stones
                   ,
                   and
                   with
                   pleasant
                   things
                   .
                
              
               
               
                 
                   Verse
                   39.
                   
                   
                     And
                     he
                     shall
                     make
                     the
                     holds
                     of
                     the
                     Mahuzzims
                     withall
                     (
                     or
                     joyntly
                     )
                     to
                     the
                     forreine
                     god
                     :
                     whom
                     acknowledging
                     ,
                     hee
                     shall
                     increase
                     with
                     honour
                     ,
                     and
                     shall
                     cause
                     them
                     to
                     rule
                     over
                     many
                     ,
                     and
                     shall
                     distribute
                     the
                     earth
                     for
                     a
                     reward
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   39
                   And
                   though
                   the
                   Christian
                   God
                   ,
                   whom
                   he
                   shall
                   professe
                   to
                   acknowledge
                   and
                   worship
                   ,
                   can
                   endure
                   no
                   compeers
                   ,
                   yet
                   shall
                   he
                   consecrate
                   his
                   Temples
                   and
                   Monasteries
                   (
                   Ecclesiasticall
                   holds
                   )
                   jointly
                   to
                   the
                   Christian
                   God
                   and
                   to
                   his
                   
                     Mahuzzims
                     ,
                     Deo
                     &
                     Sanctis
                  
                   ;
                   yea
                   he
                   shall
                   distribute
                   the
                   earth
                   among
                   Mahuzzims
                   ,
                   so
                   that
                   beside
                   severall
                   patrimonies
                   which
                   in
                   every
                   Countrey
                   he
                   shall
                   allot
                   them
                   ,
                   he
                   shall
                   share
                   whole
                   Kingdomes
                   and
                   Provinces
                   among
                   them
                   .
                   Saint
                   George
                   shall
                   have
                   England
                   ;
                   Saint
                   Andrew
                   shall
                   have
                   Scotland
                   ;
                   St.
                   
                     Denis
                     ,
                     France
                  
                   ;
                   St.
                   
                     James
                     ,
                     Spaine
                  
                   ;
                   S.
                   
                     Mark
                     ,
                     Venice
                  
                   ;
                   &c.
                   and
                   beare
                   rule
                   as
                   Presidents
                   and
                   Patrons
                   of
                   their
                   severall
                   Countries
                   .
                
              
            
          
           
             Thus
             we
             see
             how
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             how
             expresly
             the
             Spirit
             foretold
             the
             Roman
             Empire
             ,
             having
             rejected
             the
             multitudes
             of
             gods
             and
             Daemons
             worshipped
             by
             their
             Ancestours
             ,
             and
             betaken
             themselves
             to
             that
             One
             and
             Onely
             True
             God
             which
             their
             Fathers
             knew
             not
             ,
             should
             neverthelesse
             depart
             from
             this
             their
             Faith
             ,
             and
             revive
             againe
             their
             old
             Theology
             of
             Daemons
             by
             a
             new
             Superinduction
             of
             Mahuzzims
             .
          
           
             Now
             although
             this
             Prophesie
             thus
             applied
             ,
             be
             so
             evident
             ,
             that
             the
             onely
             pointing
             at
             the
             event
             were
             able
             almost
             to
             convince
             the
             Reader
             ,
             yet
             that
             we
             may
             the
             more
             yet
             admire
             the
             truth
             of
             God
             in
             the
             contemplation
             of
             an
             even
             so
             sutable
             ,
             I
             will
             add
             these
             following
             observations
             concerning
             it
             .
          
           
             1
             First
             ,
             that
             agreeably
             with
             the
             date
             of
             the
             Holy
             
             Ghost
             ,
             the
             Roman
             Historians
             themselves
             have
             observed
             and
             marked
             out
             this
             time
             of
             their
             prevailing
             against
             Macedonia
             (
             which
             I
             said
             was
             accomplished
             toward
             the
             end
             of
             the
             reigne
             of
             
               Antiochus
               Epiphanes
            
             )
             for
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Dominion
             over
             the
             world
             .
             
               Lucius
               Florus
               lib.
            
             ●
             cap.
             7.
             
             Cedente
             Hannibale
             
               praemium
               victoriae
               Africa
               ●uit
               ▪
               &
               secut●s
               Africam
               t●rrarum
               orbis
               ;
               post
               Carthaginem
               vinci
               neminem
               puduit
               ;
               secutae
               sunt
               statim
               Africam
               ,
               Gentes
               ;
               Macedonia
               ,
               Graecia
               ,
               Syria
               ,
               caeteraque
               omnia
               quodam
               quasi
               aestu
               ,
               &
               torrente
               fortunae
               :
               sed
               primi
               omnium
               Macedones
               ,
               affectator
               quondam
               imperii
               populus
               .
               In
               Velleius
               Paterculus
               lib.
            
             1.
             cap.
             6.
             is
             an
             Annotation
             out
             of
             one
             
               Aemilius
               Sura
            
             ,
             in
             these
             words
             .
             
               Aemilius
               Sura
               de
               annis
               populi
               Romani
               .
               Assyrii
               ,
               Principes
               omnium
               Gentium
               ,
               rerum
               potiti
               sunt
               ,
               dei●de
               Medi
               ,
               postea
               Persae
               ,
               deinde
               Macedones
               ,
               exinde
               duobus
               regibus
               ,
               Philippo
               &
               Antiocho
               ,
               qui
               à
               Macedonibus
               oriundi
               erant
               ,
               haud
               multò
               post
               Carthaginem
               subactam
               ,
               devictis
               ,
               summa
               Imperii
               ad
               Populum
               Romanum
               pervenit
               .
               Inter
               hoc
               tempus
               &
               initium
            
             Nini
             
               Regis
               Assyriorum
               ,
               qui
               Princeps
               rerum
               potitus
               ,
               intersunt
               anni
               mille
               nongenti
               quinque
               .
            
             Here
             the
             time
             of
             the
             Romans
             prevailing
             against
             the
             Macedonian
             King
             is
             made
             the
             beginning
             of
             their
             Empire
             ;
             even
             as
             Daniel
             also
             beginneth
             the
             Roman
             account
             from
             thence
             ;
             but
             with
             this
             difference
             ,
             that
             whereas
             
               Aemilius
               Sura
            
             seems
             to
             reckon
             from
             the
             beginning
             of
             these
             prevailings
             in
             the
             victories
             against
             
               Philip
               ,
               Daniel
            
             counts
             from
             the
             victory
             against
             Perseus
             his
             son
             ;
             when
             that
             conquest
             was
             now
             perfected
             ,
             and
             Macedonia
             brought
             into
             a
             Province
             ;
             which
             happened
             (
             as
             I
             have
             already
             said
             )
             the
             same
             yeere
             that
             
               Antiochus
               Epiphanes
            
             prophaned
             the
             Temple
             of
             Jerusalem
             .
          
           
             2
             That
             no
             Kingdome
             in
             the
             world
             that
             we
             know
             of
             ,
             could
             more
             literally
             be
             said
             in
             their
             conquests
             to
             exalt
             and
             magnifie
             themselves
             above
             every
             God
             ,
             than
             the
             Roman
             ;
             in
             respect
             of
             a
             solemne
             custome
             they
             used
             in
             their
             wars
             ,
             by
             a
             certain
             charm
             to
             call
             out
             the
             gods
             of
             any
             City
             
             when
             they
             besieged
             it
             .
             The
             form
             wherof
             Macrob.
             gives
             us
             ,
             l.
             3.
             
             
               Saturn
               .
               c.
            
             8.
             as
             he
             found
             it
             in
             
               Sammon
               .
               Serenus
            
             his
             fifth
             book
             of
             hidden
             secrets
             ,
             namely
             this
             .
             —
             If
             it
             be
             a
             god
             ,
             if
             it
             be
             a
             goddesse
             that
             hath
             the
             City
             of
             Carthage
             in
             protection
             .
             —
             
               And
               thou
               especially
               ,
               whosoever
               thou
               art
               ,
               the
               Patron
               of
               this
               City
               and
               people
               ,
               I
               pray
               and
               beseech
               ,
               and
               with
               your
               leave
               require
               you
               to
               abandon
               the
               people
               and
               City
               of
               Carthage
               ,
               to
               forsake
               the
               places
               ,
               Temples
               ,
               Ceremonies
               ,
               and
               Enclosures
               of
               their
               City
               ;
               to
               goe
               away
               from
               them
               ,
               and
               to
               strike
               feare
               ,
               terrour
               ,
               and
               astonishment
               into
               that
               people
               and
               City
               ;
               and
               having
               left
               it
               ,
               to
               come
               to
               Rome
               to
               me
               and
               mine
               ;
               and
               that
               our
               Cities
               ,
               Places
               ,
               Temples
               ,
               Ceremonies
               be
               more
               acceptable
               ,
               and
               better
               liked
               of
               you
               ;
               that
               you
               would
               take
               the
               charge
               of
               me
               ,
               of
               the
               people
               of
               Rome
               ,
               and
               of
               my
               souldiers
               ,
               ●o
               as
               we
               may
               know
               and
               understand
               it
               :
               If
               you
               doe
               so
               ,
               I
               vow
               to
               build
               you
               Temples
               ,
               and
               to
               appoint
               solemne
               sports
               for
               you
               .
            
          
           
             3
             That
             Constantine
             ,
             the
             first
             Emperour
             under
             whom
             that
             State
             forsook
             the
             gods
             of
             their
             forefathers
             ,
             and
             became
             Christian
             ,
             together
             with
             this
             alteration
             ,
             abrogated
             those
             ancient
             Roman
             lawes
             ,
             Julia
             and
             Papia
             ,
             wherein
             the
             
               desire
               of
               women
            
             and
             
               married
               life
            
             was
             so
             much
             priviledged
             and
             encouraged
             ,
             and
             single
             and
             unmarried
             life
             disadvantaged
             .
             Heare
             it
             in
             the
             words
             of
             
               Zozoman
               lib.
            
             1.
             cap.
             9.
             
             
               Hist.
               Ecclesiast
               .
               There
               was
            
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             
               an
               ancient
               law
               among
               the
               Romans
               ,
               forbidding
               those
               who
               after
               five
               and
               twenty
               yeeres
               old
               were
               unmarried
               ,
               to
               enjoy
               the
               like
               priviledges
               with
               married
               ones
               ;
               and
               besides
               many
               other
               things
               ,
               that
               they
               should
               have
               no
               benefits
               by
               Testaments
               and
               Legacies
               ,
               unlesse
               they
               were
               next
               of
               kindred
               ,
               and
               those
               who
               had
               no
               children
               to
               have
               halfe
               their
               goods
               confiscated
               :
               therefore
               the
               Emperour
               seeing
               those
               ,
               who
               for
               Gods
               sake
               were
               addicted
               to
               chastity
               and
               virginity
               ,
               to
               be
               for
               this
               cause
               in
               the
               worst
               condition
               ,
               he
               accounted
               it
               a
               folly
               for
               men
               to
               goe
               about
               to
               increase
               their
               kind
               with
               such
               carefulnesse
               and
               diligence
               ;
               when
               as
               Nature
               ,
               according
               to
               divine
               moderation
               ,
               continually
               receives
               as
               well
               
               diminution
               ,
               as
               increase
               .
               Therefore
               he
               published
               a
               law
               to
               the
               people
               ,
               that
               both
               those
               who
               lived
               a
               single
               life
               ,
               and
               those
               who
               had
               no
               children
               ,
               should
               enjoy
               the
               like
               priviledges
               with
               others
               :
               yea
               he
               enacted
               that
               those
               who
               lived
               in
               chastity
               and
               virginity
               ,
               should
               be
               priviledged
               above
               them
               ,
               enabling
               both
               sexes
               ,
               though
               under
               yeeres
               ,
               to
               make
               Testaments
               ,
               contrary
               to
               the
               accustomed
               policy
               of
               the
               Romans
               .
            
             This
             alteration
             of
             the
             Roman
             law
             by
             
               Constantine
               ,
               Eusebius
            
             also
             witnesseth
             lib.
             4.
             cap.
             26.
             
               de
               vita
               Constantini
            
             :
             and
             again
             ,
             cap.
             28.
             where
             he
             saith
             ,
             that
             above
             all
             he
             honoured
             most
             those
             that
             had
             consecrated
             their
             lives
             to
             divine
             Philosophy
             ;
             he
             meanes
             a
             monasticall
             life
             ;
             and
             therefore
             he
             almost
             adored
             the
             most
             holy
             company
             of
             perpetuall
             Virgins
             .
             That
             which
             the
             fathers
             had
             thus
             enacted
             ,
             the
             sonnes
             also
             seconded
             ;
             and
             some
             of
             the
             following
             Emperours
             by
             new
             edicts
             ,
             till
             there
             was
             no
             Relique
             left
             of
             those
             ancient
             priviledges
             ,
             wherewith
             married
             men
             had
             beene
             respected
             ;
             which
             Procopius
             saith
             (
             how
             rightly
             I
             examine
             not
             )
             was
             the
             cause
             of
             the
             ruine
             of
             that
             Empire
             ,
             which
             was
             so
             much
             enfeebled
             ,
             and
             weakened
             through
             neglect
             of
             the
             procreation
             of
             children
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             not
             able
             to
             match
             the
             numerous
             armies
             of
             barbarous
             nations
             .
             This
             was
             the
             first
             step
             of
             dis-regarding
             marriage
             ,
             and
             the
             desire
             of
             wiving
             ;
             which
             was
             not
             an
             absolute
             prohibition
             ,
             but
             discouraging
             .
             But
             no
             sooner
             had
             the
             Roman
             Bishop
             ,
             and
             his
             Clergy
             got
             the
             power
             into
             their
             hands
             ,
             but
             it
             grew
             to
             an
             absolute
             prohibition
             ;
             not
             for
             Monkes
             onely
             ,
             but
             for
             the
             whole
             Clergy
             :
             which
             was
             the
             highest
             dis-respect
             that
             could
             be
             to
             that
             which
             God
             had
             made
             honourable
             among
             all
             men
             .
          
           
             4
             Lastly
             ,
             it
             is
             a
             thing
             not
             to
             be
             passed
             by
             without
             admiration
             ,
             that
             the
             Fathers
             and
             others
             ,
             at
             the
             beginning
             of
             Saint-worship
             ,
             by
             I
             know
             not
             what
             fatall
             in●●inct
             ,
             used
             to
             call
             Saints
             and
             their
             
               Reliques
               ,
               Towres
               ,
               Walls
               ,
               Bulwarks
               ,
            
             and
             Fortresses
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Mahuzzim
             ,
             in
             the
             prime
             and
             native
             signification
             .
             Basil
             in
             his
             Oration
             upon
             the
             
             forty
             Martyrs
             ,
             whose
             Reliques
             were
             dispersed
             over
             all
             the
             Countries
             thereabouts
             ,
             speaks
             in
             this
             manner
             :
             
               These
               are
               those
               who
               having
               taken
               possession
               of
               our
               Countrey
               ,
               as
            
             certain
             conjoyned
             Towers
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               secure
               it
               from
               the
               incursions
               of
               Enimies
               .
            
             The
             same
             Basil
             concludes
             his
             Oration
             upon
             Mamas
             a
             Martyr
             in
             this
             manner
             ;
             that
             
               God
               who
               hath
               gathered
               us
               together
               in
               this
               place
               ,
               and
               disposeth
               of
               all
               that
               is
               to
               come
               ,
               keepe
               us
               safe
               from
               hurt
               ,
               and
               secure
               us
               from
               the
               ravening
               Wolfe
               ,
               and
               preserve
               stedfast
               this
               Church
               of
               Caesarea
               ,
               being
            
             guarded
             with
             a
             mighty
             Tower
             of
             Martyrs
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             
               Chrysostome
               in
               Hom.
            
             32.
             upon
             the
             Epistle
             to
             the
             Romanes
             ,
             speaking
             of
             the
             Reliques
             of
             Saint
             Peter
             and
             
               Paul
               ;
               This
               corps
            
             (
             sa●th
             he
             )
             meaning
             of
             Saint
             
               Paul
               ,
               fortifies
               this
               City
               of
               Rome
               more
               strongly
               than
               any
               Towre
               ,
               or
               ten
               thousand
               rampires
               ,
               as
               also
               doth
               the
               corps
               of
            
             Peter
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             &c.
             
             Are
             not
             these
             strong
             Mahuzzims
             ?
          
           
             The
             like
             whereunto
             is
             that
             of
             
               Venantius
               Fortunatus
            
             a
             Christian
             Poet
             ,
             not
             above
             an
             age
             younger
             than
             Chrysostome
             .
          
           
             
               
                 A
                 facie
                 hostili
                 duo
                 propupnacula
                 praesunt
                 ,
              
               
                 Quos
                 fidei
                 turres
                 urbs
                 caput
                 orbis
                 habet
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 The
                 Faith
                 's
                 two
                 Towers
                 in
                 Lady
                 Rome
                 do
                 lye
                 ,
              
               
                 Two
                 Bulwarks
                 strong
                 against
                 the
                 Einmy
                 .
              
            
          
           
             At
             the
             same
             thing
             aimes
             
               Gregory
               lib.
            
             7.
             
             Ep.
             33.
             
               ad
               Rusticanam
               Patriciam
            
             ,
             entreating
             her
             to
             come
             to
             
               Rome
               :
               Si
               gladios
               Itali●
               &
               bella
               formidetis
               ,
               if
               you
               feare
               the
               swords
            
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             
               and
               warres
               of
               Italy
               ,
               you
               ought
               attentively
               to
               consider
               ,
               how
               great
               the
            
             protection
             
               of
               blessed
            
             Peter
             ,
             
               the
               Prince
               of
               Apostles
               ,
               is
               in
               this
               City
               ,
               wherein
               without
               any
               great
               number
               of
               people
               ,
               without
               the
               aid
               of
               souldiers
               ,
               we
               have
               beene
               so
               so
               many
               yeeres
               in
               the
               midst
               of
               ●words
               ,
               by
               Gods
               providence
               safely
               preserved
               from
               all
               hurt
               .
            
          
           
           
             But
             to
             returne
             againe
             to
             Saint
             Chrysostome
             ,
             who
             in
             his
             Homily
             upon
             the
             Egyptian
             Martyrs
             ,
             Hom.
             70.
             
               ad
               populum
               Antiochenum
            
             ,
             speakes
             after
             this
             manner
             :
             
               ●hese
               Saints
               bodies
            
             saith
             he
             )
             
               fortifie
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               our
               City
               more
               strongly
               ,
               than
               an
               impregnable
               wall
               of
               Adamant
               ;
               and
               as
               certaine
               high
               rocks
               hanging
               on
               every
               side
               repell
               not
               onely
               the
               assaults
               of
               those
               enimies
               ,
               which
               are
               sensible
               and
               seen
               with
               the
               eye
               ;
               but
               also
               overthrow
               and
               defeat
               the
               ambuscadoes
               of
               invisible
               fiends
               ,
               and
               all
               the
               stratagems
               of
               the
               Divell
               .
            
             Here
             you
             see
             are
             Mahuzzims
             too
             .
          
           
             So
             long
             before
             ,
             in
             the
             dayes
             of
             
               Constantine
               ,
               James
            
             Bishop
             of
             Nisibis
             ,
             renowned
             for
             holinesse
             ,
             was
             according
             to
             order
             given
             by
             Constantine
             in
             his
             life
             time
             ,
             saith
             Gennadius
             ,
             buried
             within
             the
             wall
             of
             that
             City
             ,
             being
             a
             Frontire
             of
             the
             Empire
             ,
             
               ob
               Custodiam
               ,
               viz.
               Civitatis
               .
               Gennad
               .
               de
               vir
               .
               illustr
               .
               cap.
            
             6.
             
          
           
             
               Evagrius
               lib.
            
             1.
             c.
             13.
             tels
             us
             that
             the
             Antiochians
             offered●
             up
             a
             supplication
             to
             the
             Emperour
             Leo
             the
             first
             ,
             about
             the
             yeere
             460.
             for
             the
             keeping
             of
             the
             corps
             of
             holy
             Simeon
             ,
             sirnamed
             Stylita
             ,
             or
             the
             Pillarist
             ,
             in
             this
             forme
             :
             
               Because
               our
               City
               hath
               no
               wall
            
             (
             for
             it
             had
             beene
             domolished
             in
             a
             Fury
             )
             
               therefore
               we
               brought
               hither
               this
               most
               holy
               body
               ,
               that
               it
               might
               be
               to
               us
            
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             a
             Wall
             and
             a
             Fortresse
             ,
             which
             would
             be
             in
             Hebrew
             Language
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             
               Leshur
               vlemahoz
            
             .
          
           
             Saint
             Hilary
             also
             will
             tell
             us
             ,
             that
             neither
             the
             guards
             of
             Saints
             ,
             nor
             
               Angelorum
               munitiones
            
             ,
             the
             Bulwarks
             of
             Angels
             ,
             are
             wanting
             to
             those
             who
             are
             willing
             to
             stand
             :
             here
             Angels
             are
             Mahuzzims
             ,
             as
             Saints
             were
             in
             the
             former
             .
          
           
             The
             Greeks
             at
             this
             day
             ,
             in
             their
             
               Preces
               horariae
            
             ,
             thus
             invocate
             the
             blessed
             Virgin
             :
             
               O
               thou
               Virgin
               mother
               of
               God
               ,
               thou
               impregnable
               wall
               ,
               thou
               Fortresse
               of
               salvation
               ,
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               Psal.
            
             28.
             
               we
               call
               upon
               thee
               ,
               that
               thou
               wouldest
               frustrate
               the
               purpose
               of
               our
               enimies
               ,
               and
               be
               a
               fence
               to
               this
               City
               :
            
             thus
             they
             goe
             on
             ,
             calling
             her
             the
             
               hope
               ,
               safeguard
            
             
             and
             Sanctuary
             of
             Christians
             :
             here
             is
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             
               Mahoz
               Mahuzzim
            
             ,
             a
             strong
             Mahoz
             indeed
             .
          
           
             To
             conclude
             ,
             the
             titles
             of
             
               Protectors
               ,
               Guardians
            
             ,
             and
             defenders
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             signification
             of
             Mahuzzim
             ,
             when
             a
             person
             is
             meant
             ,
             as
             they
             are
             more
             frequent
             ,
             so
             are
             they
             no
             lesse
             ancient
             :
             
               Greg.
               Nyssen
            
             .
             in
             his
             third
             oration
             of
             the
             forty
             Martyrs
             ,
             calls
             them
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             Guarders
             and
             Protectors
             .
          
           
             Eucherius
             his
             Saint
             Gervase
             ,
             the
             perpetuall
             Propugnator
             ,
             Protectour
             of
             the
             faithfull
             .
             
               Theodoret.
               lib.
            
             8.
             
               de
               curandis
               Graecorum
               affectionibus
            
             ,
             calls
             the
             holy
             Martyrs
             Guardians
             of
             Cities
             ,
             Lieutenants
             of
             places
             ,
             Captaines
             of
             men
             ,
             Princes
             ,
             Champions
             ,
             and
             Guardians
             ,
             by
             whom
             disasters
             are
             turned
             from
             us
             ,
             and
             those
             which
             come
             from
             Devills
             debarred
             and
             driven
             away
             .
             I
             might
             here
             add
             something
             also
             concerning
             Images
             ,
             whose
             worship
             is
             another
             part
             of
             the
             doctrine
             of
             Daemons
             ,
             and
             shew
             how
             well
             the
             name
             Mahuzzim
             would
             befit
             them
             ,
             which
             the
             Iconomaci●all
             Councell
             of
             Constantinople
             calls
             so
             unluckily
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
             the
             Fortresses
             ,
             or
             Mahuzzim
             of
             the
             Divell
             ;
             and
             perhaps
             the
             nine
             and
             thirtieth
             verse
             in
             the
             fore-alledged
             Prophesie
             might
             be
             yet
             more
             literally
             translated
             ,
             if
             the
             word
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             facere
             were
             taken
             in
             a
             religious
             sence
             :
             
               And
               hee
               shall
               doe
               unto
               ,
               or
               offer
               unto
               the
               holds
               of
               Mahuzzim
               ,
               together
               with
               forreigne
               gods
            
             ;
             &c.
             that
             is
             ,
             he
             shall
             doe
             religious
             service
             to
             the
             Images
             of
             Saints
             ,
             together
             with
             Christ.
             I
             might
             also
             put
             you
             in
             mind
             of
             the
             terme
             munimentum
             ,
             given
             to
             the
             Crosse
             ,
             and
             that
             so
             usuall
             Latine
             phrase
             of
             
               Munire
               signo
               Crucis
            
             ,
             to
             fortifie
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             to
             signe
             with
             the
             signe
             of
             the
             Crosse
             ;
             but
             I
             will
             not
             engage
             my self
             too
             farre
             in
             these
             Grammaticall
             speculations
             .
          
           
             As
             for
             the
             following
             verses
             of
             this
             Prophesie
             ,
             if
             any
             desire
             to
             know
             it
             ,
             they
             may
             ,
             as
             I
             think
             ,
             be
             interpreted
             and
             applied
             thus
             .
          
           
             Ver.
             40.
             
             
               And
               at
               the
               time
               of
               the
               end
               ,
            
             that
             is
             ,
             in
             the
             Romans
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             or
             
               latter
               times
               ,
               shall
               the
               King
               of
               the
               
               South
            
             (
             that
             is
             ,
             the
             Saracen
             )
             
               push
               at
               him
               ,
               and
               the
               King
               of
               the
               North
            
             (
             the
             Turk
             )
             
               shall
               come
               against
               him
               ,
               like
               a
               whirlewind
               ,
               with
               charets
               ,
               and
               horsemen
               ,
               and
               with
               many
               ships
               ,
               and
               he
               shall
               enter
               into
               the
               Countries
               ,
               and
               shall
               overflow
               and
               passe
               over
               .
            
          
           
             Ver.
             41.
             
             
               He
               shall
               enter
               also
               into
               the
               glorious
               Land
            
             (
             Palestina
             )
             
               and
               many
               shall
               be
               overthrowne
               ,
               but
               these
               shall
               escape
               out
               of
               his
               hands
               ,
               Edom
               and
               Moab
               ,
               and
               the
               chiefe
               of
               the
               children
               of
               Ammon
               :
            
             that
             is
             ,
             the
             Inhabitants
             of
             
               Arabia
               Petraea
            
             ,
             which
             were
             never
             yet
             Provincialls
             of
             the
             Turkish
             Empire
             ;
             yea
             with
             some
             of
             them
             he
             is
             faine
             to
             be
             at
             Pension
             for
             the
             safer
             passage
             of
             his
             Caravans
             .
          
           
             Ver.
             42.
             
             He
             (
             the
             Turk
             )
             
               shall
               stretch
               forth
               his
               hands
               also
               upon
               the
               Countreyes
               ,
            
             of
             those
             parts
             ,
             
               and
               the
               land
               of
               Egypt
            
             (
             though
             it
             should
             hold
             out
             long
             under
             the
             Mamalukes
             ,
             even
             till
             the
             yeere
             1517
             )
             
               shall
               not
               escape
            
             .
          
           
             Ver.
             43.
             
             
               But
               he
               shall
               have
               power
               over
               the
               treasures
               of
               gold
               ,
               silver
               ,
               and
               all
               the
               precious
               things
               of
               Egypt
               ;
               and
               the
               Libyans
               and
               the
               Cushites
               ,
            
             that
             is
             ,
             the
             neighbouring
             nations
             ,
             whether
             of
             Africke
             ,
             or
             Libya
             ,
             as
             in
             those
             of
             
               Algiers
               ,
               &c.
            
             or
             of
             the
             Arabians
             in
             Scripture
             called
             
               Cushim
               shall
               be
               at
               his
               steps
               ,
            
             that
             is
             ,
             at
             his
             devotion
             .
             That
             which
             remaines
             as
             I
             suppose
             is
             not
             yet
             fulfilled
             ,
             and
             therefore
             I
             leave
             it
             :
             Time
             will
             make
             it
             manifest
             .
          
        
      
       
         
         
           PART
           II.
           
        
         
           
             
               
                 Vers.
                 2.
              
               
            
             
               Through
               the
               hypocrysie
               or
               faining
               of
               lyars
               ,
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               :
               of
               those
               who
               have
               their
               consciences
               seared
               ,
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               .
            
             
               
                 Vers.
                 3.
              
               
            
             
               Of
               those
               who
               forbid
               to
               marry
               ,
               and
               command
               to
               abstaine
               from
               meats
               ,
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ;
               which
               God
               hath
               created
               to
               bee
               received
               with
               thanksgiving
               of
               them
               that
               beleeve
               ,
               and
               know
               the
               truth
               ,
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               .
            
          
        
         
           OF
           the
           first
           part
           of
           this
           Prophesie
           ,
           being
           a
           description
           of
           the
           Condition
           of
           that
           
             solemne
             defection
          
           which
           was
           to
           come
           ,
           I
           have
           spoken
           hitherto
           .
           I
           come
           now
           to
           the
           second
           part
           of
           the
           division
           ,
           the
           
             quality
             of
             the
             persons
          
           ,
           and
           the
           
             meanes
             whereby
             it
             was
             to
             enter
             ,
          
           and
           to
           be
           advanced
           ,
           which
           is
           set
           forth
           in
           the
           verses
           now
           read
           ;
           which
           though
           you
           may
           finde
           by
           others
           otherwise
           translated
           ,
           yet
           I
           hope
           the
           translation
           which
           I
           have
           propounded
           ,
           if
           the
           judicious
           Reader
           please
           to
           examine
           it
           ,
           will
           approve
           it selfe
           not
           onely
           not
           to
           be
           an
           enforced
           one
           ,
           but
           such
           as
           salves
           that
           incongruity
           of
           construction
           ,
           which
           the
           other
           could
           not
           avoid
           ,
           for
           it
           is
           usually
           translated
           intransitively
           ,
           with
           reference
           to
           the
           persons
           expressed
           in
           the
           former
           verse
           ,
           viz.
           that
           they
           should
           speake
           lies
           in
           hypocrisie
           ,
           having
           their
           conscience
           scared
           with
           an
           hot
           iron
           ,
           and
           forbidding
           marriage
           ,
           and
           commanding
           to
           abstaine
           from
           meats
           ;
           so
           as
           that
           which
           in
           the
           former
           verse
           ,
           is
           named
           Doctrines
           of
           Devils
           ,
           should
           
           onely
           meane
           that
           in
           generall
           tearmes
           ,
           which
           in
           these
           verses
           is
           particularly
           instanced
           ,
           to
           be
           doctrines
           of
           prohibiting
           mariages
           ,
           and
           abstaining
           from
           meats
           ,
           as
           two
           branches
           of
           that
           devillish
           doctrine
           ;
           for
           so
           
             Calvin
             ,
             Melancton
          
           ,
           and
           some
           others
           seeme
           to
           expound
           it
           .
           But
           why
           this
           interpretation
           should
           not
           be
           the
           most
           likely
           :
           my
           first
           reason
           is
           :
        
         
           First
           ,
           because
           it
           makes
           Saint
           Paul
           ,
           who
           speaks
           of
           that
           great
           Apostasie
           of
           Christians
           ,
           which
           was
           to
           be
           in
           the
           Later
           Times
           ,
           to
           instance
           onely
           in
           the
           smaller
           ;
           and
           if
           I
           may
           so
           say
           ,
           almost
           circumstantiall
           errours
           ;
           and
           to
           omit
           this
           maine
           and
           principall
           ,
           which
           the
           Scripture
           elsewhere
           tels
           us
           ,
           should
           be
           Idolatry
           ,
           or
           
             spirituall
             fornication
          
           ;
           who
           can
           beleeve
           that
           we
           could
           so
           balk
           the
           substance
           ,
           and
           name
           that
           only
           ,
           which
           in
           comparison
           is
           but
           an
           Appendix
           thereto
           .
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           He
           prophesies
           here
           in
           expresse
           words
           ,
           of
           such
           things
           as
           were
           to
           come
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           
             in
             the
             Later
             Times
          
           ;
           but
           errours
           about
           marriage
           and
           meats
           ,
           were
           no
           novelty
           in
           the
           Apostles
           owne
           times
           ,
           as
           the
           diligent
           Reader
           may
           easily
           collect
           out
           of
           their
           Epistles
           ;
           which
           makes
           it
           improbable
           that
           he
           would
           specifie
           the
           Apostasie
           of
           the
           later
           times
           in
           these
           alone
           .
        
         
           Thirdly
           ,
           But
           my
           last
           reason
           whereunto
           I
           thinke
           I
           may
           trust
           ,
           is
           ,
           that
           the
           Syntax
           of
           the
           words
           in
           the
           Greek
           is
           uncapable
           of
           such
           an
           intransitive
           construction
           ,
           and
           consequently
           of
           the
           sense
           depending
           thereon
           ;
           for
           the
           persons
           intimated
           in
           the
           former
           verse
           ,
           are
           expressed
           
             in
             casu
             recto
          
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ;
           but
           the
           persons
           here
           intended
           ,
           we
           finde
           in
           the
           genitive
           ;
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           which
           I
           cannot
           see
           how
           they
           can
           agree
           with
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           after
           the
           manner
           of
           intransitive
           construction
           ,
           without
           breach
           of
           grammaticall
           congruity
           ,
           not
           elsewhere
           sampled
           in
           our
           Apostles
           Epistles
           ;
           indeed
           they
           would
           agree
           with
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           but
           that
           would
           be
           a
           harsh
           sense
           every
           way
           ;
           for
           either
           we
           must
           say
           as
           some
           
           doe
           ,
           
           that
           by
           devils
           are
           meant
           devillish
           men
           ,
           or
           men
           led
           by
           the
           devill
           ,
           which
           is
           an
           hard
           signification
           ;
           or
           else
           it
           would
           be
           a
           stranger
           sense
           ,
           and
           I
           think
           not
           over-pliable
           to
           the
           usuall
           exposition
           ,
           to
           say
           that
           devils
           should
           lie
           ,
           have
           seared
           consciences
           ,
           and
           forbid
           marriages
           ,
           or
           meats
           :
           So
           that
           Beza
           ,
           with
           others
           ;
           had
           rather
           confesse
           a
           breach
           of
           Syntax
           ,
           than
           incurre
           the
           inconvenience
           of
           such
           a
           forced
           sence
           .
           
             Major
             est
             habita
          
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             sententia
             ,
             quam
             constructionis
             ratio
          
           ;
           the
           Apostle
           heeded
           more
           the
           matter
           than
           he
           did
           the
           Grammar
           .
           But
           what
           needs
           this
           ,
           so
           long
           as
           there
           is
           a
           better
           way
           to
           salve
           it
           ?
           namely
           ,
           to
           conster
           the
           words
           transitively
           ,
           making
           all
           these
           genitive
           cases
           to
           be
           governed
           of
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           as
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           by
           ,
           or
           through
           the
           faining
           of
           lyars
           ;
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           through
           the
           faining
           of
           those
           who
           had
           their
           consciences
           seared
           ;
           and
           so
           forward
           :
           which
           construction
           is
           observed
           and
           followed
           by
           
             Andreas
             Hiperius
          
           ,
           one
           of
           our
           reformed
           Writers
           ,
           who
           translates
           it
           ,
           
             per
             simulationem
             falsiloquorum
             ,
             &c.
          
           and
           expounds
           it
           ,
           
             de
             modo
             qu●
             fallent
             spiritus
             impostorum
             ,
             fallent
             per
             simulationem
             ,
             seu
             hypocrisin
             falsiloquorum
             ,
             &c.
          
           and
           I
           beleeve
           that
           *
           many
           others
           have
           so
           taken
           it
           ;
           for
           our
           late
           translations
           are
           indifferent
           to
           be
           taken
           either
           way
           :
           howsoever
           it
           be
           ,
           I
           see
           no
           way
           but
           this
           ,
           to
           keep
           the
           Syntax
           true
           and
           even
           ,
           and
           wholly
           to
           avoid
           the
           fore-mentioned
           inconveniences
           :
           which
           as
           it
           is
           easie
           and
           obvious
           ,
           and
           not
           strained
           ,
           so
           I
           hope
           to
           let
           you
           see
           the
           event
           to
           have
           been
           most
           answerable
           thereunto
           :
           That
           this
           was
           the
           manner
           ,
           and
           this
           the
           meanes
           ,
           this
           the
           quality
           of
           the
           persons
           ,
           whereby
           the
           doctrine
           of
           Daemons
           was
           first
           brought
           in
           ,
           advanced
           and
           maintained
           in
           the
           Church
           ,
           viz.
           through
           the
           hypocrisie
           ,
           faining
           craft
           ,
           or
           counterfeiting
           of
           those
           who
           told
           lies
           ,
           of
           those
           who
           had
           their
           consciences
           seared
           ,
           &c.
           
        
         
           As
           for
           the
           use
           of
           the
           Preposition
           (
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           )
           to
           signifie
           
             causam
             instrumentalem
          
           ,
           or
           
             modum
             actionis
          
           ,
           he
           that
           is
           not
           a
           stranger
           in
           the
           Scripture
           ,
           knowes
           to
           be
           most
           frequent
           ,
           the
           Greeke
           
           text
           borrowing
           it
           from
           the
           use
           of
           the
           Hebrew
           Preposition
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           which
           the
           Hebrewes
           call
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           as
           when
           it
           signifies
           In
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           (
           1
           )
           subjecti
           .
           But
           two
           or
           three
           examples
           will
           not
           doe
           amisse
           :
           Mat.
           5.13
           .
           
             If
             the
             salt
             hath
             lost
             its
             savour
             ,
             wherewithall
             shall
             it
             be
             salted
             ?
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ?
             Acts
          
           17.31
           .
           
             Because
             God
             hath
             appointed
             a
             day
             ,
             in
             which
             he
             will
             judge
             the
             world
             in
             righteousnesse
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             by
             the
             man
             whom
             he
             hath
             ordained
             .
          
           2
           Pet.
           3.1
           .
           
             I
             stirre
             up
             your
             pure
             minds
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             by
             way
             of
             remembrance
             .
             Tit.
          
           1.9
           .
           
             That
             he
             may
             be
             able
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
          
           
           
             by
             sound
             doctrine
             ,
             to
             exhort
             and
             convince
             the
             gainsayers
             ,
             and
             most
             naturally
             to
             the
             businesse
             we
             have
             in
             hand
             .
          
           2
           Thes.
           2.9
           ,
           10.
           
           
             Of
             the
             man
             of
             sinne
             ,
             whose
             comming
          
           (
           saith
           the
           Apostle
           )
           
             is
             after
             the
             working
             of
             Sathan
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             with
             all
             powers
             ,
             and
             signs
             ,
             and
             lying
             wonders
          
           (
           or
           through
           them
           )
           
             and
             through
             all
             deceivablenesse
             of
             unrighteousnesse
             ,
          
           &c.
           
           So
           in
           my
           Text
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           &c.
           
             through
             the
             hypocrisie
             of
             Lyars
          
           .
        
         
           Now
           for
           the
           unfolding
           of
           these
           words
           ,
           this
           must
           first
           be
           observed
           in
           generall
           ,
           that
           they
           are
           not
           so
           to
           be
           underderstood
           ,
           as
           if
           these
           ,
           who
           are
           the
           bringers
           in
           ,
           and
           advancers
           of
           the
           doctrines
           of
           Daemons
           ,
           
           should
           every
           one
           of
           them
           be
           guilty
           of
           all
           the
           severall
           imputations
           in
           this
           description
           ;
           but
           they
           are
           to
           be
           construed
           rather
           as
           an
           a
           syndeton
           ,
           by
           understanding
           the
           Conjunction
           ,
           as
           if
           it
           had
           been
           thus
           uttered
           :
           Through
           the
           hypocrisie
           of
           Lyars
           ,
           and
           through
           the
           hypocrisie
           of
           men
           of
           seared
           consciences
           ,
           and
           lastly
           ,
           by
           the
           hypocrisie
           of
           those
           who
           forbid
           marriages
           ,
           and
           meats
           .
           Or
           thus
           :
           through
           the
           hypocrisie
           ,
           partly
           of
           Lyars
           ,
           partly
           of
           men
           of
           seared
           consciences
           ,
           partly
           of
           those
           who
           forbid
           marriage
           ,
           and
           command
           to
           abstaine
           from
           meats
           :
           and
           so
           though
           many
           were
           guilty
           of
           all
           ,
           yet
           some
           may
           be
           exempt
           from
           some
           ;
           as
           namely
           some
           may
           be
           guilty
           of
           the
           last
           note
           ,
           of
           forbidding
           marriage
           ,
           and
           abstaining
           from
           meats
           ,
           and
           yet
           free
           of
           the
           former
           ,
           of
           being
           
           counterfeit
           Lyars
           ,
           and
           men
           of
           seared
           Consciences
           :
           which
           I
           speak
           for
           reverence
           of
           some
           of
           the
           Ancients
           ,
           who
           though
           otherwise
           holy
           men
           ,
           yet
           cannot
           be
           acquitted
           from
           all
           the
           imputations
           here
           mentioned
           ,
           nor
           altogether
           excused
           from
           having
           an
           hand
           ,
           through
           the
           Fate
           of
           the
           times
           wherein
           they
           lived
           ,
           in
           laying
           the
           ground-work
           ,
           whereon
           soon
           after
           the
           great
           Apostasie
           was
           builded
           .
        
         
           This
           therefore
           being
           remembred
           ,
           I
           come
           now
           to
           the
           unfolding
           of
           them
           in
           severall
           :
           and
           first
           of
           the
           first
           ,
           the
           
             hypocrisie
             of
             Lyars
          
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           The
           word
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           signifies
           dissimulation
           ,
           a
           faining
           ,
           counterfeiting
           ,
           a
           semblance
           ,
           and
           shew
           of
           that
           which
           is
           not
           so
           indeed
           ,
           as
           it
           seemeth
           ;
           and
           this
           word
           we
           must
           repeat
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           as
           belonging
           ,
           in
           common
           ,
           with
           the
           rest
           which
           followes
           ;
           for
           all
           should
           be
           counterfeit
           :
           lying
           should
           carry
           the
           counterfeit
           of
           truth
           ;
           the
           seared
           Conscience
           ,
           a
           semblance
           of
           devotion
           ;
           the
           restraint
           of
           Marriage
           should
           be
           but
           a
           shew
           of
           chastity
           ;
           and
           abstaining
           from
           meats
           ,
           a
           false
           appearance
           of
           abstinency
           :
           for
           the
           persons
           of
           whom
           they
           are
           spoken
           ,
           should
           either
           make
           a
           shew
           of
           what
           themselves
           knew
           was
           not
           ;
           or
           that
           which
           they
           thought
           they
           had
           ,
           should
           be
           no
           better
           than
           a
           false
           shew
           ,
           and
           counterfeit
           of
           that
           they
           took
           it
           for
           .
        
         
           The
           Vulgar
           Latine
           in
           Mar.
           12.15
           .
           and
           the
           Syriack
           in
           the
           same
           place
           ,
           turne
           the
           word
           
             hypocrisis
             ,
             versutia
             ,
             dolus
          
           ,
           craft
           and
           subtlety
           :
           which
           sence
           ,
           if
           need
           were
           ,
           would
           not
           be
           denied
           admittance
           here
           .
           But
           I
           return
           to
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           the
           
             hypocrisie
             of
             Lyars
          
           ,
           which
           I
           conceive
           to
           be
           the
           same
           ,
           and
           no
           other
           ,
           than
           that
           which
           our
           Apostle
           speaks
           in
           the
           same
           case
           ,
           2
           Thess.
           2.
           where
           he
           tels
           us
           ,
           that
           
             the
             comming
             of
             the
             man
             of
             sinne
             ,
             and
             the
             Apostasie
             attending
             him
             ,
             should
             be
             after
             the
             working
             of
             Sathan
             ,
             with
             all
             power
             ,
             and
             signes
             ,
             and
             lying
             wonders
             ;
             and
             with
             all
             deceivablenesse
             of
             unrighteousnesse
             ,
          
           or
           unrighteous
           and
           ungodly
           deceiving
           ;
           and
           that
           
             God
             should
             send
             them
             strong
             delusions
             ,
             that
             they
             might
             beleeve
             a
             lye
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           Yea
           some
           of
           this
           ,
           and
           
           of
           that
           which
           followes
           in
           that
           place
           ,
           may
           extend
           also
           to
           the
           rest
           which
           followes
           in
           my
           Text
           ,
           howsoever
           the
           most
           thereof
           ,
           as
           you
           heare
           ,
           doth
           most
           evidently
           expound
           this
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           this
           
             hypocrisie
             of
             Lyars
          
           .
           Now
           according
           to
           the
           event
           ,
           this
           
             hypocrisie
             of
             Lyars
          
           doth
           appeare
           in
           three
           things
           :
           1
           Lyes
           of
           Miracles
           .
           2
           Fabulous
           Legends
           of
           the
           Acts
           of
           Saints
           ,
           and
           sufferings
           of
           Martyrs
           .
           3
           Counterfeit
           writings
           under
           the
           name
           of
           the
           best
           and
           first
           antiquity
           .
           Lyes
           of
           Miracles
           will
           display
           their
           hypocrisie
           in
           three
           particulars
           .
           1
           Forgery
           .
           2
           Illusion
           ,
           3
           Misapplication
           .
           1
           Forgery
           of
           Miracles
           never
           done
           ,
           as
           were
           the
           reports
           of
           wondrous
           dreames
           ,
           and
           visions
           ,
           which
           had
           no
           other
           credit
           ,
           but
           the
           Authors
           honesty
           ;
           or
           miraculous
           Cures
           ,
           by
           the
           power
           and
           reliques
           of
           Saints
           deceased
           ;
           as
           when
           those
           who
           never
           were
           blind
           ,
           made
           others
           beleeve
           they
           had
           newly
           received
           sight
           .
           2
           Illusion
           ;
           when
           though
           something
           were
           done
           ,
           yet
           it
           was
           but
           a
           seeming
           ,
           and
           a
           counterfeit
           onely
           of
           a
           miraculous
           work
           ,
           indeed
           some
           jugling
           trick
           of
           the
           Divell
           ,
           or
           of
           his
           instruments
           .
           Lastly
           ,
           Misapplication
           ;
           either
           when
           that
           was
           attributed
           to
           a
           divine
           power
           ,
           which
           was
           nothing
           but
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           the
           work
           and
           operation
           of
           the
           Divell
           :
           or
           when
           it
           was
           interpreted
           ,
           and
           abused
           to
           invite
           and
           confirme
           men
           in
           some
           Idolatrous
           errour
           ,
           as
           it
           happened
           in
           the
           miracle
           of
           the
           Shrines
           and
           Sepulchres
           of
           the
           holy
           Martyrs
           ,
           which
           were
           interpreted
           to
           bee
           for
           the
           confirmation
           of
           their
           Power
           ,
           Presence
           ,
           and
           notice
           of
           humane
           affaires
           after
           death
           ,
           and
           to
           warrant
           us
           ,
           and
           encourage
           men
           to
           have
           recourse
           unto
           them
           by
           prayer
           ,
           and
           invocation
           ,
           as
           unto
           Mediatours
           ;
           and
           to
           give
           that
           honour
           unto
           their
           Reliques
           ,
           which
           was
           due
           unto
           God
           alone
           .
           The
           like
           is
           to
           be
           said
           of
           the
           Miracles
           of
           Images
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           Host
           ,
           which
           though
           they
           smelt
           strong
           of
           Forgery
           ,
           or
           Illusion
           ,
           were
           supposed
           by
           a
           divine
           disposition
           to
           be
           wrought
           for
           the
           like
           end
           and
           purpose
           .
           All
           which
           was
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           the
           power
           of
           seduction
           ,
           or
           strong
           delusion
           ,
           to
           make
           the
           world
           beleeve
           
           a
           Lye
           ,
           as
           Saint
           Paul
           speakes
           2
           Thessal
           .
           2.11
           .
        
         
           Concerning
           the
           hypocrisie
           of
           fabulous
           legend-Writers
           of
           the
           Acts
           of
           Saints
           and
           Martyrs
           ,
           you
           know
           what
           it
           meanes
           ,
           as
           also
           the
           last
           which
           was
           named
           Counterfeit
           Authors
           ,
           under
           the
           name
           of
           Antiquity
           ;
           as
           approving
           those
           errours
           which
           latter
           times
           devised
           ;
           I
           shall
           not
           need
           here
           to
           use
           any
           further
           explication
           :
           and
           thus
           you
           see
           what
           is
           comprehended
           under
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           the
           hypocrisie
           ,
           counterfeiting
           ,
           or
           faining
           of
           Lyars
           .
           I
           should
           now
           come
           to
           display
           the
           truth
           of
           this
           particular
           of
           this
           Prophesie
           in
           the
           event
           ;
           but
           I
           will
           first
           unfold
           the
           next
           imputation
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           the
           hypocrisie
           of
           those
           who
           have
           their
           consciences
           seared
           ;
           which
           though
           it
           might
           be
           exemplified
           in
           other
           things
           ,
           yet
           I
           meane
           to
           instance
           onely
           in
           that
           afore-mentioned
           ,
           and
           so
           must
           give
           you
           the
           story
           of
           both
           together
           .
        
         
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           &c.
           
             Through
             the
             hypocrisie
             of
             those
             who
             have
             their
             consciences
             seared
             .
          
           For
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           as
           I
           said
           before
           ,
           is
           to
           be
           repeated
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           signifies
           both
           the
           place
           seared
           ,
           and
           the
           mark
           printed
           by
           the
           searing
           with
           an
           hot
           iron
           .
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           is
           to
           cauterize
           ,
           to
           sear
           with
           an
           hot
           iron
           ,
           or
           cut
           off
           with
           searing
           ,
           as
           Chirurgions
           doe
           rotten
           members
           :
           now
           that
           which
           is
           seared
           ,
           becomes
           more
           hard
           and
           brawny
           ,
           and
           so
           more
           dull
           ,
           and
           not
           so
           sensible
           in
           feeling
           as
           otherwise
           .
           In
           this
           sense
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           signifies
           those
           who
           have
           a
           hard
           and
           a
           brawny
           Conscience
           ,
           which
           hath
           no
           feeling
           in
           it
           :
           in
           the
           other
           sense
           as
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           is
           to
           cut
           off
           by
           searing
           ,
           it
           must
           signifie
           those
           who
           have
           no
           conscience
           left
           ;
           there
           is
           not
           much
           difference
           ;
           but
           I
           follow
           the
           first
           ,
           a
           hard
           and
           unfeeling
           Conscience
           .
           And
           whether
           those
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           whereof
           we
           spake
           before
           (
           to
           use
           no
           other
           instances
           )
           were
           not
           of
           such
           metall
           ,
           for
           their
           Conscience
           ,
           I
           think
           no
           man
           can
           deny
           .
           Who
           could
           have
           coined
           ,
           or
           who
           could
           have
           beleeved
           such
           monstrous
           stuffe
           ,
           as
           the
           Legends
           are
           stored
           with
           ,
           but
           such
           as
           were
           cauterized
           ?
           
           If
           they
           had
           had
           any
           tendernesse
           or
           feeling
           ,
           not
           only
           of
           Conscience
           ,
           but
           even
           of
           sense
           ,
           they
           could
           never
           have
           beleeved
           ,
           or
           vented
           such
           stuffe
           as
           there
           is
           .
           As
           
             Vincent
             .
             hist.
             lib.
          
           7.
           cap.
           84.
           
           That
           the
           Virgin
           Mary
           should
           draw
           out
           her
           breasts
           ,
           and
           milk
           in
           I
           know
           not
           what
           Clerks
           mouth
           .
           That
           she
           played
           the
           Midwife
           to
           an
           Abbesse
           ,
           got
           with
           child
           by
           her
           Cater
           ,
           and
           sent
           the
           Bastard
           by
           two
           Angels
           to
           a
           certaine
           Hermite
           to
           be
           brought
           up
           .
           
             Idem
             ibid.
             c.
          
           86.
           
           That
           she
           came
           and
           lay
           the
           first
           night
           in
           the
           midst
           between
           a
           certain
           Bridegroome
           and
           his
           Bride
           .
           
             Idem
             lib.
          
           7.
           cap.
           87.
           
           Caesarius
           in
           his
           seventh
           book
           cap.
           34.
           reports
           ,
           that
           the
           Virgin
           Mary
           ,
           for
           twelve
           whole
           yeeres
           together
           ,
           did
           supply
           the
           place
           of
           a
           certain
           Nun
           ,
           called
           Beatrice
           ,
           while
           she
           lay
           in
           the
           Stewes
           ,
           till
           at
           length
           returning
           ,
           she
           freed
           the
           Virgin
           from
           standing
           Sentinel
           any
           longer
           .
           And
           lib.
           7.
           cap.
           33.
           
           That
           she
           said
           to
           a
           certain
           Souldier
           ,
           I
           'll
           be
           thy
           wife
           ,
           come
           and
           kisse
           me
           ,
           and
           made
           him
           doe
           so
           .
           That
           she
           took
           a
           Monk
           about
           the
           neck
           and
           kissed
           him
           .
           In
           an
           Italian
           book
           called
           ,
           
             The
             miracles
             of
             the
             blessed
             Virgin
             ,
          
           printed
           at
           Millaine
           1547.
           a
           certaine
           Abbesse
           being
           great
           with
           child
           ,
           the
           holy
           Virgin
           willing
           to
           cover
           the
           crime
           ,
           did
           in
           her
           stead
           present
           her selfe
           before
           the
           Bishop
           in
           form
           of
           an
           Abbesse
           ,
           and
           shewed
           by
           ocular
           demonstration
           ,
           that
           she
           was
           not
           with
           child
           .
           
             Fasciculus
             temporum
          
           ,
           written
           many
           yeeres
           agoe
           ,
           tels
           us
           of
           Saint
           Gilgols
           wife
           used
           to
           sing
           with
           her
           lower
           mouth
           ,
           because
           she
           scoffed
           at
           her
           husbands
           Miracles
           .
        
         
           But
           that
           which
           
             Johannes
             de
             Nicol.
          
           in
           his
           reformed
           Spanyard
           tels
           ,
           that
           he
           read
           taken
           out
           of
           Trithemius
           ,
           is
           the
           more
           worthy
           to
           be
           remembred
           ,
           as
           being
           a
           principall
           motive
           in
           his
           conversion
           ,
           who
           was
           till
           then
           extremely
           addicted
           to
           the
           Idol-worship
           of
           the
           blessed
           Virgin
           ;
           which
           was
           much
           cooled
           ,
           when
           he
           read
           that
           she
           came
           into
           the
           chamber
           of
           Fryer
           Allen
           (
           a
           Dominican
           that
           made
           her
           Rosary
           )
           made
           a
           ring
           of
           her
           owne
           haire
           ,
           wherewith
           she
           espoused
           her selfe
           unto
           him
           ,
           kissed
           him
           ,
           let
           him
           handle
           
           her
           breasts
           ,
           and
           conversed
           as
           familiarly
           with
           him
           ,
           as
           a
           Bride
           is
           wont
           with
           her
           Bridegroome
           :
           whether
           think
           you
           not
           that
           these
           fellowes
           were
           seared
           in
           their
           conscience
           ?
           what
           block
           could
           have
           beene
           more
           senslesse
           ?
           
             Melchior
             Canus
          
           speaking
           of
           the
           golden
           legend
           ,
           as
           they
           call
           it
           ,
           a
           book
           fraught
           with
           such
           stuffe
           ,
           as
           you
           have
           heard
           ,
           me
           thinks
           almost
           expresses
           the
           meaning
           of
           a
           cauterized
           conscience
           .
           
             Hanc
             homo
             scripsit
          
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             ferrei
             oris
             ,
             &
             plumbei
             cordis
             ,
          
           a
           fellow
           of
           an
           iron
           mouth
           ,
           and
           leaden
           heart
           ,
           as
           if
           he
           had
           said
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           of
           a
           brawny
           and
           unfeeling
           conscience
           .
        
         
           But
           I
           come
           to
           shew
           how
           this
           prediction
           of
           our
           Apostle
           hath
           beene
           accomplished
           ,
           how
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           the
           cousening
           and
           feigning
           of
           lyars
           ,
           was
           the
           meanes
           whereby
           the
           doctrine
           of
           Daemons
           was
           advanced
           in
           the
           Church
           ,
           I
           meane
           the
           deifying
           and
           worshipping
           of
           Saints
           and
           Angels
           ,
           the
           adoring
           and
           templing
           of
           relicks
           ,
           the
           bowing
           downe
           to
           Images
           ,
           the
           worshipping
           of
           Crosses
           as
           new
           Idoll-columnes
           ,
           the
           worshipping
           of
           the
           breaden
           god
           ,
           or
           of
           any
           visible
           thing
           whatsoever
           upon
           supposall
           of
           any
           divinity
           therein
           :
           all
           which
           I
           have
           proved
           to
           be
           nothing
           else
           ,
           but
           the
           Gentiles
           idolatrous
           Theology
           of
           Daemons
           ,
           revived
           amongst
           Christians
           .
        
         
           The
           first
           of
           these
           ,
           the
           deifying
           and
           invocating
           of
           Saints
           ,
           and
           adoring
           relicks
           is
           the
           most
           ancient
           for
           time
           of
           all
           the
           rest
           ,
           and
           began
           to
           appeare
           in
           the
           Church
           presently
           after
           the
           death
           of
           Julian
           the
           Apostate
           ,
           who
           was
           the
           last
           Ethnicall
           Emperour
           ;
           the
           grounds
           and
           occasions
           whereof
           were
           most
           strange
           reports
           of
           wonders
           shewed
           upon
           those
           who
           approached
           the
           shrines
           of
           Martyrs
           ,
           and
           prayed
           at
           their
           memories
           ,
           and
           sepulchers
           :
           devils
           charmed
           ,
           diseases
           cured
           ,
           the
           blinde
           saw
           ,
           the
           lame
           walked
           ,
           yea
           the
           dead
           revived
           ,
           and
           other
           the
           like
           ,
           which
           the
           doctors
           of
           those
           times
           for
           the
           most
           part
           avouched
           to
           be
           done
           by
           the
           power
           and
           prayers
           of
           glorified
           Martyrs
           ,
           and
           by
           the
           notice
           they
           took
           of
           mens
           devotions
           at
           their
           sepulchers
           ;
           
           though
           at
           the
           beginning
           those
           devotions
           were
           directed
           to
           God
           alone
           ,
           and
           such
           places
           only
           chosen
           for
           the
           stirring
           up
           of
           zeale
           and
           fervour
           ,
           by
           the
           memory
           of
           those
           blessed
           and
           glorious
           Champions
           of
           Christ.
           But
           whiles
           the
           world
           stood
           in
           admiration
           ,
           and
           the
           most
           esteemed
           of
           these
           wonders
           ,
           as
           of
           the
           glorious
           beames
           of
           the
           triumph
           of
           Christ
           ;
           they
           were
           soone
           perswaded
           to
           call
           upon
           them
           ,
           as
           patrons
           and
           mediatours
           ,
           whose
           power
           with
           God
           ,
           and
           notice
           of
           things
           done
           upon
           earth
           ,
           they
           thought
           that
           these
           signes
           and
           miracles
           approved
           .
        
         
           Thus
           the
           reliques
           of
           Martyrs
           beginning
           to
           be
           esteemed
           above
           the
           richest
           jewels
           ,
           for
           the
           supposed
           vertue
           even
           of
           the
           very
           ayre
           of
           them
           ,
           were
           wonderfully
           sought
           after
           ,
           as
           some
           
             divine
             Elixar
          
           ,
           soveraigne
           both
           to
           body
           and
           soule
           .
           Whereupon
           another
           scene
           of
           wonders
           entred
           ,
           even
           of
           visions
           ,
           and
           revelations
           ,
           wonderfull
           and
           admirable
           for
           the
           discovery
           of
           the
           sepulchers
           and
           ashes
           of
           Martyrs
           ,
           which
           were
           quite
           forgotten
           ,
           yea
           of
           some
           whose
           names
           and
           memories
           ,
           till
           then
           ,
           no
           man
           had
           ever
           heard
           of
           ;
           as
           S.
           
             Ambrose's
             Gervasius
          
           ,
           and
           Protasius
           .
           Thus
           in
           every
           corner
           of
           the
           Christian
           world
           were
           new
           Martyrs
           bones
           ever
           and
           anon
           discovered
           ,
           whose
           verity
           againe
           miraculous
           effects
           and
           cures
           seemed
           to
           approve
           ;
           and
           therefore
           were
           diversly
           dispersed
           ,
           and
           gloriously
           templed
           ,
           and
           enshrined
           .
           
             Hil.
             lib.
             ad
             Constantium
          
           intimates
           miraculous
           cures
           of
           the
           reliques
           of
           Martyrs
           to
           have
           been
           as
           ancient
           as
           his
           time
           ,
           yea
           as
           the
           time
           of
           the
           Churches
           peace
           *
           .
           All
           these
           things
           happened
           in
           that
           one
           age
           ,
           and
           were
           come
           to
           this
           heigth
           in
           lesse
           than
           100
           yeares
           .
           But
           here
           is
           the
           wonder
           most
           of
           all
           to
           be
           wondred
           at
           ,
           that
           none
           of
           these
           miraculous
           signes
           were
           ever
           heard
           of
           in
           the
           Church
           ,
           for
           the
           first
           300
           yeares
           after
           Christ
           ,
           untill
           about
           the
           yeare
           360
           ;
           after
           that
           the
           Empire
           under
           Constantine
           and
           his
           sonnes
           ,
           having
           publickly
           embraced
           the
           Christian
           faith
           ,
           the
           Church
           had
           peace
           ,
           and
           the
           bodies
           of
           the
           despised
           Martyrs
           ,
           such
           as
           could
           be
           found
           ,
           were
           now
           bestowed
           in
           most
           
           magnificen●
           Temples
           ,
           and
           there
           gloriously
           enshrined
           .
           And
           yet
           had
           the
           Christians
           long
           before
           used
           to
           keep
           their
           Assemblies
           at
           the
           *
           Caemiteries
           and
           monuments
           of
           their
           Martyrs
           ;
           how
           came
           it
           to
           passe
           ,
           that
           no
           such
           vertue
           of
           their
           bones
           and
           ashes
           ,
           no
           such
           testimonies
           of
           their
           power
           after
           death
           ,
           were
           discovered
           untill
           now
           ?
        
         
           Babylas
           his
           bones
           were
           the
           first
           that
           all
           my
           search
           can
           finde
           ,
           which
           charmed
           the
           devill
           of
           
             Daphne
             ,
             Apollo
             Daphneus
          
           ,
           when
           Julian
           the
           Apostate
           offered
           so
           many
           sacrifices
           to
           make
           him
           speak
           ;
           and
           being
           asked
           why
           he
           was
           so
           mute
           ,
           forsooth
           ,
           the
           corps
           of
           Babylas
           the
           Martyr
           ,
           buried
           neere
           the
           Temple
           in
           *
           Daphne
           ,
           stopped
           his
           wind-pipe
           .
           I
           feare
           ,
           I
           feare
           here
           was
           some
           hypocrisie
           in
           this
           businesse
           ,
           and
           the
           devill
           had
           some
           ●eate
           to
           play
           :
           the
           very
           name
           of
           Babylas
           is
           enough
           to
           breed
           jealousie
           ,
           it
           is
           an
           ominous
           name
           ,
           the
           name
           Babylas
           ;
           yea
           ,
           and
           this
           happened
           too
           at
           Antioch
           ,
           where
           Babylas
           was
           Bishop
           and
           Martyr
           in
           the
           persecution
           of
           Decius
           .
           Would
           it
           not
           doe
           the
           devill
           good
           ,
           there
           to
           beginne
           his
           mystery
           ,
           where
           the
           Christian
           name
           was
           first
           given
           to
           the
           followers
           of
           Christ
           ?
           howsoever
           this
           was
           then
           farre
           otherwise
           construed
           ,
           and
           a
           conceit
           quickly
           taken
           ,
           that
           other
           Martyrs
           bones
           might
           bee
           found
           upon
           ●riall
           ,
           as
           terrible
           to
           the
           devill
           ,
           as
           those
           of
           Babylas
           ;
           which
           was
           no
           sooner
           tryed
           ,
           but
           experience
           presently
           verefied
           with
           improvement
           ,
           as
           you
           heard
           before
           ;
           so
           that
           all
           the
           world
           rung
           so
           with
           wonders
           done
           by
           Martyrs
           ,
           that
           even
           holy
           men
           ,
           who
           at
           the
           first
           suspected
           ,
           were
           at
           length
           surprised
           ,
           and
           carried
           away
           with
           the
           power
           of
           delusion
           .
        
         
           Besides
           the
           silence
           of
           all
           undoubted
           *
           antiquity
           of
           any
           such
           sepulchral
           wonders
           to
           have
           happened
           in
           the
           former
           ages
           ,
           the
           very
           manner
           of
           speech
           ,
           which
           the
           fathers
           living
           in
           this
           miraculous
           age
           used
           ,
           when
           they
           spake
           of
           these
           things
           ,
           will
           argue
           they
           were
           then
           accounted
           novelties
           ,
           and
           not
           as
           continued
           from
           the
           Apostles
           times
           .
           Chrisostome
           in
           his
           oration
           
             contra
             Gentiles
          
           ,
           of
           the
           businesse
           of
           
           Babylas
           speakes
           thus
           :
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ▪
           
             If
             any
             man
             beleeves
             not
             these
             things
             ,
             which
             are
             said
             to
             be
             done
             by
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             let
             him
             now
             beholding
             the
             present
             ,
             desist
             from
             his
             impudency
             .
             Ambros.
             Epist.
             ad
             sororem
             Marcellinam
             ,
          
           relating
           of
           a
           peece
           of
           the
           speech
           he
           made
           ,
           upon
           the
           translations
           of
           the
           bodyes
           of
           Gervasius
           and
           Protasius
           ,
           and
           the
           miracles
           then
           shewed
           ,
           reparata
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             ve●usti
             temporis
             miracula
             cer●itis
             :
             You
             see
             the
             miracles
             of
             ancient
             times
          
           (
           hee
           meanes
           the
           time
           of
           Christ
           and
           his
           Apostles
           )
           renewed
           .
           S.
           
             August
             .
             lib.
             de
             civ
             .
             Dei
          
           22.
           cap.
           8.
           in
           a
           discourse
           of
           the
           miracles
           of
           that
           time
           ,
           saith
           ;
           We
           made
           an
           order
           to
           have
           bills
           given
           out
           of
           such
           miracles
           as
           were
           done
           ,
           when
           wee
           saw
           the
           wonders
           of
           ancient
           times
           renewed
           in
           ours
           :
           
             Id
             namque
             fieri
             volumus
             ,
             cùm
             videremus
             antiquis
             similia
             divinaru●
             signa
             virtutum
             ,
             etiàm
             nostris
             temporibus
             frequentari
             ,
             &
             ●a
             non
             debere
             multorum
             notitiae
             deperire
             .
          
           But
           alas
           ,
           now
           began
           the
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           this
           was
           the
           fatall
           time
           ,
           and
           thus
           the
           Christian
           Apostasie
           was
           to
           be
           ushered
           ;
           If
           they
           had
           knowne
           this
           ,
           it
           would
           have
           turned
           their
           joyous
           shoutings
           and
           triumphs
           ,
           at
           these
           things
           ,
           into
           mourning
           .
        
         
           The
           end
           ,
           which
           these
           signes
           and
           wonders
           aymed
           at
           ,
           and
           at
           length
           brought
           to
           passe
           ,
           
           should
           have
           made
           them
           remember
           that
           warning
           which
           was
           given
           the
           ancient
           people
           of
           God
           :
           Deut.
           13.
           
           
             If
             there
             arise
             among
             you
             a
             Prophet
             ,
             or
             a
             dreamer
             of
             dreames
             ,
             and
             giveth
             thee
             a
             signe
             or
             a
             wonder
             ;
             and
             that
             signe
             or
             wonder
             come
             to
             passe
             ,
             whereof
             he
             spake
             unto
             thee
             ,
             saying
             ,
             Let
             us
             goe
             after
             other
             Gods
             and
             serve
             them
             ;
             thou
             shalt
             not
             harken
             unto
             the
             words
             of
             that
             Prophet
             ,
             or
             dreamer
             of
             dreames
             :
             for
             the
             Lord
             your
             God
             proveth
             you
             ,
             to
             know
             whether
             you
             love
             the
             Lord
             your
             God
             with
             all
             your
             heart
             ,
             and
             with
             all
             your
             soule
             .
          
           But
           why
           should
           I
           goe
           any
           further
           ,
           before
           I
           tell
           you
           ,
           that
           even
           in
           this
           also
           ,
           the
           idolatry
           of
           Saint-worship
           was
           a
           true
           counterfeit
           of
           the
           Gentiles
           idolatry
           of
           Daemons
           ?
           Did
           not
           
           Daemon-worship
           enter
           after
           the
           same
           manner
           ?
           was
           it
           not
           first
           insinuated
           ,
           and
           afterward
           established
           by
           signes
           ,
           and
           wonders
           of
           the
           very
           selfe
           same
           kinde
           ,
           and
           fashion
           ?
           Listen
           what
           Eusebius
           will
           tell
           us
           in
           his
           fifth
           book
           
             Praeparat
             .
             Evangel
             .
             cap.
          
           2.
           according
           to
           the
           Greek
           edition
           of
           
             Rob.
             Stephen
          
           ,
           when
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           those
           wicked
           spirits
           (
           as
           he
           proved
           them
           to
           be
           which
           were
           worshipped
           under
           the
           names
           of
           Daemons
           )
           saw
           mankinde
           brought
           off
           to
           a
           deifying
           of
           the
           dead
           (
           he
           meanes
           by
           erecting
           statues
           ,
           and
           ordaining
           ceremonies
           and
           sacrifices
           for
           their
           memorialls
           )
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ;
           they
           insinuated
           themselves
           ,
           and
           helped
           forward
           their
           errour
           :
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ;
           by
           certaine
           motions
           of
           the
           statues
           ,
           which
           anciently
           were
           consecrated
           to
           the
           honour
           of
           the
           deceased
           :
           as
           also
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ;
           by
           ostentation
           of
           oracles
           and
           cures
           of
           diseases
           ,
           whereby
           they
           then
           superstitious
           ranne
           headlong
           ,
           sometimes
           to
           take
           them
           to
           be
           some
           heavenly
           powers
           and
           Gods
           indeed
           ,
           and
           sometimes
           to
           be
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ;
           the
           soules
           of
           their
           deified
           worthies
           .
           And
           so
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           the
           earth-neighbouring-Daemons
           which
           are
           the
           princes
           of
           the
           Ayre
           ,
           those
           spiritualities
           of
           wickednesse
           ,
           and
           ring-leaders
           of
           all
           evill
           ,
           were
           on
           all
           hands
           accounted
           for
           great
           Gods
           :
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ;
           and
           the
           memory
           of
           the
           ancients
           deceased
           was
           thought
           worthy
           to
           be
           celebrated
           with
           a
           greater
           service
           ;
           the
           features
           of
           whose
           bodies
           the
           dedicated
           images
           in
           every
           city
           seemed
           to
           represent
           ;
           but
           the
           soules
           of
           them
           ,
           and
           those
           diviner
           and
           incorporeall
           powers
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ;
           the
           wicked
           Daemons
           counterfeited
           by
           working
           many
           miracles
           .
        
         
           Heare
           Tertullian
           also
           speak
           in
           his
           Apology
           to
           the
           Gentiles
           ,
           cap.
           21.
           
             in
             fine
             .
             Quaerite
             ergò
             si
             vera
             est
             ista
             divinitas
             Christi
             ▪
             si
             est
             ea
             quâ
             cognitâ
             ad
             bonum
             quis
             reformetur
             ,
             
             sequitur
             ut
             falsa
             renuntietur
             ,
             compertâimprimis
             illâ
             omni
             ratione
             ,
             quae
             delitescens
             sub
             nominibus
             &
             imaginibus
             mortuorum
             ,
             quibusdam
             signis
             &
             miraculis
             ,
             &
             oraculis
             ,
             fidem
             divinitatis
             operatur
             .
          
           Search
           therefore
           this
           Deity
           of
           Christ
           ,
           whether
           it
           be
           true
           ,
           or
           not
           ;
           if
           it
           be
           that
           ,
           by
           the
           knowledge
           whereof
           a
           man
           shall
           be
           reformed
           to
           good
           ,
           it
           followes
           then
           ,
           that
           the
           false
           be
           renounced
           ;
           especially
           ,
           that
           whole
           mysterie
           (
           he
           meanes
           of
           Gentiles
           Idolatry
           ,
           and
           Daemon-worship
           )
           being
           discovered
           ,
           which
           under
           the
           names
           and
           Images
           of
           the
           dead
           ,
           through
           Signes
           ,
           Miracles
           ,
           and
           Oracles
           ,
           obtaineth
           an
           opinion
           of
           divinity
           .
        
         
           Chrysostome
           shall
           conclude
           ,
           who
           in
           his
           Oration
           In
           
           Judaizantes
           saith
           ,
           that
           the
           Daemons
           of
           the
           Gentiles
           wrought
           Miracles
           for
           the
           confirmation
           of
           Paganisme
           ,
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           For
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           they
           oftentimes
           by
           their
           skill
           cured
           diseases
           ,
           and
           restored
           to
           health
           those
           that
           were
           sick
           ;
           what
           should
           we
           partake
           therefore
           with
           them
           in
           their
           impiety
           ,
           because
           of
           this
           ?
           God
           forbid
           .
           Then
           he
           adds
           out
           of
           
             Moses
             ,
             Deut.
          
           13.
           that
           which
           we
           even
           now
           quoted
           ;
           which
           ,
           had
           it
           been
           as
           well
           applied
           to
           the
           miracles
           amongst
           Christians
           present
           ,
           as
           it
           was
           to
           those
           of
           the
           Gentiles
           past
           ,
           perhaps
           he
           that
           spoke
           it
           ,
           would
           have
           questioned
           something
           which
           he
           enclined
           to
           beleeve
           .
        
         
           The
           second
           particular
           I
           named
           of
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           was
           fabulous
           Legends
           of
           the
           Acts
           of
           Saints
           and
           Martyrs
           ;
           this
           was
           also
           another
           meanes
           to
           advance
           the
           doctrines
           of
           Daemons
           .
           For
           the
           true
           acts
           and
           stories
           of
           Martyrs
           being
           extinguished
           for
           the
           most
           part
           ,
           by
           the
           bloody
           Edict
           of
           Dioclesian
           ,
           they
           now
           began
           to
           supply
           againe
           that
           losse
           ,
           by
           collecting
           such
           tales
           as
           were
           then
           current
           of
           them
           ,
           and
           adding
           thereto
           such
           miracles
           as
           were
           fabled
           after
           death
           ,
           fashioned
           all
           to
           the
           best
           advantage
           of
           what
           they
           meant
           to
           promote
           in
           the
           Church
           ,
           and
           was
           already
           on
           foot
           in
           
           the
           same
           .
           Such
           was
           that
           wherwith
           the
           good
           Father
           
             Greg.
             Nazi●●
          
           ▪
           was
           abused
           in
           his
           funeral
           Oration
           upon
           Cyprian
           ,
           and
           many
           others
           of
           the
           Greek
           Churches
           :
           that
           Cyprian
           ,
           that
           great
           Cyprian
           ,
           who
           was
           both
           Citizen
           and
           Bishop
           of
           C●rthage
           ,
           in
           the
           reign
           of
           Decius
           (
           for
           of
           him
           Gregory
           speaketh
           expresly
           )
           even
           being
           formerly
           a
           Conjurer
           ,
           and
           falling
           into
           love
           with
           a
           Christian
           Virgin
           Justina
           ,
           some
           say
           of
           An●ioch
           ,
           when
           〈◊〉
           by
           wooing
           and
           ordinary
           meanes
           he
           could
           not
           with
           her
           unto
           his
           will
           ,
           he
           went
           about
           to
           prevaile
           with
           Magick
           spells
           and
           conjurations
           ;
           which
           the
           damsell
           perceiving
           ,
           she
           having
           recourse
           to
           God
           ,
           sell
           to
           work
           against
           him
           with
           prayer
           and
           fasting
           ,
           and
           in
           her
           devotions
           also
           be●ought
           the
           Virgin
           Mary
           to
           succour
           her
           a
           Virgin
           in
           that
           jeopardy
           :
           by
           which
           meanes
           Cyprians
           Magicall
           enchantments
           were
           frustrated
           ,
           and
           he
           convinced
           thereby
           ,
           became
           a
           Christian.
           All
           which
           Baronius
           himselfe
           confesses
           to
           be
           a
           fable
           ,
           as
           well
           he
           might
           ,
           it
           being
           unknowne
           both
           to
           Pontius
           his
           Deacon
           ,
           who
           lived
           with
           him
           ,
           and
           wrote
           his
           life
           ;
           and
           to
           the
           western
           ,
           and
           African
           Churches
           ,
           where
           he
           lived
           and
           died
           :
           who
           knew
           ,
           and
           who
           could
           know
           better
           ,
           that
           in
           his
           Paganisme
           he
           was
           not
           a
           Magician
           ,
           but
           a
           Professour
           of
           Oratory
           at
           Carthage
           ,
           farre
           enough
           from
           Antioch
           ,
           and
           converted
           by
           one
           Caecilius
           ?
           Neverthelesse
           ,
           we
           have
           cause
           to
           think
           ,
           that
           this
           tale
           ,
           together
           with
           the
           like
           ,
           served
           not
           a
           little
           for
           the
           advancement
           of
           the
           mystery
           of
           Daemons
           in
           the
           Easterne
           Churches
           ;
           when
           we
           see
           our
           Adversaries
           so
           willing
           to
           have
           that
           passage
           (
           as
           seemes
           by
           their
           often
           alledging
           it
           )
           of
           calling
           upon
           the
           blessed
           Virgin
           to
           be
           authenticall
           ;
           notwithstanding
           they
           know
           (
           which
           the
           Greeks
           so
           well
           could
           not
           ,
           he
           being
           a
           Latine
           Bishop
           )
           that
           the
           whole
           story
           must
           needs
           be
           a
           fable
           .
           Of
           this
           stamp
           are
           the
           well
           known
           Legends
           of
           our
           Latine
           Churches
           ,
           which
           almost
           all
           of
           them
           drive
           principally
           at
           this
           mark
           ;
           it
           being
           also
           the
           ordinary
           conclusion
           of
           their
           tales
           (
           sure
           of
           our
           English
           )
           that
           since
           God
           hath
           done
           thus
           and
           thus
           by
           this
           holy
           Martyr
           ,
           or
           sith
           God
           hath
           
           with
           such
           myracles
           honoured
           this
           martyr
           ,
           let
           us
           pray
           unto
           him
           ,
           that
           by
           his
           merits
           and
           Intercession
           wee
           may
           obtain
           salvation
           .
           Nor
           is
           it
           a
           late
           device
           ;
           
             Greg.
             Turonensis
          
           above
           a
           thousand
           yeares
           agoe
           in
           his
           two
           books
           
             de
             miraculis
             martyrum
          
           ,
           as
           his
           fabulous
           narrations
           ,
           
           (
           which
           yet
           many
           of
           them
           hee
           referres
           to
           others
           before
           him
           )
           are
           excellently
           well
           framed
           for
           the
           promotion
           of
           Saint-worship
           ;
           so
           in
           the
           Conclusion
           of
           them
           hee
           plainly
           confesses
           ,
           that
           that
           was
           his
           ayme
           shutting
           up
           his
           first
           booke
           thus
           .
           
             Vnde
             oportet
             et
             nos
             ●●rum
             Patrocinia
             expetere
             ,
             ut
             ,
             eorum
             mereamur
             Suffragiis
             ,
             vel
             quod
             nostris
             digninon
             sumus
             meritis
             obtinere
             ,
             eorum
             possumus
             Intercessionibus
             adipisci
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           His
           second
           thus
           ;
           
             Ergò
             his
             miraculis
             lector
             incend●us
             intelligat
             ,
             non
             aliter
             nisi
             Martyrum
             reliquorumque
             amicorum
             Dei
             adjutoriis
             se
             posse
             salvari
             .
             &c
             :
          
        
         
           But
           among
           the
           Greeks
           
             Simeon
             Metaphrast●s
          
           hath
           a
           strain
           beyond
           us
           all
           ,
           
           who
           makes
           prayers
           for
           many
           of
           his
           Martyrs
           ,
           wherin
           they
           desire
           of
           God
           ,
           that
           whosoever
           should
           pray
           unto
           him
           in
           their
           names
           ,
           or
           have
           recourse
           to
           their
           sepulchers
           ,
           when
           they
           were
           glorified
           ,
           might
           obtain
           whatsoever
           they
           aske
           ,
           yea
           remission
           of
           sins
           itselfe
           :
           which
           because
           it
           is
           so
           singular
           a
           counterfeit
           of
           a
           lying
           Greek
           I
           shal
           not
           doe
           amisse
           to
           insert
           the
           particulars
           ,
           together
           with
           something
           about
           the
           occasion
           and
           time
           of
           this
           device
           .
        
         
           
             In
             the
             Martyrdome
             of
             Anastasia
             a
             Roman
             Virgi●
             under
             Diocletian
             ,
             he
             tells
             us
             if
             we
             be
             so
             wise
             as
             to
             beleeve
             it
             ,
          
           
             That
             at
             the
             time
             of
             her
             suffering
             ,
             when
             she
             had
             ,
             as
             was
             fit
             ,
             given
             thanks
             unto
             God
             ,
             and
             prayed
             for
             the
             happy
             accomplishment
             of
             her
             Martyrdome
             ,
             and
             afterward
             made
             suit
             for
             those
             who
             being
             si●k
             should
             have
             recourse
             unto
             her
             (
             viz.
             after
             death
             )
             she
             heard
             a
             voice
             from
             heaven
             certifying
             ,
             that
             what
             she
             had
             asked
             was
             granted
             her
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             Saint
             Barbara
             ,
             a
             Virgin
             of
             Heli●polis
             ,
             martyred
             under
             Maximilianus
             ,
             he
             makes
             ,
             under
             the
             Executioners
             hand
             ,
             to
             pray
             in
             this
             manner
             :
          
           
             
               And
               thou
               O
               King
               (
               God
               )
               now
               heare
               my
               prayer
               ,
               that
               whosoever
               shall
               remember
               thy
               name
               ,
               and
               this
               my
               conflict
               ,
               no
               pestilent
               disease
               may
               enter
               upon
               this
               house
               ,
               nor
               any
               other
               of
               those
               evils
               ,
               which
               may
               bring
               dammage
               ,
               or
               trouble
               to
               the
               bodies
               of
               men
               .
            
             She
             had
             no
             sooner
             spoken
             ,
             saith
             he
             ,
             but
             a
             voice
             was
             miraculously
             heard
             from
             heaven
             ,
             calling
             her
             and
             her
             fellow
             Martyr
             Julian
             to
             the
             heavenly
             places
             ,
             and
             promising
             also
             that
             those
             things
             ,
             which
             she
             had
             asked
             ,
             should
             be
             accomplished
             .
          
        
         
           
             In
             Saint
             Blasius
             (
             who
             suffered
             ,
             saith
             Baronius
             ,
             under
             Licinius
             )
             our
             Simeon
             tels
             us
             ,
          
           
             That
             when
             a
             woman
             came
             unto
             him
             to
             cure
             her
             son
             ,
             who
             had
             a
             fish-bone
             sticking
             in
             his
             throat
             ,
             he
             prayed
             in
             this
             manner
             :
             
               Thou
               O
               Saviour
               ,
               who
               hast
               been
               ready
               to
               help
               those
               who
               called
               upon
               thee
               ,
               heare
               my
               prayer
               ,
               and
               by
               thy
               invisible
               power
               take
               out
               the
               bone
               which
               sticks
               in
               this
               child
               ,
               and
               cure
               him
               ;
               and
               whensoever
               hereafter
               the
               like
               shall
               befall
               men
               ,
               children
               ,
               or
               beasts
               ,
               if
               any
               of
               them
               shall
               remember
               my
               name
               ,
               saying
               ,
               O
               Lord
               hasten
               thy
               help
               through
               the
               intercession
               of
               thy
               servant
            
             Blasius
             ,
             
               doe
               thou
               cure
               him
               speedily
               ,
               to
               the
               honour
               and
               glory
               of
               thy
               holy
               name
               .
            
          
           
             Againe
             he
             tels
             us
             ,
             while
             they
             were
             carrying
             him
             before
             the
             President
             ,
             he
             restored
             to
             a
             poore
             widow
             a
             hog
             ,
             her
             onely
             hog
             ,
             which
             a
             Wolfe
             had
             taken
             away
             from
             her
             .
             And
             when
             as
             afterward
             ,
             in
             signe
             of
             thankfulnesse
             she
             brought
             the
             hogs
             head
             and
             feet
             boiled
             to
             the
             Martyr
             in
             prison
             ,
             he
             blessing
             her
             ,
             spake
             in
             this
             maner
             :
             
               Woman
               in
               this
               habit
               celebrate
               my
               memoriall
               ,
               and
               no
               good
               thing
               shall
               ever
               be
               wanting
               in
               thy
               house
               from
               my
               God
               :
               yea
               and
               if
               any
               other
               ,
               imitating
               of
               thee
               ,
               shall
               in
               like
               manner
               celebrate
               my
               memoriall
               ,
               
               he
               shall
               receive
               an
               everlasting
               gift
               from
               my
               God
               ,
               and
               a
               blessing
               all
               the
               dayes
               of
               his
               life
               .
            
          
           
             When
             he
             comes
             to
             suffer
             ,
             he
             makes
             him
             pray
             to
             God
             thus
             :
             
               Heare
               me
               thy
               servant
               ,
               and
               whosoever
               shall
               have
               recourse
               to
               this
               thine
               Altar
               ,
            
             (
             he
             meanes
             himselfe
             )
             
               and
               whosoever
               shall
               have
               swallowed
               a
               bone
               ,
               or
               prickle
               ,
               or
               be
               vexed
               with
               any
               disease
               ,
               or
               be
               in
               any
               affliction
               ,
               necessity
               ,
               or
               persecution
               ,
               grant
               Lord
               to
               every
               one
               his
               hearts
               desire
               ,
               as
               thou
               art
               gracious
               and
               mercifull
               ,
               for
               thou
               art
               to
               be
               glorified
               now
               and
               evermore
               .
            
          
           
             When
             he
             had
             thus
             prayed
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             Christ
             descended
             from
             heaven
             in
             a
             cloud
             ,
             and
             overshadowed
             him
             :
             and
             our
             Saviour
             said
             unto
             him
             ,
             
               O
               my
               beloved
               Champion
               ,
               I
               will
               not
               onely
               doe
               this
               ,
               but
               that
               also
               which
               thou
               diddest
               request
               for
               the
               widow
               ;
               and
               will
               blesse
               also
               every
               house
               which
               shall
               celebrate
               thy
               memory
               ,
               and
               I
               will
               fill
               their
               store-houses
               with
               all
               good
               things
               ,
               for
               this
               thy
               glorious
               confession
               ,
               and
               thy
               faith
               which
               thou
               hast
               in
               me
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             Saint
             Catharine
             ,
             whom
             he
             calls
             Aecatharina
             ,
             a
             Martyr
             of
             Alexandria
             ,
             under
             Maximilianus
             ,
             he
             makes
             to
             pray
             thus
             at
             her
             Martyrdome
             .
          
           
             Grant
             unto
             those
             ,
             O
             Lord
             ,
             who
             through
             me
             shall
             call
             upon
             thy
             holy
             Name
             ,
             such
             their
             requests
             as
             are
             profitable
             for
             them
             ,
             that
             in
             all
             things
             thy
             wondrous
             works
             may
             be
             praised
             now
             and
             evermore
             .
          
        
         
           
             But
             above
             all
             the
             rest
             ,
             Marina's
             prayer
             ,
             whom
             we
             Latines
             call
             Saint
             Margaret
             ,
             is
             compleat
             ,
             and
             for
             the
             purpose
             ;
             she
             suffered
             under
             Dioclesian
             ,
             and
             thus
             she
             prayed
             ,
             if
             your
             dare
             beleeve
             Simeon
             .
          
           
             
               And
               now
               ,
               O
               Lord
               my
               God
               ,
               whosoever
               for
               thy
               sake
               shall
               worship
               this
               Tabernacle
               of
               my
               body
               ,
               which
               hath
               fought
               for
               thee
               ;
               and
               whosoever
               shall
               build
               an
               Oratory
               in
               the
               name
               
               of
               thy
               handmaid
               ,
               and
               therein
               offer
               unto
               thee
               spirituall
               sacrifices
               ,
               oblations
               ,
               and
               prayers
               ;
               and
               all
               those
               who
               shall
               faithfully
            
             *
             
               describe
               this
               my
               conflict
               of
               Martyrdome
               ,
               and
               shall
               read
               and
               remember
               the
               name
               of
               thy
               handmaid
               ;
               give
               unto
               them
               ,
               most
               holy
               Lord
               ,
               who
               art
               a
               lover
               of
               all
               the
               good
               ,
               and
               a
               friend
               of
               soules
               ,
               remission
               of
               sinnes
               ;
               and
               grant
               them
               pr●pitiation
               and
               mercy
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               measure
               of
               their
               faith
               ,
               and
               let
               not
               the
               revenging
               hand
               come
               neere
               them
               ,
               nor
               the
               evill
               of
               famine
               ,
               nor
               the
               curse
               of
               pestilence
               ,
               nor
               any
               grievous
               scourge
               ;
               nor
               let
               any
               incurable
               destruction
               either
               of
               body
               or
               soule
               betide
               them
               .
               And
               to
               all
               those
               who
               shall
               in
               faith
               and
               truth
               adhere
               to
               my
               house
            
             (
             her
             Oratory
             or
             Chappell
             )
             
               or
               unto
               my
               name
               ,
               and
               shall
               unto
               thee
               ,
               O
               Lord
               ,
               offer
               glory
               and
               praise
               ,
               and
               a
               sacrifice
               in
               remembrance
               of
               thine
               Handmaid
               ,
               and
               shall
               aske
               salvation
               and
               mercy
               through
               me
               ,
               grant
               them
               ,
               O
               Lord
               ,
               abundant
               store
               of
               all
               good
               things
               ;
               for
               thou
               alone
               art
               good
               and
               gracious
               ,
               and
               the
               giver
               of
               all
               good
               things
               for
               ever
               and
               ever
               .
               Amen
               .
            
          
           
             While
             she
             was
             thus
             praying
             with
             her selfe
             (
             *
             saith
             Simeon
             )
             behold
             there
             was
             a
             great
             earthquake
             ,
             yea
             and
             the
             Lord
             himselfe
             ,
             with
             a
             multitude
             and
             host
             of
             holy
             Angels
             standing
             by
             her
             ,
             in
             such
             sort
             as
             was
             perceptible
             to
             the
             understanding
             ,
             said
             ;
             
               Be
               of
               good
               cheare
            
             Marina
             ,
             
               and
               feare
               not
               ,
               for
               I
               have
               heard
               thy
               prayers
               ,
               I
               have
               fulfilled
               ,
               and
               will
               in
               due
               time
               fulfill
               whatsoever
               thou
               hast
               asked
               ,
               even
               as
               thou
               hast
               asked
               it
               .
            
          
           
             Thus
             saith
             Simeon
             ;
             who
             neverthelesse
             in
             the
             very
             entrance
             of
             this
             his
             tale
             of
             Marina
             ,
             or
             Margaret
             ,
             complains
             much
             ,
             forsooth
             ,
             that
             not
             a
             few
             of
             these
             narrations
             of
             the
             acts
             of
             Martyrs
             ,
             were
             at
             the
             beginning
             forgot
             ,
             yea
             profaned
             (
             as
             he
             saith
             more
             truly
             than
             he
             was
             aware
             of
             )
             
               Evidentissimis
               Daemoniorum
               doctrinis
            
             .
             Besides
             ,
             he
             calls
             I
             know
             not
             what
             narration
             of
             the
             Virgins
             Martyrdom
             ,
             in
             that
             sort
             corrupted
             ,
             
               dictio
               Daemoniaca
            
             ;
             but
             for
             his
             own
             part
             ,
             he
             would
             reject
             all
             counterfeit
             fables
             ,
             and
             tels
             us
             nothing
             but
             the
             truth
             ;
             which
             how
             honestly
             he
             hath
             performed
             ,
             
             and
             what
             touchstone
             he
             used
             ,
             let
             the
             Reader
             judge
             .
             a
             Baronius
             I
             am
             sure
             is
             quite
             ashamed
             of
             him
             ,
             who
             though
             he
             can
             be
             sometimes
             content
             to
             trade
             with
             not
             much
             better
             ware
             ,
             yet
             this
             of
             Simeons
             he
             supposes
             will
             need
             very
             much
             washing
             and
             cleansing
             ,
             before
             it
             be
             merchantable
             .
          
           
             But
             for
             the
             better
             understanding
             of
             this
             mystery
             of
             iniquity
             ,
             and
             what
             necessity
             there
             was
             of
             such
             desperate
             shifts
             ,
             when
             time
             was
             ;
             ye
             shall
             know
             ,
             that
             this
             Simeon
             lived
             towards
             the
             end
             of
             that
             time
             of
             great
             and
             long
             opposition
             against
             Idolatry
             ,
             in
             the
             Greeke
             and
             Easterne
             Churches
             ,
             by
             divers
             Emperours
             ,
             with
             the
             greatest
             part
             of
             their
             Bishops
             ,
             Peeres
             ,
             and
             people
             ,
             lasting
             from
             about
             the
             yeere
             of
             our
             Lo●d
             720
             ,
             till
             after
             840
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             120
             yeers
             ;
             which
             was
             not
             against
             Images
             onely
             ,
             though
             they
             bore
             the
             name
             ;
             but
             the
             worship
             of
             Saints
             ,
             and
             their
             reliques
             ;
             the
             state
             whereof
             shall
             not
             be
             amisse
             to
             represent
             out
             of
             such
             records
             of
             Antiquity
             ,
             as
             our
             Adversaries
             themselves
             have
             been
             pleased
             to
             leave
             us
             ;
             if
             it
             be
             but
             for
             their
             sake
             who
             so
             often
             ask
             us
             ,
             whether
             there
             were
             ever
             any
             of
             our
             religion
             before
             Luther
             .
             Let
             us
             therefore
             hear
             what
             Writers
             of
             their
             own
             sect
             ,
             such
             as
             then
             lived
             ,
             and
             were
             eye-witnesses
             ,
             will
             tell
             us
             .
             
               Leo
               Isaurus
            
             (
             saith
             
               Theophanes
               ,
               miscel
               .
               lib.
            
             21.
             cap.
             23.
             )
             erred
             not
             onely
             about
             the
             
             respective
             adoration
             of
             venerable
             Images
             ;
             but
             about
             the
             intercession
             of
             the
             most
             chast
             Mother
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             Saints
             ,
             whose
             reliques
             also
             the
             most
             wicked
             man
             abominated
             ,
             like
             unto
             his
             masters
             the
             Mahumetans
             .
             This
             was
             the
             first
             of
             those
             Emperours
             :
             the
             next
             was
             Constantinus
             ,
             whom
             they
             sirnamed
             Copr●nimus
             ,
             of
             whom
             the
             same
             Author
             (
             
               ibid.
               cap.
               ult
            
             .
             )
             speaks
             as
             followeth
             :
             
               This
               pernicious
            
             ,
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             
               inhumane
               ,
               and
               barbarous
               Emperour
               abusing
               his
               authority
               tyrannically
               ,
               and
               not
               using
               it
               lawfully
               ,
               at
               the
               very
               beginning
               made
               an
               Apostasie
               from
               God
               ,
               and
               from
               his
               undefiled
               Mother
               ,
               and
               from
               all
               his
               Saints
               .
            
             Again
             ,
             lib.
             22.
             c.
             4●
             .
             
               Vpon
               the
               twenty
               sixth
               yeere
               of
               his
               reign
               he
               shewed
               himself
               wicked
               ,
               beyond
               the
               frenzie
               of
               the
               Mahumetans
               ,
               to
               all
               that
               
               were
               Orthodox
            
             (
             so
             he
             calls
             Idolaters
             )
             
               under
               his
               Empire
               ,
               Bishops
               ,
               Monks
               ,
               Laymen
               ,
               and
               others
               his
               subjects
               :
               every
               where
               ,
               as
               well
               by
               writing
               as
               by
               speech
               ,
               banishing
               ,
               at
               unprofitable
               ,
               the
               Intercession
               of
               the
               holy
               Virgin
               and
               Mother
               of
               God
               ,
               and
               of
               all
               the
               Saints
               ,
               through
               which
               all
               succour
               is
               conveyed
               unto
               us
               ;
               and
               causing
               their
               holy
               reliques
               to
               be
               rejected
               and
               despised
               :
               and
               if
               the
               reliques
               of
               any
               notable
               Saint
               ,
               soveraigne
               both
               to
               body
               and
               soule
               ,
               were
               knowne
               to
               lie
               any
               where
               ,
               and
               wer●
               ,
               as
               the
               manner
               is
               ,
               honoured
               by
               those
               which
               were
               religious
               ,
               presently
               he
               threatned
               such
               as
               these
               with
               death
               ,
               as
               wicked
               doers
               ,
               or
               else
               with
               banishment
               ,
               proscriptions
               ,
               and
               torture
               .
               As
               for
               the
               reliques
               acceptable
               to
               God
               ,
               and
               esteemed
               by
               the
               possessours
               as
               a
               treasure
               ,
               they
               were
               taken
               from
               them
               ,
               from
               thence
               forward
               to
               be
               made
               hatefull
               things
               .
            
          
           
             Again
             ,
             cap.
             48.
             of
             the
             next
             yeere
             .
          
           
             
               If
               one
               getting
               a
               fall
               ,
               or
               being
               in
               pain
               ,
               chanced
               to
               utter
               the
               usuall
               language
               of
               Christians
               ,
               saying
               ,
            
             O
             Mother
             of
             God
             help
             me
             ;
             
               or
               were
               found
               keeping
               vigils
               ,
               &c.
               he
               was
               adjudged
               as
               the
               Emperours
               enemy
               ,
               and
               stiled
            
             Immemorabilis
             ,
             
               unworthy
               of
               memory
               ;
               this
               was
               a
               title
               of
               infamy
               .
            
          
           
             Again
             ,
             cap.
             54.
             
               anno
               regni
            
             31.
             
          
           
             
               If
               one
               were
               found
               to
               have
               a
               relique
               but
               to
               keep
            
             (
             that
             is
             ,
             though
             he
             worshipped
             it
             not
             )
             
               yet
               neverthelesse
               did
            
             Lichanodraco
             
               the
               Emperours
               President
               burn
               it
               ,
               and
               punish
               him
               that
               had
               it
               as
               a
               wicked
               doer
               .
            
             Thus
             farre
             Theophanes
             .
          
        
         
           
             
             Heare
             now
             what
             the
             Author
             of
             the
             Acts
             of
             Monk
             Stephen
             ,
             whom
             the
             same
             Emperour
             made
             one
             of
             their
             Martyrs
             for
             patronizing
             Idols
             ,
             can
             tell
             us
             ;
             heare
             what
             he
             saith
             of
             the
             great
             Councell
             of
             Constantinople
             ,
             held
             in
             this
             Emperours
             reigne
             against
             Images
             .
          
           
             
               O
               Christ
               ,
               how
               should
               I
               not
               admire
               thy
               lenity
               !
               —
               To
               that
               height
               did
               those
               most
               impodent
               tongues
               yet
               :
               further
               break
               
               out
               ,
               that
               they
               were
               not
               afraid
               to
               utter
               that
               monstrous
               and
               impious
               speech
               ,
            
             viz.
             
               that
               the
               very
               Virgin
               Mother
               of
               God
               her selfe
               was
               now
               after
               her
               death
               unavailable
               ,
               and
               no
               use
               to
               be
               made
               of
               her
               ,
               nor
               could
               she
               help
               or
               protect
               any
               one
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             The
             same
             Author
             thus
             deplores
             the
             state
             of
             those
             times
             ,
             abusing
             the
             words
             of
             Psalme
             79.
             
          
           
             
               O
               God
               the
               heathen
               are
               come
               into
               thine
               Inheritance
               ;
               thy
               holy
               Temple
               have
               they
               defiled
               ,
               and
               made
               Hierusalem
               an
               heape
               of
               stones
               ;
               The
               dead
               bodyes
               of
               thy
               servants
               have
               they
               given
               to
               be
               meat
               to
               the
               foules
               of
               the
               aire
               ,
               and
               the
               flesh
               of
               thy
               Saints
               unto
               the
               beasts
               of
               the
               earth
            
             ;
             that
             is
             (
             sayth
             he
             )
             
               the
               venerable
               and
               sacred
               reliques
               of
               the
               Martyrs
               ,
               quas
               partim
               igni
               ,
               partim
               mar●
               ,
               partim
               denique
               (
               ô
               facinus
               orbi
               universo
               damnum
               ferens
               )
               praecipitiis
               tradiderunt
            
             ;
             which
             they
             cast
             partly
             into
             the
             fire
             ,
             partly
             into
             the
             water
             (
             O
             villanous
             act
             wherby
             the
             whole
             world
             is
             damnified
             )
             partly
             threw
             down
             into
             precipices
             .
          
           
             There
             is
             nothing
             yet
             in
             these
             relations
             will
             doe
             any
             man
             hurt
             ,
             by
             engendring
             a
             misconceit
             ,
             especially
             if
             hee
             remember
             the
             tale
             is
             told
             by
             malicious
             Adversaries
             ,
             that
             counterfeit
             reliques
             were
             plentifull
             in
             those
             dayes
             as
             well
             as
             now
             :
             That
             Hezekiah
             brake
             in
             pieces
             that
             brazen
             Serpent
             ,
             made
             by
             Gods
             owne
             Commandement
             ,
             a
             holy
             monument
             and
             type
             of
             Christ
             ,
             when
             it
             was
             once
             abused
             to
             Idolatry
             .
          
           
             After
             the
             death
             of
             this
             Emperour
             Constantine
             ,
             and
             his
             son
             ,
             who
             reigned
             not
             long
             after
             him
             ,
             the
             idolatrous
             faction
             ,
             under
             Constantine
             his
             nephew
             ,
             and
             the
             Queen
             mother
             Irene
             ,
             againe
             for
             some
             yeeres
             prevailed
             ;
             and
             that
             so
             farre
             ,
             as
             to
             pack
             a
             *
             Councell
             ,
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             having
             a
             maine
             stroke
             therein
             ;
             whereby
             the
             former
             Councell
             of
             Constantinople
             was
             condemned
             ,
             and
             the
             worship
             of
             Images
             again
             established
             .
             But
             
               Leo
               Armin●●s
            
             comming
             to
             the
             Empire
             ,
             the
             Orthodox
             part
             again
             prevailed
             ,
             as
             before
             they
             had
             done
             ,
             during
             the
             reigne
             of
             three
             Emperours
             
             more
             .
             The
             last
             Emperour
             of
             the
             opposers
             of
             Idols
             was
             Theophilus
             ,
             the
             last
             Patriarch
             John
             ,
             and
             that
             to
             the
             very
             end
             ;
             the
             Idolatry
             of
             Saint-worship
             was
             opposed
             more
             or
             lesse
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             that
             of
             Images
             ,
             as
             may
             be
             gathered
             out
             of
             that
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
             or
             the
             song
             of
             triumph
             ,
             which
             the
             Greeks
             used
             to
             sing
             the
             first
             Sunday
             in
             Lent
             ,
             for
             a
             memoriall
             of
             their
             last
             and
             finall
             conquest
             of
             the
             opposers
             of
             Images
             ,
             ever
             since
             that
             time
             ,
             where
             in
             the
             hymne
             of
             
               Theodorus
               Ode
            
             8.
             
             I
             find
             this
             verse
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             :
             
               (
               i.
               e.
               )
               The
               sacred
               reliques
               of
               the
               Saints
               ,
               and
               their
               Images
               ,
               were
               not
               at
               all
               to
               be
               worshipped
               ,
               said
               most
               wickedly
               the
               renouncers
               of
               piety
               ,
               the
               barbarous
            
             L●zick
             and
             John.
             This
             Iohn
             is
             that
             Patriarch
             of
             Constantinople
             which
             I
             said
             was
             the
             last
             of
             the
             opposers
             of
             Idols
             ,
             and
             is
             often
             mentioned
             in
             this
             song
             ,
             as
             is
             also
             Lezick
             ,
             but
             what
             he
             was
             in
             uncertaine
             .
             But
             the
             whole
             story
             being
             delivered
             unto
             us
             onely
             by
             profest
             enimies
             ,
             if
             they
             should
             fasten
             no
             worse
             calumnies
             upon
             the
             opposite
             side
             than
             yet
             you
             have
             heard
             ,
             you
             would
             think
             perhaps
             that
             the
             Patrones
             of
             Idols
             then
             were
             farre
             more
             ingenuous
             to
             their
             Adversaries
             ,
             than
             we
             find
             their
             Successours
             now
             .
          
           
             Heare
             therefore
             something
             of
             this
             kind
             also
             ,
             that
             you
             may
             see
             as
             they
             agreed
             with
             us
             in
             the
             same
             profession
             against
             Idols
             ,
             so
             did
             they
             also
             in
             suffering
             the
             like
             slanderous
             lyes
             from
             their
             Adversaries
             ;
             in
             discoursing
             whereof
             I
             shall
             be
             neerer
             to
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             than
             I
             was
             before
             .
          
           
             In
             that
             great
             Councell
             of
             338
             Bishops
             ,
             held
             at
             Constantinople
             against
             Idols
             ,
             under
             
               Constantinus
               Copronymus
            
             ,
             were
             ,
             by
             some
             that
             wished
             well
             to
             Saint-worship
             ,
             though
             they
             consented
             against
             Images
             ,
             these
             two
             Canons
             inserted
             into
             the
             first
             draught
             of
             the
             definition
             of
             the
             Synod
             .
             First
             ,
             if
             any
             one
             should
             not
             confesse
             the
             holy
             and
             ever
             blessed
             Virgin
             Mary
             ,
             truly
             and
             properly
             Deipara
             ,
             (
             the
             Mother
             
             of
             God
             )
             to
             be
             higher
             than
             any
             visible
             or
             invisible
             creature
             ,
             and
             with
             a
             sincere
             faith
             implores
             not
             her
             intercession
             ,
             let
             him
             be
             Anathema
             .
             Secondly
             ,
             If
             any
             one
             shall
             not
             confesse
             all
             the
             Saints
             which
             have
             been
             from
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             world
             untill
             now
             ,
             to
             be
             honourable
             before
             God
             both
             in
             soule
             and
             body
             ,
             or
             shall
             not
             entreat
             their
             prayers
             ,
             let
             him
             be
             Anathema
             :
             which
             ,
             when
             the
             definition
             came
             to
             be
             read
             in
             the
             Councell
             ,
             the
             prevailing
             part
             of
             the
             Fathers
             caused
             to
             be
             blotted
             out
             ;
             a
             whereupon
             that
             slander
             ,
             fastened
             on
             them
             by
             their
             enimies
             ,
             may
             seem
             to
             have
             taken
             the
             first
             hint
             ,
             as
             if
             forsooth
             by
             their
             rejecting
             these
             two
             foisted
             Canons
             ,
             they
             had
             therefore
             denied
             whatsoever
             was
             contained
             in
             them
             ,
             as
             that
             the
             Virgin
             Mary
             was
             Deipara
             ,
             or
             Mother
             of
             God
             ;
             or
             that
             the
             Saints
             were
             to
             be
             honoured
             so
             much
             ,
             as
             with
             that
             honourable
             title
             of
             Saints
             .
          
           
             For
             Cedrenus
             would
             make
             us
             beleeve
             ,
             that
             this
             Emperour
             Constantine
             published
             a
             generall
             law
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             that
             none
             of
             the
             servants
             of
             God
             should
             in
             any
             wise
             be
             called
             Saints
             :
             yea
             that
             such
             of
             their
             reliques
             as
             were
             found
             ,
             should
             be
             despised
             ,
             and
             their
             intercession
             not
             to
             be
             prayed
             for
             ;
             because
             ,
             said
             he
             ,
             they
             can
             availe
             nothing
             .
             The
             prophane
             wretch
             added
             (
             saith
             the
             same
             Authour
             )
             Let
             no
             man
             pray
             for
             the
             intercession
             ,
             no
             not
             of
             Mary
             ,
             for
             she
             can
             doe
             him
             no
             good
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ;
             moreover
             ,
             that
             she
             could
             not
             be
             called
             Deipara
             ,
             the
             Mother
             of
             God.
             Then
             he
             tels
             us
             ,
             that
             hee
             compared
             the
             blessed
             Virgin
             ,
             after
             she
             was
             delivered
             of
             Christ
             ,
             to
             a
             purse
             of
             gold
             ,
             after
             it
             is
             emptied
             of
             the
             gold
             that
             was
             once
             in
             it
             .
             The
             same
             with
             Cedrenus
             ,
             almost
             word
             for
             word
             ,
             hath
             Suidas
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             one
             may
             seem
             to
             have
             been
             transcribed
             out
             of
             the
             other
             .
          
           
             But
             Theosterictus
             ,
             one
             who
             lived
             at
             the
             same
             time
             ,
             
             whereas
             Cedrenus
             was
             more
             than
             240
             yeeres
             after
             ,
             seemes
             much
             more
             ingenuous
             ,
             for
             in
             his
             funerall
             Oration
             upon
             Nicetas
             ,
             a
             a
             Confessour
             of
             those
             times
             ,
             whose
             Disciple
             
             he
             was
             ,
             relating
             otherwise
             the
             same
             things
             that
             Cedrenus
             and
             Suidas
             doth
             ;
             yet
             when
             he
             comes
             to
             the
             story
             of
             the
             purse
             ,
             he
             brings
             in
             the
             Emperor
             ,
             expresly
             calling
             the
             Virgin
             
               Mary
               ,
               Deipara
            
             ;
             but
             finds
             fault
             ,
             that
             he
             would
             not
             vouchsafe
             her
             the
             name
             
               Saint
               .
               Ita
               Deiparen●
               Maria
            
             (
             
             saith
             he
             )
             
               neque
               enim
               sanctam
               dignabatur
               nominare
               illam
            
             (
             saith
             
               Theosterictus
               )
               indignus
               ille
               ;
               quo
               tempore
               Christum
               in
               se
               habebat
               ,
               valdè
               honoranda
               illa
               erat
               ;
               ex
               quo
               autem
               tempore
               illum
               peperit
               ,
               nihil
               differebat
               à
               reliquis
               .
            
             Indeed
             it
             seemes
             at
             the
             wiping
             out
             of
             these
             fore-mentioned
             Canons
             ,
             there
             passed
             something
             in
             the
             Councell
             (
             as
             is
             wont
             in
             such
             disputes
             )
             concerning
             an
             indifference
             or
             lawfulnesse
             in
             ordinary
             speech
             to
             mention
             such
             places
             ,
             as
             were
             dedicated
             to
             the
             memory
             of
             Saints
             ,
             without
             the
             addition
             of
             the
             name
             Saint
             .
             For
             I
             find
             that
             Stephen
             the
             Monk
             ,
             afterward
             forsooth
             a
             Martyr
             ,
             at
             what
             time
             the
             Emperour
             sent
             some
             of
             the
             Bishops
             and
             others
             unto
             him
             ,
             to
             require
             his
             subscription
             to
             the
             decree
             of
             the
             Councell
             ,
             thus
             expostulates
             with
             them
             :
             
               Did
               yee
               not
            
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             
               discard
               that
               adjective
            
             Saint
             
               from
               all
               the
               Just
               ,
               from
               all
               the
               Apostles
               ,
               from
               the
               Prophets
               ,
               from
               the
               Prophets
               ,
               Martyrs
               ,
               and
               other
               godly
               men
               ?
               for
               it
               was
               bravely
               decreed
               by
               you
               ,
               That
               when
               any
               one
               were
               going
               to
               any
               of
               these
               ,
               and
               were
               asked
               whither
               he
               went
               ,
               he
               should
               answer
               ,
               to
               the
               Apostles
               ,
               to
               the
               fourty
               Martyrs
               ;
               or
               being
               asked
               whence
               he
               came
               ,
               he
               should
               in
               like
               manner
               say
               ,
               From
               the
               Temple
               of
               Martyr
            
             Theodore
             ,
             
               or
               from
               the
               Temple
               of
               the
               Martyr
            
             George
             .
          
           
             But
             Theosterictus
             tells
             the
             same
             thing
             of
             the
             Emperour
             Constantine
             himselfe
             .
             
               Sanctos
               Martyres
            
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             
               quantum
               in
               ipso
               erat
               ,
               honore
               privavit
               ,
               cum
               praeceperit
               illos
               non
               esse
               Sanctos
               appellandos
               ;
               sed
               simplicitèr
               nominari
               Apostolos
               ,
               quadraginta
               Martyres
               ,
            
             Theodorum
             ,
             Georgium
             ,
             
               &
               alios
               similitèr
            
             :
             he
             deprived
             ,
             as
             much
             as
             in
             him
             lay
             ,
             the
             holy
             Martyrs
             of
             honour
             ,
             in
             that
             he
             commanded
             ,
             they
             should
             not
             be
             stiled
             Saints
             ,
             but
             simply
             named
             the
             fourty
             Martyrs
             ,
             
               Theodore
               ,
               George
            
             ,
             &c.
             
             Whereby
             it
             appeares
             ,
             that
             this
             law
             
             (
             whatsoever
             it
             was
             that
             these
             Authors
             charge
             the
             Emperour
             with
             )
             was
             something
             which
             proceeded
             from
             the
             Councell
             it self
             ,
             as
             Monk
             Stephen
             even
             now
             charged
             them
             .
             Besides
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             something
             onely
             about
             the
             calling
             of
             places
             dedicated
             to
             Saints
             ,
             though
             our
             Authors
             (
             as
             Calumniators
             use
             )
             tell
             it
             of
             Saints
             at
             large
             .
          
           
             Lastly
             ,
             it
             seemes
             to
             have
             growne
             upon
             some
             question
             ,
             how
             farre
             ,
             and
             in
             what
             kind
             ,
             Saints
             were
             to
             be
             honored
             ,
             which
             was
             occasioned
             by
             the
             wiping
             out
             of
             those
             Canons
             afore-mentioned
             .
          
           
             
               Johannes
               Curopalata
            
             and
             Cedrenus
             relate
             ,
             that
             
               Michael
               Balbus
            
             ,
             the
             last
             save
             one
             of
             the
             Emperours
             that
             opposed
             Idols
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             (
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             )
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ;
             ordained
             ,
             that
             the
             word
             Saint
             should
             not
             be
             set
             upon
             any
             Images
             wheresoever
             they
             were
             painted
             (
             for
             this
             was
             ,
             and
             as
             some
             say
             *
             is
             yet
             ,
             the
             fashion
             of
             the
             Greeks
             ,
             to
             add
             the
             names
             of
             the
             Saints
             to
             the
             Images
             that
             represent
             them
             )
             now
             if
             any
             such
             thing
             as
             this
             were
             done
             ,
             or
             discoursed
             of
             ,
             in
             the
             dayes
             of
             Constantinus
             ,
             whom
             they
             call
             Copronimus
             ,
             you
             may
             easily
             ghesse
             what
             fuell
             it
             might
             adde
             to
             the
             fire
             of
             that
             slander
             we
             speak
             of
             .
          
           
             But
             why
             should
             we
             trouble
             our selves
             any
             longer
             to
             find
             out
             the
             originall
             of
             that
             ,
             which
             we
             are
             certain
             was
             a
             notorious
             lie
             ?
             for
             it
             is
             apparent
             in
             the
             definition
             of
             the
             Councell
             it selfe
             ,
             which
             is
             thus
             calumniously
             charged
             ,
             that
             they
             both
             give
             the
             title
             of
             Saints
             often
             to
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             Fathers
             ,
             and
             others
             ,
             and
             of
             Deipara
             to
             the
             blessed
             Virgin.
             I
             shall
             not
             need
             to
             recount
             every
             place
             where
             they
             give
             the
             title
             of
             Saint
             to
             particulars
             ;
             heare
             but
             what
             they
             say
             in
             generall
             :
             
               Sancti
               qui
               Deo
               placuerunt
               ,
               &
               ab
               ipso
               sunt
               ,
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               dignitate
               sanctitatis
               honorati
               vivunt
               semper
               Deo
               ,
               licèt
               hinc
               migraverunt
               :
            
             the
             Saints
             which
             pleased
             God
             ,
             and
             are
             by
             him
             honoured
             with
             the
             dignity
             of
             Saint-ship
             ,
             though
             they
             be
             departed
             hence
             ,
             yet
             to
             God
             they
             live
             alwayes
             .
             Againe
             ,
             
               N●fas
               est
               Christianis
               ,
               
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               D●monum
               cultricum
               Gentium
               moribus
               uti
               ,
               &
               Sanct●s
               qui
               tali
               &
               tantâ
               gratiâ
               resplendebunt
               (
               sc.
               conregnar●
               cum
               Christo
               ,
               &
               judicare
               orbem
               ●errarum
               ,
               &
               conformes
               fieri
               gloria
               ipsius
               )
               in
               ingloriâ
               &
               mortuâ
               materiâ
               ,
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               contumeliâ
               afficere
            
             :
             It
             is
             unlawfull
             for
             Christians
             to
             use
             the
             fashions
             of
             Gentiles
             ,
             who
             worshipped
             Daemons
             or
             Devils
             ;
             and
             in
             a
             base
             and
             livelesse
             matter
             (
             they
             meane
             Images
             )
             to
             dishonour
             the
             Saints
             ,
             who
             shall
             one
             day
             shine
             ,
             in
             such
             and
             so
             great
             grace
             and
             glory
             ,
             viz.
             to
             reigne
             with
             Christ
             ,
             and
             to
             judge
             the
             world
             ,
             and
             to
             be
             made
             like
             to
             his
             glory
             ,
             as
             they
             said
             a
             little
             before
             ,
             
               Concil
               .
               Nicen.
            
             2.
             
             Art.
             6.
             
             Tom.
             4.
             
          
           
             As
             for
             the
             other
             part
             of
             the
             calumny
             ,
             about
             stiling
             the
             the
             Virgin
             
               Mary
               ,
               Deipara
            
             ,
             heare
             not
             onely
             what
             they
             practised
             ,
             but
             what
             they
             expresly
             decreed
             ,
             
               ibid
               ▪
               Tom.
            
             6.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             :
             If
             any
             one
             shall
             not
             confesse
             God
             to
             be
             truly
             Emmanuel
             ,
             and
             therefore
             the
             holy
             Virgin
             to
             bee
             Deipara
             ,
             the
             Mother
             of
             God
             ,
             let
             him
             bee
             Anath●ma
             .
             Here
             the
             blessed
             Virgin
             hath
             both
             the
             name
             of
             Saint
             (
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             )
             and
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               mother
               of
               God
            
             given
             her
             .
             All
             this
             you
             shall
             find
             in
             the
             sixth
             act
             of
             the
             idolatrous
             Councell
             of
             Nice
             ,
             where
             the
             enimies
             ,
             while
             they
             would
             confute
             the
             definition
             of
             the
             Synod
             of
             Canstantinople
             ,
             have
             preserved
             it
             ,
             which
             else
             had
             utterly
             perished
             ▪
             as
             the
             Acts
             thereof
             have
             done
             .
          
           
             Now
             judge
             whether
             Constantine
             and
             his
             Councell
             were
             guilty
             or
             not
             ,
             of
             what
             the
             idolatrous
             faction
             charged
             them
             with
             .
             We
             may
             wonder
             the
             lesse
             at
             this
             notorious
             impudency
             of
             lying
             companions
             ,
             seeing
             we
             have
             like
             experience
             of
             such
             calumnies
             fastened
             upon
             our selves
             this
             day
             ;
             though
             there
             be
             so
             many
             thousand
             eyes
             and
             eares
             ,
             and
             writings
             too
             ,
             which
             confute
             them
             .
          
           
             And
             thus
             you
             have
             seen
             what
             manner
             of
             times
             they
             were
             ,
             about
             the
             end
             of
             which
             our
             
               Simeon
               Metaphras●es
            
             lived
             .
             Was
             it
             not
             high
             time
             for
             him
             thinke
             you
             ,
             and
             those
             
             hands
             to
             which
             hee
             was
             beholding
             (
             for
             I
             will
             not
             charge
             him
             with
             all
             )
             to
             ply
             the
             old
             craft
             ,
             and
             reenforce
             the
             Legends
             with
             new
             lyes
             ,
             when
             the
             credit
             of
             Saint-worship
             lay
             thus
             a
             bleeding
             ?
             It
             is
             not
             credible
             they
             would
             bee
             so
             much
             wanting
             to
             themselves
             .
             And
             it
             is
             as
             apparent
             ,
             that
             those
             tales
             of
             the
             new
             strain
             ,
             which
             wee
             had
             out
             of
             Simeon
             ,
             were
             coined
             in
             this
             age
             ,
             and
             not
             before
             ;
             For
             if
             any
             such
             thing
             had
             been
             knowen
             ,
             or
             delivered
             from
             elder
             times
             ,
             how
             came
             it
             to
             passe
             ,
             no
             notice
             therof
             was
             given
             us
             by
             any
             writer
             of
             Ecclesiasticall
             story
             ,
             by
             any
             father
             ,
             by
             any
             Compiler
             or
             forger
             of
             Martyrs
             lives
             and
             miracles
             till
             now
             ?
             Certainly
             so
             miraculous
             and
             wonderfull
             things
             ,
             as
             voyces
             from
             heaven
             ,
             and
             Christ
             descending
             thence
             in
             a
             cloud
             ,
             and
             the
             like
             ,
             had
             been
             worth
             the
             telling
             :
             But
             alas
             ,
             they
             could
             speak
             but
             little
             of
             these
             Martyrs
             ,
             save
             only
             the
             names
             and
             times
             of
             their
             sufferings
             .
             And
             thus
             I
             end
             my
             digr●ssion
             ,
             which
             yet
             I
             hope
             hath
             not
             been
             altogether
             impertinent
             to
             the
             present
             argument
             .
          
           
             The
             last
             particular
             of
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               the
               Hypocrisy
               of
               lyars
            
             I
             made
             to
             bee
             
               counterfeit
               writings
            
             ,
             under
             the
             names
             of
             the
             first
             and
             best
             Antiquity
             :
             S.
             Pet●rs
             liturgy
             ;
             the
             Liturgy
             of
             S.
             
               Iames
               ;
               Mathew
               ;
               Mark
            
             ;
             the
             Apostles
             Councell
             at
             Antioch
             ;
             foisted
             workes
             under
             the
             names
             of
             
               Austin
               ,
               Origen
               ,
               Cyprian
               ,
               Athanaesius
               and
               others
            
             :
             Through
             which
             wee
             need
             not
             doubt
             ,
             but
             the
             doctrine
             of
             Daemons
             was
             promoted
             ,
             when
             we
             see
             some
             not
             ashamed
             still
             to
             maintain
             it
             ▪
             by
             these
             counterfeit
             authorityes
             .
          
           
             Thus
             you
             see
             ,
             how
             the
             first-borne
             and
             the
             most
             ancient
             part
             of
             the
             doctrine
             of
             Daemons
             ,
             the
             Deifying
             of
             Saints
             &
             Martyrs
             was
             advanced
             by
             the
             hypocrisy
             of
             liars
             .
             The
             same
             you
             shall
             find
             to
             have
             bin
             verified
             also
             in
             the
             advancing
             of
             the
             
               next-born
               D●mon-changling
               Image-worship
            
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             third
             ,
             the
             Idolatry
             of
             the
             Masse-God
             ,
             all
             brought
             in
             ,
             and
             established
             by
             the
             means
             and
             wayes
             aforesaid
             .
             I
             need
             not
             spend
             time
             in
             Historicall
             allegations
             ,
             they
             are
             well
             enough
             knowne
             ;
             and
             
               primu●
               in
               unoquoque
               genere
               est
               mensura
               
               
               
               
               
               consequentium
               .
            
             By
             that
             I
             spake
             of
             the
             first
             ,
             you
             may
             Judge
             of
             those
             which
             follow
             ;
             yet
             for
             Images
             I
             will
             tell
             you
             a
             story
             or
             two
             for
             a
             tast
             :
             Bale
             our
             Country-man
             (
             
               Script
               .
               Illust.
               Britan
               ,
               Cent.
            
             11.
             ca.
             91.99
             .
             )
             relates
             ,
             that
             about
             the
             yeare
             712
             ,
             one
             Egwin
             of
             Worcester
             published
             in
             writing
             certain
             Revelations
             ,
             yea
             expresse
             Visions
             he
             had
             seen
             ,
             wherin
             hee
             was
             enjoyned
             to
             set
             in
             his
             Diocesse
             of
             Worcester
             the
             Image
             of
             the
             blessed
             Virgin
             ,
             for
             the
             people
             to
             worship
             ;
             which
             Pope
             Constantine
             the
             first
             having
             made
             him
             confirme
             by
             oath
             ,
             not
             only
             ratifyed
             by
             his
             Bull
             ;
             but
             caused
             Brithwald
             the
             Arch-Bishop
             to
             hold
             a
             Councell
             of
             the
             whole
             Clergy
             at
             London
             ,
             to
             commend
             them
             to
             the
             people
             .
          
           
             In
             that
             Idolatrous
             Councell
             of
             the
             second
             of
             Nice
             ,
             one
             of
             their
             proofes
             ,
             among
             many
             the
             like
             for
             worshipping
             of
             Images
             ,
             is
             a
             tale
             quoted
             out
             of
             I
             know
             not
             what
             Sophronius
             ,
             of
             a
             certain
             Recluse
             ,
             who
             using
             to
             worship
             an
             Image
             of
             the
             Virgin
             Mary
             ,
             holding
             Christ
             in
             her
             armes
             ,
             had
             been
             a
             long
             time
             tempted
             by
             the
             divell
             to
             fornication
             ;
             wherat
             on
             a
             time
             the
             old
             man
             being
             much
             aggrieved
             ,
             the
             Devill
             visibly
             appearing
             told
             him
             in
             plaine
             termes
             (
             but
             under
             an
             oath
             of
             secrecy
             )
             that
             hee
             would
             never
             cease
             to
             vex
             him
             ,
             untill
             he
             left
             worshipping
             the
             Image
             of
             the
             blessed
             Virgin.
             The
             Monke
             notwithstanding
             hee
             had
             made
             him
             sweare
             by
             the
             most
             high
             ,
             hee
             should
             tell
             no
             body
             ,
             yet
             acquaints
             one
             
               Abbot
               Theodore
            
             with
             the
             businesse
             ,
             who
             not
             only
             allowes
             of
             his
             perjury
             in
             revealing
             it
             ,
             but
             gives
             him
             this
             ghostly
             resolution
             :
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             It
             were
             better
             he
             frequented
             all
             the
             Stewes
             in
             the
             City
             ,
             than
             not
             to
             worship
             Christ
             and
             his
             mother
             ,
             in
             an
             Image
             .
             I
             am
             afraid
             some
             of
             their
             Monk
             successours
             still
             observe
             this
             wholesome
             counsell
             .
          
           
             I
             must
             tell
             you
             also
             some
             of
             the
             miracles
             and
             lyes
             for
             
             laying
             the
             foundation
             of
             Transubstantiation
             ,
             and
             thence
             advancing
             the
             Idoll
             of
             the
             Masse
             .
             A
             certaine
             Monke
             reports
             ,
             that
             hee
             saw
             Jesus
             Christ
             in
             forme
             of
             a
             child
             sitting
             upon
             the
             Altar
             .
             Another
             sayth
             ,
             yea
             more
             then
             one
             ,
             that
             Wittikind
             King
             of
             the
             Saxons
             entring
             disguised
             into
             a
             Church
             ,
             and
             diligently
             observing
             the
             Christians
             fashion
             of
             receiving
             the
             Communion
             ,
             saw
             them
             put
             a
             little
             pretty
             smiling
             boy
             into
             their
             mouths
             .
             These
             wonders
             and
             others
             of
             the
             like
             apparitions
             of
             flesh
             and
             blood
             began
             not
             ,
             till
             about
             the
             end
             of
             the
             800
             yeares
             .
             But
             that
             they
             might
             seeme
             ancienter
             ,
             
               Simeon
               Metaphrastes
            
             hath
             a
             forged
             Legend
             of
             Arsenius
             the
             Hermite
             ;
             and
             some
             body
             counterfeited
             the
             life
             of
             Saint
             Basil
             ,
             under
             the
             name
             of
             Amphilochius
             his
             companion
             ,
             which
             now
             they
             begin
             to
             be
             ashamed
             of
             .
             And
             for
             feare
             the
             people
             might
             suspect
             that
             these
             were
             illusions
             ,
             they
             keepe
             yet
             some
             of
             the
             flesh
             and
             blood
             which
             was
             thus
             transubstantiated
             ,
             for
             a
             monument
             ,
             in
             many
             Churches
             .
             To
             these
             apparitions
             ,
             to
             make
             all
             compleat
             ,
             they
             tell
             us
             of
             a
             hive
             of
             Bees
             seen
             in
             Saint
             Gervais
             his
             Monastery
             in
             Paris
             ,
             which
             built
             a
             Chappell
             of
             wax
             in
             honour
             of
             the
             Host
             ,
             which
             some
             body
             put
             into
             the
             hive
             ;
             and
             a
             miracle
             of
             an
             Asse
             that
             left
             his
             provender
             to
             worship
             the
             Host
             ;
             and
             many
             other
             the
             like
             :
             but
             I
             have
             staied
             too
             long
             amongst
             them
             ,
             and
             therefore
             let
             here
             be
             the
             conclusion
             of
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             that
             we
             may
             passe
             on
             to
             that
             is
             yet
             behind
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             I
             come
             now
             to
             the
             last
             description
             of
             the
             meanes
             whereby
             the
             doctrine
             of
             Daemons
             was
             to
             be
             advanced
             ,
             viz.
             through
             the
             hypocrisie
             of
             such
             as
             forbid
             marriage
             ,
             and
             command
             to
             abstaine
             from
             meats
             .
             Who
             are
             these
             ?
             The
             wonderfull
             correspondence
             of
             the
             event
             makes
             me
             verily
             
             beleeve
             ,
             that
             the
             Holy
             Ghost
             intended
             here
             (
             at
             least
             chiefly
             )
             to
             decipher
             unto
             us
             Monks
             ,
             and
             Doctors
             of
             Monkery
             ,
             by
             two
             such
             marks
             ,
             as
             ar●
             the
             chiefe
             points
             and
             grounds
             of
             that
             singularity
             of
             life
             .
             For
             prohibition
             of
             marriage
             ,
             and
             difference
             of
             meats
             are
             inseparable
             characters
             of
             Monasticall
             profession
             ,
             and
             goe
             common
             to
             all
             that
             crew
             of
             hypocrites
             ,
             whether
             solivagant
             Hermites
             ,
             or
             Anchorites
             which
             live
             alone
             ,
             or
             Coenobites
             which
             lived
             in
             society
             .
             And
             if
             we
             take
             them
             joyned
             together
             ,
             as
             our
             Apostle
             doth
             ,
             I
             think
             they
             can
             befit
             no
             other
             kind
             of
             men
             by
             way
             of
             rule
             and
             precept
             ,
             but
             these
             alone
             .
             'T
             is
             true
             ,
             all
             Antichrists
             Priests
             are
             forbidden
             marriage
             ,
             generally
             and
             absolutely
             ;
             but
             meats
             they
             are
             not
             ,
             save
             onely
             upon
             certaine
             dayes
             and
             times
             ,
             which
             is
             not
             their
             case
             alone
             ,
             but
             the
             people
             also
             partake
             with
             them
             in
             the
             like
             restraint
             .
             But
             Monks
             are
             bound
             by
             the
             vowed
             rule
             of
             their
             profession
             ,
             to
             abstain
             from
             both
             absolutely
             and
             perpetually
             .
             Concerning
             the
             first
             heare
             S.
             Chrisostome
             speak
             ;
             hom
             .
             7
             
               in
               Math.
               Nobis
               &
               Monachis
            
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             
               omnia
               mandata
               Dei
               sunt
               communia
               ,
               praeter
               connubium
            
             :
             all
             the
             commandments
             of
             God
             are
             common
             to
             us
             ,
             with
             Monks
             ,
             besides
             marriage
             .
             Wherefore
             in
             the
             Councell
             of
             Chalcedon
             is
             an
             expresse
             Canon
             ,
             cap.
             16.
             
             
               Vt
               nec
               Deo
               dicata
               Virgo
               ,
               nec
               Monachus
               nubant
            
             :
             that
             no
             Nun
             or
             Monk
             should
             marry
             ,
             (
             
               i.
               e.
            
             )
             they
             might
             not
             forsake
             their
             profession
             .
          
           
             For
             the
             second
             ,
             the
             abstaining
             from
             meats
             ,
             Saint
             Bennet
             can
             tell
             us
             best
             ,
             who
             is
             the
             father
             and
             founder
             of
             welnigh
             all
             the
             Monks
             of
             the
             West
             .
             His
             rule
             ,
             which
             they
             all
             bind
             themselves
             to
             observe
             ,
             ●aith
             ;
             
               à
               carnibus
               omnes
               abstineant
            
             ,
             let
             all
             abstaine
             from
             flesh
             .
             Again
             ,
             
               Carnium
               etiam
               quadrupedum
               omninò
               ab
               omnibus
               abstineatur
               comestio
               :
            
             let
             all
             abstaine
             together
             from
             the
             eating
             of
             flesh
             of
             foure
             footed
             beasts
             .
             Hence
             is
             that
             decree
             of
             Bishop
             Fructuosus
             in
             
               Gratian
               dist
            
             .
             5.
             
             
               Carnem
               cuiquam
               Monach●
               nec
               gustandi
               ,
               nec
               sumendi
               est
               concessa
               licentia
            
             :
             no
             Monk
             hath
             leave
             granted
             him
             to
             take
             ,
             or
             so
             much
             as
             to
             taste
             a
             peece
             of
             flesh
             .
             
             And
             these
             were
             the
             two
             principall
             observations
             of
             the
             first
             Monks
             ,
             before
             they
             came
             to
             be
             gathered
             into
             a
             society
             of
             a
             common
             life
             ,
             under
             certain
             set
             rules
             .
             
               Paulus
               Thebaus
            
             the
             first
             pattern
             of
             this
             kind
             of
             life
             ,
             abstained
             as
             from
             marriage
             (
             whereof
             there
             is
             no
             question
             )
             so
             from
             all
             meats
             ,
             save
             bread
             and
             dates
             .
             Anthony
             the
             next
             eate
             nought
             but
             bread
             and
             salt
             ,
             and
             both
             drank
             no
             other
             drink
             but
             water
             .
             Epiphanius
             in
             his
             Anchorato
             tels
             us
             of
             differing
             observations
             in
             this
             kind
             .
             Some
             eat
             no
             flesh
             ,
             but
             fish
             ;
             some
             neither
             of
             both
             ,
             but
             fruits
             and
             hearbs
             :
             some
             eat
             flying
             creatures
             ,
             but
             abstained
             from
             all
             besides
             .
             But
             if
             you
             will
             take
             meats
             in
             this
             place
             in
             a
             larger
             sense
             ,
             you
             shall
             have
             a
             full
             definition
             of
             Monkery
             ,
             and
             take
             in
             that
             other
             Monasticall
             principle
             of
             renouncing
             possessions
             ,
             &
             having
             no
             propriety
             in
             any
             thing
             ,
             which
             they
             account
             the
             second
             fundamentall
             principle
             ,
             next
             to
             the
             vow
             of
             chastity
             or
             single
             life
             .
             Now
             may
             not
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             meats
             ,
             be
             expounded
             in
             this
             sense
             ?
             We
             know
             the
             word
             (
             Bread
             )
             in
             Scripture
             signifies
             all
             thing
             needfull
             for
             the
             maintenance
             of
             life
             ;
             
               omnia
               vi●ae
               subsidia
            
             ;
             and
             therefore
             we
             ask
             them
             a●l
             in
             the
             Lords
             prayer
             under
             that
             name
             ,
             
               Give
               us
               this
               day
               our
               daily
               bread
               .
            
             Marke
             the
             words
             of
             David
             to
             Ziba
             ,
             2
             Sam.
             9.
             
             
               Thou
               and
               thy
               sonnes
               ,
               and
               thy
               servants
               ,
               shall
               till
               the
               land
               for
               him
            
             (
             Mephibosheth
             )
             
               and
               shalt
               bring
               in
               the
               fruits
               ,
               that
               thy
               masters
               sonne
               may
               have
            
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             food
             
               to
               eat
            
             .
             Here
             bread
             ,
             or
             food
             ,
             is
             taken
             for
             
               Mephibosheths
               whole
               maintenance
            
             ,
             the
             whole
             profit
             of
             the
             land
             which
             Ziba
             tils
             .
             Matth.
             10.9.10
             .
             
               Provide
               neither
               gold
               ,
               nor
               silver
               ,
               nor
               brasse
               in
               your
               purses
               ,
               nor
               scrip
               for
               your
               journey
               ,
               neither
               coats
               ,
               nor
               shoes
               ,
               nor
               yet
               staves
               ;
               for
               the
               workman
               is
               worthy
            
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Here
             gold
             ,
             silver
             ,
             brasse
             ,
             cloaths
             ,
             and
             staves
             ,
             and
             all
             come
             under
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             meat
             .
             In
             stead
             whereof
             Saint
             
               Luke
               chap.
            
             10.
             ver
             .
             7.
             putteth
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             his
             
               hire
               .
               Pro.
            
             30.8
             .
             Agur
             saith
             ,
             
               Give
               me
               neither
               poverty
               nor
               riches
               ,
               feed
               me
               with
            
             food
             
               convenient
               for
               me
            
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             By
             all
             which
             appeares
             ,
             that
             food
             and
             meat
             in
             
             Scripture
             is
             often
             taken
             for
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             as
             Saint
             James
             speakes
             cap.
             2.
             ver
             .
             16.
             for
             all
             provision
             of
             things
             for
             the
             use
             of
             the
             body
             ,
             and
             this
             life
             ;
             maintenance
             ,
             revenue
             ,
             estate
             ,
             possession
             ▪
             why
             may
             not
             then
             
               abstaining
               from
               meats
            
             in
             this
             Prophesie
             meane
             or
             include
             abstaining
             from
             possessions
             ,
             
               votum
               paupertatis
            
             ,
             the
             vow
             of
             poverty
             ,
             and
             renouncing
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             as
             the
             hypocrites
             call
             it
             ?
             to
             which
             the
             following
             words
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             are
             every
             way
             as
             pliable
             as
             to
             the
             stricter
             sense
             ,
             and
             may
             be
             read
             thus
             :
             
               which
               God
               hath
               created
               to
               be
               enjoyed
               with
               thankesgiving
               of
               them
               which
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             Let
             us
             heare
             
               S.
               Bennets
            
             rule
             speak
             for
             all·
             
               Nemo
               aliquid
               proprium
               habeat
               ,
               nullam
               omnino
               rem
               ,
               neque
               codicem
               ,
               neque
               tabulas
               ,
               neque
               graphiarium
               ,
               sed
               nihil
               omnino
            
             :
             Let
             no
             man
             have
             any
             thing
             proper
             or
             as
             his
             own
             ,
             no
             kind
             of
             thing
             ,
             neither
             book
             ,
             nor
             writing
             ,
             nor
             Inkehorne
             ,
             nor
             any
             thing
             at
             all
             .
             And
             those
             who
             had
             once
             imposed
             upon
             themselves
             this
             law
             ,
             were
             prohibited
             forever
             to
             returne
             to
             the
             world
             againe
             .
             
               Monachis
               non
               licere
               ad
               s●culum
               redire
               ,
               saith
               the
            
             Canon
             of
             a
             great
             Councell
             .
             Heare
             a
             story
             of
             S.
             
               Hierome
               Epist.
               ad
               Eustochium
            
             .
             A
             certain
             Monke
             being
             dead
             was
             found
             to
             have
             been
             so
             good
             an
             husband
             ,
             as
             to
             have
             had
             lying
             by
             him
             one
             hundred
             Solidi
             ,
             which
             hee
             had
             gotten
             by
             weaving
             of
             linnen
             ;
             hereupon
             great
             doubt
             there
             was
             ,
             what
             it
             should
             be
             done
             withall
             ,
             whether
             given
             to
             the
             poore
             ,
             to
             the
             Church
             ,
             or
             to
             what
             use
             .
             But
             Pambo
             ,
             and
             Isidorus
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             Fathers
             (
             of
             the
             Monks
             )
             laid
             their
             heads
             together
             ,
             decreed
             it
             should
             be
             buried
             with
             him
             ,
             with
             this
             blessing
             ;
             
               Pecunia
               tua
               sit
               tecum
               in
               perditionem
            
             ;
             thy
             money
             perish
             together
             with
             thee
             .
             The
             like
             sentence
             gave
             Gregory
             the
             great
             against
             Justus
             a
             Monk
             ,
             for
             the
             like
             fault
             ,
             Dial.
             ●
             .
             c.
             55.
             
          
           
             I
             conclude
             therefore
             ,
             that
             these
             words
             ,
             are
             a
             description
             of
             Monkery
             by
             such
             notes
             as
             are
             fundamentall
             ,
             which
             way
             soever
             wee
             take
             them
             ,
             either
             containing
             single
             life
             and
             
               discrimen
               ciborum
            
             ,
             the
             differencing
             of
             meats
             ,
             or
             the
             
             two
             vowes
             of
             chastity
             and
             poverty
             ,
             or
             all
             three
             of
             them
             ,
             Chastity
             ,
             Poverty
             ,
             and
             abstaining
             from
             meats
             .
             As
             for
             that
             other
             vow
             of
             obedience
             ,
             it
             was
             not
             from
             the
             beginning
             ,
             nor
             common
             to
             all
             ;
             not
             to
             Hermites
             and
             Anchorites
             ,
             but
             such
             as
             lived
             in
             common
             under
             an
             head
             .
             And
             these
             are
             the
             men
             through
             whose
             hypocrisy
             ,
             and
             by
             whose
             meanes
             the
             doctrine
             of
             Daemons
             should
             be
             brought
             in
             ,
             and
             advanced
             among
             Christians
             in
             the
             latter
             times
             .
          
           
             Now
             let
             us
             see
             and
             behold
             with
             admiration
             the
             truth
             of
             this
             part
             also
             of
             the
             prophesy
             .
             Where
             first
             observe
             that
             this
             singular
             kind
             of
             life
             began
             even
             just
             at
             the
             time
             when
             the
             doctrine
             of
             Daemons
             was
             to
             enter
             .
             For
             
               Paulus
               Thebaeus
            
             ,
             and
             Anthony
             ,
             the
             first
             patterns
             thereof
             ,
             died
             ,
             the
             former
             in
             the
             reigne
             of
             Constantine
             ,
             the
             latter
             a
             little
             before
             the
             yeere
             360
             ;
             whence
             ,
             or
             neere
             unto
             which
             time
             ,
             we
             began
             our
             reckoning
             before
             of
             the
             first
             entrance
             of
             Saint-worship
             into
             the
             Church
             .
             About
             that
             time
             (
             Monks
             till
             then
             having
             been
             confined
             to
             
               Egypt
               )
               Hilarion
            
             brought
             them
             into
             Syria
             ,
             and
             presently
             Saint
             Basil
             gave
             them
             a
             certain
             rule
             to
             live
             together
             in
             forme
             of
             a
             Polity
             ;
             and
             with
             the
             assistance
             of
             his
             brother
             
               Gregory
               Nyssen
            
             and
             
               Gregory
               Nazianzen
            
             (
             who
             all
             entred
             this
             new
             kind
             of
             life
             )
             dispersed
             them
             over
             all
             Asia
             amd
             Greece
             ;
             whose
             encrease
             was
             so
             wonderfull
             ,
             that
             almost
             in
             an
             instant
             they
             filled
             the
             world
             ,
             and
             their
             esteeme
             was
             so
             great
             ,
             that
             there
             was
             scarce
             a
             man
             of
             note
             ,
             but
             took
             upon
             him
             this
             kind
             of
             life
             .
          
           
             Though
             therefore
             it
             be
             most
             true
             ,
             that
             our
             Apostles
             prophecy
             will
             bee
             verified
             ,
             whichsoever
             of
             the
             two
             ,
             either
             such
             as
             themselves
             entred
             the
             restraint
             of
             a
             Monastick
             life
             ,
             or
             those
             who
             approved
             ,
             taught
             ,
             &
             maintained
             the
             holinesse
             of
             tht
             profession
             (
             as
             the
             rest
             did
             )
             were
             the
             ring-leaders
             and
             Foster-fathers
             of
             this
             defection
             ;
             (
             for
             both
             come
             within
             the
             verge
             of
             such
             as
             forbid
             marriage
             ,
             and
             command
             to
             abstain
             from
             meats
             )
             yet
             wee
             will
             not
             content
             ourselves
             with
             so
             loose
             an
             application
             ,
             but
             see
             what
             an
             hand
             Monks
             and
             Friars
             themselves
             (
             chiefly
             I
             suppose
             
             intended
             by
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             )
             had
             in
             this
             businesse
             .
          
           
             And
             first
             in
             the
             doctrin
             of
             Daemons
             ,
             adoring
             of
             Reliques
             ,
             and
             Invocation
             of
             Saints
             :
             where
             that
             which
             I
             first
             speak
             of
             shall
             be
             in
             the
             words
             of
             Chemnitius
             ,
             lest
             some
             more
             tender
             of
             the
             honour
             of
             our
             fathers
             upon
             earth
             ,
             than
             of
             the
             glory
             of
             our
             father
             in
             heaven
             ,
             might
             take
             exception
             .
             Heare
             therefore
             not
             mee
             ,
             but
             Chemnitius
             in
             his
             
               examen
               Concilii
               Tridentini
            
             :
             About
             the
             yeare
             of
             our
             Lord
             God
             370
             
               per
               Basilium
               ,
               Nissenum
               ,
               et
               Nazianzenum
               in
               publicos
               Ecclesia
               conventus
               ,
               occasione
               orationum
               Panegyricarum
               Invocatio
               Sanctorum
               invehi
               coepit
               ;
               eodem
               tempore
               cùm
               ab
               iisdem
               authoribus
               Monachatus
               ex
               Aegypto
               et
               Syriâ
               in
               Graeciam
               introduceretur
               ,
               Et
               videtur
            
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             
               haec
               sive
               portio
               ,
               sive
               Appendix
               Monachatus
               fuisse
               .
            
             By
             
               Basil
               ,
               Nissen
               ,
               and
               Nazianzen
               ,
            
             upon
             occasion
             of
             Panegyricall
             orations
             ,
             Invocation
             of
             Saints
             began
             to
             be
             brought
             into
             the
             publick
             Assemblyes
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             at
             the
             same
             time
             ,
             when
             by
             the
             same
             Authors
             the
             profession
             of
             Monasticall
             life
             was
             was
             brought
             out
             of
             Aegypt
             and
             Syria
             into
             Greece
             ;
             and
             it
             seemes
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             that
             this
             was
             either
             a
             part
             ,
             or
             an
             appurtenance
             of
             Monkery
             &c.
             
             Againe
             speaking
             of
             St.
             Ambrose
             when
             he
             had
             once
             turned
             Monke
             ,
             howsoever
             hee
             was
             before
             ;
             
               Non
               tamen
               nego
               (
               inquit
               )
               Ambrosium
               ,
               tandem
               cùm
               Monochatum
               à
               Basilio
               mutuò
               sumpsisset
               ,
               etiàm
               ad
               Invocationem
               Sanctorum
               inclinare
               coepisse
               ,
               ut
               patet
               ex
               libro
               de
               viduis
               .
            
             I
             deny
             not
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             but
             Ambrose
             at
             length
             ,
             when
             he
             had
             once
             borrowed
             Monkery
             from
             Basil
             ,
             began
             also
             to
             incline
             to
             the
             Invocation
             of
             Saints
             ,
             as
             appeares
             in
             his
             book
             
               De
               viduis
            
             .
             Thus
             Chemnitius
             .
          
           
             And
             that
             you
             may
             yet
             further
             see
             how
             operative
             Monkes
             were
             in
             this
             businesse
             ,
             heare
             Saint
             
               Augustine
               de
               opere
               Monachorum
               ,
               cap.
            
             28.
             
             
               Tam
               multos
               hypocritas
               sub
               habitu
               Monachorum
               usquequaque
               dispersit
               Satan
               ,
               circumeuntes
               provincias
               ,
               nusquam
               missos
               ,
               nusquam
               fixos
               ,
               nusquam
               stantes
               ,
               nusquam
               sedentes
               .
               Alii
               membra
               Martyrum
               ,
               si
               tamen
               Martyrum
               venditant
               ;
               &
               omnes
               petunt
               ,
               omnes
               exigunt
               ,
               aut
               
               sumptus
               lucrosae
               egestatis
               ,
               aut
               simulatae
               pretium
               sanctitatis
               .
            
             The
             Devill
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             hath
             dispersed
             in
             every
             corner
             such
             a
             crew
             of
             hypocrites
             ,
             under
             the
             habit
             of
             Monks
             ,
             gadding
             about
             every
             Countrey
             ,
             sent
             no
             whither
             ,
             staying
             no
             where
             ,
             every
             where
             restlesse
             ,
             whether
             sitting
             or
             standing
             ;
             some
             sell
             the
             limbs
             of
             Martyrs
             ,
             if
             so
             be
             of
             Martyrs
             ;
             and
             all
             asking
             ,
             all
             exacting
             either
             the
             expence
             of
             a
             gainfull
             poverty
             ,
             or
             the
             hire
             of
             a
             counterfeit
             sanctity
             .
             These
             were
             those
             surely
             which
             occasioned
             that
             rescript
             of
             Theodosius
             the
             Emperour
             ,
             
               Nemo
               Martyrem
               distrahat
               ,
               nemo
               mercetur
               ;
               let
               no
               man
               sell
               ,
               let
               no
               man
               buy
               a
               Martyr
               :
            
             whereby
             we
             may
             gather
             what
             honesty
             was
             like
             to
             be
             used
             amongst
             them
             :
             we
             know
             ,
             
               Laudat
               venales
               qui
               vult
               extrudere
               merces
            
             ;
             Merchants
             use
             to
             commend
             their
             commodities
             .
             Gregory
             of
             Tours
             ,
             who
             lived
             and
             died
             somewhat
             before
             the
             yeere
             600
             ,
             tels
             us
             this
             ,
             
               Monachos
               quosdam
               Romam
               venisse
               ,
               ac
               prope
               templum
               Pauli
               corpora
               quaedam
               noctu
               effodisse
               ,
               qui
               comprehensi
               fassi
               sunt
               in
               Graeciam
               se
               ea
               pro
               Sanctorum
               reliquiis
               portaturos
               fuisse
            
             ;
             That
             certain
             Monks
             came
             to
             Rome
             ,
             and
             neere
             unto
             Saint
             Pauls
             Church
             ,
             in
             the
             night
             time
             ,
             digged
             up
             certain
             bodies
             ;
             who
             being
             apprehended
             ,
             confessed
             they
             meant
             to
             have
             carried
             them
             into
             Greece
             for
             reliques
             of
             Saints
             .
             The
             same
             Author
             ,
             l.
             9.
             c.
             6.
             
             
               Hist.
               Franc.
            
             relates
             a
             story
             of
             another
             counterfeit
             Monk
             ,
             who
             pretended
             to
             come
             out
             of
             Spaine
             with
             Martyrs
             reliques
             ;
             but
             being
             discovered
             ,
             they
             were
             found
             to
             be
             certaine
             herbs
             ,
             with
             bones
             of
             Mice
             ,
             and
             such
             like
             stuffe
             :
             and
             he
             tels
             us
             there
             were
             many
             such
             seducers
             which
             deluded
             the
             people
             .
             And
             he
             said
             true
             ,
             there
             were
             many
             indeed
             ,
             and
             many
             more
             than
             Gregory
             took
             for
             such
             ,
             even
             those
             h●e
             took
             for
             honest
             men
             .
             For
             though
             it
             must
             not
             be
             denied
             ,
             but
             God
             had
             some
             of
             this
             order
             which
             were
             holy
             men
             ,
             and
             unfainedly
             mortified
             ,
             notwithstanding
             their
             errou●
             in
             thinking
             God
             was
             pleased
             with
             that
             singularity
             of
             life
             ;
             yet
             must
             it
             be
             confessed
             ,
             that
             the
             greater
             part
             were
             no
             better
             than
             hypocrites
             ,
             and
             counterfeits
             ,
             
             and
             that
             the
             lamentable
             defection
             of
             the
             Christian
             Church
             chiefly
             proceeded
             from
             ,
             and
             was
             fostered
             by
             men
             of
             that
             profession
             ,
             as
             in
             part
             we
             have
             heard
             already
             .
          
           
             And
             if
             you
             can
             with
             patience
             heare
             him
             speak
             ,
             I
             will
             add
             the
             testimony
             of
             
               Eunapius
               Sardianus
            
             ,
             a
             Pagan
             Writer
             ,
             who
             lived
             in
             the
             dayes
             of
             Theodosius
             the
             first
             ,
             about
             the
             yeere
             400
             ,
             in
             the
             life
             of
             Edesius
             ,
             most
             bitterly
             inveighing
             against
             the
             Christians
             for
             demolishing
             the
             renowned
             Temple
             of
             Serapis
             at
             Alexandria
             in
             Egypt
             :
             he
             speakes
             in
             this
             manner
             :
             
               When
               they
               had
               done
            
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             
               they
               brought
               into
               the
               holy
               places
               those
               which
               they
               call
               Monks
               ,
               men
               indeed
               for
               shape
               ,
               but
               living
               like
               swine
               ,
               and
               openly
               committing
               innumerable
               villanies
               ,
               not
               to
               be
               named
               ;
               who
               yet
               tooke
               it
               for
               a
               peece
               of
               Religion
               thus
               to
               despise
               the
               Divinity
            
             (
             he
             means
             of
             
               Serapis
               :
               )
               for
               then
            
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             
               whosoever
               wore
               a
               black
               coat
               ,
               and
               would
               demeane
               himselfe
               absurdly
               in
               publicke
               ,
               got
               a
               tyrannicall
               authority
               ;
               to
               such
               an
               opinion
               of
               vertue
               had
               that
               sort
               of
               men
               attained
               .
               These
               Monks
               also
               they
               placed
               at
            
             Canopus
             ,
             
               in
               stead
               of
               the
               intelligible
               gods
               ,
               to
               worship
               slaves
               ,
               and
               those
               of
               no
               good
               condition
               ;
               thus
               bringing
               a
               bond
               of
               Religion
               upon
               men
               .
               For
               having
               powdered
               the
               bones
               and
               skuls
               of
               such
               as
               had
               beene
               condemned
               of
               many
               crimes
               ,
               and
               punished
               by
               a
               legall
               course
               of
               justice
               ,
               they
               made
               Gods
               of
               them
               ;
               prostrating
               themselves
               unto
               them
               ,
               and
               thinking
               themselves
               the
               better
               for
               being
               polluted
               with
               Sepulchres
               ;
               they
               called
               them
               forsooth
               Martyrs
               ,
               and
               some
               Deacons
               ,
               yea
               and
               Solicitours
               of
               their
               prayers
               with
               the
               gods
               ;
               being
               indeed
               but
               perfidious
               slaves
               ,
               who
               had
               been
               well
               basted
               with
               the
               whip
               ,
               and
               carried
               the
               scars
               of
               their
               lewdnesse
               upon
               their
               bodies
               ,
               and
               yet
               such
               gods
               as
               these
               the
               earth
               brings
               forth
               .
            
          
           
             Thus
             the
             wretched
             caitiffe
             ,
             and
             damned
             dog
             ,
             blasphemes
             the
             Saints
             and
             servants
             of
             Christ
             ,
             who
             loved
             not
             their
             lives
             unto
             death
             ;
             the
             dust
             of
             whose
             feet
             he
             was
             not
             worthy
             to
             lick
             up
             .
             Yet
             may
             we
             make
             a
             shift
             to
             gather
             hence
             ,
             what
             manner
             of
             offices
             Monks
             were
             then
             busied
             in
             .
             
             And
             if
             Baronius
             took
             leave
             to
             use
             his
             testimony
             for
             the
             antiquity
             of
             Saint-worship
             ,
             why
             may
             not
             I
             with
             the
             like
             liberty
             alledge
             it
             ,
             to
             shew
             that
             Monks
             and
             Friars
             were
             ring-leaders
             therein
             ?
          
           
             But
             when
             the
             Idolatry
             of
             Image-worship
             came
             to
             be
             added
             to
             those
             of
             Saints
             ,
             whether
             Monks
             and
             Friars
             were
             not
             the
             chiefe
             sticklers
             therein
             ,
             judge
             when
             you
             shall
             hear
             how
             it
             fared
             with
             them
             in
             that
             great
             opposition
             against
             Idols
             in
             the
             East
             .
          
           
             Of
             
               Leo
               Isaurus
            
             ,
             the
             first
             of
             those
             Emperours
             that
             opposed
             Images
             ,
             we
             have
             this
             in
             generall
             out
             of
             the
             Greek
             Menology
             :
             That
             he
             raged
             most
             cruelly
             against
             Bishops
             and
             Monks
             ,
             which
             maintained
             the
             worship
             of
             Images
             ;
             and
             that
             he
             burnt
             a
             whole
             cloister
             of
             such
             kind
             of
             people
             in
             their
             Monastery
             ,
             together
             with
             a
             famous
             Library
             ,
             and
             all
             their
             furniture
             .
          
           
             But
             Constantine
             his
             son
             made
             a
             worse
             fray
             amongst
             them
             .
             For
             the
             Author
             of
             the
             Acts
             of
             Monk
             Stephen
             tels
             us
             ,
             That
             he
             being
             reproved
             and
             convicted
             for
             what
             hee
             had
             done
             (
             viz.
             against
             Images
             )
             by
             the
             religious
             and
             worthy
             professours
             of
             Monasticall
             life
             ,
             he
             raised
             an
             implacable
             warre
             against
             them
             ;
             calling
             that
             noble
             habit
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             
               the
               vesture
               of
               darknesse
            
             ;
             and
             the
             Monks
             themselves
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             
               unworthy
               of
               memory
            
             :
             and
             besides
             ,
             terming
             them
             all
             Idolaters
             ,
             for
             the
             worshipping
             of
             venerable
             Images
             .
          
           
             The
             same
             is
             confirmed
             by
             Theosterictus
             ,
             another
             Authour
             of
             that
             time
             ,
             who
             saith
             ,
             That
             the
             whole
             aime
             and
             study
             of
             this
             Emperour
             was
             to
             extinguish
             and
             root
             out
             the
             order
             of
             Monks
             .
          
           
             And
             for
             particulars
             ,
             here
             what
             Theophanes
             (
             himselfe
             a
             Monk
             ,
             and
             a
             little
             singed
             too
             in
             this
             flame
             ,
             before
             it
             ended
             )
             will
             informe
             us
             .
          
           
             
               In
               the
               one
               and
               twentieth
               yeere
               of
               his
               reigne
               he
               caused
            
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             Andreas
             Calybites
             ,
             
               a
               worthy
               Monke
               ,
               who
               reproved
               him
               for
               his
               impiety
            
             (
             in
             demolishing
             Images
             )
             
               to
               be
               
               scourged
               till
               hee
               died
               ,
            
             lib.
             22.
             cap.
             30.
             
             Hist.
             miscell
             .
          
           
             
               In
               the
               five
               and
               twentieth
               yeere
               of
               his
               reigne
               hee
               caused
               Monke
            
             Stephen
             
               to
               be
               dragged
               by
               the
               heeles
               in
               the
               streets
               ,
               till
               being
               rent
               in
               peeces
               ,
               he
               died
               ;
               both
               for
               the
               aforesaid
               offence
               ,
               and
               because
               he
               drew
               and
               perswaded
               many
               to
               a
               Monasticall
               life
               ,
            
             Ibid.
             cap.
             39.
             
          
           
             
               The
               same
               yeere
               the
               Emperour
            
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             
               disgraced
               and
               dishonoured
               the
               Monasticall
               habit
               ,
               publickly
               commanding
               every
               Monk
               to
               lead
               a
               woman
               by
               the
               hand
               ,
               so
               to
               march
               through
               the
            
             Hippodrome
             ,
             
               all
               the
               people
               abusing
               them
               ,
               and
               spitting
               upon
               them
               ,
            
             Ibid.
             cap.
             40.
             
          
           
             
               In
               the
               seven
               and
               twentieth
               year
               ,
               the
               Monasteries
            
             (
             he
             saith
             )
             
               partly
               he
               destroyed
               to
               the
               very
               foundations
               ,
               partly
               bestowed
               them
               upon
               his
               Captains
               and
               Souldiers
               ,
            
             Ibid.
             cap.
             49.
             
          
           
             
               In
               the
               same
               yeere
               ,
               when
               he
               could
               not
               draw
            
             Peter
             à
             Metra
             ,
             
               a
               famous
            
             Stylite
             ,
             
               or
               Pillar-Monk
               ,
               unto
               his
               opinions
               ,
               he
               caused
               him
               likewise
               to
               be
               dragged
               by
               the
               heeles
               ,
               and
               his
               body
               cast
               out
               into
               the
               streets
               ,
            
             Ibid.
             cap.
             48.
             
          
           
             
               In
               his
               thirtieth
               yeere
               ,
               his
               Praetor
               or
               Deputy
            
             Lichanodraco
             
               gathered
               all
               the
               Monks
               in
               his
               jurisdiction
               together
               ,
               and
               commanded
               them
               to
               obey
               the
               Emperour
               ,
               to
               put
               on
               a
               white
               coat
               ,
               and
               to
               marry
               wives
               instantly
               ,
               or
               to
               have
               their
               eyes
               put
               out
               ,
               and
               to
               be
               sent
               into
               exile
               ,
            
             Ibid.
             cap.
             52.
             
             So
             the
             Emperor
             ,
             when
             he
             would
             have
             Constantine
             the
             Patriarch
             abjure
             Monkery
             ,
             
               he
               made
               him
            
             (
             saith
             the
             same
             Authour
             )
             
               eat
               flesh
            
             ,
             Lib.
             eod
             .
             cap.
             29.
             
          
           
             In
             the
             one
             and
             thirtieth
             yeere
             the
             same
             Lichanodraco
             sold
             all
             the
             Monasteries
             ,
             both
             of
             men
             and
             women
             in
             his
             jurisdiction
             ,
             and
             sent
             the
             money
             to
             the
             Emperour
             .
             If
             hee
             found
             any
             one
             to
             have
             a
             relique
             of
             any
             Saint
             in
             keeping
             ,
             he
             burnt
             it
             ,
             and
             punished
             him
             that
             had
             it
             .
             He
             slew
             the
             Monks
             ,
             some
             with
             stripes
             ,
             some
             with
             the
             sword
             ;
             and
             left
             not
             a
             man
             ,
             where
             he
             had
             to
             doe
             ,
             that
             wore
             a
             Monasticall
             habit
             ;
             whereupon
             the
             Emperour
             wrote
             thus
             unto
             him
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             :
             
               I
               have
               found
               thee
               a
               man
               after
               mine
               own
               heart
               ,
               
               who
               fulfillest
               my
               whole
               will.
            
             Thus
             much
             of
             Constantine
             .
          
           
             The
             like
             reports
             Cedrenus
             of
             
               Michael
               Balbus
            
             ,
             That
             he
             abominated
             Monks
             ,
             and
             diversly
             afflicted
             them
             ,
             ordaining
             one
             punishment
             after
             another
             against
             them
             .
             As
             also
             of
             Theophilus
             ,
             the
             last
             Emperour
             that
             opposed
             Images
             :
             Theophilus
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             
               ordained
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               that
               no
               Monks
               should
               have
               accesse
               unto
               the
               Cities
               ,
               and
               that
               they
               should
               by
               all
               meanes
               be
               banished
               ;
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               and
               not
               so
               much
               as
               dare
               to
               be
               seen
               in
               the
               Countrey
               :
            
             and
             that
             he
             caused
             the
             Monasteries
             and
             places
             of
             holy
             retirement
             to
             become
             common
             and
             secular
             habitations
             :
             what
             the
             reason
             was
             ,
             we
             may
             learn
             by
             that
             the
             same
             Author
             tels
             us
             :
             
               Of
               those
            
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             
               which
               reprehended
               the
               Emperour
               ,
               the
               Abramite
               Monks
               were
               the
               chiefe
               ;
               who
               freely
               adventuring
               into
               his
               presence
               ,
               did
               demonstrate
               that
               Monasticall
               life
               was
               not
               an
               invention
               of
               yesterday
               ,
               or
               the
               other
               day
               ,
               but
               an
               ancient
               and
               primitive
               institution
               ,
               and
               that
               holy
               Images
               were
               familiar
               in
               the
               Apostles
               times
               ,
               and
               that
               Saint
            
             Luke
             
               painted
               an
               Image
               of
               the
               blessed
               Virgin
               ,
            
             &c.
             
             But
             it
             seemes
             the
             Emperour
             was
             not
             convinced
             by
             their
             demonstration
             :
             for
             this
             their
             boldnesse
             cost
             them
             full
             deare
             ,
             as
             our
             Authour
             relates
             .
          
           
             By
             this
             time
             I
             know
             you
             understand
             what
             the
             matter
             was
             that
             this
             Image-storm
             fell
             so
             heavily
             upon
             the
             heads
             of
             Monks
             and
             Friars
             :
             and
             yet
             notwithstanding
             all
             this
             ,
             they
             at
             length
             prevailed
             ,
             and
             carried
             the
             day
             (
             so
             God
             would
             have
             it
             )
             for
             their
             Idols
             .
             For
             another
             Theophanes
             ,
             whom
             they
             call
             the
             Presbyter
             ,
             a
             Writer
             also
             of
             his
             time
             tells
             ,
             That
             Theophilus
             being
             dead
             ,
             Theodora
             the
             Empresse
             (
             whilst
             she
             reigned
             in
             the
             minority
             of
             Michael
             her
             son
             )
             when
             she
             meant
             to
             restore
             Image-worship
             ,
             which
             had
             been
             banished
             now
             the
             second
             time
             ,
             ever
             since
             
               Leo
               Armenius
               ,
               Re
               cum
               illis
               communicatâ
               ,
               qui
               erant
               in
               magistratu
               &
               dignitate
               constituti
               ,
               accersit
               cum
               ipsis
               eos
               ,
               qui
               inter
               Monachos
               praestabant
               ,
               &
               de
               Imaginum
               instauratione
               quaestionem
               
               proponit
               .
               Cumque
               idem
               omnes
               consentientes
               comperissent
               ,
               diuturnoque
               ejus
               re●
               desiderio
               teneri
               ,
               atque
               animo
               excruciari
               propter
               Religionis
               in
               hâc
               re
               mutationem
               ,
               postulat
               ,
               ●t
               se
               etiam
               Patrum
               authoritatibus
               ad
               veritatem
               confirmarent
               ,
               quas
               variis
               in
               libris
               invenissent
               .
               Mandavitque
               quo
               in
               loco
               Palatii
               praefinito
               ,
               ●aetus
               Ecclesiasticus
               universus
               cogeretur
               ,
               &
               ad
               populum
               eâ
               de
               re
               verba
               faceret
               ,
               &c.
            
             that
             is
             ,
             when
             she
             had
             acquainted
             the
             Magistrates
             ,
             and
             those
             that
             were
             in
             authority
             ,
             therewith
             ,
             together
             with
             them
             she
             sent
             for
             the
             chiefest
             of
             the
             Monks
             ,
             and
             propounded
             to
             them
             the
             question
             concerning
             restoring
             of
             Images
             :
             whom
             when
             she
             found
             all
             men
             for
             the
             purpose
             ,
             yea
             very
             eager
             in
             the
             businesse
             ,
             she
             called
             a
             Synod
             ,
             whereby
             Idolatry
             was
             again
             publickly
             erected
             in
             the
             Greek
             Church
             ,
             120
             yeeres
             after
             it
             first
             began
             to
             bee
             purged
             thereof
             ,
             by
             
               Leo
               Isaurus
            
             the
             Emperour
             .
          
           
             For
             the
             Idolatry
             of
             the
             masse-god
             ,
             which
             was
             not
             in
             use
             ,
             at
             soonest
             ,
             till
             a
             thousand
             yeeres
             after
             Christ
             ,
             when
             the
             opinion
             of
             Transubstantiation
             had
             gotten
             strength
             ,
             we
             shall
             not
             need
             trouble
             our selves
             much
             to
             shew
             that
             Monks
             and
             Friars
             were
             the
             authors
             and
             advancers
             thereof
             ;
             since
             by
             that
             time
             ,
             these
             kind
             of
             men
             were
             become
             the
             onely
             masters
             of
             Divinity
             :
             and
             therefore
             wee
             need
             not
             doubt
             ,
             that
             what
             was
             then
             broached
             in
             the
             Church
             ,
             came
             out
             of
             their
             shop
             .
          
           
             Judge
             now
             ,
             by
             what
             you
             have
             heard
             ,
             how
             truly
             this
             Prophesie
             of
             Saint
             Paul
             is
             fulfilled
             ,
             who
             told
             us
             ,
             that
             the
             
               Doctrines
               of
               Daemons
            
             should
             bee
             brought
             into
             the
             Church
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ;
             
               through
               the
               hypocrisie
               of
               those
               who
               forbid
               to
               marry
               ,
               and
            
             (
             command
             )
             
               to
               abstain
               from
               meats
            
             .
          
        
         
           FINIS
           .
        
      
    
     
       
         
           Printed
           for
           SAMUEL
           MAN
           at
           the
           Swan
           in
           Pauls
           Church-yard
           .
        
      
       
         Notes, typically marginal, from the original text
         
           Notes for div A50525-e3590
           
             *
             Doctrinis
             Deastror●m
             .
          
           
             *
             Hy●erius
             〈◊〉
             exp●unds
             it
             in
             his
             Comm.
             on
             this
             Epistle
             .
          
           
             *
             H●nce
             the
             phrase
             in
             Scripture
             
               fornicaria
               Deo
            
             ,
             to
             apostatize
             from
             God
             by
             spirituall
             fornication
             :
             vide
             Psal.
             73.
             
             Hosea
             9.4
             .
             Ezek.
             23.
             see
             Concord
             .
             Kirch
             .
          
           
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             and
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             
               i.
               e.
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               Chaldaeis
               &
               Targumis●is
               est
               Idolum
               ,
               &
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               est
               Idola
               colere
               &
               scoriari
               .
            
             Rom.
             1.27
             .
             2
             Pet.
             2.18
             .
             2
             Thes.
             2.18
             .
          
           
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Ier.
             10.8
             .
          
           
             *
             So
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Acts
             3.
             
             ●6
             .
             Phil
             3.9
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             2
             Thes.
             2.13
             .
          
           
             
               Numb
               .
               25.
               the
               Mid●anites
               called
               the
               people
               to
               the
               sacrifices
               of
               their
               Gods
               ,
               and
               the
               people
               did
               eate
               .
               And
               Israel
               joyned
               himselfe
               to
               Baal
               P●or
               :
               But
               Psal.
               106.
               it
               is
               said
               ,
               they
               joyned
               themselves
               unto
               Baal
               Peor
               and
               ate
               the
               sacrifices
               of
               the
               dead
               .
            
             
               Deut.
               32.17
               .
               In
               the
               propheticall
               song
               of
               Israels
               Apostasie
               ,
               they
               sacrificed
               unto
               Daemons
               ,
               not
               to
               God
               ;
               to
               gods
               whom
               they
               knew
               not
               ,
               to
               new
               ones
               that
               came
               newly
               up
               ,
               whom
               the
               Fathers
               feared
               not
               .
               The
               Seventy
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               Heb.
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
            
             
               For
               cutting
               and
               launcing
               were
               funerall
               rites
               ,
               as
               appeares
               Levit.
               25.5
               .
               and
               chap.
               19.28
               .
               and
               Deut.
               14.1
               .
               Ier.
               48.37
               .
               and
               chapter
               16.6
               .
               and
               therefore
               retained
               in
               the
               funerall
               worship
               (
               as
               they
               call
               it
               )
               of
               those
               that
               were
               deified
               after
               death
               :
               qu●re
               ;
               did
               not
               God
               forbid
               his
               people
               this
               rite
               because
               abused
               to
               Daemon
               Idolatry
               ?
               yet
               did
               some
               transg●esse
               it
               ,
               as
               Ier.
               41.5
               .
               Moses
               body
               therefore
               hidden
               .
            
             
               Vide
               Isa.
               65.4
               
                 Idolatrae
                 in
                 sepulchris
                 ,
                 Item
                 cap.
              
               8.
               ver
               .
               19.
               
                 pro
                 vivis
                 ad
                 mort●os
                 .
                 Loc.
              
               Isa.
               8.19
               .
               
                 Targ.
                 vertit
                 nonne
                 haec
                 via
                 enim
                 populo●um
                 colentium
                 Idolam
                 .
                 Vnusquisque
                 populus
                 ab●●dolo
                 su●
                 req●irit
                 ,
                 vivi
                 a
                 mortuis
                 :
              
               the
               Seventy
               sic
               :
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               .
               Loc.
               Es.
               63.3.4
               
                 Targ.
                 sic
                 ;
                 in
                 〈◊〉
                 sacrificant
                 Idolii
                 &
                 adol●nt
                 aromata
                 super
                 lateres
                 .
              
               4.
               
               
                 Qui
                 habitant
                 in
                 domibus
                 ,
                 quae
                 edificantur
                 de
                 ●ulvere
                 sepulchorum
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 &
                 eum
                 cadaveribus
                 filiorum
                 hominum
                 morentur
                 .
              
               Seventy
               ▪
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               .
            
          
           
             Tertult
             .
             
               Idolatria
               parentationis
               est
               species
               ,
               cap.
            
             12.
             
          
           
             *
             
               Hieron
               .
               
                 in
                 cap.
              
               23.
               
               Ezech.
               
                 Idolum
                 autem
              
               Baal
               sive
               Bel
               ,
               
                 Assyrio●um
                 religio
                 est
                 ,
                 consecrata
                 a
                 Ni●o
                 Belis
                 silio
                 in
                 honorem
                 patris
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Idem
                 in
              
               Hos.
               cap.
               2.
               
               
                 Ninus
                 in
                 tantam
                 pervemt
                 gloriam
                 ut
                 pa●trem
                 suum
                 B●lum
                 referret
                 in
                 Deum
                 ,
                 qui
                 He●raicè
                 dicitur
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 &
                 in
                 multis
                 prophetis
                 ,
                 maximeque
                 in
                 Daniele
                 :
                 〈◊〉
                 juxta
                 Theodosionem
                 sub
                 Idolo
                 Babylon●
                 hoc
                 appellatur
                 nomine
                 ,
                 Hunc
                 Sidonii
                 ,
                 &
                 Phaenices
                 appellant
                 ,
              
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
            
          
           
             
               Eusebii
               Chron.
               Chronicon
               Alexandrinum
               se●
               Fasti
               siculi
               .
               Hieron
               .
               ●aulo
               post
               lecum
               proxi
               .
               mè
               citatum
               .
               Didicimus
               ,
               in
               .
               quit
               exordium
               Daemonis
               ,
               imo
               hominijs
               in
               Daemonem
               consecrati
               :
               Omnia
               enim
               Idola
               ex
               mortuorum
               errore
               creverunt
               .
               Idem
               in
               c.
               46.
               
               Isa.
               Quem
               (
               i.
               e.
               Baal●
               Graeci
               Belum
               ,
               Latini
               Saturnum
               dicunt
               ,
               cujus
               tanta
               fuit
               apud
               veteres
               religio
               ut
               ei
               non
               solum
               humanas
               hostias
               ca●tivorum
               ,
               ignobi
               iumque
               mortali●m
               ,
               sed
               &
               suo●
               liberos
               immolarum●
               .
               Cyrillus
               contra
               Iulianum
               versus
               finem
               ,
               Primus
               (
               inquit
               )
               regnavit
               in
               Assyriorum
               terrâ
               ,
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               vir
               superbus
               ,
               &
               arrogans
               ,
               Belus
               qui
               &
               primus
               hominum
               dicitur
               à
               subditis
               no
               men
               Deitatis
               accepisse
               ;
               hic
               interpres
               vitio●è
               transfert
               Arbelus
               ,
               &
               ubi
               mox
               s●qui
               ur
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               Interpres
               Arbeli
               ,
               &c.
               
               Lactant.
               de
               sals
               .
               relig
               c.
            
             23.
             
               &
               ult
               .
               originem
               Idolatrie
               ad
               Belum
               refert
               .
            
          
           
             
               Dii
               〈◊〉
               de
               quibus
               Lab●o
               libros
               scripse●a●
               ,
               in
               quibus
               a●ebat
               (
               verba
               S●rvii
               )
               esse
               quaedam
               sacra
               quibus
               animae
               vertantur
               in
               d●os
               ,
               qui
               appellantur
               animales
               ,
               quòd
               de
               animis
               sia●t
               .
            
          
           
             *
             
               Plutarch
               .
               de
               defect
               .
               Orac.
            
             in
             the
             person
             of
             Amonius
             the
             Philosopher
             makes
             two
             sorts
             of
             Daemons
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             soules
             separate
             from
             bodies
             ,
             or
             such
             as
             never
             dwelt
             in
             bodies
             at
             all
             :
             Though
             both
             these
             sorts
             have
             the
             name
             of
             Daemons
             given
             them
             in
             common
             ,
             yet
             are
             these
             which
             were
             the
             soules
             of
             men
             ,
             otherwhile
             for
             distinctions
             sake
             called
             Heroes
             ,
             (
             
               Plutarch
               de
               Plac.
               Philos.
               c.
            
             8.
             )
             though
             some
             extend
             not
             this
             name
             in
             generall
             to
             all
             ,
             but
             onely
             to
             such
             as
             are
             either
             of
             an
             inferiour
             ranke
             ,
             or
             but
             no
             vices
             ,
             not
             yet
             promoted
             to
             the
             office
             of
             Daemons
             ;
             as
             Punies
             ,
             not
             yet
             called
             to
             the
             barre
             .
          
           
             
               Vid.
               Athenag
               .
               Legat.
               pr●
               Christ
               in
               Bibliot●
               .
               Patr.
               p.
            
             133.6
             .
             
               qui
               dicunt
               non
               alio
               modo
               homines
               conve●ire
               deos
               posse
               ,
               scil
               .
               quam
               p●r
               simulac●ra
               .
            
          
           
             
               Tertul.
               de
               Idol
               c.
            
             7.
             
             
               Artifices
               Idolorum
               Daemoniis
               corpora
               conf●rre
            
             .
          
           
             “
             
               Vide
               Herod
               .
               Clio.
               c.
            
             131.
             
             
               Persas
               statuas
               non
               ▪
               erigere
               ,
               quod
               non
               ut
               Gr●ci
               sentiunt
               Deos
               ex
               hominibus
               esse
               ortos
               ;
               ex
               opinione
               Herod
               .
            
          
           
             *
             
               Nam
               quod
               potest
               inte●ligentiâ
               so●um
               ●ros●ici
               &
               comprehendi
               mente
               nec
               appetit
               formam
               ,
               quâ
               cognoscatur
               ,
               nec
               figuram
               admittit
               ,
               ut
               imaginem
               &
               effigi●m
               .
               Ve●um
               ista
               omnia
               ad
               gra●iam
               mortuorum
               reseruntur
               :
               dum
               enim
               vixerunt
               homines
               ,
               ●rant
               corporum
               compagibus
               inclusi
               ,
               Canstantin
               .
               Orat
               ad
               Sanctorum
               Coe●um
               .
               c.
            
             4.
             
          
           
             *
             
               In
               mortuo●um
               Idolis
               Daemonia
               consislunt
               .
               Tertul
               .
               vide
               de
               Spectac
               .
               cap
            
             11
             ,
             12
             ,
             13.
             
               serè
               totum
            
             .
          
           
             1
             Tim.
             3.11
             .
             2
             Tim.
             3.3
             .
             Tit.
             2.3
             .
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             a
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             b
             
               
                 Et
                 Strom.
                 l.
              
               7.
               p
               504.
               
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               .
            
             
               
                 Lactant.
                 lib.
              
               4.
               
               
                 Instit.
                 Divin
                 .
                 ait
                 ,
                 Superstitiosi
                 vocantur
                 aut
                 ii
                 qui
                 superstitem
                 memoriam
                 defunctorum
                 ●olunt
                 ,
                 aut
                 qui
                 parentibus
                 su●
                 superstites
                 ,
                 celebrant
                 ●magines
                 eorum
                 domi
                 tanqua●
                 Deos
                 Penates
                 .
                 Nam
                 qui
                 novos
                 sibi
                 ritus
                 desumebant
                 ,
                 ut
                 Deorum
                 vice
                 mortuos
                 honorarent
                 ,
                 quos
                 ex
                 hominibus
                 in
                 coelum
                 receptos
                 putabant
                 ;
                 ●os
                 superstitiosos
                 voca●ant
                 .
                 Eos
                 verò
                 qui
                 publicos
                 &
                 antiquos
                 Deos
                 colerent
                 ,
                 religiosos
                 nomina●ant
                 ,
                 undè
                 Virgilius
                 ,
                 Vana
                 superstitio
                 veterumque
                 ign●ra
                 Deorum
                 .
                 Martin
                 .
                 Lex
                 .
                 quem
                 ulterius
                 vide
                 .
              
            
          
           
             *
             S●e
             
               Tertuli
               .
               ●●●spectac
               .
               c.
            
             13.
             
          
           
             “
             See
             also
             
               Apocal
               .
               cap.
            
             1.
             ver
             .
             5.
             where
             Christ
             is
             named
             a●ter
             ●he
             seven
             ●pirits
             for
             the
             like
             reason
             .
          
           
             Colos.
             2.19
             .
          
           
             1
             Thes.
             1.9
             .
             Conversion
             to
             Christianity
             is
             described
             a
             turning
             from
             Idols
             to
             serve
             the
             true
             ▪
             and
             living
             God
             ,
             and
             to
             wait
             for
             his
             Sonne
             Iesus
             Christ
             ;
             therefore
             Ap●stasie
             is
             a
             returne
             to
             Idols
             from
             the
             living
             and
             true
             God
             and
             his
             Sonne
             Iesus
             Christ.
             
          
           
             *
             Apocal.
             1.13
             .
          
           
             
               In
               Saracen
               .
               Frid.
               Sylburg
               .
               citante
               Martins
               ●
               .
               p.
            
             1903.
             
             Lex
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             
               Mahomet
               in
               Alcorano
               inducit
               Deum
               ad
               se
               ita
               loquen●em
               :
               Pauper
               fuisti
               &
               ditavi
               te
               ,
               Idolis
               servist●
               &
               vocavi
               te
               :
               Interpres
               Aretae
               in
               Praefatione
               sub
               finem
               .
            
          
           
             Mahomet
             was
             a
             Paynim
             ,
             neicircumcised
             as
             the
             other
             Arabians
             were
             ,
             nor
             bap●ized
             till
             he
             b●gun
             his
             false
             prophesy
             :
             when
             Abdalla
             the
             I●w
             did
             ●he
             one
             unto
             him
             ,
             and
             Sergius
             the
             Monk
             conferred
             the
             other
             ,
             
               vid.
               Purchas
               P●●gr
            
             .
          
           
             *
             Tertul.
             calls
             these
             Hereticks
             ,
             
               Alterius
               divinitatis
               Haeretici
            
             .
          
           
             
               Hieron
               .
               in
               ca.
            
             43
             Ezek.
             Ego
             hoc
             arbi●ror
             ,
             quòd
             non
             polluat
             nomen
             Domini
             ,
             nisi
             ille
             qui
             v●sus
             est
             nomini
             ejus
             credere
             :
             &
             ●uomodò
             tollit
             membra
             Christi
             ,
             &
             ●acit
             membra
             meretricis
             ,
             qui
             priù●
             Christo
             ●redidit
             ;
             sic
             ill●
             polluit
             nomen
             Domini
             ,
             qui
             priùs
             nominis
             eius
             fidem
             susceperit
             .
          
           
             *
             Apoc.
             14
             4.
             
          
           
             2
             Chron.
             33.
             
          
           
             Targ.
             Eccles.
             1.11
             .
             expounds
             
               In
               novissimis
               diebus
               Regis
               Christi
            
             .
          
           
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             1
             Tim.
             26.
             
          
           
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             LXX
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             a
             
               Vide
               Targ.
               Habac.
            
             3.17
             .
          
           
             b
             
               Vide
               Cyril
               .
               Hierosol
               .
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               ●●
               .
               p.
            
             337.
             
             
               &
               Hieron
               .
               locum
               infra
               ci●atum
               .
            
          
           
             Add
             here
             that
             of
             Christ
             himselfe
             ,
             Mar.
             1
             15.
             
             
               The
               time
               is
               fulfilled
               ,
               and
               i.
               e
               kingdome
               of
               God
               is
               at
               ●and
            
             Hue
             quoque
             p●r●inet
             illu●
             ,
             1
             Tim.
             2.6
             :
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             *
             
               Tertul.
               de
               resurrect
               .
               c.
            
             24.
             
             
               Ambros.
               comment
               ▪
               in
               hunc
               locum
               .
               Hieron
               .
               q
            
             11.
             
               ad
               Algasiam
               .
               &
               prasat
               .
               in
               l.
            
             8.
             
               comment
               .
               in
               ●zek
               .
               Chryso●l
               .
               comment
               .
               in
               hunc
               locum
               .
               Aug.
               lib.
            
             19
             c.
             20
             
               de
               Civit.
               Dei
               ,
               sed
               non
               tam
               asseverantèr
               ut
               caeteri
               Cyrillus
               Hierosol●m
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               .
            
          
           
             *
             Chald.
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
          
           
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             à
             Vulg.
             humiliabit
             .
             LXX
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Irenaeus
             ,
             deminorabit
             ,
             vol
             ,
             (
             ut
             in
             alio
             exemplari
             )
             dehonorabit
             .
             Va●ab
             .
             opprimet
             .
             Iunius
             ,
             deprimet
             .
          
           
             *
             As
             infall●bly
             appeares
             in
             that
             long
             wanting
             Mathem●ticall
             Canon
             of
             Ptol●my
             ,
             now
             of
             l●te
             bro●ght
             to
             light
             out
             of
             one
             of
             our
             Libraries
             .
          
           
             Bellum
             .
             Macedo
             icum
             secu●dum
             .
          
           
             a
             
               Ammian
               .
               Marcel
               .
               lib
            
             26.
             c.
             31.
             
             Horrendi
             tremores
             per
             omnem
             orbis
             ambitum
             grassati
             sunt
             subitò
             ,
             quales
             nec
             fabulae
             nec
             veridi
             ae
             nob●s
             antiquitates
             exp●nunt
             ,
             &c.
             
               Hieron
               .
               in
               vita
               Hilarionis
            
             .
          
           
             b
             H●c
             tempore
             velut
             per
             universum
             Orbem
             Romanum
             canentibus
             buccinis
             ,
             excitae
             gent●s
             saevis●imae
             ,
             ●●mites
             sibi
             proximos
             persuliabant
             ,
             Gallias
             ,
             Rhetiasque
             ,
             simul
             Alemanni
             po●ulabantur
             ;
             Sarmatae
             ,
             Pannonias
             ,
             &
             Quadi
             ,
             Picti
             ,
             Saxones
             ,
             &
             Scoti
             ,
             &
             Attacotti
             Britannos
             ,
             aerumnis
             vexavere
             continuis
             :
             Thracias
             deripiebant
             praedatorii
             Globi
             Gotthoru●
             ,
             &c.
             
               Ammian
               .
               ibid.
               cap.
            
             10.
             
          
           
             c
             
               Hieron
               .
               epist.
            
             3.
             
             Ante
             annum
             400.
             viginti
             &
             co
             amplius
             anni
             sunt
             quòd
             inter
             Constantinopolin
             &
             
               Alpes
               Iulias
            
             quotidiè
             Romarus
             sanguis
             effunditur
             .
             Scythiam
             ,
             Thrac●am
             ,
             Macedoniam
             ,
             Daciam
             ,
             Dardaniam
             ,
             Thessalonicam
             ,
             Achaiam
             ,
             Epiro●
             ,
             Dalmatiam
             ,
             cunctasque
             Pannonias
             ,
             Gothus
             ,
             Sarmata
             ,
             Quadus
             ,
             Alanus
             ,
             Hunni
             ,
             Vandali
             ,
             Marcomanni
             vastant
             ,
             rapiunt
             ,
             Romanus
             orbis
             ruit
             ▪
             Quid
             pu●as
             nunc
             animi
             habere
             Corinthios
             ,
             Athenienses
             ,
             Lacedaemonios
             ,
             Arcadas
             ,
             cunctamque
             Graeciam
             ,
             quibus
             imperant
             Barbari
             ?
          
           
             d
             
               Synesius
               Orat.
               ad
               Arcadium
               August
            
             .
             Quomodo
             enim
             ferre
             possumus
             partes
             vir●les
             ,
             in
             nostra
             Republica
             ,
             alienorum
             &
             externorum
             esse
             ,
             &
             fortissimū
             Imperium
             concedere
             aliis
             bellicae
             gloriae
             principatum
             ?
             neque
             enim
             dubitandum
             est
             sore
             ,
             ut
             illi
             aliquando
             armis
             instructi
             hominum
             urbanorum
             se
             Dominos
             esse
             velint
             .
             Quod
             priusquam
             eveniat
             ,
             revo●and●
             sunt
             nobis
             Romanorum
             anim●
             ,
             &
             ita
             assuefaciendi
             ,
             ut
             ipsi
             suo
             Marte
             vincere
             &
             possint
             &
             velint
             ▪
             ne●
             omnino
             societatem
             cum
             Barbaris
             incant
             ,
             sed
             eos
             omnes
             despiciant
             ,
             omnique
             loco
             funditùs
             pell●nt
             .
             Primùm
             igitur
             Magistratu
             ejiciantur
             ,
             &
             procul
             à
             Curiae
             honoribus
             arceantur
             ,
             quibus
             per
             suminum
             dedecus
             ea
             obvenerunt
             ,
             quae
             diu
             apud
             Romanos
             habita
             sunt
             ,
             &
             reipsa
             fuerunt
             apud
             eos
             honestissima
             :
             Nam
             &
             Deam
             Themidem
             ,
             quae
             Senatui
             ,
             &
             Bellon●m
             ,
             quae
             Exercit●i
             praesidet
             ,
             obvelare
             se
             arbi●ror
             ,
             cùm
             cernant
             hominem
             penulâ
             scorteâ
             indutum
             ducem
             esse
             chlamydatorium
             ,
             &
             villosam
             penulam
             exuentem
             ,
             togam
             sumere
             ,
             &
             de
             summa
             rerum
             cum
             Romano
             Magistratu
             consulere
             ,
             propè
             ipsum
             consulem
             sedentem
             ,
             longè
             post
             eum
             sedentibus
             iis
             ,
             quibus
             honos
             ille
             jure
             optimo
             debebatur
             .
             
               Paulo
               post
            
             .
             Apud
             nos
             Exercitus
             magni
             sunt
             ,
             nostrisque
             servis
             Scythis
             sanguinae
             conjuncti
             ,
             qui
             nescio
             quo
             infoelici
             fato
             in
             Romanum
             Imperium
             irruerunt
             ,
             illi
             suos
             duces
             habent
             magnae
             authoritatis
             viros
             non
             solùm
             apud
             eos
             ipsos
             ,
             sed
             etiam
             apud
             nos
             ,
             quod
             malum
             nostra
             dedit
             socordia
             nobis
             .
             
               Paulo
               post
               de
               Theodosio
            
             .
             Ille
             supplicantes
             (
             
               scil
               .
               Gothos
            
             )
             erexit
             ,
             &
             belli
             socios
             ascivit
             ,
             &
             civitate
             donavit
             ,
             &
             omnium
             bonorum
             par●icipes
             fecit
             ,
             &
             partem
             Romani
             agri
             iis
             attribuit
             ;
             At
             ●lli
             quod
             pater
             tuus
             mit●m
             se
             iis
             praebuit
             ,
             nos
             in
             hun●
             usque
             diem
             derident
             ,
             sed
             id
             prius
             fecerat
             
               Valens
               ,
               Anno
            
             374.
             —
             (
             
               Vide
               Socratem
               lib.
            
             4.
             cap.
             27.
             )
             —
             
               De
               quo
               sic
               Paulus
               Diaconus
               Histor.
               Miscell
               .
               lib.
            
             12.
             cap.
             14.
             
             Hunnos
             ,
             Gothi
             ,
             transito
             Danubio
             ,
             fugientes
             ,
             à
             Valente
             sine
             ulla
             faederis
             pactione
             suscepti
             sunt
             ,
             ●ribuens
             eis
             terras
             Thraciarum
             ad
             habitandum
             ,
             arbitratus
             praepar●
             u●solatium
             ab
             eis
             habere
             contra
             omnes
             barbaros
             ;
             hâc
             pro
             re
             Milites
             de
             coe●ero
             negligebat
             ,
             &
             eos
             qui
             dudum
             contra
             hostes
             ●laboraverant
             ,
             Imperator
             despiciebat
             ,
             &c.
             —
             Hoc
             ergo
             ●uit
             initium
             ,
             ut
             in
             illo
             tempore
             Romana
             Re●publica
             calamitatibus
             subdere●ur
             .
             Barb●ri
             nam●ue
             c●m
             Thracias
             tenuissent
             ,
             licenter
             Romanorun
             va●tabant
             pro●inc●●s
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             *
             
               Paulus
               Diaconus
               His.
               Misc.
               prout
               ex
               c●dice
               Palatino
               edidit
               Ianus
               Gruterus
               .
            
             Quatuordecim
             interim
             dies
             securâ
             &
             liberâ
             direptione
             omnibus
             opibus
             suis
             &
             miraculis
             Roma
             vacua●●
             est
             .
             In
             quibus
             erant
             Ecclesiastica
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             tota
             ex
             auro
             &
             lapidibus
             pretiosis
             ornata
             ,
             &
             vasa
             Hebrai●a
             quae
             
               Titus
               V●spasiani
            
             filius
             post
             captivitatem
             Hierosolymitarum
             Romam
             detulerat
             ;
             multaque
             millia
             captivorum
             .
             —
             Cum
             Regina
             Eudoxia
             quae
             Gensericum
             ad
             hoc
             sacinus
             invitaverat
             ,
             duabusque
             ejus
             filiabus
             ,
             Carthaginem
             abducta
             sunt
             .
          
           
             *
             
               S●lona
               ●orna●des
               ,
               quem
               vide
               c●m
            
             Paulo
             Dia●ono
             .
          
           
             *
             
               Vide
               Can.
            
             9.
             
             
               Concil
               La●dicen
            
             .
             3
             an
             .
             ●64
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             
               Cyril
               .
               Hieros
               .
               Catech.
            
             6.
             expounds
             his
             of
             John
             to
             meane
             
               Simon
               Magiss
            
             .
          
           
             *
             An.
             57.
             
             §.
             189.
             
             Ann.
             72.
             
             §.
             26.
             
             Ann
             82.
             
             §.
             3.
             
          
           
             Mat.
             24.
             
             Mar.
             13
             Luke
             21.
             
             Dan
             9.24
             .
          
           
             So
             
               Targum
               ,
               On●kel●s
            
             and
             Ionathan
             both
             render
             it
             expresly
             Deut
             :
             28.36.64
             .
             allo
             c.
             4.28
             .
             
               n●cn●n
               Targum
               Ionathan
               ,
               Ier.
            
             16.13
             .
             1
             Sam.
             26.19
             .
             that
             is
             in
             all
             the
             places
             forecited
             .
          
           
             *
             2
             Sam.
             7.23
             .
             God
             is
             said
             to
             have
             redeemed
             Israel
             from
             Egypt
             ,
             from
             the
             nations
             &
             their
             gods
             .
             See
             Tremel
             .
             who
             turnes
             it
             more
             to
             our
             purpose
             
          
           
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
          
           
             a
             See
             the
             oration
             o●
             Licin●us
             to
             his
             Souldiers
             ,
             
               Euseb.
               de
               v●ta
               Constant.
               lib.
            
             2.
             c.
             5.
             
          
           
             b
             Syr.
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             The
             Altar
             ●e
             there
             speakes
             of
             in
             his
             defence
             was
             inscribed
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             which
             God
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             I
             preach
             unto
             you
             .
          
           
             c
             Ro●a
             cum
             penè
             omnibus
             dominaretur
             gentibus
             ,
             omnium
             gentium
             serviebat
             errorib●s
             ,
             &
             magnam
             sibi
             videbatur
             assumpsisse
             Religionem
             ,
             quia
             nullam
             respuebat
             falsitatem
             ,
             
               Leo
               mag
               .
               in
               Ser.
            
             1.
             
               in
               nat
               .
               Apo.
               Pet.
               &
               Paul
            
             Hic
             confutandi
             Daemonumcultus
             ,
             hîc
             omnium
             sacrificio●um
             impietas
             destruenda
             ,
             ubi
             diligentisimâ
             superstitione
             habeatur
             collectū
             quicquid
             usquam
             fuerat
             variis
             erroribus
             instructū
             .
             
               Id.
               ib.
            
             
          
           
             d
             See
             this
             use
             of
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Ezra
             1.5
             .
             
               Vulg.
               &
               Angl.
            
             with
             Lev.
             16.21
             .
             
               Vulg.
               &
               LXX
               .
               Num.
            
             9.15
             .
             
               LXX
               .
               Ibid.
               cap.
            
             33.2
             .
             
               LXX
               .
               cap.
            
             32.33
             
               LXX
               .
               Vulg.
               cum
               .
               Angl.
               
            
          
           
             e
             viz.
             ver
             .
             42
             of
             this
             cha
             .
             over
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             and
             ver
             .
             3.
             of
             the
             next
             chapter
             over
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             where
             it
             is
             impossible
             it
             should
             distinguish
             ,
             and
             so
             elsewhere
             .
          
           
             *
             Some
             render
             it
             not
             of
             ,
             but
             
               is
               his
               Annointed
            
             or
             Messiah
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             
               Messiah
               is
               Mahoz
               Ieshueth
            
             .
          
           
             See
             the
             notice
             hereòf
             at
             that
             time
             taken
             by
             the
             Iewes
             1
             Mac.
             8
             
               à
               principio
               adver
            
             .
             13.
             inclusivè
             .
          
           
             But
             
               Constantinus
               Morossa
            
             the
             Greek
             Histo●ian
             inveighing
             against
             
               Leo
               ●saurus
            
             for
             demolishing
             images
             ,
             cals
             them
             ,
             
               turres
               atque
               munit●ones
               religios●cultus
            
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A50525-e28810
           
             
               Calvin
               ,
               Beza
            
             .
          
           
             *
             So
             Cafiellio
             seem●s
             to
             understand
             it
             ,
             translating
             it
             
               per
               ●●mulationem
               hominum
               falsiloquorum
            
             .
          
           
             
               Vide
               etiam
            
             Ephes
             .
             4.14
             .
          
           
             In
             o●ni
             distribut●●●e
             omitti●
             copulativa
             videtur
             ,
             vix
             apponi
             .
             Li●acr
             .
             Nonne
             sic
             etiam
             in
             Graecis
             .
          
           
             *
             Plus
             crudelitati
             vestrae
             ,
             Nero
             ,
             Deci
             ,
             Maximiniane
             debemus
             .
             Diabolum
             ●nim
             p●r
             vos
             vicimus
             ,
             Sanctus
             ubique
             beatorū
             Martyrum
             sanguis
             exceptus
             est
             ;
             dum
             in
             his
             Daemones
             mugi●nt
             ,
             dum
             ●●gritudines
             depelluntur
             &c.
             
             At
             tu
             (
             id
             ●st
             Constanti
             )
             omnium
             crudelitatum
             crudeli●●me
             damno
             majore
             in
             nos
             ,
             &
             veniâ
             minore
             ,
             desaevis
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             *
             See
             
               Clem.
               Con.
               fol.
            
             106.
             
          
           
             *
             A
             delicate
             subu●bs
             of
             Antioch
             .
          
           
             *
             Adde
             ,
             that
             no
             such
             thing
             could
             bee
             ,
             so
             long
             as
             they
             used
             to
             pray
             for
             Martyrs
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             others
             of
             the
             dead
             .
             See
             
               Clement
               .
               &
               ali●s
            
             .
          
           
             In
             which
             respect
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             though
             the
             Genitive
             case
             were
             taken
             actively
             ,
             would
             signifie
             the
             Idolatry
             of
             Saint-worship
             ,
             viz.
             the
             worship
             of
             the
             dead
             ,
             which
             the
             Devils
             are
             wont
             thus
             to
             counterfeit
             .
          
           
             
               Savil.
               Tom.
            
             6.
             p.
             376.
             
               alii
               Rem
               .
               primâ
               adversus
               Iud●os
               .
            
          
           
             This
             Gregory
             of
             Towres
             died
             Anno
             596.
             
          
           
             But
             I
             find
             now
             the
             same
             in
             the
             
               Aurea
               Legenda
            
             of
             all
             the
             foling
             Martyrs
             ,
             save
             the
             first
             ,
             which
             is
             not
             there
             .
             S.
             Barbara
             is
             but
             the
             Appendix
             .
          
           
             *
             O
             happy
             Simeon
             .
          
           
             *
             If
             she
             prayed
             this
             prayer
             with
             her selfe
             ,
             by
             what
             revelation
             was
             it
             made
             knowne
             to
             others
             ?
          
           
             a
             In
             notis
             ad
             martyrologium
             ●oman
             .
             ●ul
             .
             13.
             
          
           
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             Habetur
             in
             op●ribus
             D●m●sceni
             auctis
             ,
             interprete
             
               Jacobo
               Billio
            
             ,
             ex
             Reginae
             matris
             bibliothe●a
             ,
             &
             apud
             
               Surum
               ,
               Tom.
            
             6
             Nov.
             28.
             
          
           
             *
             Called
             the
             second
             of
             Nice
          
           
             
               Habetur
               apud
               Baron
               an
            
             .
             842.28
             .
          
           
             a
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             saith
             t●e
             Con●u●er
             
               Co●●
               ,
               Nic.
            
             2.
             act
             .
             6.
             tom
             .
             6.
             
          
           
             
               Apud
               Surium
               Apr.
            
             3.
             tom
             .
             2.
             
          
           
             a
             Vnder
             
               Leo
               Arm●nius
            
             .
          
           
             Viz.
             The
             Emperour
             .
          
           
             *
             
               Possevinus
               in
               sua
               Moscovia
            
             .
          
           
             *
             
               Vide
               opus
               Hierarchicum
               seu
               Cosin
               .
               Migalian
               .
               in
               Timoth.
               ubi
               ex
               Home●●
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               l●
               .
               O●cu●
               .